Space Gass 12.5 Help Manual

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Table of Contents
Introduction
Introduction
How to use this manual
Printing this manual
Legal notice
Hardware requirements
Product support
Hardware locks and insurance
New features
1
1
2
5
6
9
10
11
12
Installation and Configuration

Installation and configuration
Installing SPACE GASS
Configuring SPACE GASS
Folders and files
Text formatting
General configuration
Graphics scale calibration
Graphics colors
General colors
Problem size limits
Renderer configuration
Customizing toolbars
Customizing property panels
The SPACE GASS utility tool
23
23
24
25
26
28
29
32
33
34
35
36
42
45
47
Getting Started
Getting started
Starting SPACE GASS
Command line options
The main SPACE GASS window
The status line
Using the mouse
Dialogue boxes
Data entry
Managing job files
Starting a new job
Opening a job
Merging jobs
Saving a job
Deleting a job
Cleaning up a job
Running a macro
Running a script
Job status
Shortcuts
49
49
50
51
53
55
57
58
60
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
73
74
Input Methods
Input methods
77
77
iii

Linking to Other Programs
Linking to other programs
CIMSteel/2 Step, IFC Step and Revit links
Import links
Export links
Special Revit Structure links
DXF links
Importing DXF files
Exporting DXF files
79
79
81
84
88
91
94
95
96
Modelling the Structure

Modelling the structure
Coordinate systems
Sign conventions
Ill-conditioning and instabilities
101
101
102
107
111
Project Data
Project data
Units
Job details and attachments
Node data
Member data
Plate data
Node restraint data
Section property data
Standard section libraries
Shape builder
Flipping a section
Column and beam Tee sections
Angle sections
Material property data
Master-slave constraint data
Member offset data
Node load data
Prescribed node displacement data
Member concentrated load data
Member distributed force data
Member distributed torsion data
Thermal load data
Member prestress data
Plate pressure data
Self weight data
Combination load case data
Load case title data
Lumped mass data
Spectral load data
Spectral curve editor
Importing a spectral curve
Area load data
Sea load data
Moving load data
113
113
114
116
118
119
124
129
132
135
136
143
144
145
146
148
154
156
157
158
160
162
164
165
167
168
169
171
172
174
177
178
179
181
182
Text File Input
185
iv
Table of Contents
Text file input
Text file format
Initiator
Headings text
Nodes text
Members text
Plates text
Node restraints text
Section properties text
Material properties text
Master-slave constraints text
Member offset text
Node loads text
Prescribed node displacements text
Member concentrated loads text
Member distributed forces text
Member distributed torsions text
Thermal loads text
Member prestress loads text
Plate pressure loads text
Self weight text
Combination load cases text
Load case titles text
Lumped masses text
Spectral loads text
Steel member design text
Terminator
Text file errors
Text file example
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
212
213
216
Structure Wizard
Structure wizard
219
219
Portal Frame Builder

Portal frame builder
Portal frame geometry
Portal frame extra data
Portal frame sections and materials
Portal frame loads
Portal frame load cases
Portal frame design
Portal frame assumptions
221
221
223
226
229
230
234
235
236
Datasheet Input
Datasheet input
Using datasheets
237
237
238
Graphical Input
Graphical overview
The renderer
The traditional graphics window
Align members
Align plate axes
245
245
246
269
276
278

Arc generation
Area loads
Attach
Attachment and alignment methods
Bends generation
Combination load cases
Connect
Connectivity check
Coordinates
Copy
Copy member loads
Copy member properties
Copy node loads
Copy node properties
Copy plate loads
Copy plate properties
Delete
Draw
Extend
Extrude
Filters
Find
Grid
Gridlines
Infotips
Intersect
Keyboard positioning of points
Load case titles
Lumped masses
Managing load cases
Master-slave constraints
Material properties
Measurements and dimensions
Member concentrated loads
Member distributed forces
Member distributed torsions
Member offsets
Member prestress loads
Member properties
Mesh
Mirror
Move
Move intermediate nodes
Moving loads
Multiple viewports
Node loads
Node properties
Node restraints
Notes
Ortho
Pan
Plane
Plate pressure loads
Plate properties
Prescribed node displacements
vi
279
280
283
285
289
290
293
294
295
296
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
309
310
312
314
317
319
321
322
323
325
326
328
330
331
332
334
336
338
340
341
343
346
348
349
351
352
370
372
374
377
378
380
381
382
384
386
389
Table of Contents
Property panels
Query analysis results
Query frame
Query steel member design results
Redraw
Remove crossed member nodes
Remove intermediate nodes
Renumber
Repeat last command
Reverse member direction
Reverse plate direction
Rotate
Scale
Scales
Sea Loads
Section properties
Select all
Selection methods
Self weight
Snap
Spectral loads
Static load to mass conversion
Stretch
Subdivide
Taper plates
Taper/haunch generation
Textures
Thermal loads
Transparency
Varying plate pressure loads
View buckling mode shapes
View diagrams
View dynamic mode shapes
View envelope
View global origin
View labelling and annotation
Load case titles viewer
View local axes
View manager
View member origins
View node / member / plate properties
View nodes / members / plates
View plate contours
View results in local XY or XZ plane
View steel member design groups
View steel member design results
View steel member flange restraints
View steel member top flanges
Viewpoint
Views
Zoom
Analysis
Analysis
391
395
397
398
399
400
401
402
404
405
406
407
408
409
411
418
419
420
422
423
425
426
427
428
429
431
433
435
437
439
443
444
445
446
447
448
451
453
454
455
456
457
458
460
461
463
466
467
468
471
473
475
475
vii

Static analysis
Static analysis
Displacements, actions and reactions
P-D effect
P-d effect
Tension-only and compression-only effects
Cable members
Non-linear analysis procedure
Static analysis buckling
The wavefront optimizer
The wavefront analysis method
A quick frontwidth calculation method
The wavefront method in more detail
Running a static analysis
Static analysis results
Buckling analysis
Buckling analysis
Buckling effective lengths
Special buckling considerations
Running a buckling analysis
Buckling analysis results
Dynamic frequency analysis
Modelling considerations
Running a dynamic frequency analysis
Dynamic frequency analysis results
Dynamic spectral response analysis
Running a dynamic spectral response analysis
Dynamic spectral response procedure
Dynamic spectral response analysis results
Analysis warnings and errors
Steel Member Design
Steel member design
Steel member input methods
Auto-create steel members
Steel member input form
Steel member input datasheet
Copy steel member properties
Steel member design data
Steel member design sign conventions
Member groups
Flange restraints
Column and beam Tees
Running a steel member design
Updating analysis member sizes
Serviceability check
The steel member design/check process
Design groups and intermediate stations
Design segments
Section check
Member check
Critical flange
viii
476
476
478
479
480
481
482
484
485
486
491
492
493
494
501
502
502
504
506
508
512
514
514
515
516
521
522
522
524
528
529
531
535
535
537
538
543
545
546
547
557
558
562
568
569
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
Table of Contents
Effective flange restraints
Twist factor
Load height factor
Lateral rotation factor
End moment ratios and other factors
Eccentric effects for compression members
Eccentric effects for tension members
The code check
Steel member design results
Steel member design/check assumptions
BS5950-1:2000 code specific items
Hong Kong CP2011 code specific items
AISC 360-10 code specific items
Eurocode EN 1993-1-1:2005 code specific items
AS/NZS 4600:2005 code specific items
IS800 code specific items
Steel member design/check errors
583
585
586
587
589
590
591
592
593
595
600
605
607
612
615
619
620
Steel Connection Design

Steel connection design
Creating and editing connections
The connection manager
Design considerations
Connection reports
Connection preferences
623
623
625
636
641
643
645
Concrete Beam Design

Concrete beam design
Creating and editing concrete beams
The concrete manager
Concrete beam preferences
AS3600 2009 code specific items for beams
IS456 2000 code specific items for beams
647
647
649
664
669
671
675
Concrete Column Design

Concrete column design
Creating and editing concrete columns
Concrete column preferences
AS3600 2009 code specific items for columns
IS456 2000 code specific items for columns
677
677
679
693
698
699
702
Output
Output
Page setup
View text report
Print preview
Print text report
Print graphics
The status report
705
705
709
712
713
715
716
717
Standard Libraries
Standard libraries
719
719
ix

The library editor
721
Importing and exporting
723
Importing old libraries

Section libraries
Material libraries
Bolt libraries
Plate libraries
Weld libraries
Reinforcing bar libraries
Spectral curve libraries
Vehicle libraries
724
725
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
Portal Frame Analysis

Portal frame analysis
Geometry and loads
Method of input
Analysis procedure
Analysis results
Graphical output
Analysis input report
Static analysis report (itemised)
Static analysis report (enveloped)
Bill of materials report
Dynamic frequency analysis report
Dynamic spectral response analysis report
Buckling analysis report
735
735
736
740
741
742
743
747
755
766
773
774
775
776
Portal Frame Member Design

Portal frame member design
Member design results
Steel member design report
779
779
783
784
Portal Frame Connection Design

Portal frame connection design
Connection design results
787
787
789
Cable Analysis
Cable analysis
Method of input
Analysis procedure
Analysis results
805
805
806
807
808
Converting Old Jobs

Converting old jobs
815
815
Bibliography
Bibliography
817
817
Index
821
Introduction
Introduction
SPACE GASS 12.5
77th Edition, April 2016
SPACE GASS is a general purpose structural analysis and design program for 2D and 3D
frames, trusses, grillages, beams and plates. It includes a full complement of features that
make it suitable for any job from small beams, trusses and portal frames to large high rise
buildings, towers and bridges.
To see the new features recently added, refer to New features.
Its emphasis on graphics means that you easily see the status of your model at all times. In
fact, the extensive range of graphical editing tools allow you to input your model or make
changes entirely within the graphical editor. Of course, if you prefer to work with datasheets
or other methods of input then they are available too.
A structure wizard automatically generates the initial data for many typical structures which
you can then manipulate to create the exact model you want.
State of the art solvers for linear and non-linear static analysis, dynamic analysis and buckling
analysis are available. Steel and concrete design modules for various international codes of
practice are also available.
Graphical and text reports can be generated for any parts of the structural model.
Comprehensive filters that can be defined graphically allow you to customize your graphical
views and output reports to include just want you want to see.
Although SPACE GASS is a comprehensive program with many advanced features, its
logical menu structure, toolbars and graphical emphasis makes it easy to learn and use, even
for first time users. If you have questions or need help then you will probably find the answers
in this manual.
How to use this manual

Illustrated as follows is an example of each of the three outline styles used in this manual.
These styles are designed to draw your attention to information in one of three ways: as a hint,
an important note or general note.
Hints are non-essential, but useful, pieces of information which will improve your
understanding of the program. Hints sometimes identify a special way of doing something and
are typically quite specific.
Important notes should be carefully read and understood. They outline information that is
vital to the effective use of the software.
Notes identify articles of information which are meant as an aside to aid your understanding
of SPACE GASS. Some notes are quite general in nature and do not give reference to a
specific procedure. Notes may also serve to draw your attention to specific interpretation.
HINTS
This is an example of the SPACE GASS HINTS style and
icon.
IMPORTANT NOTES
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
This is an example of the SPACE GASS important note style and icon.
NOTES
This is an example of the SPACE GASS NOTES style and icon.

Following is a brief overview of each section in the manual.
Chapter 1 "Installation and Configuration"
Deals with the installation and configuration of SPACE GASS. Once the software is installed
and running correctly, you should not have to refer to this chapter again.
Chapter 2 "Getting Started"
If you are new to frame analysis programs or Windows programs in general, then you should
read this chapter before attempting to run a job. It provides very good basic information that
you will need to know about the operation of SPACE GASS.
Chapter 3 "Input Methods"
Explains the four main methods of inputting and editing your model.
Chapter 4 "Linking to Other Programs"
Describes how data can be transferred between SPACE GASS and other structural analysis,
CAD and building management programs.
Introduction
Chapter 5 "Modelling the Structure"
Discusses the basics of how you can model a structure with SPACE GASS and includes
information on nodes, members, restraints, coordinate systems, sign conventions, etc.
Chapter 6 "Project Data"
Gives a detailed description of each type of data that can be used in the frame analysis part of
the model. Data for steel and concrete design is not included (see later chapters). This chapter
deals only with the data itself, and leaves the discussion of the numerous methods that you
can use to input the data to later chapters.
Chapter 7 "Text File Input"
Describes the format of standard SPACE GASS text files. This is one of the five methods of
data entry. You can type your data into a standard text file and then import it into SPACE
GASS. Standard text files can also be used as an alternative for permanent storage of data.
Chapter 8 "Structure Wizard"
Another method of input involves selecting from a number of standard structures, answering a
few simple questions about the structure selected, and then having the structure wizard
generate all of the frame data for you. Any of the other data entry methods can be used to
modify the data after it has been generated using this method.
Chapter 9 "Portal Frame Builder"
Described in detail the portal frame builder and how it can be used to generate the complete
model of a portal frame building including the full structure, loads (including wind loads) and
design data.
Chapter 10 "Datasheet Input"
Is a modified form of spreadsheet input which allows you to input or edit any parts of the
frame data or steel design data. Along with graphical input, this is probably one of the most
useful and versatile methods of data entry.
Chapter 11 "Graphical Input"
Covers all of the graphics facilities, including those in the renderer. This includes graphical
structure input, graphical load input, graphical steel design input, connection drawing detail,
graphical output of loading, displacement, bending moment, shear force, stress, axial force
and animated mode shape diagrams. Full descriptions are also given for the many commands
associated with drawing, moving, copying, rotating, mirroring, erasing, zooming, panning,
scaling, coordinate systems, changing the viewpoint, labelling, querying diagrams, viewing
the rendered model, hidden line removal, renumbering, etc.
Chapter 12 "Analysis"
The static, dynamic and buckling analysis modules, together with their options and control
parameters are fully described here.
Chapter 13 "Steel Member Design"
Details the use of the steel member design module. Please pay particular attention to the
assumptions listed near the end.
Chapter 14 "Steel Connection Design"
Details the use of the steel connection design module.
Chapter 15 "Concrete Column Design"
Details the use of the reinforced concrete column design module. Please pay particular
attention to the assumptions listed near the end.

Chapter 16 "Output"
Describes the types of output reports and graphics hardcopies that can be obtained and the
options that are available for sorting, formatting, enveloping, positioning on the page, etc.
Chapter 17 "Standard Libraries"
SPACE GASS is supplied with a number of standard section, material, bolt, plate and weld
libraries. This chapter provides a complete guide on how you can customise any of these
libraries, or create your own section libraries.
Appendix A "Portal Frame Analysis"
Presents a detailed report on the analysis of a typical steel portal frame. Full discussions
regarding the input data and the decisions involved in producing it are included, together with
complete printouts of the analysis input and output reports.
Appendix B "Portal Frame Member Design"
Presents a detailed report on the member design for the steel portal frame analysed in
appendix B. It includes a discussion on how the steel members are being modelled, together
with complete printouts of the member design input and output reports.
Appendix C "Portal Frame Connection Design"
Presents a detailed report on the connection design for the steel portal frame analysed in
appendix B. It includes a discussion on how the steel connections are being modelled,
together with complete printouts of the connection design input and output reports.
Appendix D "Cable Analysis"
Presents a worked example demonstrating the input and analysis of a 30m tall, guyed mast.
The catenary cable equations are used to calculate the axial force in a nominal guy member,
this is then compared to the result obtained from SPACE GASS.
Appendix E "Converting Old Jobs"
Explains how you can convert data files that were produced with SPACE GASS v1, v2 or v3
for loading into the latest version. Note that data files produced with SPACE GASS 4 or later
are automatically converted into the latest format when they are opened.
Appendix F "Bibliography"
A list of references.
Introduction
Printing this manual

This manual is also supplied in an Adobe PDF format that is ideal for printing. You can get to
it by looking for sgwin.pdf in your SPACE GASS program folder (usually "c:\Program files
(x86)\SPACE GASS 12").
Legal notice
End User License Agreement
Notice to Licensee:
This End User License Agreement (the "Agreement") is a legal agreement between you and
I.T.S. Integrated Technical Software Pty Ltd (ACN 086 605 567) ("ITS"), a registered
company under the Corporations Law of the State of Victoria, Australia. BY USING THIS
PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THIS AGREEMENT. If you do not agree to all the terms and conditions of this Agreement or
if you do not have the authority to agree to all the terms and conditions of this Agreement on
behalf of the licensee then you MUST NOT USE THE PRODUCT. Provided the Product has
not been used and is not a loan, student or evaluation version, you may return it to your place
of purchase for a full refund.
1. Definitions. For the purposes of this Agreement, the following terms shall have the
following meanings:
1.1 "Product" shall mean and include the SPACE GASS software, updates, CDs,
computer disks, Security Devices, help files, reference manual or other instructions,
technical support or any other software, items or information of any kind provided by
ITS or obtained from the www.spacegass.com web site.
1.2 "Software" shall mean all software included in the Product.
1.3 "Security Devices" shall mean and include hardware or software that limits the
number of users that may operate the Software simultaneously, or imposes an Expiry
Date beyond which the Software cannot be used, or prevents certain parts of the
Software from being used.
1.4 "Expiry Date" shall mean the date imposed by any Security Devices beyond
which the Software cannot be used.
1.5 "ITS" includes its employees, agents and suppliers.
2. License. The Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as
well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Product is licensed, not sold.
2.1 Grant of License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, ITS
grants to you a non-exclusive license to use the Product during the term of this
Agreement.
2.2 User Limit. The Software may be installed on an unlimited number of computers,
however the maximum number of users operating it simultaneously may not exceed
the user limit imposed by the Security Devices.
2.3 Reference Manual. You may make such copies of the reference manual as are
reasonably necessary for your use of the Product by the permitted number of
simultaneous users, but you may not make copies of the reference manual for any
other purpose without the prior written consent of ITS.
3. Ownership; Proprietary Rights. ITS shall at all times be the owner of and have all rights
to the Product, and all intellectual property associated therewith, including but not limited to
patents, copyrights, trade names and marks, domain names, and trade secrets related thereto.
The Product is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Nothing herein
6
Introduction
shall cause or imply a sale, license or transfer of any intellectual property rights of ITS to you
or to any third party, except as expressly set forth herein. You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source code of the Software.
You may not attempt to reverse engineer, duplicate or bypass any Security Devices.
4. Disclaimers. ITS makes no warranties or representations as to the Product to you or to any
other party. To the extent permitted by applicable law, all implied warranties, including, but
not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose,
are hereby disclaimed.
5. Limitation of Liability. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event
shall ITS be liable for any punitive, exemplary, consequential, indirect, incidental, or special
damages arising from or related to the use of the Product by any party, including without
limitation damages arising from loss of data, loss of revenue or profits or failure to realize
savings or other benefits, even if ITS has been advised of or should be aware of the possibility
of such damages. In the event of any defect in the Product ITS may, at its option;
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
replace the Product or supply its equivalent;

repair the Product;
pay for the cost of replacing the Product or of acquiring its equivalent; or
pay for the cost of having the error in the Product rectified.
To the extent that the Product involves providing a service, in the event of any error or defect
in the provision of that service ITS may, at its option;
i.
ii.
supply the service again; or

pay for the cost of having the service supplied again.
Because some states and jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability, the
above limitation may not apply to you.
6. Indemnification. You, at your sole expense, will defend, indemnify and hold ITS harmless
from and with respect to any loss or damage (including reasonable attorneys fees and costs)
incurred in connection with, any suit or proceeding brought by a third party against ITS
insofar as such suit or proceeding shall be based upon (i) any claim arising out of or relating
to your use of the Product except where such claim alleges that the Software infringes or
constitutes wrongful use of any copyright, trade secret, patent or trade mark of any third
party; or (ii) any claim arising out of or relating to any act or omission by you. You will pay
any damages and costs assessed against ITS (or paid or payable by ITS pursuant to a
settlement agreement) in connection with such a suit or proceeding.
7. Changes to the Product. ITS may change the Product from time to time without notice to
you and shall not be under any obligation to provide you with any notification of such change.
8. Non-Transferability. You may not rent, lease, sub-license, lend or transfer the Product to
another person or legal entity without the prior written consent of ITS.
9. Term and Termination. The term of this Agreement shall commence on the date that you
install or use the Product and shall continue (unless earlier terminated as provided herein)
until the Expiry Date, or in perpetuity if no Expiry Date is imposed. Without prejudice to any
other rights, ITS may terminate this Agreement at any time if you fail to comply with its
terms and conditions.
Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason whatsoever, you shall cease all use of the
Product and remove all copies of the Software from your computers.
10. General.
10.1 Assignment. You may not assign or transfer this Agreement or any of your
rights, duties or obligations hereunder and this Agreement may not be involuntarily
assigned or assigned by operation of law, without the prior written consent of ITS,
which consent may be granted or withheld by ITS in its sole discretion.
10.2 Severability. Each provision of this Agreement is intended to be severable. If
any covenant, condition or other provision contained in this Agreement is held to be
invalid or illegal by any court of competent jurisdiction, such provision shall be
deemed severable from the remainder of the Agreement and shall in no way affect,
impair or invalidate any other covenant, condition or other provision contained in this
Agreement. If such covenant, condition or other provision shall be deemed invalid
due to its scope or breadth, such covenant, condition or other provision shall be
deemed valid to the extent of the scope or breadth permitted by law.
10.3 Governing Law. You agree that the use of the Product by you shall be governed
by the laws of the State of Victoria and the Commonwealth of Australia, and you
consent to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of that State and the
Commonwealth.
10.4 Attorneys Fees. If any legal action is brought arising out of or relating to this
Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to receive its reasonable attorneys
fees and court costs in addition to any other relief it may be entitled.
10.5 Entire Agreement. This Agreement is the complete and exclusive statement of
the agreement of the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes all prior and concurrent agreements, promises, proposals, representations
and warranties, oral or written, with respect to the subject matter hereof.
Introduction
Hardware requirements
Windows 7, 8 or 10 (Windows 10, 64-bit preferred).

Intel or AMD CPU (Intel multi-core preferred).
Any modern graphics card with at least 2Gb RAM (NVIDIA preferred).
For more detailed information, including tips on how to get the maximum speed out of
SPACE GASS, refer to www.spacegass.com/hardware.
Product support
Product support includes:
Notification of any program modifications or enhancements as they become available.

Update facility for those users wishing to upgrade to the latest version.
Replacement of any software which is found to be defective through no fault of the user or
which does not conform to the general published function of the software.
Telephone, facsimile and email support by I.T.S. or an authorised dealer.
Comprehensive Internet web site providing latest information, drivers, updates, libraries, etc.
for all registered SPACE GASS users.
I.T.S. reserves the right to charge for telephone, facsimile or email support.
10
Introduction
Hardware locks and insurance

SPACE GASS is sometimes supplied with a hardware lock that must be inserted into the
parallel or USB port before the software will run. If the hardware lock is faulty or becomes
damaged or destroyed, it can be replaced for a nominal fee provided that a remnant of the lock
showing a valid serial number can be produced proving that it is a genuine SPACE GASS
hardware lock.
The hardware lock cannot be replaced for a nominal fee if it is lost or stolen and, for this
reason, it is recommended that the user insure the software package and hardware lock for the
full current market value of the software.
11
New features
The key new features added in SPACE GASS since v10 are as follows. Note that minor new
features, enhancements and bug fixes are not listed here.
Version 12.50
This is a major new version containing a significant number of enhancements and new
features. SPACE GASS now also supports hardware acceleration in all modern graphics
cards. Previously this was restricted to some NVIDIA graphics cards. For more information
on this and how to optimize SPACE GASS for maximum performance refer to
www.spacegass.com/hardware.
Version 12.27
Includes a new moving loads tool that allows for stationary and moving loads in the form of
vehicles, pressure patches and line loads. Loads can now be applied to plates as well as
members, plus a proximity distance setting lets you model multi-level roadways with
different loads on each level.
Added support for IS1893 to the spectral analysis module.
Added support for IS800 seismic checks (IS800 chapter 12) to the steel member design
module.
Version 12.26
Adopted a less conservative approach when calculating m for segments unrestrained at one
end with steel member design in accordance with AS4100 and NZS3404.
Version 12.25
Added copy/paste and import/export facilities to the filter management form.
Version 12.24
A new reinforced concrete column design module has been added.
Version 12.23
Support for Revit 2016 has been added.
Version 12.20
This is a semi-major upgrade that includes many changes, enhancements and fixes. It is also
the first version that has all of the tools of the traditional SPACE GASS window now
available in the renderer (along with many new tools that are only available in the renderer).
A new reinforced concrete beam design module has been added.
Tools for querying and viewing steel member design results have been added to the renderer.
You can also label the steel member number, load factor and governing load case on each
steel member in the model.
12
Introduction
A load case title column has been added to the combination load cases datasheet.
Seismic checks in accordance with chapter 12 of NZS3404 have been added to the steel
member design module. The clauses checked are table 12.4(1), table 12.4(3), 12.4.1.2,
12.5.2, 12.5.3.1, table 12.5, 12.7.2.1, 12.8.3.1(a), 12.8.3.1(b), 12.8.3.1(c) and 12.10.3.1.
Version 12.00
This is a major upgrade containing many new features and substantial performance
improvements, especially in the analysis solvers and graphics engine. It also makes the
renderer the main interface for the program.
Introduced a new "Paradise" solver for the static, buckling and dynamic frequency analysis
modules. It is a sparse matrix solver that fully utilizes the parallel processing capabilities of
modern multi-core CPUs. The new solver is usually between 10 and 100 times faster than
SPACE GASS 11. The most dramatic speed savings occur with jobs that have a large matrix
frontwidth and lots of load cases.
The renderer graphics now fully utilizes the parallel processors on the graphics card rather
than doing the graphics calculations on the main CPU. This means that deflection diagrams,
bending moment diagrams, shear force diagrams, etc. can be scaled up and down smoothly
regardless of the size of the job, even in fully rendered 3D mode.
The renderer has been given a major overhaul with a new user interface that now has almost
all of the functionality of the traditional SPACE GASS window. This means that you can do
everything in the renderer without constantly having to switch back to the traditional SPACE
GASS window. The new functionality in the renderer includes:
New user interface that can be configured with different skins and user defined
layouts.
Substantial performance increases and no annoying delays or pauses.
Opening and saving of jobs.
Generating reports.
Structure wizards.
Datasheets.
Node, member and plate drawing and editing tools.
Loading input and editing tools.
Filtering.
Scaling.
Static, buckling and dynamic analysis.
Steel and concrete design.
Display of all analysis result diagrams such as deflections, moments, contours, etc.
Ability to show fully rendered deflections rather than just wireframe.
Animated mode shapes.
Version 11.09
Released an all new Steel Connection Design module for AS4100 that complies with the
latest ASI design guides.
Released a new Steel Member Design module for AS4600 that works with the cold formed
sections from manufacturer including Lysaght, Stramit, Duragal and others. Supported
sections include Cees, Zeds, angles, tophats, channels, back-to-back Cees, CHSs, SHSs and
13

RHSs. New cold formed section libraries for Lysaght, Stramit and Duragal have also been
included.
The Portal frame builder now automatically creates all of the main connections in the
building. They can then be used in the steel connection design module.
Allow a steel member design to be performed via a script file with the user being able to
control the design groups, sections properties and load cases considered.
Allow exporting of steel member design/check summaries to a text file or MSExcel/Access/Word file.
Version 11.08
Various new script commands have been added that allow you to have more control over
importing/exporting and analysis. You can also pause the script to see what stage it is up to
at any point.
Version 11.05
Released a Portal Frame Builder module for the modelling of portal frame buildings in
SPACE GASS. It generates the full structural model plus dead loads, live loads, wind loads
and steel member design data. The module supports gable (symmetrical and asymmetrical)
and monoslope roofs, overhangs, knee braces, haunches, fly bracing, uneven frame spacings,
openings, roof/wall bracing and end wall props. Wind loads are generated in accordance
with AS/NZS 1170.2:2011 for all regions in Australia and New Zealand.
Version 11.01
Released a Sea Load module for the calculation of wave, current, marine growth and
buoyancy loads on submerged structures in marine and offshore environments.
Version 11.00
This is a major new version that includes a new 3D renderer with full editing capabilities. Of
course you can still edit your model in the traditional SPACE GASS window, however the
editing tools in the renderer are generally more advanced and offer additional features over
the traditional editing tools.
Some of the load input tools, design data tools and analysis results diagrams are not yet
available in the renderer, however they will be added soon.
Member force and moment envelope reports can now be limited to the maximum and
minimum values taken from just one end of the members rather than from both ends.
The analysis engine has also had a major make-over with finite and large displacement
theory added, plus options for secant or tangent matrix solutions, residual or full loading,
and residual convergence criteria. An "Auto" optimizer setting has also been added that
senses the most efficient optimization method before the main analysis calculations begin. It
removes the necessity for you to manually use trial and error methods to find the best
optimization setting.
The standard libraries have been completely re-designed allowing non-standard and built-up
sections to be saved. A new shape builder, moving loads generator with animated moving
loads, and area loads generator have also been added.
14
Introduction
Other major new features include on-screen notes, job attachments, dimensions, load
combinations grid, load case titles viewer, measure tool, textures, gridlines, view selector,
customizable toolbars and multiple undo/redo steps.
The major new features of SPACE GASS 11 are listed in more detail below:
A new renderer with full editing capabilities.
A new shape builder with shape dragging, snapping, stacking, alignment and
copy/paste. Shapes can now be specified as voids to easily model holes in your
sections. New standard shapes have also been added for polygons, polytubes,
triangles, Cees, Zeds, tophats and schifflerized angles. Line shapes that allow you to
specify a line thickness and a series of points have also been added. You can even
show the dimensions of your sections graphically in the new shape builder.
On-screen notes that can be positioned anywhere on or near your model or attached to
nodes, members or plates.
Dimensions that can be added to your model or to individual members or plates.
A measure tool that lets you determine the actual length, component lengths and
angles between any two points.
An attachment tool that you can use to attach external documents, spreadsheets,
drawings or any other files to your SPACE GASS job and embed them into the job
file.
Important new drawing aids now let you align with other existing points or objects,
snap to key intermediate positions along members, attach to existing objects, or align
with existing members or global axes. You can even lock onto a node or member by
briefly hovering over it and then begin drawing at some offset away from it. When
aligned with an axis, member or point, you can also just type in the desired distance
away your point should be.
A new combination load cases grid showing primary and combination load cases
across the top and combination load cases down the side. You simply type
multiplying factors into any cells to quickly build up your combination load cases in a
very visual way. Rows for new combination load cases can be added as desired.
Customizable toolbars.
A view selector showing the current viewpoint. It can also be dragged around or
clicked to change the orientation of the model.
Unlimited undo/redo steps.
More detailed infotips when hovering over a node, member or plate.
New libraries in XML format that now hold non-standard and built-up sections,
directly editable via the shape builder and/or library editor. Categories have also been
added for Common, Special, Legacy and Obsolete classifications.
A new moving loads generator incorporating animated views of the vehicles

travelling over your model. Horizontal loads and moments can now be added to
15

vehicles. Travel paths can now be drawn graphically, as can a loading area outside of
which wheels are treated as inactive even if they are still within the ends of their
travel path. A new vehicle editor has also been added, and vehicles are now
incorporated into the standard libraries.
16
A load case manager now lets you copy, renumber or delete multiple load cases rather
than one at a time.
buttons throughout SPACE GASS that allow to select from load cases, sections
or materials that already exist in the job, plus a load case titles viewer that can be left
open all the time if you need to see which load cases are which.
A new area loads generator with options for two-way and one-way loads. Load
directions include X, Y, Z, "Normal to area" and "Vector". Loading areas can be
actual or projected, and more than four members per polygon can now be handled.
A new renumbering tool that offers renumbering in three directions simultaneously.
A taper/haunch tool that now subdivides automatically if required.
A new find tool with additional modes for finding duplicated nodes, invalid plates,
members duplicated in steel member groups, members with free ends and plates with
free vertices.
New move, rotate, copy, mirror, stretch and scale tools that allow you to select nodes,
members or plates. They also provide a graphical preview of the final result before
the changes are made.
Textures such as "brickwork", "steel" and "concrete" that can be added to members or
plates and shown graphically.
Gridlines that can be defined and shown graphically in two directions at any spacings
and then used as snap and reference points when drawing objects or locating points.
A tool for converting static loads such as dead loads and live loads into masses for
use in a dynamic analysis.
A new curve editor for spectral curves that has extra capabilities for importing,
exporting, labelling and an equation data generation tool.
A view manager that lets you save the current view into a list of saved views and then
recall them as desired.
Moveable property panels that list all of the sections and materials used in your
model. You can even click on a section or material in the panel to select all the
members or plates in your model that use that item.
A member alignment tool that lets you align or stack members via their center, top,
bottom, left or right sides.
An option for showing member origins graphically. This quickly lets you see which
way each member is running.
Introduction
Generation of bends of any radius at member intersections. A very useful tool for
pipework analysis.
A tool for reversing the direction of members. Options for adjusting member fixities,
offsets and loads are included.
Various tools for extending members along their length, moving intermediate nodes,
removing intermediate nodes and removing crossed member nodes.
A new steel member design module for the Hong Kong code HK CP2011 has been
released.
Version 10.8
Steel member design modules for the AISC 360-10 LRFD and ASD standards have
been released.
SPACE GASS now uses the Titan license manager softlock system instead of
hardware locks, although hardware locks can still be supplied if requested. TitanLM
suppports stand-alone or network installations, and lets users borrow licenses from
the network for use off-site.
Versions 10.6 to 10.7
A new plate element has been added in v10.7. Plate elements can be quadrilateral or
triangular with bending, shear and membrane stiffness.
SPACE GASS can now import and export data in CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) and IFC Step
file formats. This allows it to communicate directly with many other programs such
as Tekla Structures/XSteel, ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus, AutoCAD,
Revit Structure, StruCAD, etc.
A new built-in graphics rendering module has been added in v10.7 that allows you to
generate realistic rendered models of your job that show the complete geometry of all
members and plates. This replaces the old internal 3D viewer and the external VRML
viewer. It is expected that this module will gradually be given full input, editing and
viewing functionality until it completely replaces the existing graphics system in
SPACE GASS.
Nodes can now be moved, rotated or deleted directly in v10.7.
Rotated and/or flipped members can now be located using the find command or
filtered in v10.7.
In v10.7 graphical envelopes can now be limited to minimums and maximums, just
minimums, just maximums or just absolute maximums.
The minimum and maximum intermediate values are now shown on displacement,
bending moment, shear force, axial force, torsion and stress diagrams in v10.6.
A new connectivity tool has been added that allows you to check what is connected to
any given node, member or plate.
Versions 10.1 to 10.5
17
18
An interface to Autodesks Revit Structure program has been added in v10.51b.
The dynamic response analysis module now supports AS1170.4-2007 and

NZS1170.5-2004
Dynamic zoom, pan, viewpoint and diagram scale changing have been added in
v10.50. Your current operation stays active and none of your node, member or plate
selections are lost while you are using these tools. Refer to shortcuts for more
information.
SPACE GASS can be run minimized, normal or maximized (the default mode)
depending on the -min, -nml or -max command line options. It can also be controlled
by the SHOW line in a script file. These changes were made in v10.50a.
The concrete material properties in the standard metric library have been updated in
v10.50a. The new values are based on AS3600-2001 clauses 6.1.5, 6.1.6 and
Commentary Table C6.1.2.
Importing/exporting MS-Excel, MS-Word or MS-Access data can now be done in

script mode in v10.50.
"D" restraints are no longer supported in v10.50. Restraints are now just "F", "R" or
"S".
The structure wizard no longer generates general restraints and is less restraining in
general in v10.50.
Importing of SDNF version 3 files is now supported in v10.50.
A new steel member design module for the Hong Kong code HK CP2005 has been
added in v10.41.
A new steel member design module for the British code BS5950:2000 has been added
in v10.41.
When exporting to DXF, the frame data can now be put into section-specific layers
rather than having the entire frame in one layer.
A new steel member design module for the LiteSteel beam range of sections from
Smorgon Steel has been added in v10.40. These are designed to AS4600.
The tool that updates analysis section property data based on the results of a steel
member design has been enhanced considerably so that it allows the update-analysisdesign procedure to be iterated automatically.
A new dynamic frequency analysis solver has been added in v10.30. It allows you to
create combinations of mass load cases and to combine lumped mass load cases with
self weight load cases. The new solver uses the wavefront optimizer and, as a result,
the computers memory requirement is vastly reduced.
An option for SPACE GASS to check for program updates via the SPACE GASS
website has been added.
Introduction
The moving load generator is now able to generate combination load cases that
combine the moving loads with other static loads.
Moving load travel path coordinates, when used in conjunction with travel path node
numbers, are now treated as offsets from the path defined by the node numbers.
The number of moving load wheels per vehicle has been increased to 200.
Custom libraries are now stored in a separate file to the standard libraries. They can
also be stored in a different folder to the standard libraries.
Your company logo can now be scaled to an exact height that you specify and can
optionally be included on every page or just the first page. JPG images formats are
also now supported.
Saving of loads after graphical editing, importing of text files and report generation
have all been sped up dramatically.
Zooming via the mousewheel is now centered on the mouse position.
Selection of the local XY and/or XZ planes for the display of moments, shears and
stresses can now be made direct from the side toolbar rather than via a filter.
New members being drawn graphically can now be optionally given the default
attributes or those of the previously accessed member.
An option for allowing duplicate members to be drawn has been added. Finding and
filtering duplicate members has also been added to the cleanup, find and filter
functions.
Deleting members with zero length has been added to the cleanup function.
Filters defined in terms of analysis members now also affect steel design reports.
Options for suppressing automatic re-scaling of load and analysis results diagrams
have been added.
An option for selecting steel members and connections graphically and then viewing
or editing them in a datasheet has been added.
The default bolt, plate, weld, rebar, spectral and vehicle library names can now be
specified in the configuration.
The lowest buckling load factor is now displayed at the end of a buckling analysis.
The end offset distance for members exported to a DXF drawing file can now be
specified.
The data generated by the structure wizard is now adjusted according to the vertical
axis setting.
The default gravity direction in the self-weight datasheet is now adjusted according to
the vertical axis setting.
Auto-created steel members are now terminated at pin-ended members.

19
Version 10.00
20
A facility for generating moving loads has been added.
Other jobs can be opened and merged with the current job.
Steel member design input data can now be generated automatically for the entire
model.
A facility for connecting members that cross over each other has been added.
Print previews can be produced.
Your company logo can be included in text and graphical reports.
The analysis and design output has been combined into a single report.
Text reports can be exported to PDF, HTML and TXT files.
Graphical output can be exported to PDF, HTML and BMP files.
All symbols are now shown correctly in reports.
A new page setup form gives you full control over the output device, margins, page
layout and formatting.
You can specify and configure separate graphics and text printers.
USB network locks are supported.
If the program is terminated abnormally, any network licences that were active are
recovered immediately and automatically.
Mouse wheel zooming, panning and viewpoint changing is supported.
Keyboard zooming, panning and viewpoint changing is supported.
Keyboard scrolling through filters, views and load cases is supported.
Temporary job files are now stored on the local workstation for extra speed and much
reduced network traffic.
Filters, views, etc. in the current job can be retained when data is imported from a text
file.
In order to detect the cause of frame buckling, the nodes at which the maximum
translations and rotations occur are listed in buckling reports.
Tension/Compression-only effects can be made to revert to "no reversal" mode after a

specified number of iterations.
Unrestrained degrees of freedom are now automatically stabilised during the analysis.
This prevents many instabilities due to incorrect modelling.
Introduction
Cable members no longer require uniformly distributed loads to be applied to them.
Nodes connected only to cable members no longer have to be restrained rotationally.
Error messages can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
Export files include all input data and are no longer affected by filters or report
selections.
You can print or obtain print previews direct from the datasheets.
SPACE GASS can now import and export data directly with MS-Excel, MS-Access
and MS-Word.
Options for springs and compression-only members have been added to the structure
wizard beam and grillage structures.
Compression effective lengths in the steel member design input data can be fully
controlled separately for each axis.
The automatic reduction of the minor axis compression effective length due to flange
restraints is now optional.
Steel members can be nominated as "braced " for either or both axes in order to limit
the compression effective lengths to their actual lengths.
Double angles are shown as such in the graphical section property legend.
Steel members that have been offset can now be designed.
Everything attached to and associated with a member is deleted when the member is
deleted. This includes attributes, offsets, loads and design input data.
The steel design input data member lists are automatically adjusted when members
are deleted, subdivided or otherwise edited graphically.
Steel members and connections are now sorted numerically if input or edited
graphically.
Abandoned unnamed jobs can now be recovered automatically.
Undo for all design input data is supported.
Undo for node, member and plate renumbering is supported.
Cleanup for all design input data is supported.
The area loader supports subdivided members.
Single angle sections can be designed as concentrically connected.
The properties of a node can be copied to a graphical selection of other nodes.
The properties of a member can be copied to a graphical selection of other members.
21
22
The design input data for a steel member can be copied to a graphical selection of
other steel members.
Loads can be copied from a node to a graphical selection of other nodes.
Loads can be copied from a member to a graphical selection of other members.
You can press the space bar to repeat the last graphics command.
An external macro such as another program, batch file or MS-Excel/Access macro

can be run from within SPACE GASS.
SPACE GASS can be controlled externally from another program or batch file using
a script file.
A backup copy of the job is made just before each save.
Full 3D geometry displays can be saved in VRML files for later viewing.
Buttons have been added to the library editor for adding, deleting and editing.
A large number of minor improvements, bug fixes and adjustments have been
incorporated.

Installation and configuration
Installation and configuration of SPACE GASS is a simple two-stage process that is
explained in the following sections.
23
Installing SPACE GASS

The installation procedure involves downloading and installing SPACE GASS on your
computer and then registering it for the modules you are licensed to use. The registration
procedure also involves linking SPACE GASS to your specific Titan softlock or hardware
lock. For detailed instructions, refer to www.spacegass.com/install.
24
Configuring SPACE GASS

You can run SPACE GASS by double-clicking the SPACE GASS shortcut that was created
when it was installed.
When you first start SPACE GASS, or if you make any changes to your system, you will be
prompted for some configuration information.
After the initial configuration, you can change any of the configuration settings by selecting
them from the Config menu. The eight configuration forms are detailed in this chapter.
All configurable data is stored in a number of files called SG.INI, SGSettings.GS and various
XML files. They are all stored in the LocalAppData folder (eg.
c:\Users\Fred\AppData\Local\SPACE GASS\12).
Note that you can quickly reset SPACE GASS back to its
default configuration settings by running the SPACE GASS Utility Tool (via the Start button
=> All Programs => SPACE GASS 12 => Tools => SPACE GASS Utility) and clicking the
"Reset Client Configuration" button or the "Reset All" button. For more information, refer to
The SPACE GASS utility tool.
25
Folders and files

Select "Folders and files" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to set the folder locations for the SPACE GASS program itself and for
the various types of data files.
Main program folder

Contains the SPACE GASS program itself.
Main data folder
Contains the main job data files.
Standard libraries folder
Contains the standard section, material, bolt, plate, weld, spectral curve, reinforcing bar and
vehicle libraries supplied with SPACE GASS. This normally matches the main program
folder, however it can be different if you wish to have the standard libraries in a separate
folder. Note that all standard libraries are contained in a file called sglibstandard.mdb which
cannot be modified.
26

Custom libraries folder
Contains the custom section, material, bolt, plate, weld, spectral curve, reinforcing bar and
vehicle libraries that you create. These can be in the same folder as the standard libraries or in
another location. Note that all custom libraries are contained in a file called sglibcustom.mdb
which can be modified via the library editor or the shape builder.
If you wish to have the SPACE GASS program folder write
protected then you must change the custom library folder to a different location.
Text data folder
Contains import/export text data files and print text files.
Backup data folder
Contains import/export backup job data files.
Archive data folder
Contains import/export archive data files.
CAD data folder
Contains import/export CAD data files.
Temporary data folder
Contains temporary files that are created and deleted by SPACE GASS as it operates.
Documents folder
Contains MS-Access, MS-Excel and MS-Word document files.
Text editor program
The name of the SPACE GASS text editor. This can be the standard Windows NOTEPAD or
any other text editor that runs in Windows.
Calculator program
The name of the SPACE GASS calculator. This can be the standard Windows calculator or
any other calculator that runs in Windows.
Default library names
The names of the default libraries.
Note that any folders that do not exist are automatically created as you go.
Copy the Job to the Backup Data Folder Before Saving
If this box is selected, whenever a job is saved, a copy of the previously saved version of the
job is copied to the backup data folder and renamed with an extension of BAK.
27
Text formatting
Select "Text formatting" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to set the report and graphics text formats and fonts.
Report text format

The report text format which is initially selected when you create a new job. Note that this
setting does not change the current job. The report text format for the current job can only be
changed from the report form (selected from the Output menu).
Graphics text format
The graphics text format which is initially selected when you create a new job. Note that this
setting does not change the current job. The graphics text format for the current job can only
be changed from the Labelling and Annotation form (selected from the View menu).
Report font
The font for text reports. This must not be a proportional font otherwise the columns of
numbers in reports will not line up properly. The two-column output toggle switches between
one-column and two-column output in the report.
Screen graphics font
The font for screen graphics text. This can be any proportional or fixed font.
After setting the screen graphics font size, if the text on the
SPACE GASS graphics screen looks too big or too small, it may be because the screen
graphics correction factors have not been set correctly. Refer to "Graphics scale calibration"
in "Graphics scale calibration" later in this chapter.
Printer graphics font
The font for printer graphics text. This can be any proportional or fixed font.
28
General configuration
Select "General configuration" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to set the general purpose configuration items in SPACE GASS.
Sound on alert
This allows you to suppress or enable the sound that the program makes when it wants to alert
you to something.
Sound on error
This allows you to suppress or enable the sound that the program makes when an error occurs.
Diagram shading
Loading, bending moment, shear force, stress and axial force diagrams are shaded if this item
is ticked.
29

Shading is normally turned off as it makes multiple superimposed diagrams hard to read.
Check disk space
If this item is ticked, SPACE GASS performs a disk space check to ensure that there is
enough free space for a static or dynamic analysis to proceed to completion. If the disk space
check has been disabled and there is not enough space for the analysis data, the program may
abort with an error message. Although this is not a desirable occurrence, it will not result in
loss of data.
Vertical axis
The graphics vertical axis which is initially selected when you create a new job. Note that this
setting does not change the current job. The graphics vertical axis for the current job can only
be changed from the Viewpoint form (selected from the View menu).
Changing this setting only affects the graphics display. It doesnt affect the local axis
definitions, the steel design top flange definitions, or the analysis and design modules in any
way.
Aperture size
The size of the aperture circle which appears when nodes and/or members can be selected
graphically.
Crosshair size
The size of the crosshair which appears when snap or ortho modes are on.
Curve resolution
All curved lines drawn with SPACE GASS are actually a series of short straight lines. In most
cases it is very difficult to differentiate between a true curve and a series of ten straight line
segments placed around the curve. SPACE GASS allows you to specify how many straight
line segments per member are used to approximate curved lines in displacement, bending
moment, shear force or axial force diagrams.
Use previous attributes when drawing new members
If this item is ticked, any new members that you draw will have the same attributes as the
member that was previously drawn or edited graphically. If unticked, newly drawn members
will have the default attributes.
Allow duplicates when drawing new members
Tick this item if you wish to be able to draw multiple members between the same two nodes.
For example, you may wish to have two members that share the same end nodes but which
are offset away from each other by some distance. This may be applicable for double angle
members that have a gap between them.
If you have drawn duplicate members and wish to locate them, you can do so by using the
Find tool and selecting "Duplicated" in the member type field. You can also use a similar
procedure to create a filter that isolates any duplicated members.
Allow automatic prompting for load case titles
If you want to be prompted for a load case title each time you input loads for a new load case
then you should tick this option.
Automatically open the renderer when SPACE GASS starts
Now that the renderer has all of the tools that are available in the traditional SPACE GASS
window it has become the new default user interface. This option lets the renderer open
automatically at start-up rather than you having to do it manually.
30
Start with the traditional SPACE GASS window minimized

If this option is ticked, the renderer will open automatically at start-up and the traditional
SPACE GASS window will not appear. If you occasionally want to use the traditional
SPACE GASS window you can simply restore it from the taskbar and then minimize it again
when you are finished with it.
Re-scale load diagrams after load editing
If this item is ticked, load diagrams will be re-scaled automatically whenever any distributed
member loads are changed.
Re-scale result diagrams after analysis
If this item is ticked, the analysis diagrams will be re-scaled automatically whenever an
analysis is completed.
Draw positive bending moments on tension/compression side
The convention for drawing bending moment diagrams varies from country to country.
SPACE GASS can be configured to draw bending moments on either the tension or
compression side of a member.
Shorten members in DXF files
When exporting to a DXF file, you can allow the members to be drawn full length or you can
have them shortened at each end by a proportion of the member depth. For example, a
member with a depth of 500mm could be drawn 250mm shorter at each end by using a depth
factor of 0.5.
Dashed lines
Dashed (broken) lines are used to differentiate between load cases and between diagram
types. All lines are drawn continuous if dashed lines are not allowed.
DXF layer names
Layer names are only applicable if you have the CAD interface module. These are the layers
into which the drawing will be placed when you transfer it into your CAD program.
It is recommended that you make each layer name different so that it is easy to distinguish
between centrelines, text, members, hidden lines, attributes, bolts, plates and cut-off lines. It is
also recommended that you set the hidden line layer in your CAD software to dashed or
dotted lines.
Automatically check for program updates
SPACE GASS can automatically check its website to see if a newer version is available. If so,
a notification message is displayed and you have the option of downloading and installing the
update.
31
Graphics scale calibration

Select "Graphics scale calibration" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to calibrate your monitor so that graphics is properly sized and
proportioned.
Some monitors exaggerate the horizontal and/or vertical scales so that the SPACE GASS
graphical output appears stretched or compressed in either or both directions. SPACE GASS
allows you to apply correction factors which allow for these exaggerations and adjust the
graphical output so that it is correctly sized and proportioned.
You should simply measure the width and height of the two lines on the screen with a ruler,
and SPACE GASS calculates the correction factors for you.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Ensure that you measure between the arrow heads rather than measuring the overall form
or screen size, otherwise items on the SPACE GASS graphics screen will appear too small
or too large.
32
Graphics colors
Select "Graphics colors" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to select colors for screen, printer and plotter graphics output.
Colors are selected by first clicking the item to be changed and then selecting a color from the
palette at the bottom of the form.
The list of color indexes next to "Section properties" represents section properties 1-25. If you
have more than 25 section properties, the pattern is repeated for properties 26-50, 51-75, etc.
The list of color indexes next to "Load cases" represents the first 25 load cases. If you have
more than 25 load cases, the pattern is repeated for each additional group of 25 load cases.
33
General colors
Select "General colors" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to set the Windows color scheme. It controls items such as form colors,
button colors, scroll bar colors, etc.
When you select this option SPACE GASS loads the standard Windows color selection form
which can also be selected from the Windows Control Panel. The appearance of this screen is
dependant upon the version of Windows you are running.
34
Problem size limits

Select "Problem size limits" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to set maximum job size limits.
SPACE GASS has been dimensioned dynamically. This allows it to expand into the available
memory of your computer giving you virtually unlimited problem size capacity dependant
only on the memory capacity of your computer.
The size limits you set allow you to reserve space for a job, with space being allocated
according to the size of each component of a job. You should set the limits high enough so
that there is enough capacity for the largest of jobs that you are likely to encounter but small
enough that you don't exceed the memory capacity of your computer.
Keep in mind that the limits can be changed at any time, even when you are halfway through
inputting a job and find that you have run out of capacity. Just select "Problem size limits"
from the Config menu and change the limits to suit your job size. After changing the limits
you can simply return to where you left off, with all previously entered data retained.
35
Renderer configuration
Various renderer settings and preferences are available from the Settings menu in the renderer
as shown below.
In the following form:

The "Alignment proximity" controls how close the mouse cursor must be to an axis aligned
with a "locked on" node or member or a global axis in order to align with it.
The "Cursor pickbox size" controls how close the mouse cursor must be to a node, member or
plate in order to select it, lock onto it or display its infotip.
The "Lock delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node or member before
you lock onto it.

The "Use previous attributes..." option, if ticked, means that when you draw a new node,
member or plate it will have the same properties (ie. section ID, material ID, etc) as the
previous item you drew or selected.
36

The "Allow duplicates..." option lets you draw members or plates on top of existing members
or plates (ie. so that they share the same nodes).
The "Allow hidden nodes to be selectable" option allows you to select nodes that you can't see
due to being behind other objects.
The "Automatically prompt for new load case titles" option enables load case titles to be
prompted for automatically each time a new load case is created.
The "Anti-aliasing" option gives graphical text a smooth appearance by changing the color of
pixels around the edges of the text.
The "Order independent transparency (OIT)" option enables true (fully accurate)
transparency for the display of transparent objects. If unticked (required by some older
graphics cards) then the transparency is unsorted, resulting in some transparent objects
appearing to be in front of objects that they should be behind.
The "Support multiprocessor for RC beam design" option allows multiple zones to be
designed/checked simultaneously during a reinforced concrete beam design.
The "Use OpenGL for graphical forms" option controls the system used to display graphical
objects in forms such as the shape builder, moving loads generator, steel connection design
module, reinforced concrete design modules, portal frame builder, etc. If unticked then
DirectX is used. Note that this setting doesn't affect the graphical system used in the main
renderer window.
The "Disable OpenGL shaders" option should be unticked for maximum graphical speed in
the renderer. If ticked (required for some older graphics cards) then the renderer uses a slow
software emulation mode to display graphical objects rather than utilizing the parallel
processing power of the graphics card. This option should only be ticked when the renderer
becomes unstable due to an old or incompatible graphics card being used.
The "Default deflection color" option, if ticked, means that when only one load case is
displayed, deflections are shown by member color rather than load case color. If unticked or if
multiple load cases are displayed then deflections are colored by load case.
The "Curve quality" controls how many segments are used to display curved objects such as
cylinders and the like.
The "Result quality" controls how many short straight lines are used to approximate a curve
when drawing deflected shapes, bending moment diagrams, etc.
The "Structure line width" is the thickness of lines used to draw the structure when in
wireframe or outline modes.
The "Diagram line width" is the thickness of lines used to draw diagrams such as bending
moment diagrams, etc.
The "Maximum undo/redo steps" is the number of undo/redo steps that are remembered in the
renderer. More memory is consumed if this setting is increased.
The "Highlight delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node, member or
plate before it becomes highlighted. Note that this setting has no effect over whether the node,
member or plate is attached to when drawing new objects.
The "Infotip delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node, member or plate
before its infotip appears.
The "Maximum load case components" is used to prevent memory overflow problems with
large models that contain many load cases by limiting how many load cases can be displayed
simultaneously. A "component" is considered to be a single diagram (eg. a load, a bending
moment diagram, a shear force diagram, etc) on a single node, member or plate. If you
experience memory problems when you try to display loads or analysis results graphically for
many load cases simultaneously then you may need to lower this limit. Conversely, if your
system has substantial memory and you are being restricted to an insufficient number of load
cases when displaying loads or analysis results graphically then you could experiment with
raising this limit.
The "Rotation drag distance" is the number of pixels that you can move the mouse while the
left button is held down before it will start to rotate the model. It is used to avoid the problem
of the model rotating unintentionally when you are trying to select items or start a selection
window. If this problem occurs then try increasing the rotation drag distance slightly.
37

The "Rotation mode" controls how the model behaves when you rotate it with the mouse.
Trackball mode lets the model rotate about all three axes, whereas Turntable mode prevents
rotation about an axis normal to your computer screen. Trackball mode is a bit harder to
control than Turntable.
The "Rotate at" setting controls the centre of rotation when you rotate the model by dragging
with the left mouse button held down.
The following form lets you can change the theme of the renderer via the "Skin" setting. This
affects the colors and styles of all the forms, buttons and input fields. You can also separately
change the colors of most the items in your model to suit your requirements.
38
In the following form you can control the color and threshold of each pass or fail level when
displaying steel member design results.
39
The size of the text displayed on the screen and in graphical prints can be controlled in the
following form.
The "Other" menu option gives you access to some of the configuration settings normally
found only in the traditional SPACE GASS window as follows:
40

For further information on each of these options, refer to "Folders and files", "Text
formatting", "General configuration" and "Problem size limits".
In particular, if you wish to change the vertical axis you should choose "Settings => Other =>
General Configuration".
41
All of the toolbars in the renderer can be hidden/shown, moved or undocked. Buttons can also
be added or deleted.
In order to move or undock a toolbar, simply drag its handle on the left hand end of the
toolbar to the desired location.
Undocked toolbars such as the one shown below can be placed anywhere in the renderer
window or docked to the top, bottom, left or right sides of the renderer.
To hide a toolbar, simply right-click anywhere on it and then untick it from the list of toolbars
that appears. To restore a toolbar, select Toolbars from the Window menu, click the Toolbars
tab and then tick the desired toolbar.
42
Adding or deleting buttons

To add or delete buttons, right-click anywhere on a toolbar, select Customize from the menu
that appears and then click the Commands tab.
You can then select a toolbar from the list and add or delete buttons as required.
43
The Options tab also has additional settings that you might find useful as shown below.
For information on how to customize the renderer's property panels, refer to Customizing
property panels.
44
Customizing property panels

Property panels can be pinned open by clicking the button at the top of the panel so that it
changes to
. This means that it will stay open, even if not being used. If you click it again,
it changes to
, indicating that the panel is not pinned and will close when not required.
If you want to close a panel manually then just click
You can undock a panel and place it anywhere on the screen or dock it to the left or right side
of the renderer by first pinning it using
and then dragging the title bar of the panel to the
desired location. Note that when undocked, it will stay open when not being used.
45
For information on how to customize the renderer's toolbars, refer to Customizing toolbars.
46
The SPACE GASS utility tool

The utility tool lets you reset the SPACE GASS registration and/or configuration settings, or
attach your own logo to SPACE GASS so that it appears in the printed reports.
Reset Registration
If you have a Titan softlock, this option resets SPACE GASS back to its freshly installed
state. It is used primarily to start afresh in cases where SPACE GASS is having difficulty
obtaining a Titan license. Note that this option resets the connection from SPACE GASS to
the Titan server but does not affect the Titan server itself or its registration.
If you have a hardware lock, this option de-registers SPACE GASS. The next time you run
SPACE GASS it will initiate the re-registration process. It is used primarily to re-register
SPACE GASS in cases such as when new modules have been purchased or when the
hardware lock has been changed.
For more information, refer to http://www.spacegass.com/install.
Reset Client Configuration
This option resets the SPACE GASS client configuration back to its default settings. The next
time you run SPACE GASS it will initiate the re-configuration process.
For more information, refer to Configuring SPACE GASS.
47
Reset All
Choose this option to reset both the registration and client configuration.
Set Report Logo
You can use this option to set your own logo to appear at the top of your printed reports. You
must first create a JPG image file that contains your logo and any text that goes with it. For
best results, make the image file large enough so that it contains enough pixels for a printer
resolution of at least 300 dpi. For example, if your printer operates at 600 dpi resolution and
you want the printed logo height to be 20mm, your image file will need to be at least 472
pixels in height (ie. 600/25.4x20). Regardless of the size of your image file, it will be scaled
to print at the exact height you specify in the page setup form.
After creating your JPG image file, click the "Set Report Logo" button to display the
following form.
You should then click the "Set Logo" button, browse to your image file and select it.
Note that even after completing the above procedure, you must ensure that SPACE GASS is
configured to use the logo. You can do this by choosing "Page Setup" from the SPACE GASS
File menu, setting the logo height and specifying whether it is to be on the first page only or
on all pages.
For more information, refer to Page setup.
48
Getting Started
Getting started
This chapter explains how to start SPACE GASS and takes you on a guided tour of the main
SPACE GASS window and all of its menus. It also explains how you should interact with
SPACE GASS and respond to its requests for data.
49
Starting SPACE GASS

Before proceeding with this section you should have copied and installed SPACE GASS (see
also Installing SPACE GASS).
In order to start SPACE GASS, you can either:
1.
2.
Double-click the "SPACE GASS" shortcut on your desktop.

Double-click on a SPACE GASS job file (they end with .SG).
If you are running SPACE GASS for the first time, you will be taken through part of the
SPACE GASS configuration program (see also Configuring SPACE GASS).
You can control how SPACE GASS starts by the use of command line options. For example,
you can bypass the splash screen, you can prevent the previous job from loading
automatically, you can control the location of the SPACE GASS configuration file, etc. They
are fully explained in Command line options.
50
Getting Started
Command line options

You can control how SPACE GASS starts by adding one or more options to the command
line in the shortcut you use to start SPACE GASS.
To add a command line option, select "Properties" of your SPACE GASS shortcut and append
the contents of the "Target" field with one or more of the following options.
-n
Bypasses the automatic loading of the previously used job.
-p
Bypasses the splash screen.
-w
Bypasses the Internet check for new versions of SPACE

GASS.
-c [bbggrr]
Allows you to set the datasheet alternate line color, where

[bbggrr] is the 6 character hexadecimal representation of the
desired color with bb=blue component, gg=green component
and rr=red component. For example, 50% blue, 50% green and
20% red could be specified with a command line option of c7f7f33.
-s [file]
Allows you to specify a script file that contains a list of menu

commands and other items that SPACE GASS will
automatically execute one-by-one rather than you operating it
in the normal way. For example, a command line option of -s
"c:\scripts\myscript.txt" would load the myscript.txt script file
from the c:\scripts folder. Note that the ""s can be omitted if
this option is at the end of the target field. See "Running a
script" for more information and full details of the script file
format.
-min
Runs SPACE GASS minimized so that it is not visible except

for an icon on the taskbar. This can be useful when SPACE
GASS is controlled by a script file (see the -s command line
option above), although it may be more convenient to use the
"SHOW MIN" command in the script file to achieve the same
effect. See "Running a script" for more information and full
details of the script file format.
-nml
Runs SPACE GASS in a normal window that is usually smaller

than the overall screen size.
-max
Runs SPACE GASS maximized so that it fills the entire screen

area. This is the default setting and is the same as if none of the
-min, -nml or -max command line options are specified.
Note that the -min, -nml and -max command line options can be overridden by the SHOW
line in a script file. See "Running a script" for more information and full details of the script
file format.
51

For example, to bypass the splash screen and the automatic loading of the previously used
job, you could have a shortcut target field of:
"C:\Program Files\SPACE GASS\Exe\sgwin.exe" -p -n
If you start SPACE GASS by double-clicking on a job, then the shortcut is bypassed and any
command line options in it are not used. You can, however, apply the command line options
when a job is double-clicked by starting Windows Explorer, selecting Tools > Folder
Options from the menu, clicking the File Types tab, scrolling down to and clicking the SG file
extension, clicking the Advanced button, clicking the Edit button and then adding the
command line option to the end of the "Application used to perform action" field.
Note that you can use the -i command line option to set up
multiple shortcuts, each with its own SG.INI file for cases where you want to be able to run
SPACE GASS with different configurations. For example, you may have a laptop that is
normally connected to the office network during which SPACE GASS needs to access jobs
and libraries that are stored on the network. However, there may also be times when the
laptop is being used away from the network on-site or at home. It would be convenient if these
two scenarios could each have its own folder settings and other configuration items.
You can set this up by simply making a copy of your SPACE GASS shortcut so that you have a
shortcut for when you are connected to the office network and another for when you are
running SPACE GASS away from the office, each with its own SG.INI file and configuration
settings. Edit the properties of each shortcut and add -i "path" to the end of the target field,
where "path" is the folder containing the SG.INI file. For example, -i "c:\SG\Config\Office"
would store the SG.INI file for that shortcut in the "c:\SG\Config\Office" folder, and -i
"c:\SG\Config\Home" would store the SG.INI file for that shortcut in the
"c:\SG\Config\Home" folder. The next time you run SPACE GASS from either shortcut, it
would run through the configuration process and let you set them up with their own unique
configuration settings.
52
Getting Started
The main SPACE GASS window

When you start SPACE GASS, the following main window appears with the structural model
for the current job displayed in it. You can also click the
window.
button to open the renderer
The title bar

This is the colored band across the top of the window, it contains the SPACE GASS version,
the name of the current job and the scale of the viewport if it is being displayed in full-screen
mode.
The menu bar
The second band across the top of the window contains the twelve main menu items. By
selecting one of the main menu items you can gain access to all of the options contained
within that menu. The menu bar allows you to access all of the programs features (see also
The menu system).
The toolbars
The buttons across the top and to the left of the display area form the toolbars. The toolbar
buttons replicate the most commonly used menu items and give you instant access to them
(see also The toolbars). The graphics settings buttons across the bottom of the screen display
the current settings for the drawing tool and allow the settings to be toggled.
53

The graphics display area
The area in the centre of the main window displays the structural model for the current job.
The global axes are also shown in the top-right corner. You can display up to four viewports
in this area.
The text display area
The area below the graphics settings buttons forms the text display area. The first line
displays the project heading, job heading and the local axis settings. The second line is a
multi-purpose line which usually contains the status line, but which also periodically displays
other prompts and messages, some of which are purely informative and some of which
require you to respond.
54
Getting Started
The status line
The status line appears in the second line of the text display area of the main SPACE GASS
window. It is also displayed at the bottom of the renderer. The status line indicates which data
is present for the various parts of the current job.
The presence (or absence) of data is indicated by sequences of characters shown as follows. In
all cases, unless otherwise indicated, "Y" represents "data exists", while "N" represents "no
data exists".
If, for example, you have performed a static analysis, a dynamic frequency analysis and an
elastic buckling analysis (but no dynamic spectral response analysis), the "Analysis" part of
the status line would appear as "Analysis:YYNY".
You can use the status line as a check to ensure you have entered sufficient data before
performing another operation. For instance, you cannot perform a static analysis until you
have applied some type of load to the structure (in addition to which, sufficient data must be
present on the structure itself). Check for the appropriate code in the status line window
before proceeding with the operation.
Headings
1. Project name, Job name, Designers initials and Notes
(Y/N)
Structure
1. Nodes
2. Members
3. Plates
4. Restraints
5. Sections
6. Materials
7. Master-slave constraints
8. Member offsets
(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Loads
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Node loads
Thermal loads
Self weight
Load case titles
Lumped masses
Spectral load data
55

(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Analysis
1. Static analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed,
"U"=desired convergence not obtained,
"I"=ill-conditioned
2. Dynamic frequency analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
3. Dynamic response spectrum analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
4. Buckling analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
(Y/N/U/I)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Steel
1. Steel member design data
2. Steel Member design/check results, where
"N"=not designed or checked,
"D"=designed,
"C"=checked
3. Connection design data
4. Connection design results, where
"N"=not designed,
"D"=designed
(Y/N)(D/C/N)(Y/N)(D/N)
Concrete
1. Concrete column design data
2. Concrete beam design data
(Y/N)(Y/N)
56
Getting Started
Using the mouse

This section gives basic information about using the mouse. If your mouse has more than one
button, use the left button unless specifically told otherwise.
The right mouse button is generally used by SPACE GASS to replicate the keyboard ESC
key. The ESC key generally enables you to abort from the current operation or form. Note,
however that the right mouse button is not always active, such as when a form is open.
The following definitions explain the basic terms that are associated with using the mouse.
Pointer
The descriptive cursor that appears on the screen and tracks the mouse movement.
Point
Position the pointer on an item.
Click (or Pick)
Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the left mouse button.
Right Click
Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the right mouse button.
Double-click
Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the left mouse button twice.
Drag
Point to an item, press and hold the left mouse button as you move the mouse to a new
location, then release it.
Mousewheel
Rotate the mousewheel to dynamically zoom, pan or change the viewpoint. For more
information, refer to Shortcuts.
57
Dialogue boxes
When you choose a command, a form often appears so that you can select options or type in
data. If an option is dimmed, it is not currently available.
Using the keyboard with a form

Although its usually easiest to use a mouse while you work in a form, you can also select
options or fill in information with the keyboard. Some of the standard keyboard operations
that you can use in forms are as follows.
TAB
SHIFT+TAB
ENTER
ESC
ALT
Move to the next field in the form.

Move to the previous field in the form.
Equivalent to selecting the Ok button.
Equivalent to selecting the Cancel button.
If an option, box or button has an underlined
letter in its name, you can choose that item by
holding down ALT while typing the underlined
letter.
Moving a form
You can move a form dragging its title bar to the new location. The title bar is the colored
band along the top of the form.
Closing a form
You can close a form by pressing the Ok or Cancel buttons. Alternatively, if the form has a
control-menu box at the left side of the title bar, you can double-click on it to replicate the
58
Getting Started
cancel button. If you single click the control-menu box, a control menu appears which also
allows you to close or move the form.
59
Data entry
Forms can contain a wide variety of data entry fields, boxes, options and buttons. Some of the
commonly used ones in SPACE GASS are:
Command buttons
You choose a command button to initiate an action, such as carrying out or cancelling a
command. The Ok, Cancel and Help buttons are common command buttons. In SPACE
GASS, they are usually located in the top-right corner of the form. To choose a command
button, you can either click on it or press TAB until the button you want is selected, and then
press ENTER.
Scroll bars
Some windows and forms have scroll bars which you can use to view information that does
not fit inside the window. If you can view all of the contents of a window or form without
having to scroll, the scroll bars may be absent or dimmed to indicate that they cannot be used.
Scroll bars have a scroll arrow at each end with a moveable scroll box in between. To scroll
through information displayed in a window or form, drag the scroll box to the desired
position. To scroll one line at a time, click the scroll arrows, or to scroll continuously, hold a
scroll arrow down. To scroll one page at a time, click the scroll bar on either side of the scroll
box.
Text boxes
You can type appropriate information directly into text boxes. Text boxes are generally
sideways scrollable so that they can hold more data than can be displayed in the box.
Sometimes numeric text boxes have arrow buttons attached to them. These are called "spin
buttons" and you can change the number in the text box, without actually having to type
anything, by clicking the arrows or holding them down.
When entering data into a text box, you will find that quite often a default value is already
displayed there. If a default value is highlighted then as soon as you start typing it will be
erased. To edit a default value without causing it to be erased, you can simply click
somewhere in the text box or press one of the keyboard ARROW keys before you begin
typing. The point where you clicked becomes the insertion point for the new text.
If you want to highlight text in a text box, you can simply drag the pointer across the text, or
double-click on a word to select one word at a time. Any text that you type will then replace
the highlighted text. You can also delete highlighted text by pressing "DEL" or
"BACKSPACE".
Generally, when you select a text box by clicking on it, its default value does not become
highlighted, however if you use the TAB key to get to the text box, its default value does
become highlighted.
60
Getting Started
List boxes
Display a list of items in a scrollable window from which you can make a selection. In special
circumstances, you can sometimes select more than one item from a list box.
Combo boxes
Appear initially as a rectangular box containing the current selection. When you select the
down arrow in the square box at the right of the selection, a list of available choices appears.
If there are more items than can fit in the box, scroll bars are provided.
Radio buttons
Represent a group of mutually exclusive options. You can select only one option at a time. If
you already have one option selected, your current selection replaces it. The selected radio
button contains a black dot.
Check boxes
Represent non-exclusive options. You can select as many check box options as needed. When
a check box is selected, it contains an X.
Lists
Sometimes SPACE GASS will ask you to provide a list of items such as nodes, members or
load cases. Lists can be typed in as integers separated by commas or dashes. If, for example,
your list was to contain the items 1,2,6,7,8,9,13,14,15 and 20, you could type it in as
1,2,6,7,8,9,13,14,15,20 or as 1,2,6-9,13-15,20. Dashes simply allow you to list a range of
numbers.
A special type of list is used to input flange restraint positions in the steel member design
modules. This list accepts @s (AT symbol) instead of dashes and can be used to quickly
input a number of equally spaced flange restraints. For example, a list containing the
following numbers 1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4 could be replaced with 5@1.2,4@0.6.
When using a file selection form in which you have to scroll
to get to the file you want, you can simply type in the first couple of characters of the file
name to automatically scroll it into view.
61
Managing job files

SPACE GASS jobs end with ".SG". Whenever you run SPACE GASS, it loads and displays
the job that you previously had open. The procedures for starting new jobs, opening
previously saved jobs, merging jobs, saving jobs, deleting jobs and cleaning up jobs are
explained in the following sections.
SPACE GASS jobs are actually ZIP files renamed from {Job}.ZIP to {Job}.SG. You
can manually open and view their contents with WinZip, however be careful not to make any
changes or SPACE GASS may no longer be able to open them.
62
Getting Started
Starting a new job

You can start a new job by clicking the
menu.
toolbar button or selecting "New" from the File
If you have unsaved changes to the current job file then SPACE GASS will ask you if you
wish to save these changes.
63
Opening a job
You can open a previously saved job by clicking the
from the File menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Open"
You will be prompted for the name of the file you wish to open. SPACE GASS, by default,
looks in the most recently accessed folder when opening a job.
64
Getting Started
Merging jobs
You can open another previously saved job and merge it with the current job by selecting
"Merge" from the File menu. It is a good idea to save the current job first so that you can
recover it if required.
For the job being merged with the current job, you can specify whether you want to include
its structural data (required), load data and/or design data.
The insertion point is the location at which the (0,0,0) origin of the merged job will be
located. The default insertion point will guarantee that no overlapping with the current job
occurs.
In order to prevent clashing of numbered items, the merged job will be adjusted so that its
numbering starts after the highest numbers in the current job. This might prevent some jobs
from being merged if there is not enough room between the highest numbers in the current job
and the maximum numbers specified in the problem size limits. If this occurs, you could
renumber the current job and/or the merged job before attempting the merge, or you could
increase the problem size limits if they are not already at their maximum settings.
65
Saving a job
You can save the current job by clicking the
File menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Save" from the
Saves all changes made to the job. If you have not already created a name for the job (ie. if it
is previously unsaved) then you will be prompted for a file name and a location (performs the
same function as selecting "save as" from the file menu).
"Save As" is similar to "Save", except that the job is saved under a new name that you
specify. For example, if you open Job1, make changes to it and then use Save As to save it as
Job2, Job1 will be left unchanged while Job2 will be the changed version of Job1.
66
Getting Started
Deleting a job
You can delete a previously saved job by selecting "Delete Job" from the File menu.
Deletes the entire job. Use it with care because the job cannot be recovered after it has been
deleted.
67
Cleaning up a job
You can clean up the current job by clicking the
Job" from the File menu or the floating menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Clean-up
Cleans up your model by deleting obsolete items or items that are no longer connected to
anything. For example, it will remove loads that are applied to non-existent nodes, members
or plates, or section properties that are not being used by any members. It is very useful for
quickly removing the causes of many analysis errors.
The clean-up tool can also merge nodes that are within a specified distance of one another,
transferring members, plates, restraints, loads, etc. from the deleted nodes to the retained
nodes. If this action results in a change to the way the structure responds to the applied loads
then an error message will be displayed and the clean-up will not proceed. Any pairs of nodes
close together that are linked with master-slave constraints will not be merged.
Dummy nodes can be removed provided they are not used as direction nodes for members or
plates.
68
Getting Started
Running a macro
Macros are simply programs external to SPACE GASS that you can run from within SPACE
GASS using this tool. They can be MS-Excel or MS-Access programs, DLLs, ActiveX
programs, EXE programs or batch files.
Macros are not for running and controlling SPACE GASS from another external program.
For that you should refer to Running a Script.
You can open the macro management form by clicking the
"Run a Macro" from the File menu or the floating menu.
toolbar button or selecting
To run a macro, simply double-click the macro name in the form shown below.
To add a new macro or edit an existing macro, just click the "Add" or "Edit" buttons in the
above form and then fill in the details in the following form.
Macro Title is the name of the macro that will appear in the "Run a Macro" form.
Macro Type specifies the type of macro that is involved.
Macro File gives the location of the external program that will be executed when you run the
macro. This is not required for ActiveX macros.
Class Name is the name of the class in an ActiveX macro.
Macro Name is the name of the macro in an MS-Excel or MS-Access macro.
Parameter is a list of extra parameters that are passed to the macro.
Examples of each type of macro are supplied with SPACE GASS and are located in the main
program folder.
69
Running a script
Scripts allow you to run and control SPACE GASS from another program external to SPACE
GASS.
Scripts are not for running an external program from within SPACE GASS. For that you
should refer to Running a Macro.
A script is simply a text file that contains a list of commands that SPACE GASS will
automatically execute one-by-one. The script file can be located anywhere, and its name and
location must be specified in the command line when SPACE GASS is started.
For example, a command line option of -s "c:\scripts\myscript.txt" would load the myscript.txt
script file from the c:\scripts folder. Note that the double quotes (" ") can be omitted if this
option is at the end of the target field. If you dont want SPACE GASS to be visible when
running in script mode then you can use a "SHOW MIN" line in the script file as described
below.
You can create a script file manually using a text editor or you can write a program that will
create the script file and hence be able to control SPACE GASS automatically.
The commands in the script file allow you to select any of the SPACE GASS menu items,
however currently only the import, export, analysis and exit functions will bypass their input
dialogs when in script mode. All of the other functions will display their normal dialogs and
messages and then continue with the script when you have responded to them.
Any error messages will be displayed and cause the script mode to be terminated. Any
informative messages or warnings will be added to the log file and will not cause the script to
pause.
If you want to run SPACE GASS normally, ensure that the -s script file option does not exist
in the target field of the SPACE GASS shortcut that you use to start SPACE GASS, otherwise
SPACE GASS will go into script mode and will execute all the script commands rather than
allowing you to control it normally.
The structure of a script file is as follows:
70
1.
A header line containing "SPACE GASS Script File" must appear before any other command
lines.
2.
An optional LOGFILE line can be included between the header line and the first command
line. It lets you generate a log file that contains a list of all the menu commands executed from
the script file, plus any messages, warnings or errors that might occur while SPACE GASS is
running in script mode. Its format is "LOGFILE Filespec", where Filespec is the path and
name of the log file you want to create.
3.
An optional SHOW line can be included between the header line and the first command line.
You can use it to specify whether SPACE GASS runs in a minimized, normal or maximized
window when in script mode. Its format is "SHOW MIN", "SHOW NML" or "SHOW
MAX". "SHOW MIN" runs SPACE GASS minimized so that it is not visible except for an
icon on the taskbar. This is probably the most useful setting for running SPACE GASS in
script mode. "SHOW NML" runs SPACE GASS in a window that is usually smaller than the
overall screen size. "SHOW MAX" runs SPACE GASS maximized so that it fills the entire
screen area. This is the default setting and is the same as having no SHOW line in the script
file.
Getting Started
Note that the SHOW line overrides any -min, -nml or -max command line options that might
have been specified. See "Command line options" for more information.
4.
An optional PAUSE line can be included that allows you to pause the script. It can be useful if
your script is not working properly and you want to see what stage it is up to at certain points
in the script file.
5.
Command lines must appear exactly as "MENU MM SS [Extra]", where MM is a required 2

digit main-menu number, SS is a required 2 digit sub-menu number, and Extra is an optional
list of parameters depending on the command.
Extra can be up to 128 characters long and is used only as:
(a) the file name when importing or exporting files.
(b) the merge option when importing, where M signifies to merge rather than overwrite (eg.
M c:\Data\MyData.XLS to merge file MyData.XLS with the current job). If the "M" is
omitted when importing then the current job gets overwritten.
(c) the type of static analysis, where LIN=Linear, SSF=Small displacement theory/Secant
matrix/Full loading, SSR=Small displacement theory/Secant matrix/Residual loading,
FSF=Finite displacement theory/Secant matrix/Full loading, FSR=Finite displacement
theory/Secant matrix/Residual loading, FTR=Finite displacement theory/Tangent
matrix/Residual loading, LSF=Large displacement theory/Secant matrix/Full loading,
LSR=Large displacement theory/Secant matrix/Residual loading, LTR=Large displacement
theory/Tangent matrix/Residual loading.
Note that SSF, SSR, FSF, FSR, FTR, LSF, LSR and LTR are all non-linear analyses and are
only applicable if MENU 04 02 is used.
The above parameters can also be used to set the type of axial force distribution calculation in
a buckling analysis when MENU 04 05 is used.
(d) the list of load cases to be analysed, where CASES<list> specifies the list (eg.
CASES4,6,12-17,23,24 to analyse load cases 4, 6, 12-17, 23 and 24). Note that CASES0
signifies that all load cases should be analysed.
(e) the solver type, which can be PARADISE, WAVEFRONT or WATCOM.
(f) the optimization method when analysing, where NONE=None, AUTO=Auto,
GEN=General, LX=Linear-X, LY=Linear-Y, LZ=Linear-Z, CX=Circular-X, CY=Circular-Y
or CZ=Circular-Z.
(g) the tension/compression-only effects activation in a static analysis, where
TON=Activated, TOFF=Deactivated, TNR<n>=No reversal after n iterations (eg. TNR5 for
no reversal after 5 iterations).
(h) the number of load steps in a non-linear static analysis, where STEPS<n> specifies the
number of steps (eg. STEPS1 for one load step).
(i) the maximum number of iterations per load step in a non-linear static analysis, where
ITNS<n> specifies the maximum iterations (eg. ITNS10 for a maximum of 10 iterations per
load step).
(j) the convergence accuracy in a non-linear static analysis, where CNVG<n> specifies the
convergence (eg. CNVG99.99 for 99.99% convergence).
(k) the lists of steel design groups, section properties and/or load cases when performing a
steel member design or check. The lists can be specified as GROUPS<list>, SECTIONS<list>
71

and/or CASES<list> (eg. GROUPS1-5,12,13,15-20 to export groups 1-5, 12, 13 and 15-20).
Note that GROUPS0, SECTIONS0 and/or CASES0 signifies that all items should be included.
Note that any analysis or design options not set by you via the Extra parameter are taken to be
whatever was used in the previous analysis or design. For example, if you run an analysis of
load cases 1,2,3 and 4, and then run another analysis in script mode with the CASES
parameter omitted, it will also use just load cases 1,2,3 and 4.
6.
Comment lines are permitted anywhere in the file provided that they have a "#" before the first
non-blank character.
7.
Blank lines are permitted anywhere in the file.
A sample script file follows:

SPACE GASS Script File
# Create a log file (optional)
LOGFILE C:\Space Gass Data\Text\Logfile.txt
# Import a text file (Textin.txt)
MENU 01 15 C:\Space Gass Data\Text\Textin.txt
# Perform a non-linear analysis with Linear-X optimization and
tension/compression-only effects activated
MENU 04 02 LX TON
# Export a text file (Textout.txt)
MENU 01 26 C:\Space Gass Data\Text\Textout.txt
# Exit SPACE GASS
MENU 01 41
Note that when you exit SPACE GASS via a script file, any changes to the current job will be
abandoned. If you wish to save the changes then you should include a Save or Save-As
command before the Exit command.
72
Getting Started
Job status
You can display the current status of the job as shown below by selecting "Job Status" from
the File menu.
73
Shortcuts
Many of the menu items can also be accessed using a keyboard or mouse shortcut.
Ctrl key shortcuts
They are shown in the menus with Ctrl+K or Shift+Ctrl+K after them, where K represents the
shortcut key. For example, to operate the Edit Libraries tool you must hold down the Ctrl key
and then hit the L key (Ctrl+L). Alternatively, to access the Renumber facility you must hold
down the Shift and Ctrl keys together and then hit the R key (Shift+Ctrl+R).
Alt key shortcuts
Every menu item also has an Alt key shortcut that is represented by an underlined character in
the menu item names. If you hold down the Alt key, the underlining appears in the menus and
you can then hit the underlined character on the keyboard to select the desired menu item. If
there are more than one of the same underlined character in a menu, you can simply hit the
underlined character multiple times until the desired menu item is selected. For example, to
access the Units form you must hold down the Alt key and then hit the S key followed by the
U key (Alt+SU). Alternatively, to access the Connect tool, you must hold down the Alt key
and then hit the S key, followed by the C key three times (Alt+SCCC).
Renderer shortcuts
While using any of the renderer tools, various keyboard shortcuts are available that can speed
things up. They are listed below.
Shortcut
Tab key
F11 key
G key
S key
X, Y or Z keys
A key (hold down)
Action
Toggles all of the property panels on or off
Toggles full screen mode on or off
Toggles the grid on or off
Toggles the snap on or off
Allows you to set the working plane
Temporarily disables aligning with a "locked on" node or
member
C key (hold down)
Temporarily disables attaching to a node or member
Up/Down arrow keys
Zooms in/out
Rotate mousewheel
Zooms in/out
Drag with left mouse button Rotates
Drag with right mouse
Pans
button
Many of the other shortcuts listed below are also available in the renderer
Other shortcuts
The following list shows a number of special mouse and keyboard shortcuts that operate some
of the most useful and commonly used tools.
Action
Zoom in
Zoom out
Zoom full
Zoom previous
74
Keyboard
shortcut
Up arrow
Down arrow
Right arrow
Left arrow
Mouse shortcut
Mousewheel forwards
Mousewheel backwards
Getting Started
Pan down
Pan up
Pan left
Pan right
Pan in renderer
Ctrl+Up arrow
Ctrl+Down arrow
Ctrl+Right arrow
Ctrl+Left arrow
Rotate down
Rotate up
Shift+Up arrow "V"+Mousewheel forwards

Shift+Down
"V"+Mousewheel backwards
arrow
Shift+Right arrow "H"+Mousewheel forwards
Shift+Left arrow "H"+Mousewheel backwards
Hold the left mouse button down and move the
mouse
Rotate left
Rotate right
Rotate in renderer
Ctrl+Mousewheel forwards
Ctrl+Mousewheel backwards
Shift+Mousewheel forwards
Shift+Mousewheel backwards
Hold the right mouse button down and move
the mouse
Enlarge load diagram

Reduce load diagram
"L"+Up arrow
"L"+Mousewheel forwards
"L"+Down arrow "L"+Mousewheel backwards
Enlarge deflection
diagram
Reduce deflection
diagram
"D"+Up arrow
Enlarge moment
diagram
Reduce moment
diagram
"M"+Up arrow
Enlarge shear force

diagram
Reduce shear force
diagram
"S"+Up arrow
Enlarge axial force

diagram
Reduce axial force
diagram
"A"+Up arrow
"D"+Mousewheel forwards
"D"+Down arrow "D"+Mousewheel backwards
"M"+Mousewheel forwards
"M"+Down arrow "M"+Mousewheel backwards
"S"+Mousewheel forwards
"S"+Down arrow "S"+Mousewheel backwards
"A"+Mousewheel forwards
"A"+Down arrow "A"+Mousewheel backwards
Enlarge torsion
"T"+Up arrow
"T"+Mousewheel forwards
diagram
Reduce torsion diagram "T"+Down arrow "T"+Mousewheel backwards
Enlarge buckling
diagram
Reduce buckling
diagram
"B"+Up arrow
"B"+Mousewheel forwards
"B"+Down arrow "B"+Mousewheel backwards
Enlarge stress diagram "E"+Up arrow
"E"+Mousewheel forwards
75

Reduce stress diagram "E"+Down arrow "E"+Mousewheel backwards
76
Previous load case

Next load case
First load case
Last load case
Page up
Page down
Home
End
Previous filter
Next filter
No filter
Last filter
Ctrl+Page up
Ctrl+Page down
Ctrl+Home
Ctrl+End
Previous saved view

Next saved view
First saved view
Last saved view
Shift+Page up
Shift+Page down
Shift+Home
Shift+End
Repeat last command
Spacebar
Input Methods
Input methods
There are four main ways in which data can be input into SPACE GASS.
Structure Wizard
If your model resembles one of the standard structures available in the Structure Wizard then
it is the easiest way to quickly generate your model in SPACE GASS. Even if it isnt exactly
what you want, you can then use the other graphical or datasheet tools to modify the
generated model to your exact requirements.
Datasheet Input
Each component of the SPACE GASS model can be input, edited or viewed in a Datasheet.
For example, there are datasheets for nodes, members, plates, section properties, member
loads, masses, etc. Datasheets are an invaluable tool for viewing data or making changes,
particularly using the multi-row editing tool.
Graphical Input
You can use Graphical Input to input or edit any parts of the structural data or load data in
your model. This is a very powerful tool that has the advantages of allowing you to make
large changes quickly and see your changes visually as you make them.
Importing from Other Programs
SPACE GASS is able to link to other programs and import the structural model in a wide
variety of formats.
Some of the commonly used CAD and BIM (building information management) programs
that can be linked to SPACE GASS include Tekla Structures (XSteel), ProSteel, Microstation,
Frameworks Plus, StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley Structural and AutoCAD.
You can also import from SPACE GASS text files, CSV (comma separated value) files, DXF
files, SDNF files, Microstran ARC files and MS-Excel files.
If you have your own program that generates the SPACE GASS data, if it can write the
data into a SPACE GASS text file, CSV file or MS-Excel file in the correct format then it can
be imported into SPACE GASS.
If you wish to know the format of a CSV or MS-Excel file that is suitable for importing into
SPACE GASS, the best way is to generate a small model in SPACE GASS using the structure
wizard or some other method and then export it into a CSV or MS-Excel file and use resulting
file as a pattern. The SPACE GASS text file format is fully explained in Text file format, but
you can also generate a text file from SPACE GASS and use it as a pattern.
The other formats are quite complex and are simply generated by the programs that you are
importing your SPACE GASS model from.
For more information, refer to "Linking to other programs".
Common Database
Each of the above data input methods operates on the same common database, therefore you
can use any combination of methods to input your data. For example, you can use the
77

structure wizard to generate the basic frame geometry, then graphically edit the geometry and
apply some loads, followed by opening up some datasheets to view the data and make further
modifications to the structure or loads.
When some data has been input, regardless of the amount or type, you can produce an output
report on the screen or printer. In addition, regardless of which input method you use, the
graphics display area displays the current state of the structural model graphically. A graphics
hardcopy can also be produced at any time.
78

Linking to other programs
SPACE GASS can link to many other engineering, CAD and BIM (building information
management) programs using a wide variety of links and file formats.
Some of the commonly used CAD and BIM programs that can be linked to SPACE GASS
include Tekla Structures (XSteel), ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus, StruCAD, Revit
Structure, Bentley Structural and AutoCAD.
Other programs that can import and/or export CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) or IFC Step files can also
be linked to SPACE GASS. These include STAAD, Risa-3D, SAP2000 ETABS, ROBOT,
SmartPlant4D Structural and others
Programs that can import and/or export DXF or SDNF files can also be linked to SPACE
GASS, however only the basic geometry can be included in these formats.
Details of the files that SPACE GASS can import/export are as follows.
SPACE GASS Text File
ZIP File
CSV File
CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step File
IFC Step File
This format is ideal for people who wish to

write their own programs to generate the
SPACE GASS data and then import it into
SPACE GASS. The format of SPACE GASS
text files is fully explained in "Text file input
".
This format is still available but is essentially
obsolete because the native SPACE GASS job
files are actually ZIP files renamed from .ZIP
to .SG.
This format is also ideal for people who wish
to write their own programs to generate the
SPACE GASS data and then import it into
SPACE GASS. It is a text file with the values
separated by commas that can be written by
many programs including MS-Excel.
Useful for transferring models with many
other CAD and building management
programs such as Tekla Structures (XSteel),
ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus,
StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley Structural,
AutoCAD, etc. This is a very comprehensive
format that includes the structural and load
data.
Useful for transferring models with many
other CAD and building management
programs such as Tekla Structures (XSteel),
ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus,
StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley Structural,
AutoCAD, etc. This is a very comprehensive
format that includes the structural and load
data.
79

DXF File
SDNF File
MS-Excel
MS-Word
Microstran ARC
A drawing format text file invented for

AutoCAD that many programs can import and
export. It is a very good means of transferring
drawings from SPACE GASS in the form of
plans, elevations, cross sections and
connection drawings into a CAD program.
Because DXF is a drawing format, when
transferring a structural model to another
program, it is better to use the more
comprehensive and specialized CIMSteel/2
and IFC Step file formats described above.
This is a steel detailing neutral file format that
has now been made obsolete by the much
more advanced CIMSteel/2 and IFC Step file
formats described above. It can contain the
structural geometry and section property data
and is still used by many programs.
Microsoft Excel is a very powerful tool for
generating data and can be used to quickly
generate a structural model for importing into
SPACE GASS. SPACE GASS can also export
to Microsoft Excel.
The data from a SPACE GASS model can be
exported to a Microsoft Word document file.
A format for importing Microstran models
into SPACE GASS.
In order to import from or export to a SPACE GASS text file, CSV file, SDNF file,
Microstran ARC file, MS-Excel file or MS-Word file, the procedure simply involves selecting
the desired format from the Import or Export options in the File menu and then choosing a file
name.
Linking to other programs using the very comprehensive CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step, IFC Step
or Revit Structure transfer options are fully explained in the following sections.
80
CIMSteel/2 Step, IFC Step and Revit links

Complete structural models can be imported into SPACE GASS or exported to other
programs using the very comprehensive CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step, IFC Step or Revit Structure
transfer options. Each of these formats can contain the complete structural model, including
loads and design data.
They can be used to link SPACE GASS with programs such as Tekla Structures (XSteel),
ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus, StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley Structural,
AutoCAD and many others that use the CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step or IFC Step formats.
Revit Structure is slightly different to the other programs because in addition to
communicating with SPACE GASS via the CIMSteel/2 or IFC links, it can also communicate
via special import and export menu items that can be added to the Revit Structure "Tools"
menu.
The physical and analytical models
The "physical" model includes all of the "visible" information such as the geometry of the
beams, columns, braces, cables, trusses, struts, ties, walls, slabs and connections. It includes
all the components that make up the models physical attributes.
The "analytical" model includes the "visible" information too, but it also contains "hidden"
information such as support conditions, member end releases, offset data, section and material
properties, loads, load combinations, design data and analysis results.
The other main difference with the analytical model is that, depending on the program you are
importing from, the geometry may be somewhat idealised so that the centroids of members
line up with the members they are connected to. For example, bracing members that connect
to a beam-column connection do not often line up with the centroid of the beam-column
connection in the real structure and in the "physical" model, however they may be adjusted to
line up in the "analytical" model.
Section name conversion files
One of the major obstacles to successfully transferring data between programs is that there is
no standard naming convention for section property names and hence every program uses
slightly different names. To solve this problem, conversion files are used to convert the
section names used by SPACE GASS to the names used by other programs. Conversion files
are supplied with SPACE GASS for converting section names to Tekla Structures, Prosteel,
Revit Structure and others. You can also make your own section name conversion files quite
easily.
A conversion file is simply a text file that contains a list of the SPACE GASS section names
together with the library each section comes from and the name of the section that is used by
the program SPACE GASS is communicating with. An extract from a typical conversion file
is as follows:
SG Name, SG library, Other name
W21x101, US, W 21*101
W21x111, US, W 21*111
W21x122, US, W 21*122
You can see from the above example that the SPACE GASS name and the "Other name" are
often very similar and sometimes only involve adding or removing spaces or changing from
"x" to "*" or vice versa.
81
Standard section name conversion files are supplied with SPACE GASS for each of the
SPACE GASS section libraries and each of the well-known programs that you may want
SPACE GASS to communicate with. For example, Tekla Structures conversion files are
supplied for each of the SPACE GASS section libraries. Similar sets of conversion files are
also supplied for Revit Structure, Prosteel, etc.
Creating custom section name conversion files
You must first initiate a CIS/2 or IFC import or export from the File menu to display the
following form.
Custom section name conversion files can then be created in either of two ways.
1.
You can create a custom conversion file that is a combination of some of the standard
conversion files supplied with SPACE GASS.
To do this you must first select a program name in the "Convert section names for" list box
and then click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left and ensure that the SPACE
GASS libraries from which the sections will be taken are listed in the "Library search order"
box.
You can then create the custom conversion file by clicking the "Create a custom section name
conversion file" button.
2.
You can create a template for a custom conversion file that contains just the SPACE GASS
section names and the libraries they come from, but not the "other program" names.
To do this you must click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left and then ensure
that the SPACE GASS libraries from which the sections will be taken are listed in the "Library
search order" box.
You can then create the template conversion file by clicking the "Create a template section
name conversion file" button.
To convert the template conversion file into a complete custom conversion file, you should
edit the template file with a text editor such as Notepad and manually enter the "other
program" names at the end of each line. You could also use MS-Excel, however when opening
the file, you must specify that the file is comma delimited, otherwise each line will appear in
82

just one cell.
Section name conversion files are stored in the SPACE GASS program folder (usually
"c:\Program files\SPACE GASS\Exe").
Details of how to import and export using these links are explained in the following sections.
83
Import links
You can import a CIS/2 or IFC Step file by selecting "Import - from CIMSteel/2 Step" or
"Import - from IFC Step" from the File menu.
When importing from Revit Structure, you can import a CIS/2 or IFC Step file created by it or
you can select the "Send Model to SPACE GASS" item from the Revit Structure "Tools >
External Tools" menu as explained in "Special Revit Structure Links".
Even though the internal structure of CIS/2 step files and IFC step files are quite different, the
importing procedure is the same and hence the following instructions apply to both.
The name of the file being imported is displayed in the "Data Filename" field and you can
select another file by clicking on the button to the right of the input field.
When importing, to ensure that the section names used by the source program are converted
properly to SPACE GASS names, you should do the following:
1.
If you are linking with a standard program for which a section name conversion file exists,
select it in the "Convert section names for" list box.
If the name of the program you are linking with does not appear in the list, it simply means
that there is currently no standard conversion file for that program. If so, you should select
"Other". You can then create and use a custom conversion file or use one that you previously
created as explained in "Creating custom section name conversion files" in the previous
section. Alternatively, you can just skip the custom conversion file option and the section
names will be imported or exported with no conversion.
2.
84
Click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left to display the section libraries form as
shown below.
If you selected a program name in the "Convert section names for" list box in step 1 above,
ensure that the "Use a standard section name conversion file" option is ticked. This will
activate the section name conversion using the standard conversion files supplied with SPACE
GASS.
If you selected "Other" in the "Convert section names for" list box in step 1 above, and you
have a custom conversion file that you want to use, ensure that the "Use a custom section
name conversion file" option is ticked and that the name of the custom conversion file is in the
"Conversion filename" field. If you wish to create a custom conversion file, follow the
procedure in "Creating custom section name conversion files" in the previous section.
If you wish to use a mixture of custom and standard conversion files, you can tick both the
"Use a custom section name conversion file" and "Use a standard section name conversion
file" options. In this case, SPACE GASS will try to convert the section name using the custom
conversion file first and, if the name cant be found there, the standard conversion files will be
used.
3.
You also need to check that the appropriate SPACE GASS libraries are listed in the "Library
search order" box.
The "Library search order" box controls which SPACE GASS libraries will be used when the
section names being imported are converted. If the name of a section being imported does not
appear in one of the libraries listed in this box then it will not be converted. It is therefore
important that you include enough libraries in the "Library search order" box to ensure that all
the sections being imported have their names converted.
You can include all libraries in the box, however this may slow down the import process
slightly due to the increased number of libraries that have to be scanned.
If a section name appears in more than one SPACE GASS library then the libraries higher up
in the list will have priority.
You can choose which components of the model to import by expanding the "Import" branch
of the menu tree on the left and then clicking "Nodes" or "Members" as shown below.
85
You can specify the starting node number or, if you leave it at zero, the imported nodes will
be automatically numbered starting from the first available number.
Nodes that are very close together can be merged into one, and the connecting members and
plates adjusted to suit.
If you select the "Adjust lower limits of node coordinates by" checkbox, SPACE GASS will
find the node with the lowest coordinates and move it to the coordinates that you specify. The
rest of the model will also be moved by the same amount.
You can specify the starting member and plate numbers or, if you leave them at zero, the
imported members and plates will be automatically numbered starting from the first available
number.
Members that have an end very close to another member can be connected together.
Similarly, members that cross each other within a specified distance can be subdivided and
connected at the intersection point.
86

A number of programs that generate CIS/2 and IFC Step files incorrectly mix radians and
degrees when specifying member direction angles. If you are importing one of these nonstandard files and find that some members are rotated incorrectly, you can select the "Assume
radians for all angular measurements" checkbox to correct the problem.
For more information about the "Physical" and "Analytical" models, refer to "The physical
and analytical models" in the previous section.
87
Export links
You can export a CIS/2 or IFC Step file by selecting "Export - to CIMSteel/2 Step" or
"Export - to IFC Step" from the File menu.
When exporting to Revit Structure, you can export a CIS/2 or IFC Step file or you can select
the "Update Model from SPACE GASS" item from the Revit Structure "Tools > External
Tools" menu as explained in "Special Revit Structure Links".
Even though the internal structure of CIS/2 step files and IFC step files are quite different, the
exporting procedure is the same and hence the following instructions apply to both.
The name of the file being exported to is displayed in the "Data Filename" field and you can
select another file by clicking on the button to the right of the input field.
When exporting, to ensure that the section names used by SPACE GASS are converted
properly to the names used by the destination program, you should do the following:
1.
If you are linking with a standard program for which a section name conversion file exists,
select it in the "Convert section names for" list box.
If the name of the program you are linking with does not appear in the list, it simply means
that there is currently no standard conversion file for that program. If so, you should select
"Other". You can then create and use a custom conversion file or use one that you previously
created as explained in "Creating custom section name conversion files" in the previous
section. Alternatively, you can just skip the custom conversion file option and the section
names will be imported or exported with no conversion.
2.
88
Click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left to display the section libraries form as
shown below.
If you selected a program name in the "Convert section names for" list box in step 1 above,
ensure that the "Use a standard section name conversion file" option is ticked. This will
activate the section name conversion using the standard conversion files supplied with SPACE
GASS.
If you selected "Other" in the "Convert section names for" list box in step 1 above, and you
have a custom conversion file that you want to use, ensure that the "Use a custom section
name conversion file" option is ticked and that the name of the custom conversion file is in the
"Conversion filename" field. If you wish to create a custom conversion file, follow the
procedure in "Creating custom section name conversion files" in the previous section.
If you wish to use a mixture of custom and standard conversion files, you can tick both the
"Use a custom section name conversion file" and "Use a standard section name conversion
file" options. In this case, SPACE GASS will try to convert the section name using the custom
conversion file first and, if the name cant be found there, the standard conversion files will be
used.
You can choose which components of the model to export by clicking the "Export" branch of
the menu tree on the left.
89

The normal procedure is to export the analytical model because, as well as the geometric
information, it contains "hidden" information such as support conditions, member end
releases, offset data, section and material properties, loads, load combinations, design data
and analysis results. However, if you are exporting to a program that requires the physical
model then you should select it. Note that when exporting from SPACE GASS, the geometric
information in the physical and analytical models is the same.
For more information about the "Physical" and "Analytical" models, refer to "The physical
and analytical models" in the previous section.
90
Special Revit Structure links

Revit Structure is slightly different to the other programs because there are two ways to link it
to SPACE GASS. In addition to being able to communicate with SPACE GASS via the
CIMSteel/2 and IFC Step file links, Revit Structure can be configured to create SPACE
GASS jobs directly and also update the Revit model from them.
The advantage of using the direct Revit Structure link over the CIMSteel/2 and IFC links is
that after you have transferred the model to SPACE GASS, you can import the section
property and steel design changes back into Revit Structure without completely replacing the
Revit Structure model.
The advantage of the CIMSteel/2 and IFC Step file links is that you can start with a SPACE
GASS model and transfer it into Revit Structure to create a Revit model from scratch. You
cant do this with the direct Revit Structure link.
Of course, you can use a combination of methods. You could start with a SPACE GASS
model, export it using CIMSteel/2 or IFC to create a new Revit Structure model, add to the
model in Revit Structure and then export it back to SPACE GASS using the direct Revit
Structure link.
Setting up the direct link between SPACE GASS and Revit Structure
You can add the special SPACE GASS items to the Revit Structure "Tools" menu by running
the RevitSpaceGassLink.exe file in the SPACE GASS program folder (usually "c:\Program
files\SPACE GASS\Exe").
The program will attempt to find the SPACE GASS and Revit Structure program folders and
then display them in the following form.
If either field doesnt display a folder name with "(file found)" at the end, you will have to
click the appropriate browse button at the right of the field to select the program folder
manually. Once both folders have been identified correctly you can click the Ok button and
the SPACE GASS items will be automatically added to the Revit Structure "Tools" menu.
Transferring from Revit Structure
To create a complete SPACE GASS model from Revit Structure, click the "Send Model to
SPACE GASS" item from the Revit Structure "Tools" menu.
91
When exporting to SPACE GASS, you have full control over units, connections between
beams and columns, loads, member offsets, specification of tension-only members, section
names, etc.
If the names of sections in your Revit Structure model are different to the names used in the
SPACE GASS section libraries, you can use (or set up your own) section name conversion
file that converts the Revit Structure names to the SPACE GASS names. For more
information, refer to "Creating custom section name conversion files" in "CIMSteel/2 Step,
IFC Step and Revit links".
Transferring to Revit Structure
When the SPACE GASS analysis and/or design is complete, you can update the Revit
Structure model by clicking the "Update Model from SPACE GASS" item from the Revit
Structure "Tools" menu.
92
When importing from SPACE GASS you can elect to incorporate steel design data into the
Revit Structure model. This is then retained in Revit Structure and returned to SPACE GASS
the next time you export a model to SPACE GASS from Revit Structure.
93
DXF links
The DXF file format is a text format invented for AutoCAD that many programs can import
and export. Because DXF is essentially a drawing format rather than for engineering models,
it is limited to the basic structural geometry when used to transfer a structural model. For this
reason, transferring a structural model is best done using the CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step or IFC
Step file formats or the Revit links which are very comprehensive and can include loads.
The DXF format is, however, a very good means of creating drawings in the form of plans,
elevations, cross sections and connection drawings for transferring into a CAD program.
Details of how to import and export DXF files are explained in the following sections.
94
Importing DXF files

You can import a DXF file by selecting "Import - from DXF" from the File menu.
When importing, SPACE GASS interprets each discrete line in a CAD drawing as a member.
This has two ramifications that you will need to consider.
1. CAD programs do not know that intersecting lines need to be segmented into submembers with nodes at the intersection points. For example, if you drew the top and
bottom chords of a truss with just two lines adding the struts and braces as separate
lines, SPACE GASS would consider that the chords are not connected to the web
members except at the chord ends.
You must ensure every member that you want in the SPACE GASS model is drawn as
a separate line in the CAD program. If you draw a line in the CAD program which
continues past a node then the member will not be connected to that node in the
SPACE GASS model.
2. You shouldnt read a DXF file, created with full member geometry, back into SPACE
GASS (it interprets each member flange and web line as an individual member).
Note that SPACE GASS only interprets LINE, 3DLINE and POLYLINE entities as
geometry when importing a DXF file. All other entity types are ignored.
It is usually much quicker and more efficient to draw the
structure directly in SPACE GASS rather than drawing it in your CAD program and
importing it into SPACE GASS. This is because SPACE GASS knows it is dealing with a
structure and not just lines in a drawing.
95
Exporting DXF files

There are two types of DXF files that can be exported from SPACE GASS.
1.
Elevations, plans, cross sections and member schedules.
2.
Steel connection drawings.
Exporting elevations, plans, cross sections and member schedules

You can export elevations, plans, cross sections and member schedules by selecting "Export
to DXF" from the File menu.
Full geometry
You can elect to simply export a wireframe drawing that consists of lines along the
centrelines of each member, or you can also include the full member geometry which shows
the actual member shapes including flanges and webs, etc.
Drawings that include the full member geometry can have the geometry lines shortened by a
distance factor that you specify in the General Configuration form at each end of the member
so that intersecting members do not run into one another.
Member schedule
Selecting this check box causes a member schedule to be included in the drawing.
Z axis vertical
AutoCAD and some other 3D CAD programs assume that the Y-axis is vertical for 2D
drawings, while the Z-axis is vertical for 3D drawings.
96
If this check box is selected then the global Z-axis is made vertical in the drawing, otherwise
the Y-axis is vertical.
Label members
Members can be unlabelled, or labelled with the member names, member marks or both.
Draw with
By choosing 3DLINEs or FACES you can generate a full 3D drawing, or by choosing
2DLINEs you can limit the drawing to just 2D views, elevations, plans or cross sections of the
structure. Note that FACEs support hidden line removal and shading while 3DLINEs do not.
A 3D drawing complete with full member geometry is very useful for visualizing how the
structure fits together and for checking whether members clash with each other or not.
Similar 3D drawings with hidden line removal can also be viewed directly in SPACE GASS
without having to go to a CAD program (see also View rendered model).
Because almost all structural drawings are made up
predominantly of 2D plans, elevations and details, the ability of SPACE GASS to produce 2D
drawings of the frame is one of the most useful aspects of being able to export DXF files.
SPACE GASS allows you to create a series of 2D vertical or horizontal "slices" at any
position through a 3D frame and have them exported to CAD as cross sections, elevations or
plans.
These 2D drawings can contain the full member geometry complete with dashed and dotted
hidden lines. It is then a simple matter for a draftsperson to use a CAD package, such as
AutoCAD, to add connections, notation, etc. and complete the structural drawing.
2D drawing plane
If you have specified a 2D drawing by choosing 2DLINEs in the "Draw with" combo box,
you must choose a 2D drawing plane here.
2D drawing limits
If you have specified a 2D drawing, then you must nominate upper and lower drawing plane
limits. The limits will be along the global axis at right angles to the 2D drawing plane. Any
members that lie between the two limits will be included in the drawing.
Scale
You can scale the drawing up or down with this field. For example, a scale of 10 causes the
drawing dimensions to be reduced by a factor of 10. Units for the DXF drawing file are the
same as those used in SPACE GASS.
Title
Typing a title into this field causes it to appear at the bottom of the drawing.
DXF layer names
Layer names can be any names of up to 8 characters. AutoSKETCH requires layer names to
be integers from 1 to 10 in all cases. It is recommended that you configure your CAD
software so that the hidden line layer uses dashed or dotted lines. This ensures that they can
be easily distinguished from visible geometry lines.
You can specify that the layers should be section-specific for centerlines, full geometry and/or
text. This means that each member type will have its own layer rather than the entire frame
97

just going into a single layer. You can then set your CAD software so that each layer has a
different color, making identification of the various section types very easy.
Exporting steel connection drawings

During or after a steel connection design, you can create fully detailed and annotated
drawings of the connections and export them to DXF drawing files in either of two ways.
1.
Enable the "Generate drawings for a CAD system" option at the beginning of the connection
design phase (see also Running a steel connection design). This causes a DXF drawing file to
be created for every connection designed.
2.
Click the
toolbar button after the connection design phase to view the connection
drawings graphically and then selectively produce DXF files from there (see also View steel
connection drawings).
Using either method, the final result is the same. You can control the drawing layer names by
setting them in the SPACE GASS configuration data. An example of a steel connection
drawing produced automatically by SPACE GASS is shown as follows.
98

SPACE GASS connection detail
99

Modelling the structure
Before a frame can be modelled and analysed with a program such as SPACE GASS, it must
first be idealised and modelled mathematically. The most popular mathematical model uses
the concept of nodes connected by elements of a finite size (finite elements).
SPACE GASS requires that frames are represented by nodes connected by members, cables
or plates. Such nodes are generally free to move and rotate in space. Practical structures,
however, are connected to a footing in some way, and so node restraints must be applied
which limit the movement of selected nodes.
The relative movement between nodes connected by a member, cable or plate is a function of
the section and material properties of that element. Loads can be mathematically represented
in the model and can be applied elements. Such loads include all of the normal force and
moment type loads, in addition to load inducers such as prescribed displacements and
temperature differentials. A single analysis can consider numerous load cases, each of which
may contain many different load types.
During the analysis phase, all unrestrained node displacements (degrees of freedom) are
calculated for each load case. Element forces and moments are then determined from the
relative movement of the nodes they are connected to and, finally, reactions are calculated by
equating element reactions at each restrained node.
If the analysis selected is non-linear, SPACE GASS does an initial linear analysis and then
modifies the stiffness matrix for each member based on the previous analysis node
displacements and member axial forces. It then re-analyses the structure for the modified
member stiffness and continues iterating the analysis phase in this way until convergence is
achieved. Note that because the plate elements are linear elements at this stage, their stiffness
is not modified during the non-linear analysis iterations.
101
Coordinate systems
The geometry of a structural model is referenced by a set of global XYZ axes. Each member
and plate element also has its own set of local xyz axes so that items such as section
properties and local loads can be more easily referenced.
All axes are right hand orthogonal. This means that if you are looking at the XY plane with
the Y-axis pointing upwards and the X-axis pointing to the right, the Z-axis points towards
you as shown below.
Global Axes
The shape and position of a structure in space is defined by a set of global axes (X,Y,Z). All
node coordinates, for example, are input relative to the global axes system. The global XZ
plane is assumed to be horizontal, while the global Y-axis points vertically upwards.
Note that although SPACE GASS assumes that the Y-axis is vertical by default, it can be
configured to set the Z-axis to vertical. This is done via the Viewpoint tool.
Global Axes
Member Axes
The local axes for a member have their origin at node A and are defined as follows:
1. The x-axis lies along the axis of the member and points from node A to node B.
2. The local y-axis is normal to the local x-axis and points in the same general direction
as the global Y-axis. It is orientated such that the local xy-plane is parallel to the
global Y-axis.
3. The local z-axis is orthogonal with x and y.
For members that have their longitudinal axis parallel to the global Y-axis, rule 2 is
undefined and hence, for these members, the local z-axis points in the same direction
as the global Z-axis.
4. If a direction angle, node or axis is defined then the member is rolled about its
longitudinal x-axis by the direction angle or, if a direction node or axis is defined, by
an amount such that the local y-axis is aligned with the direction node or axis as
shown below.
102
Member Local Axes
Member Direction Angle
Member Direction Node
103
Member Direction Axis
If you are unsure of the orientation of the local axes for a particular member, you can display
them graphically (see also View local axes).
Plate Axes
The local axes for a plate have their origin at the centre of the plate and are defined as
follows:
1. The x-axis is in the plane of the plate and is parallel to the line joining node A and
node B.
2. The local y-axis is also in the plane of the plate and is normal to the local x-axis.
3. The local z-axis is normal to the plane of the plate and is orthogonal with x and y.
4. If a direction angle, node or axis is defined then the local axes are rotated about the
plates normal z-axis by the direction angle or, if a direction node or axis is defined,
by an amount such that the local y-axis is aligned with the direction node or axis as
shown below.
Note that defining a direction angle, node or axis affects the orientation of the plates
axes but not the orientation of the plate itself.
Plate Local Axes
104
Plate Direction Angle
Plate Direction Node
105

Plate Direction Axis
If you are unsure of the orientation of the local axes for a particular plate, you can display
106
Sign conventions
Items which act along or about an axis are considered to be positive when they act along or
about the positive axis direction. Positive rotations conform to the right hand screw rule
shown as follows.
Right Hand Screw Rule
Applied loads have their sign determined by the axes system in which they are referred. Most
types of member and plate loads can be specified in either the global or local system, however
node loads and self weight are always referenced by the global system.
Node displacements are positive if they displace along or around the positive global axis
directions. External reactions are positive if they act along or around the positive global axis
directions.
Member Actions
Member actions follow the sign conventions as follows.
Member Forces and Moments
Positive axial forces cause compression in the member.

Positive moments cause compression on the positive axis side of the member.
107
Channel and angle sections have their flange toes pointing in the direction of the local
z-axis. Positive y-axis moments therefore cause the flange toes to go into compression.
Positive shears cause the node A end of the member to translate in the direction of the
positive axis with respect to the node B end.
Positive torsions cause the node A end of the member to rotate anti-clockwise with respect to
the node B end when observed from the node B end.
Plate Actions
Plate actions follow the sign conventions as follows.
Plate Forces
108

Plate Moments
When calculating the design moments for reinforced concrete slabs, the twisting
moment Mxy must be combined with the normal bending moments Mx and My. The WoodArmer method is commonly used for this and is explained in "Bending Moments in Reinforced
Concrete Slabs" below.
Plate Stresses
Note that plate elements have no rotational stiffness about their local z-axis. This
means that there is effectively a rotational pin connection between the plate and its corner
nodes about the axis normal to the plate.
Positive moments cause compression in the top (positive z-axis) face of the plate.
Plane Stress
Three dimensional objects subjected to loads generally have three principal stresses, however
in structural elements where one dimension is very small compared to the other two (ie. plate
elements), one of the three principal stresses is zero and a state of "plane stress" is said to
exist. In this case, the stresses are negligible with respect to the smaller dimension as they are
not able to develop within the material and are small compared to the in-plane stresses.
Principal Stress
For plates subjected to plane stress, there are two principal stresses acting in the principal axis
directions. The angle between the principal axes and the local x and y axes is called the
principal angle. The principal stresses can be calculated from x, y and xy using Mohr circle
theory as follows.
1 (max) = (x + y)/2 + SQRT((x - y)2/4 + xy2)
(min) = (x + y)/2 - SQRT((x - y)2/4 + xy2)
xymax = ( - )/2
109

= Tan-1(2xy/(x - y))/2
where x, y and xy are the membrane and shear stresses in the local axis directions (as per
the above diagrams), 1 and 2 are the principal stresses, xymax is the maximum shear stress
and is the principal angle.
von Mises Stress
Richard von Mises (an eminent Austrian scientist who worked on solid mechanics, fluid
mechanics, aerodynamics, aeronautics, statistics and probability theory) found that, even
though none of the principal stresses exceeds the yield stress of the material, it is possible for
yielding to result from the combination of stresses. The von Mises criteria is a formula for
combining these principal stresses into an equivalent stress, which is then compared to the
yield stress of the material. The yield stress is a known property of the material and is usually
considered to be the failure stress.
The equivalent stress is often called the "von Mises Stress" as a shorthand description. It is
not really a stress, but a number that is used as an index. If the von Mises stress exceeds the
yield stress, then the material is considered to be at the failure condition.
The von Mises stress can be calculated from the principal stresses according to:
vm = SQRT(((1 2)2 + 12 + 22)/2)
where 1 and 2 are the principal stresses and vm is the equivalent or "von Mises" stress.
Bending Moments in Reinforced Concrete Slabs
When evaluating the design moments for a reinforced concrete slab, the twisting moment
Mxy must be taken into account in addition to the normal bending moments Mx and My. Mxy
contributes a moment effect to both the principal bending directions x and y.
Using the Wood-Armer method, the design moments Mx* and My* can be determined as
follows:
To design bottom reinforcement (ie. calculate moments that cause tension in the bottom face):
Mx* = Mx + | Mxy |
My* = My + | Mxy |
If either of Mx* or My* from the above calculations are < 0 then
If Mx* < 0 then Mx* = 0 and My* = My + | Mxy2/Mx |
If My* < 0 then My* = 0 and Mx* = Mx + | Mxy2/My |
To design top reinforcement (ie. calculate moments that cause tension in the top face):
Mx* = Mx - | Mxy |
My* = My - | Mxy |
If either of Mx* or My* from the above calculations are > 0 then
If Mx* > 0 then Mx* = 0 and My* = My - | Mxy2/Mx |
If My* > 0 then My* = 0 and Mx* = Mx - | Mxy2/My |
Further information can be found by searching for "Wood-Armer" on the Internet or at web
sites such as http://www.scribd.com/doc/76706580/Slab-Design-by-Wood-Armer-Method or
http://www.scribd.com/doc/51463621/Wood-Armer
110
Ill-conditioning and instabilities

The most common analysis errors are caused by structures that are not correctly conditioned
or stabilised.
Ill-conditioning commonly occurs when frames contain members of widely varying
stiffnesss. When a very stiff member is connected to a very flexible member and their
stiffness matrices are assembled into the structure stiffness matrix, some of the stiffness terms
of the flexible member can be completely lost due to their insignificance in comparison with
the stiffness terms of the stiff member. Hence, the flexible member is not completely
represented and ill-conditioning occurs.
SPACE GASS contains an algorithm which checks for possible ill-conditioning and displays
warning messages if appropriate. Generally, these messages appear well before illconditioning actually occurs. They do, however serve to highlight structures which are close
to being ill-conditioned. If after the analysis, the sum of the reactions equals the sum of the
applied loads then it can be assumed that the frame is well conditioned.
Instabilities occur when one or more nodes are free to translate or rotate without resistance
from the frame. Sometimes unstable structures are very easy to detect, such as when restraints
have not been applied or when an obvious collapse mechanism is possible.
Instabilities are often very subtle and difficult to isolate. For example, if an unrestrained node
has a pinned connection to each of its connecting members then it would be free to rotate and
an instability would result. This type of instability can be hard to detect because it only affects
one node in the structure. True trusses must therefore have every rotational degree of freedom
restrained.
Sometimes highly ill-conditioned frames can also be
interpreted as being unstable by the program.
Another common type of instability occurs when a group of members connected end-to-end
in a straight line are free to rotate about their longitudinal axis. The instability occurs because
during the analysis the program is unable to determine the amount of rotation of the
intermediate nodes.
Some instabilities cannot be detected by a static analysis, and you should therefore be wary
of results that contain very large deflections or deflections that occur in the wrong
direction. However most instabilities can be detected by a buckling analysis and are
identified by very low buckling load factors. If you get buckling load factors that are below
the minimum allowable value (eg. shown as "<0.001" when the minimum allowable value
is 0.001), this could indicate an instability problem rather than a buckling problem. It is
even more likely to be an instability problem if the low buckling load factors occur in every
load case.
If the model contains instabilities, the buckling analysis may, in some cases, give invalid
results. In the absence of instability or buckling messages from the static analysis, you
should always check the deflections to see if they are excessive or not. Excessive deflections
are sometimes the only indicator of instabilities.
There are no hard and fast rules to follow in the detection of conditioning and stability
problems, however if the structure is clearly drawn and examined, the problem usually
becomes evident to any moderately experienced user.
111
SPACE GASS is now able to automatically rectify some instabilities caused by nodes that are
free to rotate or translate in one or more directions without resistance from interconnecting
members, restraints or constraints. For more information, refer to "Stabilize unrestrained
nodes" in Running a static analysis.
112
Project Data
Project data
This chapter describes in detail each type of data that can be included in the analysis model.
This chapter does not include design data (see also "Steel member design", "Steel
connection design" and "Concrete column design").
See also Input methods.
See also Output.
See also Print graphics.
113
Units
SPACE GASS can handle a variety of different unit sets. The units do not need to be
consistent or even belong to the same system (ie. you can mix units from Metric and
Imperial). You can quickly select standard Imperial or Metric by clicking the "Imperial" or
"Metric" buttons and then make further individual changes as required.
If the "Convert the current job for any unit changes" box is checked then all of the data in the
current job will be converted in accordance with the units changes you made. If the box is not
checked then the units will change but none of the job data will be converted.
If the "Save the above units as the default for new jobs" box is checked then SPACE GASS
will use the selected units as the default every time you start a new job in the future.
If you are entering data and are not sure what the correct units are for that particular
type of data, you should either (a) select the datasheet (from the datasheets button on the top
toolbar) for the particular type of data you are entering and observe the units displayed at the
bottom-right of the datasheet or, (b) produce an output report and observe the units displayed
next to each section heading.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Before accepting any output from SPACE GASS, please check that all of the input and
output data conforms to the units you have selected. You can do this most conveniently by
producing a full output report and observing the units that are shown next to the heading
in each section of the report.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
If you change units for any or all data types after having input some data and you want the
data to be converted, then you must ensure that the option to "Convert the current job for
any unit changes" is checked. Otherwise the data will not be converted automatically.
114
Project Data
See also The structure menu.

See also Initiator.
115
Job details and attachments

This tool allows you to specify headings for your job and attach other files that you want to
embed and save with the job.
Headings
Project heading
Allows you to describe the project.
Job heading
Allows you to describe the job.
Designer
Identifies you as the designer.
Notes
Allows you to describe the job in more detail.
Attachments
You can attach external documents, drawings, spreadsheets and other files to your job that are
then saved and embedded into the main <job>.SG job file. They can be added, opened or
extracted using the form shown below.
116
Project Data
See also The structure menu.

See also Headings text.
117
Node data
Nodes are used to define the geometry of the structure in 3D space, and to mark the start and
end points of members in the model.
There are six possible displacements (degrees of freedom) per node in a 3D frame. They are
translation along, and rotation about, X,Y, Z.
Node
The node numbering order is of no consequence and successive node numbers do not have to
be sequential. For example, a straight beam with five nodes could just as easily be numbered
24,8,2,13,99 as 1,2,3,4,5. It is possible to leave gaps in the numbering sequence to allow for
nodes which might be inserted later.
While the node numbering sequence doesnt effect the results it is easier to interpret
the results of an analysis if a logical numbering sequence has been used.
You can renumber nodes at any stage by using the graphics renumbering facility (see
also Renumber).
X, Y and Z coordinates
Global coordinates of the node that may be positive or negative.
Dummy nodes
These are nodes that are not connected to any members. They are useful as direction nodes or
reference points.
See also Node restraints.
See also Master-slave constraints.
See also Members.
See also Nodes text.
See also Datasheet Input.
See also Node properties.
See also Draw.
118
Project Data
Member data
Members represent the actual beams, columns, ties, struts, cables, braces, etc. in the real
structure. They must be prismatic and must be connected to a node at each end.
Member
The member numbering order affects the analysis frontwidth, however this is of no
consequence if the wavefront optimiser is used. The graphical renumbering tool also means
that the initial member numbering order is unimportant because it can be easily changed at
any time. Successive member numbers do not have to be sequential.
Type
Choices are:
Normal,
Tension-only,
Compression-only,
Cable.
While in tension, tension-only members act identically to normal members with axial,
flexural, torsional and shear capacity. However, if they go into compression then they are
automatically disabled and act as if they have been removed from the model. Members such
as tension bracing and slender ties fall into this category.
Slender members that rely on axial tension to resist lateral loads applied to them
should be modelled as cables rather than as tension-only members!
While in compression, compression-only members act identically to normal members with
axial, flexural, torsional and shear capacity. However, if they go into tension then they are
automatically disabled and act as if they have been removed from the model. This type of
member is useful in situations such as where a support member resists download loads by
bearing on a footing but is unable to resist any uplift.
In both tension-only and compression-only cases, the program does an initial analysis and
then scans for tension-only members that have gone into compression, and compression-only
members that have gone into tension. If any of these are found they are disabled and the
structure is re-analysed. This process continues until all tension-only members are in tension
and all compression-only members are in compression. Note that disabled members are
sometimes re-enabled if their axial force reverses sign during the iteration process.
During a dynamic analysis, tension-only and compression-only members are treated

as normal members that can take tension and compression.
119
See also Tension-only and compression-only effects.

Cable members use axial tension only to resist lateral loads. They have no flexural, torsional
or shear capacity, and so to avoid instabilities you must restrain all rotational degrees of
freedom for nodes connected to cable members which are not rotationally fixed to other
members. Cable end fixities of FFFFFF, FFFFFR, FFFFRR, FFFRRR all give the same
results.
Cables that arent laterally loaded are treated as tension-only members which become
disabled if they go into compression. Laterally loaded cables sag instead of taking
compression.
Cable members cannot be included in a dynamic analysis.

See also Cable members.
Cable length
If the member type is "Cable" then an unstrained cable length can be specified to allow for
cable sag when the cable length is different to the chord length (as follows). A zero cable
length indicates that the unstrained cable length is equal to the chord length.
Chord length
The chord length is the straight line distance between the member ends Note that a members
chord length may not be equal to the distance between its end nodes if offsets exist for that
member.
Using a direction angle, node or axis
If a direction angle, node or axis is defined then the member is rolled about its longitudinal xaxis by the direction angle or, if a direction node or axis is defined, by an amount such that
the local y-axis is aligned with the direction node or axis as shown below.
Note that the three member orientation members are mutually exclusive. Hence, setting one of
them to a desired value causes the other two to be disabled.
Member Local Axes
120
Project Data
Direction angle
The direction angle (degrees), also called the skew angle, allows you to roll the member (with
its local axes) about its longitudinal axis. It is normally set to zero so that the member local
y-axis lies in a vertical plane.
Member Direction Angle
Direction node
Selecting a direction node aligns the local xy-plane with the nominated node.
A direction node can be a normal node or a dummy node (one which is not connected to any
members).
Direction Node
Direction axis
Choices are:
X axis,
Y axis,
Z axis,
-X axis,
-Y axis,
121

-Z axis,
N/A.
Selecting a direction axis aligns the local xy-plane with the nominated axis (eg. -Z axis
selected in the diagram as follows).
Direction Axis
Node A and B
The two end nodes connected to each member are referred to as node A and node B. Node A
is considered to be at the start of the member and any external loads applied to the member
are located by their distance from node A.
Node A cannot be equal to node B, however there are no restrictions relating to node A being
numerically bigger than node B or vice-versa.
End fixity
A member may be released or fixed to its end nodes with varying degrees of fixity. Member
end fixity is referenced by the local axes system and there are six possible components at each
end which may be fixed or released. These components are specified by a six character code
corresponding to translational fixity along x, y and z and rotational fixity about x, y and z
respectively.
The letter "F" represents fixed and "R" represents released. Thus, as an example, a pin ended
truss member with no rotational end fixity in a 3D frame could be modelled using a fixity of
"FFFFRR" at each end (or FFFRRR if the torsions are also released), while a pin ended truss
member in a 2D frame could have fixities of "FFFFFR". Members with fully fixed ends
would have fixities of "FFFFFF".
You can also specify a spring stiffness, allowing you to model a semi-rigid joint. The letter
"S" represents a spring stiffness, applicable to rotation about the local y or z axes of the
member. If you specify a spring stiffness in the fixity code you will also need to enter a
corresponding stiffness in the y/z stiffness fields.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Member end fixities should not be confused with node restraints. Member end fixities
specify how members are connected to their end nodes, while node restraints specify how
nodes are connected to the footings or other supports. Note that completely rigid frame
members should have member end fixities of "FFFFFF" regardless of whether the frame
has pin based supports or not.
122
Project Data
Section
The section property number references a particular member cross section from the section
property data. Thus, members with identical section properties would have the same section
property numbers.
The current section property for the members selected is displayed in this field. If no section
property has been chosen, or if more than one section property applies to the selection, this
field will be blank. The source is displayed along with an indication of whether the section
has been flipped and what type of angle section was chosen (if appropriate).
You can change the section property by entering another section property number. If this
number corresponds with a section which has already been defined, the corresponding
properties will be displayed. All of the members selected will have this property applied to
them.
Material
The material property number references a particular material from the material property data.
Thus, members with identical materials would have the same material property numbers.
For full details of the forces and moments in members, refer to "Sign conventions".
See also Section properties.
See also Material properties.
See also Member offsets.
See also Members text.
See also Member properties.
See also Draw.
123
Plate data
A mesh of plate elements can be used to represent walls, slabs, plates, etc. in the real
structure. Plate elements can be triangular or quadrilateral with a node at each vertex. They
can be connected at their nodes to other non-plate elements such as beams, columns, cables,
etc.
Plate
The plate numbering order affects the analysis frontwidth, however this is of no consequence
if the wavefront optimiser is used. The graphical renumbering tool also means that the initial
plate numbering order is unimportant because it can be easily changed at any time. Successive
plate numbers do not have to be sequential.
Type
Each plate can be specified as thick (using Mindlin plate theory Ref. 19,20,21) or thin
(using Kirchoff plate theory Ref. 22,23). Transverse shear is not considered for Kirchoff
plate theory and for the vast majority of applications in structural engineering we would
recommend that Mindlin plate theory be used.
Direction angle, node, axis
By default, a plates local axes are such that x and y are in the plane of the plate and z is
normal to the plate. The x-axis is aligned with a line joining nodes A and B and the y-axis is
orthogonal with respect to x and z. The direction fields allow you to rotate the x and y axes
about the plates normal z axis. The purpose for this is to control the axes for which the output
results apply.
Plate Axes
It is recommended that for the plate elements in a surface, you align all their in-plane axes in
the same direction rather than having them orientated randomly. For circular plates, you may
elect to have all of the axes aligned in the same direction or, alternatively, you could align
them radially or tangentially depending on which type of output you require.
124
Project Data
If the plate axes are orientated randomly then the results will be for different axis directions
and they will be difficult to compare. It will also be difficult to produce meaningful contour
diagrams if the plate axes are not aligned.
The Align plate axes tool can be used to quickly align the axes for a selection of plate
elements. It will also optionally reverse the normal z-axis of some plate elements if they are
not all pointing in the same direction. You can also use the Reverse plate direction tool as an
alternative way of reversing the normal z-axis.
Direction Angle
Direction Node
125
Direction Axis
Actual thickness
This is the actual thickness of the plate and is used to calculate its self weight and self-mass
if they have been specified.
The thickness should be limited to around 15% of the in-plane plate dimensions for Mindlin
plates and around 5% for Kirchoff plates. The plate dimensions relate to the overall plate size
and not the element size.
Membrane thickness
This is used to calculate the membrane stiffness of the plate and is usually the same as the
actual thickness. The membrane stiffness terms are the ones that affect Fx, Fy and Fxy as
shown below.
126
Project Data
Bending thickness
This is used to calculate the bending stiffness of the plate and is usually the same as the actual
thickness. The moment of inertia per unit length of the plate is taken as Tb3/12, where Tb is
the bending thickness. The bending stiffness terms are the ones that affect Mx, My and Mxy
as shown below.
When calculating the design moments for reinforced concrete slabs, the twisting
moment Mxy must be combined with the normal bending moments Mx and My. The WoodArmer method is commonly used for this and is explained in "Sign conventions".
Shear thickness
This is used to calculate the transverse shear stiffness of the plate and is only used for Mindlin
(thick) plate theory. For a uniform plate the shear thickness should be approximately Ta*(5/6)
to be consistent with Mindlin thick plate theory, where Ta is the actual plate thickness. The
transverse shear stiffness terms are the ones that affect Vxz and Vyz as shown below.
127
Offset
Plates can be offset along their normal z-axis. This may be required to line them up with other
interconnecting elements such as other plates or members.
Material
Material property number references a particular material from the material property data.
Thus, plates with identical materials would have the same material property numbers.
For an accurate analysis, plates must be properly meshed into elements that are a
suitable size, shape and pattern. For more information, refer to the Mesh tool.
For full details of the forces, moments and stresses in plates, refer to "Sign
conventions".

See also Plates text.
See also Plate properties.
See also Draw.
128
Project Data
Node restraint data
Node restraints are used to model the structures supports. They are sometimes referred to as
boundary conditions.
Unrestrained nodes are generally free to move along or about any axis direction, however
practical structures must be restrained to a footing in some way, otherwise instabilities would
occur.
Nodes can be restrained about one or all of their six degrees of freedom and such a restraint
may take the form of a fixed restraint or a flexible restraint. If a degree of freedom is given a
flexible restraint then a spring stiffness must also be input. Fixing a degree of freedom has the
effect of immobilizing that node movement, while specifying a flexible restraint causes the
node movement to be a function of the spring stiffness.
Node restraints are specified by a six character code corresponding to restraints along X, Y
and Z and about X, Y and Z respectively. "F" represents fixed, "R" represents released and
"S" represents spring (or flexible). "D" restraints are no longer supported and "F" should be
used instead.
For example, a pin-based support that prevents all translations but allows the node to rotate
about X, Y or Z would have a restraint code of FFFRRR. Alternatively, a roller support that
allows the node to move in the X direction only and rotate about X, Y or Z would have a
restraint code of RFFRRR. A fully built-in (encastre) support would have a restraint code of
FFFFFF. A restraint that prevents movement in the Z direction while allowing all other
movements and rotations would have a restraint code of RRFRRR.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Member end fixities should not be confused with node restraints. Member end fixities
specify how members are connected to their end nodes, while node restraints specify how
nodes are connected to the footings or other supports. Note that completely rigid frame
members should have member end fixities of "FFFFFF" regardless of whether the frame
has pin based supports or not.
General restraint
The general restraint facility allows you to apply a restraint to all otherwise unrestrained
nodes.
For example, if you have a frame with two pin based supports and you want to prevent all
translations in the Z direction for all of its other nodes, you could apply restraints of FFFRRR
to the two support nodes and specify a general restraint of RRFRRR.
129

In order to input a general restraint, you simply apply the desired restraint to any unrestrained
node and then tick the "General" box (or select "Yes" in the General Restraint column if you
are using a datasheet).
Using a general restraint saves data entry time and reduces the quantity of printed output.
Note that output reports only show the general restraint code on one node, even though the
analysis has assumed that it applies to all unrestrained nodes.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The general restraint facility should be used with great care and only if you are absolutely
sure of the effect it has on your model! If you apply a general restraint early in the
development of your model and then forget that it exists at some later stage when it is no
longer appropriate, you could be over-restraining your model. This could happen if nodes
are added that shouldnt get the general restraint. It could also happen if you initially use a
general restraint to prevent all out-of-plane movements in a 2D frame for example and then
extend the frame to 3D and forget to remove the general restraint.
X, Y and Z axial stiffnesses
Axial spring stiffness for degrees of freedom restrained with "S". Axial spring stiffnesses
must always be greater than zero.
When modelling the elastic properties of soil as a spring support, the spring stiffness is based
on the modulus of subgrade reaction of the soil. This is a notoriously difficult parameter to get
an accurate figure for. The following typical values of the modulus of subgrade reaction (to be
used as a guide) are extracted from J. E. Bowles, "Foundation analysis and design", McGraw
Hill 4th Edition, 1988.
Soil Type
Loose sand:
Medium dense sand:
Dense sand:
Clayey medium dense sand:
Silty medium dense sand:
Clayey soil with qu < 200 kPa:
Clayey soil with qu in range 200 to 400 kPa:
Clayey soil with qu > 800 kPa:
Modulus of Subgrade Reaction
4800 - 16000 kN/m3

9600 80000 kN/m3
64000 128000 kN/m3
32000 80000 kN/m3
24000 48000 kN/m3
12000 24000 kN/m3
24000 48000 kN/m3
> 48000 kN/m3
The spring stiffness to be input into SPACE GASS is simply equal to the modulus of
subgrade reaction multiplied by the area of the footing that the spring is modelling. For
example, if you have a 600mm wide strip footing supported on soil with a modulus of
subgrade reaction of 80000 kN/m3 and the soil is modelled as springs spaced 500mm apart,
the axial stiffness of each spring would be 80000 x 0.600 x 0.500 = 24000 kN/m. Units for the
spring stiffness are shown in the headings of the node restraints datasheet.
X, Y and Z rotational stiffnesses
Rotational spring stiffness spring stiffnesses for degrees of freedom restrained with "S".
Rotational spring stiffnesses must always be greater than zero.
Important note about restraining 2D frames
It is common practice amongst some engineers to restrain all out-of-plane movements in 2D
frames. While this is generally appropriate for static analyses (provided there are no out-ofplane loads), it may not be appropriate for buckling and dynamic frequency analyses. This is
because the frame may buckle or vibrate in an out-of-plane direction even though there are no
130
Project Data
loads in that direction. Of course, nodes that are braced in the out-of-plane direction should be
restrained in that direction, however nodes that can move out-of-plane in the real structure
should not be restrained in that direction in the model. Failure to do this could affect the
buckling load factors, effective lengths and dynamic natural frequencies and mode shapes,
and could result in unsafe designs.
For example, if a 2D frame rafter is sub-divided, the intermediate nodes should not be
restrained in the out-of-plane direction unless they are braced in that direction in the real
structure. Restraining them would prevent any out-of-plane buckling or vibration modes that
could occur if the rafter member hadnt been sub-divided.
Another example is a pin support for a 2D XY-plane frame column base which could be
modelled with the standard 2D pin base restraint code of FFFFFR, however this would
prevent rotations about the global X-axis. In reality, a column pin support would probably
allow rotations about both horizontal axes and hence a restraint code of FFFRFR would be
more appropriate. Restraining the rotation about the X-axis would affect the out-of-plane
buckling and vibration modes of the column and could result in incorrect results.
The general rule to follow is that if a node is free to move or rotate in the real structure then it
should not be restrained in that direction in the model. Be careful with the general restraint, as
it is applied to all nodes that dont have their own restraint, and for some nodes this may not
be appropriate.
If you have applied a general restraint and require some nodes to not have a restraint
at all, you can prevent them from getting the general restraint by restraining them with a code
of RRRRRR.
See also Node restraints text.
See also View node / member / plate properties.
131
Section property data

You can display the section property data for a member by clicking the
Member Properties form.
button in the
Section properties must be input for each type of member cross section in the model. Each
section property describes the geometric properties of a single cross section relative to the
local member axes.
Section
There are two fields, one for the section property number and the other for the section name.
Section property numbers do not have to be sequential or in any particular order. The section
property name is used as a description for the section, and as a reference for sections which
have been read from a library.
Source
This indicates the source of the section. There are four different sources:
Manual:
Library:
Shp Bldr:
Std Shps:
User defined properties.

A shape taken from a library.
The source will be the library name (eg. AUST300).
Section defined in the Shape Builder.
Section defined in Standard Shapes.
See also Standard sections libraries.

See also Shape builder.
If you create a section in the shape builder by importing it from the library, and you
dont make any changes to it, the source will be the name of the library the section was taken
from. However, you can still edit the shape via the shape builder. You can also edit other
library sections in the shape builder, even if the section wasnt input via the shape builder.
Flipped
"YES" if the section has been flipped (see also Flipping a section).
Angle Type
Indicates the angle configuration.
Choices are:
132
Single,
Project Data
Short-Short,
Long-Long,
Starred.
See also Angle sections.
Area of section
Cross sectional area of the section.
Torsion constant
Torsional stiffness of the cross section. Calculating the torsion constant for arbitrary cross
sections can be quite complex, particularly if the cross section changes shape (warps) under
torsion. For example, a circular tube has a relatively high torsion constant because it doesnt
warp under torsion. However, if a saw cut is made through the tube wall the torsion constant
is drastically reduced because the cross section can change shape under very small torsion
loads. Thus two shapes with very similar geometric properties can have substantially different
torsion constants.
The torsion constant for shapes which cannot warp is equal to the polar moment of
inertia.
The torsion constants for various common shapes can be calculated using the following
formulae.
Solid circle:
Circular tube:
Solid square:
Solid rectangle:
where A & B are length and breadth (or vice-versa)
and A>B
I, H, T, L and angle J is equal to the sum of the torsion constants of the
sections: composite sections which constitute the total
cross-section.
Y and Z moments of inertia
Principal moments of inertia of the cross section.
Y and Z shear areas
Principal shear areas of the cross section, where a value of zero represents an "Infinite" shear
area.
The shear area is the effective cross sectional area which is used in the calculation of shear
deformations. In general, the shear area depends upon the shearing stress distribution, which
in turn depends upon the shape of the cross section.
133
For rolled steel sections, the major axis shear area is approximately equal to the area of the
web(s). For rectangular cross sections, the shear area is equal to A/1.2, where A is the gross
area. Values for other shapes are given in standard textbooks on strength of materials.
For most cross sections and materials, the shear deformations are negligible
compared to the flexural deformations. Therefore, the shear area can often be specified as
infinite.
Principal angle
Angle (degrees) from principal axes to geometric axes in anti-clockwise direction. For
example, the principal angle is positive for single angle sections that have their horizontal leg
pointing to the left.
Section mark
Member mark used in connection detail drawings, marking plans, etc.
Member cross sections are always shown as if you are looking along the member from
the node B end to the node A end.
See also Section properties text.
See also View rendered model.
134
Project Data
Standard section libraries

Standard sections libraries are available for most countries and they include all I sections, H
sections, T sections, channels, angles, square tubes, rectangular tubes and circular tubes.
See also Standard library.
135
Shape builder
You can open the shape builder by clicking the
button in the Member Properties form of
either the renderer or the traditional graphics window.
The shape builder allows you to modify library shapes, combine library, standard and custom
shapes into built-up sections, and create standard and custom shapes. Standard shapes are
easily created by clicking on one of the standard shapes buttons and entering the desired
dimensions. For a custom shape, you are required to enter three or more coordinates and the
shape builder will display the shape and calculate the section properties.
Inputting shapes
To input a shape, you can:
Import it from a sections library by clicking the library button
Click the custom shape button

perimeter of a shape.
Click the line shape button

and then enter a set of coordinates to define a shape
formed by a line of a user defined thickness.
136
and then enter a set of coordinates to define the
Project Data
Click one of the standard shape buttons
and then enter its dimensions.

Any shape (other than a hollow shape) can be converted to a negative shape (void) by ticking
the "Negative shape (hole)" option. This makes it very easy to model voids in your cross
section.
Editing and combining shapes

You can input up to 10 shapes from any of the above sources and combine them to form your
desired cross section.
Each shape can be translated, mirrored, rotated or transposed using the shape editing buttons
shown below.
Shapes can also be dragged and snapped together via their edge and corner reference points as
shown below.
137
When dragging shapes, the behaviour can be controlled using the grid and snap settings along
the bottom of the shape builder as shown below.
Shapes can be copied by dragging while holding down the Ctrl key.
138
Project Data
Multiple shapes can be selected by clicking them while holding down the Shift key. You can
then use the alignment buttons
at the top of the shape
builder to align the selected shapes along the top, bottom, center, left or right. Alternatively,
you can stack shapes vertically or horizontally using the stack alignment buttons
139
Dimensions
Dimensions can be added to shapes by clicking the dimensions button
140
Project Data
Design properties
SPACE GASS can now do a steel member design or check using sections that haven't been
imported from a library, however you must specify their steel design properties. You can do
this via the shape builder "Design Properties" button. Generally speaking, you would only use
the "Design Properties" button when are you don't want to save the section to a library
because the saving to library process also includes inputting the steel design properties.
Saving sections
You can save your section to a custom library for later recall into any other jobs by clicking
the "Save to Library" button
and then filling out the form that appears below.
141
If a custom section library doesnt yet exist or if you wish to create a new custom library,
click the
button at the right of the "Library" field and then fill out the custom librarys
details. Similarly, if the library doesnt yet contain any groups or if you wish to create a new
group within a custom library, click the
then fill out the groups details.
button at the right of the "Group" field and
The SPACE GASS section libraries can now contain built-up sections made from
whatever shapes you can build in the shape builder, including voids. Built-up or non-standard
sections cannot be used in the design/check modules, however they can be recalled into any
other jobs and used in a static, dynamic or buckling analysis.
The shape builder always shows the cross section as if you are looking along the
member from node A towards node B. This is the reverse of how it was in SPACE GASS 10
and earlier versions.
The section properties displayed in the panel on the right side of the shape builder
apply to the whole cross section (ie. the sum of the composite shapes in the display window).
See also View rendered model.
142
Project Data
Flipping a section
If the properties of a section have been read from a library, SPACE GASS then asks if the
section has been flipped. This simply causes the section to have its major and minor section
properties transposed and allows the section to be used in the frame with its major axis
parallel to the local y-axis instead of the z-axis. In most cases, the major axis of a member is
parallel to its local z-axis (see also Coordinate systems).
When a section is flipped, the orientation of the local y and z axes are not affected. This
information is not required for sections with equal major and minor axis section properties.
Flipped section orientation
You can see from the diagram above that when the section is flipped, the y and z axes remain
unchanged. This method of flipping a section is different to applying a 90 direction angle to
a member. A direction angle rotates the local axes together with the section, while the above
method simply transposes the section properties. Note that the transposed properties apply to
every member which references the flipped section property number, while a direction angle
rotation affects only the member(s) to which it is applied.
143
Column and beam Tee sections

Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are therefore assumed to be lying on
their side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping). They are
orientated at right angles to normal beam Tees which have the major axis parallel to the
flange.
Tee section orientation
144
Project Data
Angle sections
For angle sections, you can specify single or double angle sections.
Choices are:
Single angle,
Double angle with short legs connected,
Double angle with long legs connected,
Double angle starred (equal angles only).
Angle section orientation
The diagrams above show the orientation of a single angle section and the available double
angle sections. Note that the z-axis is the major axis in all cases.
For double equal angles, the long leg is assumed to be the vertical leg in the
diagrams above. Note that in SPACE GASS 10 and earlier, double equal angle
sections with long legs connected were adjusted internally and treated as though
their short legs were connected. This adjustment was removed in SPACE GASS 11
and later versions.
145
Material property data

You can display the material property data for a member by clicking the
button in the
Member Properties form. The material property data for a plate is always shown in the Plate
Properties form.
Material properties must be input for each type of member or plate material in the model.
Each material property describes the properties of a single isotropic material.
Material
There are two fields, one for the material property number and the other for the material
name. Material property numbers do not have to be sequential or in any particular order. The
material name is used as a description for the material, and as a reference for materials which
have been read from a library.
E
Value of Youngs Modulus for the material.
Poissons
Value of Poissons Ratio for the material.
Mass Dens
Mass density, required only for self weight calculations.
Temp Coeff
The coefficient of thermal expansion, required only for thermal loads. You must ensure that
this is appropriate for the temperature units you have selected (see also Units).
146
Project Data
Fc
Characteristic concrete strength, required only for concrete materials. Is used only in the
SPACE GASS concrete design modules.
See also Material properties text.
147
Master-slave constraint data

You can display the master-slave constraints data for a node by clicking the
Node Properties form.
button in the
Master-slave constraints allow you to connect nodes together with imaginary links so that
they translate and/or rotate together. The degree of constraint can be varied so that any or all
of the six degrees of freedom of a node can be linked to another node. For example, it is
possible to connect two nodes together with a 3D rigid link, a 2D rigid link, a 2D translational
link, a 2D rotational link, a 1D translational link, a 1D rotational link or any other
combination of the six degrees of freedom.
A node which is linked to another node is termed a "slave node" and the node to which
it is linked is termed its "master node". A master node can have many slave nodes, however a
slave node can have only one master node. A typical frame can have many slave nodes and
many master nodes. A master node cannot be the slave of another master node. A slave node
constrained DOF cannot be a support (restraint).
A constraint link between a slave node and its master node not only affects the movements of
the slave but also the master.
Node
Slave node to be constrained.
Master node
The node to which the slave node is to be constrained. You can select a master node by
clicking the "Select" button and then choosing a node.
Constraint code
Master-slave constraints are controlled by a six character constraint code which specifies the
exact constraint relationship between a slave node and its master. The six characters of the
constraint code correspond to translational constraint along X, Y and Z and rotational
constraint about X, Y and Z respectively. "F" represents fixed (constrained) and "R"
represents released (unconstrained).
In order to illustrate how the constraint code works, we will consider some typical examples
of constraints in the global XY plane. Please note that the following examples apply equally
to the XZ and YZ planes also.
148
Project Data
When considering the XY plane, the only significant characters in the constraint code are the
first, second and sixth. These correspond to translation along X and Y, and rotation about Z.
When considering the XZ plane, only the first, third and fifth characters apply, and when
considering the YZ plane, only the second, third and fourth characters apply.
If a slave node has a constraint code of "RFxxxR" (where xxx could be any combination of
Fs and Rs) then its Y-axis translation will be the same as its master node. Note that the Xaxis translation and the Z-axis rotation of the slave node will be completely independent and
in no way affected by its master node. This can be represented by the simple constraint
equation Dys = Dym, where Dys is the slave Y-axis translation and Dym is the master Y-axis
translation.
Similarly, if a slave node has a constraint code of "RRxxxF" then its Z-axis rotation will be
the same as its master node and the X-axis and Y-axis translations will be independent. The
constraint equation in this case is Rzs = Rzm, where Rzs is the slave Z-axis rotation and Rzm
is the master Z-axis rotation.
A slightly different situation occurs if both a translational degree of freedom and a rotational
degree of freedom are constrained. An example of this is a constraint code of "FFxxxF". In
this case, the constraint code effectively places a 2D imaginary rigid member between the
slave node and its master so that the translations of the slave node are a function of both the
translations and the rotation of the master node. The constraint equations in this case are
Dxs = Dxm-Ly*Rzm
Dys = Dym+Lx*Rzm
Rzs = Rzm
where Lx and Ly are the horizontal and vertical components of the distance between the slave
and master nodes.
Constraint movements
The following list shows some common constraint codes.

149
FRRRRR
RFRRRR
RRFRRR
RRRFRR
RRRRFR
RRRRRF
FFFRRR
RRRFFF
FFRRRF
FRFRFR
RFFFRR
FFFFFF
X translation
(Dxs=Dxm)
constrained
Y translation
(Dys=Dym)
constrained
Z translation
(Dzs=Dzm)
constrained
X rotation constrained (Rxs=Rxm)
Y rotation constrained (Rys=Rym)
Z rotation constrained (Rzs=Rzm)
X, Y and Z
(Dxs=Dxm)
translations
constrained
(Dys=Dym)
(Dzs=Dzm)
X, Y and Z rotations (Rxs=Rxm)
constrained
(Rys=Rym)
(Rzs=Rzm)
Rigid link in XY
(Dxs=Dxm-Ly*Rzm)
plane
(Dys=Dym+Lx*Rzm)
(Rzs=Rzm)
Rigid link in XZ plane (Dzs=Dzm-Lx*Rym)
(Dxs=Dxm+Lz*Rym)
(Rys=Rym)
Rigid link in YZ plane (Dys=Dym-Lz*Rxm)
(Dzs=Dzm+Ly*Rxm)
(Rxs=Rxm)
Rigid link in all
(Dxs=Dxm-Ly*Rzm+Lz*Rym)
planes
(Dys=Dym+Lx*Rzm-Lz*Rxm)
(Dzs=Dzm-Lx*Rym+Ly*Rxm)
(Rxs=Rxm)
(Rys=Rym)
(Rzs=Rzm)
Any further combinations of the six character constraint code can also be specified.
The following diagrams show the effect that each of the XY plane constraints have. The
effects shown apply equally to the XZ and YZ planes also. Note that constraint codes for any
of the three planes can be combined together as can be seen in the examples above.
150
Project Data
Typical constraint links
Master-slave constraints can be used to great advantage in many structures. They are
particularly useful for modelling floor slabs in three dimensional frames. A typical floor slab
may displace and rotate in plan as a unit but its plan dimensions do not change due to its large
in-plane rigidity. This could be modelled in SPACE GASS by using one of the perimeter
nodes in a typical floor slab as the master node for that floor and specifying all of the other
perimeter nodes in that floor to be slaves of the master node in the in-plane (XZ plane)
directions using a constraint code of "FRFRFR". Thus all nodes in the floor would move as a
unit in the in-plane (horizontal plane in this case) directions. They would still, however be
free to move independently in the out-of-plane (vertical) direction.
151
Rigid diaphragm modelled with constraints
Another example is the case of wind bracing or a scissor lift where two continuous members
cross each other and are connected to each other with a bolt or pin. The pin transfers shear
from one member to the other but not moment so that the members are free to rotate about the
pin independently.
Scissor lift modelled with constraints
This situation is very difficult to model in a frame analysis program unless a constraint
facility is available. Using a master-slave constraint, it is a simple matter to locate two nodes
on the same point where the two members cross. One of the members would be connected to
152
Project Data
the first node and the other member would be connected to the second node. Assuming that
the frame was in the XY plane, a constraint code of "FFRRRR" could then be used to force
the two nodes to translate together but rotate independently.
A third example of a common master-slave constraints application is in the modelling of a
shear wall. A column of nodes consisting of one master and the rest slaves could be used to
form the wall itself. Any other nodes connected directly to the wall could also be slaves of the
master. Assuming that the wall was in the XY plane, a constraint code of "FFRRRF" could be
used.
Another situation which is difficult to model without using a master-slave constraint occurs
when two members of different depths are connected together end-to-end such that their
centrelines do not line up. In such cases a node could be placed at the end of each member
and then a master-slave constraint could be used to join the two nodes together with a rigid
link.
In some situations, short stiff members could be used as an alternative to constraint links,
however they would be susceptible to ill-conditioning problems, particularly if they were very
stiff in comparison to other members in the structure.
Master-slave constraints do not suffer from ill-conditioning problems, regardless of

how short the links are.
See also Master-slave constraints text.
153
Member offset data

You can display the offsets data for a member by clicking the
Properties form.
Choices are:
button in the Member
Local,
Global.
It is possible to specify a rigid member segment that doesnt deform under bending at each
end of a member. These rigid segments have infinite stiffness for bending, shear and axial
deformations. Member offsets are very useful for modelling the very stiff area at the
interconnection of members (especially stiff members such as large steel members or concrete
members).
Member offsets
For example, the rectangular reinforced concrete frame shown above on the left could be
modelled quite accurately with SPACE GASS using a model similar to the one shown on the
right. Each member in the model has short member offsets at each end where intersecting
members overlap.
Member offsets are also very useful in situations where the centrelines of connected members
do not intersect at a node. For example, the diagonal brace members of a plane truss may
intersect below the top chord centreline. Member offsets could be used to allow for this.
Member offsets could also be used to model the centreline mismatch when members of
different depths are connected end-to-end with "top-of-steel" alignment.
154
Project Data
The ends of a member with "local" offsets are offset relative to an axis connecting the
end nodes of the member rather than being relative to the axis of the member in its final
position.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Be careful when sub-dividing members that have local offsets because the direction of the
axis that the offsets are relative to will change when any intermediate nodes are added.
See also Member offset text.
155
Node load data
Concentrated forces and moments may be applied to any node along or about the global X, Y
and Z axis directions. If a load is applied to a restrained degree of freedom then that load is
simply added to the final reaction.
Node loads may be applied in any number of load cases and may be combined with other load
types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain node loads.
Node
Node to be loaded.
X, Y and Z forces
Node forces (global axes).
X, Y and Z moments
Node moments (global axes).
See also Node loads text.
See also Node loads.
See also View diagrams.
156
Project Data
Prescribed node displacement data
Prescribed node displacements allow you to specify known displacements and/or rotations to
nodes. They can be very useful for situations where a frame deflects by a fixed and known
amount such as settlement of a support for example.
Prescribed displacements may only be applied to restrained (fixed or deleted) degrees

of freedom, otherwise they are ignored.
Prescribed node displacements may be applied in any number of load cases and may be
combined with other load types within the same load case. It is important to note that like all
other load types, prescribed node displacements do not have any effect on load cases other
than the ones in which they are input.
Case
Load case to contain prescribed displacements.
Node
Node to be displaced.
X, Y and Z translations
Node translations (global axes).
X, Y and Z rotations
Node rotations (global axes).
See also Prescribed node displacements text.
See also Prescribed node displacements.
157
Member concentrated load data
Concentrated forces and moments may be applied to members in either the global or the local
axes systems. Such loads can act along or about any of the three axis directions and can be
located at any point along the member.
Member concentrated loads may be applied in any number of load cases and may be
combined with other load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain concentrated member loads.
Member
Member to be loaded.
Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple concentrated loads on a member in the same load case.
Each load is given a sub load number (different to a load case number). For example five
concentrated loads applied to a member within the same load case would have sub load
numbers of 1,2,3,4 and 5 respectively. Unless there are multiple loads applied to a single
member within the same load case, the sub load number should be 1.
Axes
Axes system in which loads are referenced.
Choices are:
Local,
Global.
Units
Units system in which load positions are referenced.
Choices are:
Actual,
Percentage.
Position
The load position is defined as the distance from node A to the load. Depending on the "Units
system" selected, this distance may be expressed as an absolute length or as a percentage of
the member length. Thus, a member 600mm long with a load at midspan could have the load
position specified as 300mm or as 50%.
X, Y and Z forces
Member concentrated forces.
158
Project Data
X, Y and Z moments
Member concentrated moments.
See also Member concentrated loads text.
See also Member concentrated loads.
159
Member distributed force data
Member distributed forces can be input in the local or global axes systems and can act along
any of the three axis directions.
Distributed forces may start and finish at any point along the member length and may vary in
intensity from start to finish. Thus, it is possible to apply uniform, trapezoidal, or triangular
distributed loads.
Member distributed forces may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other
load types within the same load case.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
For "Local" or "Global Inclined" loads, the total load is equal to the load per unit length
multiplied by the actual distance between the load start and finish positions. For "Global
Projected" loads, the total load is equal to the load per unit length multiplied by the
projected distance between the load start and finish positions.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
For cable members, distributed forces must be uniform and extend over the entire length of
the cable. For "Global Inclined" UDLs applied to cable members, the total load is equal to
the load per unit length multiplied by the unstrained cable length (which may not be equal
to the distance between the cables end nodes). For "Global Projected" UDLs applied to
cable members, the total load is equal to the load per unit length multiplied by the projected
distance between the cables end nodes.
Case
Load case to contain distributed member forces.
Member
Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple distributed loads on a member in the same load case.
Each load is given a sub load number (different to a load case number). For example two
distributed loads applied to a member within the same load case would have sub load
numbers of 1 and 2 respectively. Unless there are multiple loads applied to a single member
within the same load case, the sub load number should be 1.
Axes
Axes system in which loads are referenced. There are two global axes systems which may be
used. When the axes are designated as "Global projected" the load acts over the projected
160
Project Data
length of the member, while a "Global inclined" load acts over the actual length of the
member.
Choices are:
Local,
Global projected,
Global inclined.
Units
Choices are:
Actual,
Percentage.
Start and finish positions

The load start and finish positions are taken relative to node A. Depending on the "Units
system" selected, this distance may be expressed as an absolute length or percentage of the
member length. Thus, a member 600mm long with a load that extends from the 150mm mark
to the end could have the load start position specified as 150mm or as 25%, and the load
finish position specified as 600mm or as 100%. The finish position must always be greater
than start.
X, Y and Z start and finish forces
Start and finish member distributed forces.
See also Member distributed forces text.
See also Member distributed forces.
161
Member distributed torsion data
Member distributed torsion loads are similar to member distributed forces except they may
only be applied about the local x-axis. The load intensity may be varied between the start and
finish positions. Member distributed torsions may be applied in any load case and may be
combined with other load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain distributed member torsions.
Member
Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple distributed torsions on a member in the same load case.
Each load is given a sub load number (different to a load case number). For example two
distributed torsions applied to a member within the same load case would have sub load
numbers of 1 and 2 respectively. Unless there are multiple loads applied to a single member
within the same load case, the sub load number should be 1.
Units
Choices are:
Actual,
Percentage.
Start and finish positions

The load start and finish positions are taken relative to node A. Depending on the "Units
system" selected, this distance may be expressed as an absolute length or percentage of the
member length. Thus, a member 600mm long with a load that extends from the 150mm mark
to the end could have the load start position specified as 150mm or as 25%, and the load
finish position specified as 600mm or as 100%. The finish position must always be greater
than start.
Start and finish torsion load
Start and finish member distributed torsion load.
162
Project Data
See also Member distributed torsions text.
See also Member distributed torsions.
163
Thermal load data
A thermal load can be applied to a member by specifying a temperature change, while a

thermal load can be applied to a plate in the form of a temperature change or a thermal
gradient across its thickness. Thermal loads act over the entire length of the members or area
of the plates to which they are applied.
Thermal loads may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other load types
within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain thermal loads.
Element
Member or plate to be loaded.
Thermal load
Uniform temperature change.
Thermal gradient (plates only)
Thermal gradient across plate thickness. A positive thermal gradient causes the top (positive
z-axis) face of the plate to expand and the bottom face to contract.
Unlike other load types, you can apply thermal loads to nonexistent members or plates without causing an analysis error. Such loads are simply ignored
during the analysis phase. For example, in order to apply a uniform 10 temperature change
to an entire structure with a highest member number of less than 100, you could simply
generate 10 thermal loads on members 1-100 without concerning yourself about possible
gaps in the member numbering sequence.
See also Thermal loads text.
See also Thermal loads.
164
Project Data
Member prestress data
A prestress can be applied to a member by specifying a tensile or compressive force. Prestress

loads act over the entire length of the members on which they are applied.
It is possible to model prestress loads with equivalent thermal loads and vice-versa, however
this is generally unnecessary because they can both be applied directly in SPACE GASS.
Prestress loads may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other load types
Note that the prestress load you apply to a member is not likely to be the final axial
force in the member at the end of the analysis (unless its ends are fixed in position or don't
move). This is because the axial force changes as the member stretches or compresses as its
end nodes move. If you wish to achieve a particular axial force at the end of the analysis then
a trial and error process is required. This involves setting an initial prestress force,
performing the analysis, checking the final axial force, adjusting the prestress and repeating
the process until the desired axial force is achieved. This is a common requirement in posttensioned concrete applications where the tendons are jacked to a known tension.
Case
Load case to contain prestress loads.
Member
Prestress force
The prestress force is positive for compression or negative for tension.
In some instances, you may wish to apply a prestress load to
a cable member instead of specifying a non-zero unstrained cable length. The prestress load
P that is equivalent to an unstrained cable length L is given by the equation:
165
where
D = chord length,
A = cross sectional area,
E = Youngs modulus of elasticity.
See also Member prestress loads text.

See also Member prestress loads.
166
Project Data
Plate pressure data
Pressure loads may be applied to plates in either the global or the local axes systems. Such
loads can act along or about any of the three axis directions and always extend over the entire
plate surface.
Plate pressure loads may be applied in any number of load cases and may be combined with
other load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain plate pressure loads.
Plate
Plate to be loaded.
Axes
Axes system in which loads are referenced.
Choices are:
Local,
Global.
X, Y and Z pressure
Plate pressure loads.
Plate pressure loads can be input graphically as explained in Plate pressure loads or, for
variable pressure loads such as hydrostatic or wind loads, the Varying plate pressure loads
tool can be used.
See also Plate pressure loads text.
See also Plate pressure loads.
See also Varying plate pressure loads.
167
Self weight data
Self weight loads are considered as forces and moments in a static analysis and as masses in a
dynamic analysis.
Self weight can be automatically generated by the program if an acceleration (such as gravity)
is specified. Acceleration may be specified along any of the three global axis directions. Note
that self weight will only be considered if non-zero mass densities are specified in the
material property data.
When self weight loads are used as masses in a dynamic analysis, the direction and magnitude
of the X, Y and Z accelerations are ignored. The process simply involves calculating the mass
of each member and then applying half of it as translational lumped masses to each of the
member end nodes in each of the unrestrained X, Y and Z global axis directions.
Self weight may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other load types
Case
Load case to contain self weight.
X, Y and Z acceleration
Acceleration applied to the entire structure. See Units for the appropriate acceleration units
that apply.
See also Self weight text.
See also Self weight.
168
Project Data
Combination load case data
All loads applied to a structure are always input via primary load cases. Further load cases can
be created by combining the various primary load cases into combination load cases.
Combination load cases can be combined into further combination load cases.
Combination case
Load case to be formed. Cannot be equal to a primary load case.
Case
Load case to be factored and combined into the combination. This can be a primary load case
or a combination load case.
Multiplying factor
The multiplying factor applied to the primary load case when it is combined.
Consider for example a structure that is to be analysed for the following combination load
cases 10, 11 and 12.
Load case 1:
Load case 2:
Load case 3:
Load case 4:
Load case 5:
Load case 20:
Load case 21:
Load case 22:
where
Self weight (SW)

Floor load (LL1)
Roof traffic (LL2)
Cladding (CL)
Wind load (WL)
1.25*DL + 1.50*LL
0.80*DL + 1.50*LL
0.80*DL + 1.00*WL,
DL = SW + CL
LL = LL1 + LL2
The desired combination load cases could then be made up as follows.

Load case 10 (DL):
1.00*Load case 1 + 1.00*Load case 4
169

Load case 11 (LL):
Load case 20:
Load case 21:
Load case 22:

Note that for a linear analysis, it is not necessary to analyse the combination load cases. They
can be calculated by simple linear superposition of the primary load case results during the
output phase. For a non-linear (2nd order) analysis however, the simple linear superposition
rules dont apply and combination load cases have to be fully analysed and treated in the same
way as primary load cases.
For this reason, SPACE GASS allows you to decide whether or not to analyse the
combination load cases and treat them the same as primary load cases or to not analyse them
and have them calculated by simple linear superposition during the output phase. You can
specify the load cases that you want analysed by listing them at the start of the analysis phase.
For example, if you have primary load cases 1,2,3 and 4, and combination load cases 10,11
and 12, you could analyse just the primaries by entering 1-4 for the load cases list.
If you are doing a dynamic spectral response analysis, you should create a reverse
combination load case for each spectral load case. You may also have to create further
combinations to combine the spectral load cases with different direction vectors. For more
information refer to Spectral load data.
SPACE GASS will not allow a combination load case to be a simple linear
combination of analysed primary load cases if any of the primaries have been analysed nonlinearly or if the frame contains tension-only or compression-only members. In this case the
combination load case must be analysed.
You can modify the combination load case data and obtain
new results without re-analysing the structure, however this only applies to linear
superposition combinations. Results for analysed combinations are deleted if the combination
load case data is changed.
See also Combination load cases text.
See also Combination load cases.
170
Project Data
Load case title data
Load case titles serve the purpose of creating clearer, more understandable output. Primary or
combination load cases may be given titles.
Case
Load case to have title defined.
Title
A description of the load case.
Notes
Notes that allow you to describe the load case in more detail.
See also Load case titles text.
171
Lumped mass data
Lumped masses are considered in a dynamic analysis and are ignored in a static analysis.
Translational or rotational masses can be applied to any node along or about the global X, Y
and Z axis directions. If a mass is applied to a restrained degree of freedom then that mass is
simply ignored during the dynamic frequency analysis.
Masses may be applied in any load cases and may be combined with static loads within the
same load case, although it is often a good idea to put masses in load cases of their own (ie.
not in with static loads) so that they can be isolated in graphics displays or output reports.
Self mass can be added to the lumped masses by either by adding self-weight to a load case
that contains lumped masses or by combining lumped mass and self-weight load cases into a
combination load case.
Case
Load case to contain lumped masses.
Node
Node to have masses applied.
X, Y and Z translational masses
Translational masses (global axes).
X, Y and Z rotational masses
Rotational masses (global axes).
The application of lumped masses
A mass that affects the natural frequencies of a structure must be applied in each of the
unrestrained directions of the node to which it is attached. For example, a 0.5 tonne machine
which is attached to a point on a building rafter has an inertia in each of the X, Y and Z
directions and effects the natural frequencies of the building in all three directions. It must
therefore be applied as 0.5 tonne X, Y and Z translational masses.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Lumped masses are not the same as loads and therefore cannot be calculated by simply
converting loads to mass units. Masses represent the structure and/or attachments to the
structure which move and rotate with it and which effect its natural frequencies. Some
types of loads would have to be input as lumped masses while others would not. For
172
Project Data
example, dead loads and 30-100% of live loads would normally affect the natural
frequencies of a structure, however wind loads would not.
The inertia of the structure could be modelled in one of the following two ways:
Translational masses
Consider a rigid floor slab. You could model the distribution of mass by placing a small
translational mass at each node in the slab (the sum of all node masses equalling the total
mass of the slab).
Translational and rotational masses
You could also model the rigid floor slab by lumping all of the translational mass and a
rotational mass at the centroid of the slab.
In the first approach, the rotational inertia would be provided by the action of each of the
small translational masses being a distance away from the centroid of the slab. In the second
approach, the rotational inertia would be provided directly by the rotational mass at the
centroid of the slab. It is usually more convenient and just as accurate to use the second
approach.
The rotational mass for a point at the centroid of a rectangle is
where m is the mass of the rectangle, and a and b are the dimensions of the rectangle.
The concept of rotational mass, together with formulae for calculating rotational masses at
various locations on rectangles and other shapes, is given in Clough and Penzien (10).
Self mass
It is not necessary to manually input lumped masses for the self mass of the structure because
self mass can automatically be considered by simply adding self-weight to one or more load
cases. However, automatic self mass generation does not calculate rotational masses because
of the large number of extra masses that would be generated for a fairly insignificant
improvement in results accuracy. If required, rotational self mass must be manually applied as
rotational lumped masses.
In order to adequately define the distribution of mass along members for which local
vibrations are important, it is sometimes necessary to add intermediate nodes (with masses
applied) to such members.
See also Lumped masses text.
See also Self-weight.
See also Lumped masses.
See also Dynamic frequency analysis.
See also Running a dynamic frequency analysis.
173
Spectral load data
In order to perform a response spectrum analysis, you must first create one or more spectral
load cases. A spectral load case contains the number of a mass load case, a direction vector
and a list of mode shapes, each with its associated spectral curve and damping factor. Spectral
load cases can be combined and multiple spectral load cases can be analysed simultaneously.
The mode shapes must have been calculated from a dynamic frequency analysis before
the response spectrum analysis can proceed.
Case
The spectral load case being created (see also "load cases" below).
Mode
A mode shape being included in the spectral load case. Multiple mode shapes can be included
in a single spectral load case by simply inputting multiple entries (lines) with the same
spectral load case number. A particular mode shape can appear only once in each spectral
load case.
In the spectral analysis, it is important to consider a sufficient number of mode shapes.
SPACE GASS provides a very efficient means of measuring the contribution of each mode
shape in the overall dynamic response. This is known as the mass participation factor. For
example, for an earthquake acting in the X direction, the total X-axis mass participation factor
should be greater than 90% (eg. AS1170.4 clause 7.4.2). If it is less than 90% then a few more
mode shapes should be included in the analysis. A small mass participation factor will
indicate inaccurate results. For more information, refer to "Dynamic spectral response
analysis results".
It is important that you include the fundamental mode (ie. the mode with the longest period in
the direction of the earthquake), together with all other modes that have significant mass
participation. If you're not sure which modes to include then you should list them all. It will
improve the accuracy of the analysis and won't significantly affect the analysis time.
Spectral curve
The name of the spectral curve to be used with the specified mode shape. Normally all mode
shapes in a spectral load case use the same spectral curve, however you can nominate
different spectral curves for each mode if desired.
174
Project Data
Damping
The damping factor associated with the nominated spectral curve. This value is built into each
spectral curve when it was derived and cannot be changed. It is included in the datasheet for
display purposes only.
Mass case
The mass load case for which the specified mode shapes have been (or will be) calculated
from a dynamic frequency analysis.
Direction vector
Defines the direction of the ground vibration. For example, an earthquake acting in the X
direction would have a direction vector of Dx=1.0, Dy=0.0 and Dz=0.0.
Note that for the NZS and IS codes, if auto-scaling of the base shear is activated, the direction
vector should be parallel to one of the horizontal global axes. For these codes, to model a
direction vector that is at an angle to the horizontal global axes, you should create a separate
spectral load case for each of the horizontal global axis directions and then combine them into
a combination load case using multiplying factors that are proportional to the projected
lengths of the desired direction vector.
Load cases
For building structures, it is common to input two spectral load cases per mass load case, one
for each of the orthogonal horizontal directions. Furthermore, if the loading code requires you
to consider a combination of the two orthogonal directions (ie. AS1170.4-2007 5.4.2.1,
NZS1170.5-2004 5.3.1 or IS1893.1 6.3.2.2) then further load cases may also be required.
Finally, because the dynamic vibrations oscillate from one side to the other, it is also
necessary to consider the reverse of all of the above load cases.
For example, consider two basic spectral load cases defined for a particular mass load case as
follows:
Load case 21 = Direction vector 1,0,0 (ie. earthquake in X-axis direction)
Load case 22 = Direction vector 0,0,1 (ie. earthquake in Z-axis direction)
If the loading code requires further combinations of the above load cases in the form of 100%
of the actions in one direction plus 30% of the actions in the perpendicular direction then
further load cases are required. These are most conveniently input as combination load cases
as follows:
Load case 23 = 1.0 x case 21 + 0.3 x case 22
Load case 24 = 1.0 x case 21 - 0.3 x case 22
Load case 25 = 1.0 x case 22 + 0.3 x case 21
Load case 26 = 1.0 x case 22 - 0.3 x case 21
Finally, the reverse of the all the above load cases must be defined as further combination
load cases as follows:
Load case 31 = -1.0 x Load case 21
175

Thus, each pair of basic spectral load cases can spawn up to a further ten combination load
cases.
The structure should be designed to resist the envelope of all load cases.
176
Project Data
Spectral curve editor

You can open the spectral curve editor by opening the "Spectral Load Data" datasheet from
the Loads menu and then clicking the
button.
You can select the desired spectral curve from the tree in the left-hand window and observe
its data values in the right-hand window. You can also click the spectral curve editor button
(next to the Ok button) to load and display the spectral curve editor as shown below.
The spectral curve editor can be used to input or edit curves in the spectral curve library.
Note, however, that the standard curves supplied with SPACE GASS cant be changed. The
editor allows you to create a spectral curve that will result in the most accurate analysis
possible.
Operation of the spectral curve editor is self-explanatory and simply involves selecting a
curve name and then inputting or modifying its properties. Each curve contains a set of period
versus acceleration pairs, a description and a damping factor.
You can go to a specific point in a curve by clicking near it in the graphics window or by
scrolling to and selecting it in the list box. The currently selected point in the list box is
highlighted by a small circle in the graphics window. You can add (or delete) points by
clicking the buttons below the list box.
See also Standard Libraries for general information about the operation of the library editor.
177
Importing a spectral curve

You can import a spectral curve directly into the spectral curve editor by right-clicking the
spectral library that you want to import the curve into and selecting "From Text File" or
"From Excel". Note that you can't import into a standard library and so you have to create a
custom spectral library first. You can do this by clicking the "Add Library" button near the
bottom of the form.
In order to successfully import a spectral curve into the spectral curve editor you must ensure
that you use the correct format in the text or Excel file.
You can create a text or Excel file to use as a pattern for
creating your own file by simply exporting one of the standard spectral curves. Right-click on
one of the existing curves and then choose the "Export..." option to do this.
The correct format is as follows:
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
etc.
etc.
Line n
Line n+1
Description:Damping factor
period,acceleration
period,acceleration
period,acceleration
{for point 1}
{for point 2}
{for point 3}
period,acceleration
period,acceleration
{for point n-1}

{for point n}
For example:
AS1170.4 S=1.0:5%
0.00,2.5
0.01,2.5
0.02,2.5
2.99,0.602276
3.00,0.600937
See also Spectral loads text.
See also Dynamic spectral response analysis.
See also Running a dynamic spectral response analysis.
178
Project Data
Area load data
179
The area loads tool generates member distributed forces based on pressure loads applied to
areas defined by members that you have selected. For more information see Area loads and
Member distributed forces.
180
Project Data
Sea load data
This tool lets you generate wave and ocean current loads on submerged structures in marine
and offshore environments where these effects impose significant loading on the affected
structure. For more detailed information refer to "Sea Loads".
181
Moving load data

The moving loads tool generates loads on nodes, members and plates subjected to moving or
stationary loads such as vehicles, cranes or conveyors.
Features include:
Loads can be moving or stationary.

Load sources can be wheeled vehicles such as trucks or cranes, or distributed loads
such as pressure patches or line loads.
Multiple scenarios allow you to model any combinations of moving and stationary
loads.
Moving loads can be combined with other static loads.
A lane generation tool is included for roads and bridges.
Travel paths and lanes can have multiple segments, including curved segments.
Loads can be generated on nodes, members and plates.
Libraries of standard vehicles are included for various countries.
Loads can share common travel paths or lanes.
A speed, delay and start position can be specified for each load.
Load factors, lane factors and dynamic load allowances can be specified.
A loading area can be defined so that loads which move outside of it become inactive.
A vertical proximity setting enables independent generation of loads on multi-level
roadways.
Moving load data can be exported to MS-Excel, MS-Word or a text file.
Moving load data can be imported from MS-Excel or a text file.
An animated display allows you to view your loads moving along the structure.
For full details refer to "Moving loads".
182
Project Data
183
Text File Input

Text file input
Select "Import from text" or "Export to text" from the File menu
Inputting data into SPACE GASS via a text file is sometimes faster than using datasheet
input, however it is not as user friendly and is not recommended for first time users of SPACE
GASS.
You can use Windows Notepad to edit or create text files. The text editor linked to SPACE
GASS can be started by choosing "Text editor" from the File menu.
SPACE GASS text file names have the form <name>.TXT, where <name> is any name. The
text file should be located in the text data folder as created during the installation procedure.
If a large proportion of the data for a job has to be modified
and you do not wish to use the normal editing facilities, the data can be put into a text file
which can then be edited using a word processor or text editor, and then imported back into
SPACE GASS.
185
Text file format

Each data group in a SPACE GASS text file must be preceded by a title line. The title line
describes the type of data in the lines to follow. For example, the node data would be
preceded by "NODES". When reading text files the program uses only the first six characters
of each title line, therefore when creating text files you can abbreviate title lines to their first
six characters.
It is possible to repeat data throughout the data file. Single items or whole groups can be
repeated. In such cases the last entry overrides any previous entries. For example, if node
coordinates were entered at the top of the file and then updated at the end, the last group
would override the first. This practice, however is not recommended.
Groups of data do not have to be input in any particular order. The program recognises the
data types by their title lines rather than their order of appearance.
Items within a line must be separated by commas.

Lines can be continued on the next line if they end with the "&" character.
The maximum length of a single line is 1024 characters.
The maximum length of a set of continued lines is 2048 characters.
Comment lines must begin with the "#" character.
Blank lines are permitted anywhere in the file.
Non-numeric items that contain commas must be enclosed in "quotes".
Real numbers in SPACE GASS text files no longer need to contain a decimal point.
Furthermore, all numbers in SPACE GASS text files can now be up to 15 digits long (they
were previously limited to 10 digits).
186
Text File Input
Initiator
Line 1:
Line 2:
SPACE GASS Text File - Version 1228

UNITS LENGTH:Len, SECTION:SecProp,
STRENGTH:MatStr, DENSITY:Dens,
TEMP:Temp, FORCE:Force,
MOMENT:Mom, MASS:Mass, ACC:Acc,
TRANS:Trans, STRESS:Stress
Len
SecProp
MatStr
Length units (ft, in, m, cm or mm)

Section property units (ft, in, m, cm or mm)
Material strength units (Ksf, Psf, Ksi, Psi,
MPa, kPa,
Pa, kg/m^2, kg/cm^2, kg/mm^2)
Mass density units (K/ft^3, K/in^3, lb/ft^3,
lb/in^3,
T/m^3, T/cm^3, T/mm^3, kg/m^3, kg/cm^3,
kg/mm^3)
Temperature units (Fahrenheit, Celsius)
Force units (K, lb, kN, N, kg)
Moment units (Kft, Kin, lbft, lbin, kNm,
kNcm, kNmm,
Nm, Ncm, Nmm, kgm, kgcm, kgmm)
Mass units (K, lb, T, kg)
Acceleration units (g's, ft/sec^2, in/sec^2,
m/sec^2,
cm/sec^2, mm/sec^2, kN/kg)
Translation units (ft, in, m, cm, mm)
Stress units (Ksf, Psf, Ksi, Psi, MPa, kPa, Pa,
kg/m^2, kg/cm^2, kg/mm^2)
Dens
Temp
Force
Mom
Mass
Acc
Trans
Stress
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
See also Units.
187
Headings text
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
Line 5:
HEADINGS
Project
Job
Designer
Notes
Project
Job
Designer
Notes
Project description
Job description
Designers initials
Job notes
(50 Char)
(50 Char)
(3 Char)
(1024 Char)
If any of the heading lines have no data then they should be entered as just a pair of quotes
(eg. "") rather than just being a blank line.
See also Headings.
188
Text File Input
Nodes text
Line 1: NODES
Next n Node,X,Y,Z,Gen1,Ndi1,Rot,Ai,Xi1,Yi1,Zi1,
lines: Gen2,Ndi2,Xi2,Yi2,Zi2
Node
X
Y
Z
Gen1
Ndi1
Rot
Ai
Xi1
Yi1
Zi1
Gen2
Ndi2
Xi2
Yi2
Zi2
Node number
X coordinate
Y coordinate
Z coordinate
# of 1st order nodes to be generated
1st order node number increment
Axis of rot. for arc or helix generation (X/Y/Z)
Angle increment for arc or helix generation
1st order X increment
1st order Y increment
1st order Z increment
# of 2nd order nodes to be generated
2nd order node number increment
2nd order X increment
2nd order Y increment
2nd order Z increment
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
For straight line generation, Ai should be zero. For arc or helix generation, Rot is the axis of
rotation, Ai is the angle increment and Xi1, Yi1, Zi1 are the centre of rotation and the helix
length increment. For example, if a helix is generated about the Y-axis, then Yi1 is the helix
length increment. For arc generation the helix length increment is 0.
Rot choices are "X"=X-axis, "Y"=Y-axis, "Z"=Z-axis.
See also Nodes.
189
Members text
Line 1:
Next n
lines:
MEMBERS
Mem,DirAng,DirNode,DirAxis,Type,Na,Nb,Sp,Mp,
Fa,Fb,Ya,SZa,SYb,SZb,Cab,Gen1,Mbi1,Nai1,Nbi1,
Gen2,Mbi2,Nai2,Nbi2
Mem
DirAng
DirNode
DirAxis
Type
Na
Nb
Sp
Mp
Fa
Fb
SYa
SZa
Syb
SZb
Cab
Gen1
Mbil
Nail
Nbil
Gen2
Mbi2
Nai2
Nbi2
Member number
Direction angle
Direction node
Direction axis
Member type (N/T/C/A)
Node number A
Node number B
Section property number
Material property number
Node A fixity (F/R/S)
Node B fixity (F/R/S)
Y rotational stiffness at node A
Z rotational stiffness at node A
Y rotational stiffness at node B
Y rotational stiffness at node B
Cable length
# of 1st order members to be generated
1st order member number increment
1st order node A increment
1st order node B increment
# of 2nd order members to be generated
2nd order member number increment
2nd order node A increment
2nd order node B increment
(Integer)
(Real)
(Integer)
(2 Char)
(1 Char)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(6 Char)
(6 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Type choices are "N"=Normal, "T"=Tension-only, "C"=Compression-only, "A"=Cable.

Fa, Fb choices are "F"=Fixed, "R"=Released. "S"=Spring can also be used for the y and z
rotational fixities.
See also Members.
190
Text File Input
Plates text
Line 1:
Next n
lines:
PLATES
Plate,DirAng,DirNode,DirAxis,Type,Na,Nb,Nc,Nd,
TA,TM,TB,TS,Mat,Offset,Gen,PInc,NInc
Plate
DirAng
DirNode
DirAxis
Type
Na
Nb
Nc
Nd
TA
TM
TB
TS
Mat
Offset
Gen
PInc
NInc
Plate number
Direction angle
Direction node
Direction axis
Plate type (K/M)
Node number A
Node number B
Node number C
Node number D
Actual thickness
Membrane thickness
Bending thickness
Shear thickness
Plate offset
# of plates to be generated
Plate number increment
Node number increment
(Integer)
(Real)
(Integer)
(2 Char)
(1 Char)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Type choices are "K"=Kirchoff (thin), "M"=Mindlin (thick).

See also Plates.
191
Node restraints text

Line 1: RESTRAINTS
Next n Node,Rest,Gr,Gen,NInc,Ax,Ay,Az,Rx,Ry,Rz
lines:
Node
Rest
Gr
Gen
NInc
Ax
Ay
Az
Rx
Ry
Rz
Node number
Restraint code (F/R/D/S)
General restraint (Y/N)
# of restrained nodes
X axial spring stiffness
Y axial spring stiffness
Z axial spring stiffness
X rotational spring stiffness
Y rotational spring stiffness
Z rotational spring stiffness
Rs choices are "F"=Fixed, "R"=Released, "D"=Deleted, "S"=Spring.

Gr choices are "Y"=General restraint, " " or "N"=Normal restraint.
192
(Integer)
(6 Char)
(1 Char)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
Text File Input
Section properties text

Line 1:
Next n sets
of lines:
Next set of
3 lines per
shape:
Next set of
"Points"
lines per
shape:
Sec
Secn
SECTIONS
Sec,Secn,Lib,Mark,Ar,Ix,Iy,Iz,Ay,Az,Pa,Shapes
ShapeType,Points,Dims
Void,Parent,Transpose,Mirror,TransX,TransY,Rotate,Fabrication
Strengths
X,Y,Z
Section property number

Section name
Section library name

Lib
Section mark
Mark
Area of section
Ar
Torsion constant
Ix
Y principal moment of inertia
Iy
Z principal moment of inertia
Iz
Y shear area
Ay
Z shear area
Az
Principal angle
Pa
The number of shapes in the section
Shapes
ShapeType Shape type (0=Undefined, 1=Rod, 2=Square, 3=Flat, 4=CHS,
5=SHS, 6=RHS, 7=I-shape, 8=PWG, 9=Channel, 10=Beam Tee,
11=Column Tee, 12=Equal Angle, 13=Unequal Angle, 14=Cruciform,
15=Box Girder, 16=Wedge, 17=Slice, 18=Fillet, 19=Points, 20=LSB,
21=LSB/B2B, 22=Lines, 23=Triangle, 24=Cee, 25=Zed, 26=Top Hat,
27=DA/Short, 28=DA/Long, 29=DA/Starred, 30=Polygon,
31=PolyTube, 32=Equilateral Triangle, 33=Schifflerized Angle,
34=Back to Back Cee, 35=Rounded Angle, 36=Rack, 37=L-shape,
38=Trapezoid, 39=Flat Oval)
The number of perimeter points in a points shape or line shape
Points
The shape dimensions (D,Bt,Bb,Btw,Bbw,Tt,Tb,Tw,Hf,Rr)
Dims
1=Void shape (hole), otherwise 0
Void
Parent shape if Void=1
Parent
Transpose 1=Transposed shape, otherwise 0
1=Mirrored about X, 2=Mirrored about Y, 3=Mirrored about both,
Mirror
otherwise 0
Translation distance along X
TransX
Translation distance along Y
TransY
Rotation angle (degrees)
Rotate
Fabrication Fabrication code (0=Hot rolled, 1=Stress relieved, 2=Lightly welded,
3=Heavily welded, 4=Cold formed, 5=Cold formed and stress
relieved)
Strengths Material strengths (Fy,Fyw,Fu for up to 6 grades of steel)
Coordinates of perimeter points in a points shape or line shape
X,Y,Z
(Integer)
(15
Char)
(8 Char)
(5 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
193
Material properties text

Line 1:
MATERIALS
Next n lines: Mat,Matl,E,Pr,D,T,Fc
Mat
Matl
Lib
E
Pr
D
T
Fc

Material name
Material library name
Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
Mass density
Coefficient of thermal expansion
Characteristic concrete strength
194
(Integer)
(15 Char)
(8 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
Text File Input
Master-slave constraints text

Line 1:
CONSTRAINTS
Next n lines: SNode,MNode,Cnst,Gen,SInc,MInc
SNode
MNode
Cnst
Gen
SInc
MInc
Slave node number

Master node number
Constraint code (F/R)
# of slave nodes to be generated
Slave node number increment
Master node number increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
(6 Char)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Cc choices are "F"=Fixed, "R"=Released.

195
Member offset text

Line 1:
Next n
lines:
OFFSETS
Mem,Ax,Dxa,Dya,Dza,Dxb,Dyb,Dzb
Mem
Ax
Dxa
Dya
Dza
Dxb
Dyb
Dzb
Member number
Axes system (L/G)
Member offset from A along x-axis
Member offset from A along y-axis
Member offset from A along z-axis
Member offset from B along x-axis
Member offset from B along y-axis
Member offset from B along z-axis
Ax choices are "L"=Local, "G"=Global.

196
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
Text File Input
Node loads text

Line 1: NODELOADS
Next n Case,Node,Fx,Fy,Fz,Mx,My,Mz,Gen,NInc
lines:
Case
Node
Fx
Fy
Fz
Mx
My
Mz
Gen
NInc
Load case number

Node number
X force
Y force
Z force
X moment
Y moment
Z moment
# of loaded nodes to be generated
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
See also Node loads.
197
Prescribed node displacements text

Line 1: NODEDISPS
Next n Case,Node,Tx,Ty,Tz,Rx,Ry,Rz,Gen,NInc
lines:
Case
Node
Tx
Ty
Tz
Rx
Ry
Rz
Gen
NInc
Load case number

Node number
X translation
Y translation
Z translation
X rotation
Y rotation
Z rotation
# of displaced nodes to be generated
See also Prescribed node displacements.
198
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Text File Input
Member concentrated loads text

Line 1: MEMBCONC
Next n Case,Mem,Sl,Ax,Un,Ps,Fx,Fy,Fz,Mx,My,Mz,
lines: Gen1,MInc,Gen2,SInc,PInc
Case
Mem
Sl
Ax
Un
Ps
Fx
Fy
Fz
Mx
My
Mz
Gen1
MInc
Gen2
SInc
PInc
Load case number

Member number
Sub load number
Axes system (L/G)
Units system (A/%)
Load position
X force
Y force
Z force
X moment
Y moment
Z moment
# of loaded members to be generated
Member number increment
# of loads per member to be generated
Sub load number increment
Load position increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
Ax choices are "L"=Local, "G"=Global.

Un choices are "A"=Actual, "%"=Percentage.
See also Member concentrated loads.
199
Member distributed forces text

Line 1: MEMBFORCES
Next n Case,Mem,Sl,Ax,Un,St,Fi,Xs,Xf,Ys,Yf,Zs,Zf,
lines: Gen,MInc
Case
Mem
Sl
Ax
Un
St
Fi
Xs
Xf
Ys
Yf
Zs
Zf
Gen
MInc
Load case number

Member number
Sub load number
Axes system (L/G/A)
Units system (A/%)
Start position
Finish position
X start force
X finish force
Y start force
Y finish force
Z start force
Z finish force
# of loaded members to be generated
Ax choices are "L"=Local, "G"=Global-projected, "A"=Global-inclined.

See also Member distributed forces.
200
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Text File Input
Member distributed torsions text

Line 1: MEMBTORSION
Next n Case,Mem,Sl,Un,St,Fi,Ts,Tf,Gen,MInc
lines:
Case
Mem
Sl
Un
St
Fi
Ts
Tf
Gen
MInc
Load case number

Member number
Sub load number
Units system (A/%)
Start position
Finish position
Start torsion
Finish torsion
# of torsion loads to be generated
Member # increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)

See also Member distributed torsions.
201
Thermal loads text

Line 1:
Next n
lines:
THERMAL
Case,Elem,Type,Temp,GradY,GradZ,Gen,EInc
Case
Elem
Type
Temp
GradY
GradZ
Gen
EInc
Load case number

Element number
Element type (M/P)
Temperature change
Reserved (must be set to 0.0)
Plate thermal gradient
# of thermal loads to be generated
Element # increment
Type choices are "M"=Member, "P"=Plate.

202
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Text File Input
Member prestress loads text

Line 1:
Next n
lines:
PRESTRESS
Case,Mem,Force,Gen,MInc
Case
Mem
Force
Gen
MInc
Load case number

Member number
Prestress force
# of prestress loads to be generated
Member # increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
See also Member prestress.
203
Plate pressure loads text

Line 1:
Next n
lines:
PRESSURE
Case,Plate,Px,Py,Pz,Gen,PInc
Case
Plate
Ax
Px
Py
Pz
Gen
PInc
Load case number

Plate number
Axes system (L/G/A)
X pressure
Y pressure
Z pressure
# of loaded plates to be generated
Plate number increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Ax choices are "L"=Local, "G"=Global-projected, "A"=Global-inclined.

See also Plate pressure.
204
Text File Input
Self weight text

Line 1:
Next n lines:
SELFWEIGHT
Case,Ax,Ay,Az
Case
Ax
Ay
Az
Load case number

X acceleration
Y acceleration
Z acceleration
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
See also Self weight.
205
Combination load cases text

Line 1:
Next n lines:
COMBINATIONS
Comb,Case,Fact
Comb
Case
Fact
Combination load case number

(Integer)
Load case number (primary or combination) (Integer)
Multiplying factor
(Real)
See also Combination load cases.
206
Text File Input
Load case titles text

Line 1:
Next n lines:
TITLES
Case,Title,Notes
Case
Title
Notes
Load case number

Load case title
Load case notes
(Integer)
(50 Char)
(255 Char)
See also Load case titles.
207
Lumped masses text

Line 1: LUMPEDMASS
Next n Case,Node,Tx,Ty,Tz,Rx,Ry,Rz,Gen,NInc
lines:
Case
Node
Tx
Ty
Tz
Rx
Ry
Rz
Gen
NInc
Load case number

Node number
X translational mass
Y translational mass
Z translational mass
X rotational mass
Y rotational mass
Z rotational mass
# of loaded nodes to be generated
208
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Text File Input
Spectral loads text

Line 1:
Next n
lines:
SPECTRAL
Case,Mode,Curve,MCase,Dx,Dy,Dz
Case
Mode
Curve
MCase
Dx
Dy
Dz
Load case number

Mode shape
Spectral curve name
Mass case
X direction vector
Y direction vector
Z direction vector
(Integer)
(Integer)
(50 Char)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
See also Spectral loads.
209
Steel member design text

Line 1:
Next n lines:
STEELMEMBERS
Group,Title,MList,SGrade,Units,LoadHeight,
ScanCode,CalcLcMjr,LcMjr,BraceMjr,CalcLcMnr,
LcMnr,BraceMnr, CalcLb,Lb+,Lb-,TopPos,
TopRest,BotPos,BotRest, Ast,EndCon,
EccEffect,Criteria,Bolts,Dia,ISSeismicCat,NZSeismicCat,
MemberType,Cantilever,Gen,GInc,MInc
Group
Title
MList
SGrade
Units
LoadHeight
ScanCode
CalcLcMjr
LcMjr
BraceMjr
CalcLcMnr
LcMnr
BraceMnr
CalcLb
Lb+
LbTopPos
TopRest
BotPos
BotRest
Ast
EndCon
EccEffect
Criteria
Bolts
Dia
ISSeismicCat
NZSeismicCat
MemberType
Cantilever
Gen
GInc
MInc
Group number
Group title
List of analysis members in the group
Strength grade (N/H)
Units system (A/R)
Load height position (C/T)
Library scan code
Calculate LcMjr from a buckling analysis (Y/N)
Major axis compression effective length
Major axis braced in position at both ends of group (Y/N)
Calculate LcMnr from a buckling analysis (Y/N)
Minor axis compression effective length
Minor axis braced in position at both ends of group (Y/N)
Calculate Lb+ and Lb- (Y/N)
Positive bending effective length
Negative bending effective length
List of restraint positions (intermediate only) on top flange
List of restraint types (end and intermediate) on top flange
List of restraint positions (intermediate only) on bottom flange
List of restraint types (end and intermediate) on bottom flange
Angle section type (A/S/L/X)
End connection type (C/F/W/S/L)
Consider eccentric effects (Y/N)
Design criteria (W/D)
Maximum number of bolts in cross section (0=Welded)
Bolt diameter
Indian IS800 seismic category
New Zealand NZS3404 seismic category
Member type (for seismic checks)
Reserved for a future version
Number of groups to be generated
Group number increment
SGrade choices are "N"=Normal strength, "H"=High strength.

Units choices are "A"=Actual, "R"=Ratio.
LoadHeight choices are "C"=Shear centre or below, "T"=Top flange.
210
(Integer)
(50 Char)
(50 Int)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
(4 Char)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(50 Real)
(52 Char)
(50 Real)
(52 Char)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Text File Input

CalcLcMjr choices are "Y"=Calculate LcMjr from a buckling analysis, "N"=Use the input
value of LcMjr.
BraceMjr choices are "Y"=Both ends of the design group are braced in position for buckling
about the major axis, "N"=Either or both ends of the design group are not braced in position
for buckling about the major axis.
CalcLcMnr choices are "Y"=Calculate LcMnr from a buckling analysis, "N"=Use the input
value of LcMnr.
BraceMnr choices are "Y"=Both ends of the design group are braced in position for buckling
about the minor axis, "N"=Either or both ends of the design group are not braced in position
for buckling about the minor axis.
CalcLb choices are "Y"=Calculate Lb+ and Lb- from the flange restraints, "N"=Use the input
values of Lb+ and Lb-.
TopPos and BotPos are lists of the intermediate flange restraint positions which can include
@ multipliers but not dashes. For example, restraint positions 1.2,3.0,4.8,6.6,8.4,10.2,11.4
could be listed as 1.2,5@1.8,1@1.2 or 1.2,5@1.8,11.4.
TopRest and BotRest must be a string of characters without commas, dashes or @s. For
example FLLPLR.
Ast choices are "A"=Single angle, "S"=Double angle with short legs connected, "L"=Double
angle with long legs connected, "X"=Double starred angle. Ast is only considered if the
section is an angle section.
EndCon choices are "C"=Centroid, "F"=Flange, "W"=Web, "S"=Angle short leg, "L"=Angle
long leg.
EccEffect choices are "Y"=Consider end connection eccentric effects, "N"=Ignore eccentric
effects.
Criteria choices are "W"=Use weight design criteria, "D"=Use depth design criteria.
ISSeismicCat choices are 0=Non-seismic, 1=Ordinary concentrically braced frame,
2=Special concentrically braced frame, 3=Ordinary moment frame, 4=Special moment frame.
NZSeismicCat choices are 0=Non-seismic, 1=Category 1 member, 2=Category 2 member,
3=Category 3 member, 4=Category 4 member.
MemberType choices are 0=Non-specific, 1=Beam, 2=Column, 3=Brace.
Cantilever is reserved for a future version and should be set to 0.
See also Steel member design data.
211
Terminator
Line 1:
212
END
Text File Input
Text file errors

Error messages which may occur while a text file is being read by SPACE GASS are as
follows.
Illegal or missing numeric value
Essential real or integer numeric value has been omitted or is beyond the problem size limits.
Illegal data encountered
Unexpected data type was encountered (eg. integer instead of real).
Title line not recognised
Incorrect data group title has been detected (eg. NEDES instead of NODES).
Generation data out of limits
Items to be generated would exceed the problem size limits. Change the generation data or
choose "Problem size limits" from the Config menu and increase the limits.
Illegal or missing character
Illegal character detected or expected character not found.
Maximum limit exceeded
One of the problem size limits has been exceeded. Choose "Problem size limits" from the
Config menu and increase the limits.
Library not found
The standard sections or materials library cannot be found.
Wrong format library
The standard sections or materials library is in an invalid or old format and cannot be read.
Section or material not found
Specified section or material name cannot be found in specified library.
Demonstration version limit exceeded
The demonstration version of the program allows only 1 section property, 1 material property,
5 steel design groups, and 1 steel design connection.
Not a valid SPACE GASS text file
The file does not have a valid SPACE GASS text file format or the first line does not indicate
that it is SPACE GASS data.
Restraint positions are not in ascending order
The intermediate flange restraint positions must be in ascending order.
Restraint positions do not match types
The number of intermediate flange restraint positions must match the number of restraint
types less the two end restraint types. Each use of an @ multiplier in a restraint positions list
must have only one corresponding restraint type.
L or C restraint is ineffective
A Lateral restraint type must have Full or Partial restraint types between it and the end of the
design group on both sides to be effective. A Continuous restraint type must be between Full,
Partial or Lateral restraint types to be effective.
213
Ignored segments must be at ends

You have specified an ignored segment at an intermediate position along the group. Segments
to be ignored must be at either or both ends of the group only.
Require intermediate restraint positions only
Restraint positions should be specified for the intermediate restraints only. SPACE GASS
already knows the positions of the restraints at the ends of the group.
100 members per design group limit exceeded
A steel member design group cannot contain more than 100 members.
100 cases per combination limit exceeded
A combination load case cannot contain more than 100 primary load cases.
100 flange restraints limit exceeded
A steel member design group cannot contain more than 100 flange restraints per flange.
No members in steel design group
A steel member design group must consist of at least one analysis member.
Restraint position exceeds maximum distance
A flange restraint has been positioned beyond the length of the steel member design group.
Illegal or missing restraint type
An illegal character has been detected in the steel member design restraint types field or the
restraint type is missing.
Comma is missing
A list of numbers is missing a comma.
There must be a value between separators
A list of values has two adjacent commas, dashes or @s.
Too many values in list
A list of numbers contains too many values.
Cannot use "-" range in this data field
You are not permitted to use dashes in this list of integers.
Cannot use "@" multiplier in this data field
You are not permitted to use @s in this list of numbers.
Multiplier must be an integer
The number before an @ in a list of numbers must be an integer.
Cannot have a repeated member
The same member has been referenced twice in a single connection.
Must have at least one supported member
All connection types require at least one supported member.
An apex connection must be the same on both sides
If you have specified one side of a connection to be an apex then you must use exactly the
same connection type for the other side.
214
Text File Input
An internal stiff seat must be the same on both sides

If you have specified one side of a connection to be an internal stiff seat then you must use
exactly the same connection type for the other side.
This connection requires two supported members
Apex and internal stiff seat connections require two supported members.
This connection requires only one supported member
Baseplate connections must have only one supported member. It doesnt matter whether the
supported member is specified as side A or side B.
This connection requires a supporting member
A supporting member is always required (except for apex, stiff seat or baseplate).
This connection requires no supporting member
Apex and baseplate connections cannot have a supporting member.
No connection type specified
You have not specified a valid connection type for one of the supported members.
Supported member not specified
You have not specified a supported member for one of the connection types.
Invalid bolting procedure for connection type
A snug bolting procedure cannot be used in bolted end plate, apex or moment baseplate
connections, use bearing or friction bolting procedures.
Haunches are only for B.E.P, welded moment or apex
Haunches are supported only in bolted end plate, apex and welded moment connections.
Invalid bolt strength for bolting procedure specified
Normal strength bolts cannot be tensioned for bearing or friction bolting procedures. Use high
strength bolts.
Stiff seat bearing length required
Because you have not specified a supporting member for the stiff seat connection, the bearing
length cannot be calculated by SPACE GASS. Specify a supporting member or a stiff seat
bearing length (or both).
Cannot have fillet weld for welded apex connection
Welded apex connections require butt welds for the flanges.
Must have the same bolting procedure on each side
You must specify the same bolting procedure on both sides of an apex or internal stiff seat
connection.
Cannot have a haunch on only one side of an apex
If you have specified a haunch on one side of an apex connection then you must also specify a
haunch on the other side.
Must have the same haunch depth on each side of an apex
Apex connections require the same haunch depth on both sides.
215
Text file example

The following sample text file contains all of the data for the worked example used in the
appendices at the end of this manual.
SPACE GASS Text File - Version 900
UNITS LENGTH:m, SECTION:m, STRENGTH:kPa, DENSITY:T/m^3, TEMP:Celsius, &
FORCE:kN, MOMENT:kNm, MASS:T, ACC:m/sec^2, TRANS:m, STRESS:kPa
HEADINGS
"SPACE GASS Worked Example"
"25m Single Span Portal Frame"
"PS"
""
NODES
1,0.000,0.000
2,0.000,3.750
3,0.000,7.500
4,1.630,7.585
5,3.260,7.671
6,6.250,7.828
7,12.500,8.155
8,18.750,7.828
9,21.740,7.671
10,23.370,7.585
11,25.000,7.500
12,25.000,3.750
13,25.000,0.000
MEMBERS
1,0.00,0, ,N,1, 2,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
2,0.00,0, ,N,2, 3,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
3,0.00,0, ,N,3, 4,3,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
4,0.00,0, ,N,4, 5,4,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
5,0.00,0, ,N,5, 6,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
6,0.00,0, ,N,6, 7,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
7,0.00,0, ,N,7, 8,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
8,0.00,0, ,N,8, 9,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
9,0.00,0, ,N,9,10,4,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
10,0.00,0, ,N,10,11,3,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
11,0.00,0, ,N,11,12,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
12,0.00,0, ,N,12,13,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
RESTRAINTS
1,FFFFFR
2,RRFFFR,Y
13,FFFFFR
SECTIONS
1,"530 UB
2,"360 UB
3,"360 UB
4,"360 UB
92","AUST250", ,"C1"
51","AUST250", ,"R1"
51-A","", ,"HNCH ",N,0.10773E-01,0.472E-06,0.14524E-04,0.63586E-03
51-B","", ,"S4 ",N,0.96446E-02,0.472E-06,0.14519E-04,0.36376E-03
MATERIALS
1,"STEEL","METRIC"
NODELOADS
2,7,0.0,-4.5
MEMBFORCES
1,3,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,4,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,5,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,6,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,7,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,8,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,9,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,10,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
2,3,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,4,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,5,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,6,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,7,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,8,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,9,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
216
Text File Input

2,10,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
3,1,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,6.300,6.300,0.0,0.0
3,2,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,6.300,6.300,0.0,0.0
3,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,6,1,L,A,0.0,1.7410,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,6,2,L,A,1.7410,6.2590,0.0,0.0,3.600,3.600
3,7,1,L,A,0.0,3.4820,0.0,0.0,3.600,3.600
3,7,2,L,A,3.4820,6.2590,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,11,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,4.500,4.500,0.0,0.0
3,12,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,4.500,4.500,0.0,0.0
4,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
5,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
6,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
7,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
SELFWEIGHT
1,0.0,-9.807E-03,0.0
COMBINATIONS
10,1,1.25
10,2,1.50
11,1,0.80
11,3,1.00
11,6,1.00
12,1,1.25
12,3,1.00
12,6,-0.96
13,1,0.80
13,4,1.00
13,7,1.00
14,1,1.25
14,5,1.00
14,7,-6.50
217
TITLES
1,Dead load (DL)
2,Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
3,Cross wind (CW)
4,Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
5,Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
6,Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
7,Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
10,1.25DL+1.5LL
11,0.8DL+CW+IPCW
12,1.25DL+CW+ISCW
13,0.8DL+LW1+IPLW
14,1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
STEELMEMBERS
1,"","1,2",N,A,C,A ,N,20.0,1.7,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.2,2.4,3.6,5.3,7",RLLLLFIF,"",RF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
2,"","5,6",N,A,C,A ,N,12.517,1.2,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.3,2.5,3.7,4.9,6.1,7.3,8.1",RLLLLLLLF,"4.9",RLF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
3,"","8,7",N,A,C,A ,N,12.517,1.2,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.3,2.5,3.7,4.9,6.1,7.3,8.1",RLLLLLLLF,"4.9",RLF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
4,"","12,11",N,A,C,A ,N,20.0,1.7,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.2,2.4,3.6,5.3,7",RLLLLFIF,"",RF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
STEELCONNECT
1,"Left baseplate",0,1,0,8,0,S,S,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
2,"Left eave",2,0,3,0,1,S,B,0.0,0.0,3.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
6,"Bolted apex",0,6,7,2,2,B,B,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
11,"Right eave",11,10,0,3,0,S,S,3.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
12,"Right baseplate",0,0,12,0,8,S,S,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
END
218
Structure Wizard
Structure wizard
You can open the structure wizard by clicking the
wizard" from the Structure menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Structure
Structure wizard input provides a very fast means of inputting data into SPACE GASS for
structures that conform generally to one of the standard structures shown above.
The structure wizard input method can still be used for
structures which dont conform exactly to the structures shown above. In such cases it can be
used to input the basic structure and then modified by one of the other data entry methods.
For example, a portal frame with its apex off centre could be initially input as a symmetrical
portal frame using the structure wizard and then modified graphically by moving the apex
node to its correct location.
Once a structure has been selected, a structure specific form is opened which allows you to
input basic data relating to the frame geometry, supports, pattern loads, etc. SPACE GASS
will then generate the structure, and apply any pattern loading, automatically.
The input form for a single bay portal frame is shown below.
219
Important note regarding restraints applied to wizard generated models

For all 2D frames generated by the structure wizard, out-of-plane translations on some nonsupport nodes are restrained. This has two major implications that you should be aware of.
1. If you extend the frame to 3D after it has been generated then the 2D restraints may
no longer be appropriate. If this is the case, you should modify or delete them.
2. Even though a frame is 2D, it may often be appropriate to allow some nodes to move
and/or rotate in the out-of-plane direction. This is especially the case if a buckling or
dynamic frequency analysis is to be performed where out-of-plane movements can
occur even when there are no loads in that direction. Because of this, you may have to
modify the restraints generated by the structure wizard to allow these movements.
Conversely, you may have to apply more out-of-plane restraints if those movements
are prevented in your real structure.
For more information, refer to Node restraint data and, in particular, the section
entitled "Important note about restraining 2D frames".
220

Portal frame builder
This tool lets you generate all of the structural, load and design data for a complete portal
frame building. You can then go ahead and analyse and design it using the normal analysis
and design tools available in SPACE GASS. It supports gable (symmetrical and
asymmetrical) and monoslope roofs, overhangs, knee braces, haunches, fly bracing, uneven
frame spacings, openings, roof/wall bracing and end wall props.
Wind loads are generated in accordance with AS/NZS 1170.2:2011 for all regions in Australia
and New Zealand. They are calculated for each direction based on the region, average
recurrence interval, terrain category (including transition zones), shielding and topography.
Openings can be allowed for by specifying minimum and maximum internal Cp,i pressure
coefficients for each wind direction. Wall loads can be applied to the columns (the normal
situation) or to the eave ties and end frame rafters for buildings that have tilt-up panels.
Load cases are automatically generated for all combinations of the dead, live and wind loads.
You can access the portal frame builder tool from within the renderer by clicking the
button or by selecting "Portal frame builder" from the Structure menu.
Note that if you haven't purchased the portal frame builder tool, you can still run it in a free
trial mode that limits you to a pre-defined building width and height, and prevents you from
exporting or saving the job. All other features are fully activated.
A video showing the portal frame builder in action can be viewed at
www.spacegass.com/portal.
221

Refer to Geometry, Extra data, Sections and materials, Loads, Load cases or Design for more
details about the input parameters.
222
Portal frame geometry

This form lets you define the basic geometric data for the portal frame building.
Options
The basic options are largely self-explanatory, however some of the less obvious ones are
explained in more detail below.
If "Define eaves height by" is set to "Sheeting intersection" then the height is measured from
the footing to the intersection point of the wall and roof sheeting. Otherwise it is measured to
the "Springing height", which is the underside of the rafter (or haunch if one exists) at the face
of the column.
Eave and ridge ties are extended down the full length of the building, whereas end frame prop
ties are placed just between the end frame and the first internal frame at each end of the
building wherever there is a prop.
223

Gridlines and dimensions can be generated automatically if ticked. You can also edit them or
add extra dimensions manually using the renderer's normal gridline and dimensioning tools.
If you tick "Align column outside flanges" and the end frame columns are different to the
internal frames then the columns will be adjusted so that their outside flanges line up down
the length of the building. If unticked, the columns will be aligned via their centroids.
The "Connect rafter props to bottom flange" option lets you decide between connecting the
props to the rafter centerline or to the bottom flange. If connected to the centerline the
connection is pin-ended, whereas if connected to the bottom flange the connection is rigid.
The reason for the rigid connection is to prevent shear force in the prop generating torsion in
the rafter and potentially causing it to fail unrealistically.
Geometry
All dimensions in the geometry fields are relative to the sheeting lines.
Bay spacings and bracing

The frames are assumed to be equally spaced by default, however you can change the
spacings as required. The bay spacings are to the frame centroids and will affect the overall
length of the building if you change them.
Purlin and girt details

Purlins and girts are not added to the model as actual members, however they are included in
the steel member design data as flange restraints.
The purlin and girt depths are required so that the frame positions can be calculated relative to
the sheeting lines. For gable frames, the purlins on each rafter are equally spaced with the first
purlin positioned 200mm from the ridge. For monoslope frames, the purlins equally spaced
and centered between the columns. The girts are equally spaced with the first girt positioned
200mm from the footing.
224

Fly braces can be positioned at every 2nd, 3rd, etc... purlin or girt as specified by you.
Of course you can manually adjust the purlin, girt and fly brace data to suit your exact
requirements via the steel member design input data once the model has been generated.
225
Portal frame extra data

This form lets you input the end frame props, bracing, knee braces, haunches and the position
of the model.
End frame props and bracing

This table allows you to specify the props and bracing for the front and rear walls. If the front
and rear walls have identical data then you can input the data for one wall and then click the
"Duplicate at Front/Rear" button.
Prop positions can be input as actual values or as percentages of the end frame width relative
to the column centroids. Alternatively, you can click the "Generate End Frame Props" button
to quickly generate equally spaced props with or without bracing.
226
Knee braces and haunches

You can specify knee braces or haunches in the internal and/or end frames using the
following fields. The knee brace length is the horizontal distance from the face of the column,
while its height is the vertical distance from the intersection of the centroids of the column
and rafter. The haunch length is the horizontal distance from the face of the column.
Positioning and numbering

By default, the model is generated with its front-left corner at the global origin, however you
can control this with the X,Y,Z position fields. This is especially useful if you are adding the
generated model to an existing structure in your job.
The nodes, members and load cases use the next available numbers unless you specify
starting numbers in the "Start..." fields.
227
Connections
The portal frame builder can also generate all of the main connections in the building. All you
need to do is specify the type of connection to be used for the knees, ridges and baseplates.
These can then be designed or checked in the steel connection design module.
228
Portal frame sections and materials

This form lets you define the section and material properties of the various components of the
building.
229
Portal frame loads

This form lets you define the dead load, live load and wind load generation parameters.
Dead and live loads

The "Roof sheeting and purlin dead load" is a permanent load that is applied to all load
combinations, whereas the "Services and superimposed dead load" is considered to be a
temporary load that is only applied to the downward load combinations.
The dead loads you input are applied to the actual roof area, while the live load is applied to
the plan projection of the roof area. If you tick the "Calculate" live load option then it will be
calculated based on the maximum of 0.25 and 1.8/A + 0.12 kPa as given in AS/NZS 1170.1
table 3.2. Note that the distributed live load is applied to the entire roof area, even if the roof
area is greater than 200m^2. The 1.4kN concentrated live load specified in AS/NZS 1170.1
(but not in conjunction with the distributed live load - see AS/NZS 1170.1 section 3.1) is not
applied.
230

Wind loads
Wind loads can be calculated for any region in Australia or New Zealand. The average
recurrence intervals (ARIs) for the ultimate and serviceability limit states are used to calculate
the regional wind speeds from AS/NZS 1170.2 table 3.1.
Wind directions
If you tick the "Apply same wind in all directions" option then you are only required to input
one set of wind data for the shielding, topographic, terrain category and internal pressure
parameters. Otherwise, these data must be defined for each of the four orthogonal building
axes.
Shielding multiplier (Ms)

The shielding multiplier (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 4.3) takes into account shielding
provided by other upwind buildings or structures. It is 1.0 if there is no shielding. You can
enter the desired value directly or you can click the "Calculate" button and then input various
shielding parameters and have Ms calculated for you. The ns, hs, bs and h values and the
calculation of Ms are all explained in AS/NZS 1170.2 section 4.3.
Topographic multiplier (Mt)

The topographic multiplier (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 4.4) takes into account the
topography and its effect on the wind that is applied to the structure. It is 1.0 if there are no
topographic effects. You can enter the desired value directly or you can click the "Calculate"
button and then input various topographic parameters and have Mt calculated for you. The H,
E, Lu, x and z values and the calculation of Mt are all explained in AS/NZS 1170.2 section
4.4.
231
Terrain category
The terrain category affects the terrain height multiplier Mz,cat (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section
4.2). Mz,cat can be based on a single terrain category or it can be an averaged value if the
terrain category changes on the upwind side of the structure. SPACE GASS allows for
averaging two terrain categories in accordance with AS/NZS 1170.2 section 4.2.3. Note that
the "Approach" TC is closer to the structure than the "Upwind" TC and the "TC transition
distance" is the distance from the structure to the point where the terrain category changes.
Internal pressure coefficients

In order to take into account openings, you can input the Cp,i pressure coefficients for
maximum pressure (Pos) and maximum suction (Neg). These coefficients are then used when
factoring the Cp,i=1.0 internal pressure primary load cases into the ultimate and serviceability
combination load cases.
232

Wind loads on walls
Wind loads are normally applied to the columns when horizontal girts support the wall
sheeting, however if the eave ties or end wall rafters are loaded instead (such as with tilt-up
panels) then you can tick the "Load rafters/eaves tie" options to allow for this.
Walls as effective surfaces

When SPACE GASS calculates the action combination factors Kc,e and Kc,i (see AS/NZS
1170.2 section 5.4.3) it assumes that each wall is potentially an effective surface. You can,
however, specify certain walls to be not considered as an effective surface in these
calculations if required (see AS/NZS 1170.2 table 5.5).
Sheeting
In order to calculate friction loads, the portal frame builder needs to know the type of sheeting
and its direction. You can choose between "Smooth" (no friction loads), "Ribbed" or
"Corrugated".
233
Portal frame load cases

This form lets you view the primary and combination load cases.
The 4 internal wind pressure primary load cases (cases 4 to 7) are for the ultimate limit state
and apply to a Cp,i pressure coefficient of 1.0. The 8 external wind pressure primary load
cases (cases 8 to 15) are also for the ultimate limit state and are based on the actual Cp,e
pressure coefficients. Along with dead load and live load, they are factored into the various
combination load cases for ultimate and serviceability limit states.
You can add extra combination load cases to this table, however it is sometimes easier to do
this in the main SPACE GASS combination load cases datasheet once the model has been
generated.
234
Portal frame design

This form lets you input the steel member design parameters.
The data is the same as in the steel member design input form but with some fields disabled.
For more information, refer to Steel member design data.
Once the model has been generated, please check the steel member design data that was
generated and check that it is what you want. If not, you can edit it using the normal steel
member design data input/editing methods.
235
Portal frame assumptions

The following is a list of assumptions made in the current version of the portal frame builder.
1. Impact loading from wind borne debris (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 2.5.8) is not
taken into account.
2. The wind direction multiplier Md (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 3.3) is assumed to be
0.95 for regions B, C and D, and 1.0 for all other regions and wind directions.
3. The permeable cladding reduction factor Kp (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 5.4.5) is
assumed to be 1.0.
4. Frictional drag forces (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 5.5) are not taken into account.
5. The dynamic response factor Cdyn (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 6) is assumed to be
1.0.
6. The wind load applied to the triangular part just below the roof in the end walls of
gable buildings is not taken into account if there are no end wall rafter props.
7. The distributed live load is applied to the entire roof area, even if the roof area is
greater than 200m^2.
8. The 1.4kN concentrated live load specified in AS/NZS 1170.1 (but not in conjunction
with the distributed live load - see AS/NZS 1170.1 section 3.1) is not applied.
236
Datasheet Input
Datasheet input
You can open a datasheet by clicking the
toolbar button and then selecting from the
datasheet menu that appears. Alternatively, you can select one of the datasheet items from the
Structure, Loads or Design menus.
Datasheet input is the one of the most useful methods of entering data into SPACE GASS. All
types of frame and steel design data can be input or edited via a datasheet.
For more information about operating the datasheets, refer to Using datasheets.
237
Using datasheets
All datasheets have the same format, appearing in a grid format like a spreadsheet. The
members datasheet is shown below.
Common datasheet operations

Sorting the data on any column
Click the column heading to sort on. Further clicks cause

the sorting to alternate between ascending and
descending order.
Frozen key columns
Allows you to scroll the main data sideways without

scrolling the key columns so that you can always see
which row you are working on. In the members
datasheet, the "Member" column is the key column.
Multi-row editing
Possibly one of the most useful datasheet editing tools! It

allows you to edit multiple rows of data simultaneously.
The procedure is as follows:
1. Select the rows to be edited by clicking the
buttons at the left end of the rows, using the
CTRL or SHIFT keys to highlight multiple rows
(see "Selecting rows" below).
2. Move in any highlighted row to the column you
want to edit.
3. Click the right mouse button.
4. Enter your data, select between replacing,
238
Datasheet Input
multiplying, dividing, adding or subtracting and
then click the Ok button.
5. All the highlighted rows will be updated.
6. Go back to step 2 above to edit another column.
Split screen
Move to the small black bar just to the left of the

horizontal scroll arrow, click and drag it to the right to
introduce and position a vertical split screen division.
Grouping
Drag a column heading button upwards to group the

datasheet by that column. Drag additional buttons
upwards to group in multiple levels.
Right click on any of the grouped buttons and select
"Clear Grouping" to cancel the grouping and put the
datasheet back to normal.
Editing existing data
Move to the desired cell using the keyboard or mouse

and then type in or select the desired data.
Entering new data
Move to the bottom (blank) row and then type in or

select the desired data.
Uniformly distributed loads
After entering the start load magnitude for a new load in

a distributed load datasheet, the finish load magnitude is
automatically set to the same as the start load, saving you
having to enter the load magnitude twice for uniformly
239

distributed loads. For existing loads this doesn't happen
because the datasheet assumes that you are trying to
specify a trapezoidal load. You can, however, make it
happen when editing existing loads by typing into the
start load cell as normal and then pressing the "F" key to
"Fill" the finish load cell with the same value as the start
load.
Combo boxes
To edit combo box cells, either click the arrow and then
make your selection or just use the keyboard arrow keys
to move to the combo box cell and then type the first
character of the desired selection. For example, to change
a Yes/No combo box to Yes, just move to the cell and
then type Y.
Selecting rows
Click the button to the left of the row to be selected.

You can select multiple rows by:
1. Dragging up or down the selection buttons.
2. Selecting one row, holding down the CTRL key
and then selecting additional rows.
3. Selecting one row, holding down the SHIFT key
and then clicking on another selection button to
select all the rows in between.
Alternatively, you can click the blank button at the topleft corner of the datasheet to select all the rows.
Cutting, copying and pasting
Cut or copy selected rows from a datasheet to any other

Windows program or paste from another Windows
program into a datasheet.
Duplicating rows
Rows of data can be duplicated using the normal copy

and paste methods, however some datasheets such as
section properties contain hidden fields that would not be
duplicated using these methods. For example, all the
geometric data for shape builder sections is stored in
hidden fields. To ensure that the hidden fields are
duplicated the following procedure can be used:
1. Select the rows to be duplicated and then click
the right mouse button on one of the buttons at
the left end of the selected rows.
2. Select "Duplicate Rows" from the menu that
appears.
3. Change the numbers of the duplicates via the
"Paste Overwrite Error" form that appears so that
the duplicates do not simply overwrite the
selected rows.
The duplicate rows will be inserted into the datasheet.
Deleting rows
Select the rows to be deleted and then press the Delete

key or click the datasheets delete button or click the
right mouse button and select Delete from the menu that
appears.
240
Datasheet Input
Special buttons
Special buttons on some of the datasheets allow you to

quickly change specific data in the current row. For
example, the special fixity buttons in the members
datasheet (shown left) let you choose commonly used
fixity codes without having to type them in.
Counter
A counter at the bottom-right corner of the datasheet tells

you how many rows of data are in the datasheet.
Generation
The generate button on some datasheets allows you to

generate a number of extra items (members, nodes, etc.).
When you click the generate button you will be
presented with a generation form which varies for each
type of input. Most of the generation forms are selfexplanatory, however some of them employ 2nd order
generation which is explained below.
Note that it is often better and more convenient
to use the graphical Copy tool for generating
data rather than using the datasheet generate
buttons.
Generation
The above node generation form allows you to generate items along two axes at once. It can
also be used to generate extra series at different levels (ie. the 2nd order).
Consider the following 20 node grid in the XY plane. It could have been created by inputting
the coordinates for node 1 then generating four 1st order nodes (5,9,13 & 17) along a line
with a node increment of 4 and X increment of 2.4, followed by three 2nd order rows of nodes
with a node increment of 1 and a Y increment of -1.5.
241
Grid of generated nodes
If only 1st order generation is required, you should specify zero for the number of 2nd order
items to be generated.
The node generation form also has the unique ability to generate nodes along a line, arc or
helix.
The axis of rotation, which only applies to an arc or helix, defines the point about which the
nodes will be generated. The angle increment causes the nodes to be generated at some
regular angle increment.
The helix length increment defines a regular increment along a parametric path at which the
nodes will be generated.
2nd order generation is also employed in the member and member concentrated load
datasheets.
Renumbering data
Any data can be renumbered by simply changing its number in a datasheet. However, be
careful, because related data in other datasheets will not be automatically renumbered to
match. A better way to renumber nodes, members or plates is to use the graphics renumber
tool. It not only lets you renumber large groups of nodes, members and plates effortlessly, it
also adjusts all of the restraints, constraints, loads, and design data automatically to allow for
the new numbering sequence (see also Renumber).
A convenient way to quickly move around and edit numeric
cells in a datasheet is to use the keyboard arrow keys to move to the desired cell, type the new
data, then use the keyboard arrow keys to move to the next cell. You do not have to press
ENTER to accept the new data.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
When you use a datasheet to renumber items, none of the other data which may reference
the renumbered items is adjusted. You must do this yourself or use the renumber tool
instead (as explained above).
See also Analysis data.
242
Datasheet Input
See also Steel member design data.
See also Steel connection design data.
243
Graphical Input
Graphical overview
Inputting and editing your model using graphical methods is one of the most useful and
intuitive input methods. You can see exactly what is in your model and you can see the
changes as you make them. Nodes, members and plates can simply be drawn on the screen,
and there are numerous tools for copying, renumbering, stretching, moving, generating loads
and otherwise manipulating your model.
The renderer window (shown below) is the default user interface for SPACE GASS, however
the traditional graphics window (for those of you who prefer the older system) is also
available. Because the renderer window has superior graphics and tools compared to the
traditional system there is generally need to use the traditional user interface at all.
245
The renderer
The SPACE GASS renderer is now the recommended tool for all of your input, analysis,
design and display tools. Of course you can still edit your model in the traditional graphics
window, however the editing tools in the renderer are generally more advanced and offer
additional features over the traditional editing tools.
All of the data is shared between the renderer and the traditional graphics window and so you
can make changes in either one and then see your model updated in the other one as soon as it
gets focus.
The renderer user interface is the one that starts by default, however you can also open it by
clicking the
button in the traditional graphics window.
Rendering mode
When in the renderer you can switch between wireframe, outline and rendered views of your
model by clicking the render mode selection button.
246
Graphical Input
Zoom, pan, rotate
You can zoom, pan or rotate your model via the mouse scrollwheel or by dragging it around
using the left or right mouse buttons as shown below.
Zoom by rotating the mousewheel or by holding down the mousewheel while moving the
mouse or by pressing the keyboard Up/Down arrow keys. If you find that zooming doesnt
work, click on the graphics area before trying again.
Pan by holding down the right mouse button while moving the mouse.
Rotate by holding down the left mouse button while moving the mouse. You can also drag the
view selector (shown below) or click on one of its faces, edges or corners.
The view selector

An alternative to rotating the model by dragging it around directly is to drag the view selector
around. You can also click one of the view selector faces, edges or corners to go straight to a
specific viewpoint. If you click on the small square attached to the front face it will take you
to the 30,10 viewpoint.
Note that you can also right-click one of the view selector faces to change the working plane
(or press X, Y or Z while you are working).
Node, member and plate property panels

The property panels operate in two slightly different modes as described below.
Mode 1 - When you double-click on a node, member or plate in the model, the appropriate
property panel opens and you can make changes and then click the Ok button at the bottom of
the panel to confirm the changes. Alternatively, if you make some changes in a property panel
and then simply click on a another node, member or plate in your model, the previous changes
will be confirmed and the newly selected item's data will appear in the property panel.
247

Mode 2 - If you select one or more nodes, members or plates and then right-click and select
"View/Edit Properties (Form)" from the menu that appears, the appropriate panel will open
with the combined data for all of the selected items. When in this mode, you cannot select
other nodes, members or plates until you have clicked the Ok or Cancel buttons at the bottom
of the panel. Blank fields indicate that the data is different for the selected items. Be careful
with blank fields because if you enter data into one of them then all of the selected items will
get that data.
Single selection
248
Multiple selection
Graphical Input
Section and material property panels

The section and material property panels are located by default on the right hand side of the
renderer and are usually closed unless you have them pinned open. To open them simply
hover over the tab.
249
You can open the property panels to view the section and material properties and color match
them to the members in your model, or you can click a particular section or material in the
panel to have all the matching members in your model selected.
Controlling property panels

changes to
it changes to
250
Graphical Input
Drawing in the renderer

Once you are in a tool that involves drawing a line or vector, to begin drawing you must
position your cursor at the start of the line, click the left mouse button, move the cursor to the
other end of the line and then click the left mouse button again. The line is dragged around
with the cursor as you position the second point. The end of the first line then becomes the
start of the next line and the process continues for subsequent lines until you press Esc or
click the right mouse button (right-click) to end the sequence.
There are a number of working plane, attachment, alignment and snap tools available to help
you position points exactly where you want them while drawing or selecting points. These are
explained as follows.
251
Working plane tool

At any time while drawing lines or just generally moving the mouse cursor, you can see its
coordinates displayed in the bottom right-hand corner of the renderer. Depending on the
current working plane, you will notice that only two of the coordinates change as you move
the mouse and the third one is held constant. You can change the working plane by pressing
the X, Y or Z keys or by right-clicking one of the view selector faces or by clicking the
working plane button
in the bottom toolbar.
Note that whenever you graphically select a point or a node, the working plane moves to the
plane of that point or node. If you have a grid displayed (see below), it is drawn in the current
working plane.

The following discussion applies to all tools that involve selecting points or drawing vectors,
such as when drawing nodes, members or plates, moving, stretching, copying, extending,
connecting or even when adding dimensions. During these operations there are a number of
aligning, snapping and attachment tools that can help.
To attach to a node (or the end of a member or the vertex of a plate), just move close to the
node until it changes color. This indicates that you are close enough, and you can then click
the left mouse button to attach to it.
To attach to an intermediate point on a member, just move close to the member until it
changes color. You can then move along the member to find its mid-point, third points,
quarter points or fifth points, each of which will show up as a different colored dot with a
label next to it. You can then click to attach to the desired point.
Note that if you wish to position a point close to a node or member without attaching to it, you
can hold down the C key to temporarily turn off the attachment feature.
252
Graphical Input
If you are drawing the second end of a line then "Perpendicular" and "Orthogonal" attachment
points will also be highlighted on the member if applicable.
You can even align your point with an orthogonal line extending from a node or a member's
midpoint. In order to do this you must first briefly hover over the node or member until you
hear a faint pop sound that indicates that you have "locked on" to it. You can then move away
and a dotted line will extend from the "locked on" node or member to your point, allowing
you to line up with it exactly.
Note that you can temporarily turn off alignment with locked on nodes or members by holding
down the A key while you are working. You can also change the "locked on" delay via the
"Lock delay" setting in the Attachment and alignment methods Preferences form in the
Settings menu (see below).
Similarly, you can align your point with any of the "locked on" member's three local axes as
shown below.
253
You can even use it to draw a new member that is aligned with an existing member by
"locking on" to the existing member and then drawing in line with it.
When aligning with a locked on node or member, you can position your point an exact
distance from the locked on item by simply typing the distance rather than having to click the
point with your mouse.
254
Graphical Input
When drawing a line, if it is close to being aligned with one of the three global axes then it
will snap to that axis. You can then either click the point with your mouse or you can just type
the length of your line.
Snap tool
The renderer also has a snap tool which can be turned on or off via the snap button
bottom of the side toolbar or by pressing the S key.
in the
Positioning points using the keyboard

In addition to being able to type a length when you are locked on to an item or aligned with a
global axis as described above, you can also type an X,Y,Z coordinate to position your point
if you are not locked on to an item or aligned with an axis. Coordinates can be entered as
absolute or relative and in cartesian or polar coordinates. Examples of each of these are as
follows:
255
Type
Alignment
vector
length
Drawn
line length
Absolute
cartesian
Relative
cartesian
Absolute
polar
Relative
polar
Situation
Locked to
a node or
member
Aligned
with a
global
axis
Not
locked or
aligned
Not
locked or
aligned
Not
locked or
aligned
Not
locked or
aligned
Format
Length
Example
10.2
Length
6.75
X,Y,Z
1.2,2.4,0.9
@X,Y,Z
@0,0,6.35
Length<VertAngle<HorAngle
6.5<45<0
@Length<VertAngle<HorAngle @10<30<0
For more information, refer to Using the keyboard to position points.
Selection methods
You can select nodes, members or plates directly by clicking them with the left mouse button
or you can use a selection window. If the second corner of the selection is to the right of the
first then it is a "Normal" selection window in which only the nodes, members or plates that
fall completely within the window are selected. Alternatively, if the second corner is to the
left of the first then it is a "Crossing" selection window in which any nodes, members or
plates that are within the window or which cross the boundary of the window are selected. A
normal selection window is drawn as a rectangular box, whereas a crossing window is shown
as a filled rectangle. The two types of selection window are shown below.
In order to de-select nodes, members or plates, you can simply select them again, either by
clicking directly or by using a selection window.
Normal selection window
256
Graphical Input
Crossing selection window
Selecting a tool
Once you have made your selection, you can get access to the various graphical tools by
right-clicking and then selecting from the menu that appears. A typical member selection
menu is shown below.
257
258
Graphical Input
After selecting from the menu, the tool you selected may open a form or it may require you to
pick extra points. For example, if you selected the "Generate Arc" tool from the above menu,
the Arc tool would then require you to pick a point on the concave side of the arc so that it
knows which direction to use when creating the arc. Whenever the graphical editor requires
you to do something, it displays a red prompt at the bottom-left corner of the window as
shown below. It is therefore a good idea to look there if you are not sure what to do next.
Grid tool
A grid can be displayed as a visual aid while you are developing or viewing your model. The
grid also assists in identifying the working plane, as it is always displayed in that plane. The
grid can be turned on or off via the grid button
pressing the G key.
in the bottom of the side toolbar or by
Note that if you change your working plane (see above) then the grid automatically moves to
that new plane.
259
Restraints
Node restraints can be turned on or off in the renderer using the
button in the side
toolbar. Restraints are shown using combinations of the following icons.
Icon Restraint Example
3D fixed FFFFFF
3D pinned FFFRRR
2D fixed
FFRRRF
2D pinned FFRRRR
1D
translation
fixed
1D
translation
spring
1D
rotation
fixed
1D
rotation
spring
RFRRRR
RSRRRR
RRRRRF
RRRRRS
Shortcuts
While using any of the renderer tools, various keyboard shortcuts are available that can speed
things up. They are listed below.
Shortcut
Tab key
F11 key
G key
S key
X, Y or Z
keys
A key (hold
down)
C key (hold
down)
Action
Toggles all of the property
panels on or off
Toggles full screen mode on
or off
Toggles the grid on or off
Toggles the snap on or off
Allows you to set the
working plane
Temporarily disables
aligning with a "locked on"
node or member
Temporarily disables
attaching to a node or
member
Zooms in/out
Up/Down
arrow keys
Rotate
Zooms in/out
mousewheel
Drag with left Rotates
mouse button
Drag with
Pans
260
Graphical Input
right mouse
button
All of the toolbars in the renderer can be hidden/shown, moved or undocked, and buttons can
be added or deleted. For more information refer to Customizing Toolbars.
Renderer settings and preferences

Various renderer settings and preferences are available from the Settings menu as shown
below.

The "Alignment proximity" controls how close the mouse cursor must be to an axis aligned
with a "locked on" node or member or a global axis in order to align with it.
The "Cursor pickbox size" controls how close the mouse cursor must be to a node, member or
plate in order to select it, lock onto it or display its infotip.
The "Lock delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node or member before
you lock onto it.
261

The "Use previous attributes..." option, if ticked, means that when you draw a new node,
member or plate it will have the same properties (ie. section ID, material ID, etc) as the
previous item you drew or selected.
The "Allow duplicates..." option lets you draw members or plates on top of existing members
or plates (ie. so that they share the same nodes).
The "Allow hidden nodes to be selectable" option allows you to select nodes that you can't see
due to being behind other objects.
The "Automatically prompt for new load case titles" option enables load case titles to be
prompted for automatically each time a new load case is created.
The "Anti-aliasing" option gives graphical text a smooth appearance by changing the color of
pixels around the edges of the text.
The "Order independent transparency (OIT)" option enables true (fully accurate)
transparency for the display of transparent objects. If unticked (required by some older
graphics cards) then the transparency is unsorted, resulting in some transparent objects
appearing to be in front of objects that they should be behind.
The "Support multiprocessor for RC beam design" option allows multiple zones to be
designed/checked simultaneously during a reinforced concrete beam design.
The "Use OpenGL for graphical forms" option controls the system used to display graphical
objects in forms such as the shape builder, moving loads generator, steel connection design
module, reinforced concrete design modules, portal frame builder, etc. If unticked then
DirectX is used. Note that this setting doesn't affect the graphical system used in the main
renderer window.
The "Disable OpenGL shaders" option should be unticked for maximum graphical speed in
the renderer. If ticked (required for some older graphics cards) then the renderer uses a slow
software emulation mode to display graphical objects rather than utilizing the parallel
processing power of the graphics card. This option should only be ticked when the renderer
becomes unstable due to an old or incompatible graphics card being used.
262
Graphical Input
The "Default deflection color" option, if ticked, means that when only one load case is
displayed, deflections are shown by member color rather than load case color. If unticked or if
multiple load cases are displayed then deflections are colored by load case.
The "Curve quality" controls how many segments are used to display curved objects such as
cylinders and the like.
The "Result quality" controls how many short straight lines are used to approximate a curve
when drawing deflected shapes, bending moment diagrams, etc.
The "Structure line width" is the thickness of lines used to draw the structure when in
wireframe or outline modes.
The "Diagram line width" is the thickness of lines used to draw diagrams such as bending
moment diagrams, etc.
The "Maximum undo/redo steps" is the number of undo/redo steps that are remembered in the
renderer. More memory is consumed if this setting is increased.
The "Highlight delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node, member or
plate before it becomes highlighted. Note that this setting has no effect over whether the node,
member or plate is attached to when drawing new objects.
The "Infotip delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node, member or plate
before its infotip appears.
The "Maximum load case components" is used to prevent memory overflow problems with
large models that contain many load cases by limiting how many load cases can be displayed
simultaneously. A "component" is considered to be a single diagram (eg. a load, a bending
moment diagram, a shear force diagram, etc) on a single node, member or plate. If you
experience memory problems when you try to display loads or analysis results graphically for
many load cases simultaneously then you may need to lower this limit. Conversely, if your
system has substantial memory and you are being restricted to an insufficient number of load
cases when displaying loads or analysis results graphically then you could experiment with
raising this limit.
The "Rotation drag distance" is the number of pixels that you can move the mouse while the
left button is held down before it will start to rotate the model. It is used to avoid the problem
of the model rotating unintentionally when you are trying to select items or start a selection
window. If this problem occurs then try increasing the rotation drag distance slightly.
The "Rotation mode" controls how the model behaves when you rotate it with the mouse.
Trackball mode lets the model rotate about all three axes, whereas Turntable mode prevents
rotation about an axis normal to your computer screen. Trackball mode is a bit harder to
control than Turntable.
The "Rotate at" setting controls the centre of rotation when you rotate the model by dragging
with the left mouse button held down.
263
The following form lets you can change the theme of the renderer via the "Skin" setting. This
affects the colors and styles of all the forms, buttons and input fields. You can also separately
change the colors of most the items in your model to suit your requirements.
264
Graphical Input
In the following form you can control the color and threshold of each pass or fail level when
displaying steel member design results.
265
The size of the text displayed on the screen and in graphical prints can be controlled in the
following form.
The "Other" menu option gives you access to some of the configuration settings normally
found only in the traditional SPACE GASS window as follows:
266
Graphical Input
For further information on each of these options, refer to "Folders and files", "Text
formatting", "General configuration" and "Problem size limits".
In particular, if you wish to change the vertical axis you should choose
"Settings => Other => General Configuration".Other renderer tools
Other features and tools currently available in the renderer are as follows:
Printing of your rendered or wireframe model.
Exporting to other image formats such as DWG, DXF, IGES or STL.
Undo/redo with unlimited steps.
Shape builder.
Library editor.
Structure wizard.
Portal frame builder.
Find tool.
Draw tool
Copy node, member or plate properties tool.
Filters tool.
Move tool.
Rotate tool.
Copy tool.
Mirror tool.
Stretch tool.
Scale tool.
Renumber tool.
Check connectivity tool.
Generate arc tool.
Generate bends tool.
Subdivide tool.
Intersect tool.
Extend tool.
Extrude tool.
Connect tool.
Remove intermediate nodes tool.
Remove crossed member nodes tool.
Move intermediate nodes tool.
Align members tool.
Generate taper/haunch tool.
Reverse member direction tool.
Mesh plates tool.
Reverse plate direction tool.
Align plate axes tool.
Copy node, member or plate loads tool.
Generate moving loads tool
Generate area loads tool.
Combination load cases editor.
Manage load cases tool.
Static load to mass conversion tool.
Load case titles viewer.
View manager tool.
Measure tool.
Dimension tool.
Gridlines tool.
267

Notes tool.
Query analysis and steel member design result tools.
If you have a large model with loads displayed and the renderer is operating slowly
when you zoom, pan or rotate, try turning off the loads display or at least select less load
cases to be displayed simultaneously.
268
Graphical Input
The traditional graphics window

This is the original graphical interface for SPACE GASS that is gradually being replaced by
The renderer. It is still available, however not recommended due to the more advanced tools
available in the renderer graphical interface. You can open the traditional graphics window
via the renderer's Window menu => Open Traditional SPACE GASS Window.
The process of inputting a frame graphically into SPACE GASS simply involves drawing
lines on the screen with your mouse. Each line represents a member or the edge of a plate.
Nodes are automatically attached to the ends of each member, at plate vertices and at points
where members intersect. Node, member and plate numbering is performed automatically, or
at your discretion. The graphics renumber facility lets you renumber nodes and/or members,
and automatically adjusts all the other data that references nodes and/or members accordingly.
In order to draw a line, you must position your cursor at the start of the line, click the left
mouse button, move the cursor to the other end of the line and then click the left mouse button
again. The line is dragged around with the cursor as you position the second point. The end of
the first line then becomes the start of the next line and the process continues for subsequent
lines until you press ESC or click the right mouse button (right-click) to end the sequence.
If the end of a member is drawn so that it touches another member, the two members become
connected. If attach is on then you only have to position a member close to another member in
order to connect them. If you connect a member to an intermediate point along an existing
member, the existing member is subdivided into two, and a node is automatically inserted at
the intersection point.
269

Nodes, members and plates can be deleted, moved, copied, rotated, stretched, mirrored or
subdivided. It is simply a matter of selecting a node, member or plate, or placing a window
around a group of nodes, members and plates, and then performing the desired operation in
accordance with the instructions following in this chapter. If you want to move a single node,
you can just select it with your mouse and then drag it to its new location. You can see the
members connected to the node being stretched as you move the node.
normal selection window is drawn with a solid line, whereas a crossing window is drawn with
a dashed line. The two types of selection window are shown below.
In order to de-select nodes, members or plates, you can simply select them again, either by
270
Graphical Input
Once you have made your selection, you can get access to the various graphical tools by
right-clicking and then selecting from the menu that appears. A typical member selection
menu is shown below.
271
After selecting from the menu, the tool you selected may open a form or it may require you to
pick extra points. For example, if you selected the "Generate Arc" tool from the above menu,
the Arc tool would then require you to pick a point on the concave side of the arc so that it
knows which direction to use when creating the arc. Whenever the graphical editor requires
you to do something, it displays a red prompt at the bottom-left corner of the window as
shown below. It is therefore a good idea to look there if you are not sure what to do next.
272
Graphical Input
Positioning points accurately in the traditional graphics window

In order to input a structure graphically you have to be able to position the graphics cursor
accurately. Unless you have the steady hands of a surgeon and you are an expert with the
mouse, this is virtually impossible. Therefore, SPACE GASS has a number of indispensable
tools that enable you to draw a structure to the nearest micron regardless of your surgical
abilities.
All of these tools can be accessed via the settings menu or activated, deactivated and/or
configured using the graphics settings buttons across the bottom of the screen and/or the
keyboard. All of these settings can be toggled without interrupting the use of most graphics
tools.
[Keyboard "G"] Clicking the Grid button displays a grid of dots on the
screen at any user defined spacing. If the grid has been activated the grid button will appear
depressed and instead of the text "Grid: Off" the button will display a message "Grid: x",
where x is the spacing you defined. The grid can lie in the XY, XZ or YZ planes.
See also Grid.
[Keyboard "S"] The Snap facility, if turned on, activates a secondary
crosshair graphics cursor which indicates the actual selection point and which moves in
discrete steps rather than moving smoothly. The snap spacing can be set equal to the grid
spacing or any other desired value. As with the Grid button, if you activate the Snap button
and enter a spacing at the prompt the text on the button will change from "Snap: Off" to
"Snap: x", where x is the spacing you defined.
For example, if you set the snap spacing to 100mm the cursor will move in steps of 100mm,
enabling you to draw to an accuracy of exactly 100mm. The button will indicate that snap has
been set to 100mm by displaying the text "Snap: 100" (if units are set as mm). You can
change the snap spacing as you move the cursor. SPACE GASS automatically senses when
SNAP is not required and turns it off temporarily in such cases.
See also Snap.
[Keyboard "O"] The Ortho tool forces lines to be drawn either horizontally or
vertically. Since structures are made up predominantly of horizontal beams and vertical
columns, it is a very useful tool indeed.
See also Ortho.
[Keyboard "A"] The Attach facility displays an aperture circle with the
graphics cursor and allows you to attach to existing members by simply picking points near
them. The aperture circle indicates how close you must get to a member in order to attach to
it. It is very useful for attaching new members to existing members or for locating points
which are at the ends of members.
See also Attach.
[Keyboard "X,Y,Z and P"] The Plane facility allows you to change the current
drawing plane. You will be able to select the drawing plane (choice of XY - "Z", YZ - "X"
and XZ - "Y") as well as specifying an offset. An offset is the distance from a virtual plane to
the specified plane, the distance being measured perpendicular to the virtual plane. For
273

example, selecting the XY plane with an offset of 5m will result in every node being created
with coordinates of x,y,5.
See also Plane.
[Keyboard "C"] The Coordinates facility allows you to toggle between
one of four coordinate systems. The different systems available are:
Cartesian
Cartesian-Relative
Polar
Polar-Relative
The text display at the bottom right corner of the screen will constantly change to reflect the
position of the graphics cursor on the screen. The format of this text is governed by the
coordinates system you have selected. Selecting the "Off" option switches all coordinates
systems off and disables the coordinates display text.
See also Coordinates.
The keyboard can also be used to position points precisely. You simply type in the
coordinates of the point using cartesian or polar coordinates in absolute or relative modes
(depending upon the coordinates system selected). Note that there is no icon or button for this
tool. You just need to type a number and the coordinates input form will appear
automatically.
See also Using the keyboard to position points.
See also The renderer.
Other tools
There are also a number of other tools that are of great use when inputting data graphically.
The query frame facility (see also Node properties, Member properties and Plate properties)
allows you to point to a node, member or plate and obtain information about node
coordinates, member end fixities, section properties, material properties, etc. You can also
query analysis results and steel member design results.
You can use the zoom, pan and viewpoint facilities to view the structure in different ways.
Zoom allows you to zoom in on a portion of the structure and have it enlarged for a detailed
inspection. Pan allows you to translate the structure in any direction on the screen. Viewpoint
allows you to rotate your viewpoint to any position around the structure.
There are a host of additional tools which allow you to scale the structure or diagrams to any
desired value, show the rendered model, superimpose loading diagrams, displacement
diagrams, bending moment diagrams, shear force diagrams, axial force diagrams, torsion
diagrams, reactions, stress diagrams, envelopes and dynamic mode shapes, display steel
connection drawings, show local axes, restraints, constraints, offsets, top flanges, etc.
You can also set up a number of filters, each of which limits the amount of the model that you
can see and work on. The contents of each filter can be based on a range of axis coordinates,
node properties, member properties, load types and many other selection criteria that you can
control. Filters can also be selected in the output reports so that they can be quickly
customized to include exactly what you want to see.
274
Graphical Input
Searching for specific nodes, members or plates is easy with the find function. You can search
for nodes, members or plates directly, or by reference to their properties.
All aspects of what you see on the graphics screen can be saved as views that can be named
and then recalled at any time. All filters, viewpoint, scales, zoom, pan and other settings
applicable at the time the view is saved are recalled when the saved view is recalled.
Many of the above mentioned procedures are identical in the renderer, however some of them
are not and some renderer tools have more options available. For more information, refer to
The renderer.
275
Align members
It is easy to align or stack members using the render's "Align Members" tool.
After selecting the members to be adjusted, right-click and select "Align members" from the
menu that appears and then click another member to align them with. In the form that appears
you can then choose to align the members according to their tops, bottoms or sides.
Alternatively, you can stack members side by side or on top of one another using the "Stack"
options.
In the before and after diagrams below, the blue beam has been adjusted to align with the red
beam's top flange.
276
Graphical Input
277
Align plate axes

You can use this tool to align the local axes of a number of plates. After you have drawn and
meshed some plates, you will probably find that their local axes are all pointing in different
directions. If they are left this way then the results will be for different axis directions and
they will be difficult to compare. It will also be difficult to produce meaningful contour
diagrams if the plate axes are not aligned.
After selecting the plates to be aligned, right-click and select "Align Plate Axes" from the
menu that appears. You should then click a plate that the selected plates are to be aligned
with.
Options include allowing plates to be reversed (ie. the direction of their local z-axes are
reversed), letting plates that are currently aligned with a direction node or axis to be realigned, and adjusting pressure or thermal gradient loads for reversed plates.
278
Graphical Input
Arc generation
The Arc generation tool lets you apply an arc to any member by adding intermediate nodes
with any desired radius and arc plane.
After selecting the members to be converted to an arc, right-click and select "Generate Arc"
from the menu that appears. You should then pick any point on the concave side of the
member so that the tool knows which way to bend the arc.
If you have selected multiple members connected end-to-end and the "Generate continuous
arc over multiple connected members" option is ticked then the Arc tool will try to generate a
continuous arc that encompasses all of the connected members. This is particularly handy if
you have already generated an arc and then wish to re-select it and change its radius. With this
option unticked, a separate arc will be generated for each selected member.
279
Area loads
One-way or two-way area loads can be generated by specifying a pressure that is applied to a
roof or a floor or any other set of members that can form closed or open polygons. The
pressure loads are converted to member distributed forces calculated from the contributing
area of each member. You can select many members that form multiple open or closed areas
and the area loading tool will process them all at once.
Two-way loads require closed areas formed by three or more perimeter members and the
generated member loads are based on the load surface spanning in two directions, generally
resulting in a mixture of uniform, triangular and trapezoidal loads.
One-way loads don't require closed areas and the generated loads are based on the load
surface spanning in just one direction, resulting in uniformly distributed loads if the
supporting members are parallel, or trapezoidal if the supporting members are not parallel.
After selecting the desired members to be loaded, right-click and then select "Generate Area
Loads" from the menu that appears.
280
Graphical Input
281

For one-way area loads, if you click the "View Dummy Members" button in the one-way area
loading form shown below, you can visually see the dummy members that effectively "close"
the open polygons on which the one-way loads are based. Of course, the "dummy" members
don't exist and don't attract any load.
"Projected" areas results in the loads being based on the projected areas normal to the load
direction, whereas "Actual" areas cause the generated loads to be based on the actual areas
regardless of the load direction.
The load direction can be parallel to one of the global axes or along any vector that you
specify. You can select the load direction vector graphically by clicking the "Select Vector"
button.
If the "Generate loads normal to area in general load direction" option is ticked then the
pressure is applied in the general load direction that you have specified, but normal to each
polygon. This is handy if you have a pitched roof and you want to apply a generally vertical
wind load that is normal to the roof on both sides of the ridge.
The "Generate uniformly distributed forces only" option forces the pressure applied to a
polygon to be applied uniformly to each member rather than as triangular or trapezoidal loads.
The "Check for crossing members" option checks for members that cross over each other
which could result in areas that overlap. This check should normally be left on.
If the area loader generates loads on members that already contain loads in the same load case
or if it generates multiple overlapping loads on the same member then the "Merge loads with
matching start and finish positions" option will try to merge the loads rather than having two
sets of loads with different sub-load numbers. This makes it easier to see the loads when they
are viewed graphically. If this option is turned off then when identical loads are generated on
a single member it might be difficult to differentiate between them when they are viewed
graphically.
The "Ignore member offsets when calculating areas" option treats the members as if they have
no offsets and could result in slightly inaccurate results if the member offsets affect the shape
or size of the area. It should only be ticked if the area loader is unable to find the desired areas
due to member offsets.
282
Graphical Input
Attach
This tool is only available in the traditional graphics window. The renderer has other
attachment tools that replicate the function of this Attach tool.
The attach tool lets you attach nodes, members, plates and reference points to existing nodes,
members or plates without having to position the cursor exactly on them.
You can change the attach setting by clicking on the
toolbar button or
selecting "Attach Mode" from the Settings menu or pressing "SHIFT+CTRL+A" on the
keyboard (or just "A" if a graphics command is active).
If ATTACH is on (as indicated on the toggle button above), the program displays an aperture
circle with the graphics cursor and allows you to attach to existing nodes members when you
pick points near them. The aperture circle indicates how close you must get to a node,
member or plate in order to attach to it. The point of attachment depends on the ATTACH
setting.
The settings that may be displayed on the attach button are:

Off:
Middle/End:
Nearest/End:
Function is deactivated.
Attaches to the middle or the end, whichever is
closest.
Attaches to the nearest point or, if an end falls
283
n%/End:
Middle:
Nearest:
Orthogonal:
Perpendicular:
within the aperture circle, attaches to the end.

Attaches to a point at the nearest n% increment
along the member, or the end, whichever is
closest.
Attaches to the middle.
Attaches to the nearest point.
Attaches to a point that makes the line being
drawn exactly horizontal or vertical.
Attaches to a point that makes the line being
drawn perpendicular to the member being
attached to.
For example, if you draw a new member and wish to attach it to the end of an existing
member, you can simply set ATTACH to "MIDDLE/END" and then locate the start of the
new member near the end of the existing member. The two members will be automatically
connected with a common node at the intersection point.
To connect a member to the mid point of another member ensure that ATTACH is set to
"MIDDLE" and then simply position the end of the first member to within the aperture circle
radius of the second member. The second member is automatically broken into two and a
node inserted at the intersection point.
The attach setting is only used if the aperture circle touches a node, member or plate.
284
Graphical Input

The following discussion applies to all tools that involve selecting points or drawing vectors,
such as when drawing nodes, members or plates, moving, stretching, copying, extending,
connecting or even when adding dimensions. During these operations there are a number of
aligning, snapping and attachment tools that can help.
To attach to a node (or the end of a member or the vertex of a plate), just move close to the
node until it changes color. This indicates that you are close enough, and you can then click
the left mouse button to attach to it.
To attach to an intermediate point on a member, just move close to the member until it
changes color. You can then move along the member to find its mid-point, third points,
quarter points or fifth points, each of which will show up as a different colored dot with a
label next to it. You can then click to attach to the desired point.
Note that if you wish to position a point close to a node or member without attaching to it, you
can hold down the C key to temporarily turn off the attachment feature.
If you are drawing the second end of a line then "Perpendicular" and "Orthogonal" attachment
points will also be highlighted on the member if applicable.
You can even align your point with an orthogonal line extending from a node or a member's
midpoint. In order to do this you must first briefly hover over the node or member until you
hear a faint pop sound that indicates that you have "locked on" to it. You can then move away
285

and a dotted line will extend from the "locked on" node or member to your point, allowing
you to line up with it exactly.
Note that you can temporarily turn off alignment with locked on nodes or members by holding
down the A key while you are working. You can also change the "locked on" delay via the
"Lock delay" setting in the Attachment and alignment methods Preferences form in the
renderer's Settings menu.
Similarly, you can align your point with any of the "locked on" member's three local axes as
shown below.
You can even use it to draw a new member that is aligned with an existing member by
"locking on" to the existing member and then drawing in line with it.
286
Graphical Input
When aligning with a locked on node or member, you can position your point an exact
distance from the locked on item by simply typing the distance rather than having to click the
point with your mouse.
When drawing a line, if it is close to being aligned with one of the three global axes then it
will snap to that axis. You can then either click the point with your mouse or you can just type
the length of your line.
287

For information about the grid, snap and working plane tools in the renderer, refer to Grid,
Snap and Plane.
For more information about using the keyboard to position points, refer to Using the keyboard
to position points.
For more information about operating the other tools in the renderer, refer to The renderer.
288
Graphical Input
Bends generation
This tool in the renderer allows you to generate bends of any radius between members that are
currently connected to each other.
After selecting the members to be adjusted, right-click and select "Generate Bends" from the
menu that appears. Each bend is approximated by a series of straight line segments and you
can specify the number of segments per 90 degrees in the form shown below. You can also
specify a threshold angle to stop bends being generated between members that are close to
being aligned in a straight line.
Note that a bend will not be generated between connected members if the angle is less than
the threshold angle, if the bend radius is too large or if there are more than two members or a
plate connected to the intersection node.
289

Combination load cases combine existing load cases to allow analysis of a structure with the
interaction of different loads. Combination load cases are given a load case number the same
as any other load case.
You can open the combination load cases grid by clicking the
shown below.
button in the top toolbar as
Existing combination load cases can be edited by typing into any cell. New combination load
cases can be added by typing into the blank line near the top of the grid.
By hovering over a column heading or a cell in any row, information about the load case will
be displayed including its title (if one exists).
The title for any combination load case can be directly input or edited via the "Title" column
in the datasheet, plus if you right-click on a column heading you can input or edit a primary or
combination load case's title or notes.
290
Graphical Input
If you have a large number of columns and you don't want to repeatedly scroll sideways to get
to the cells you need, you can condense the grid for any combination load case by simply
clicking the arrow to the left of the combination load case you are interested in. You can then
condense the grid for any other row or you can revert back to the default sorting by clicking
the * button near the top-left corner of the grid.
When creating combination load cases, if the columns you need are not included in the grid,
you can add them by clicking the "Add Columns" button near the top-right corner of the grid
and then listing the extra load cases required.
291

292
Graphical Input
Connect
The Connect tool allows you to connect members that cross each other within a specified
distance but which are not currently connected.
After selecting the members to be connected, right-click and select "Connect" from the menu
that appears. Members that cross each other within the tolerance you specify in the following
form will be connected.
After using the Connect tool, if you want to check that the members are properly
connected, you can use the "Connectivity" tool.
See also Intersect.
293
Connectivity check
The Connectivity tool lets you see graphically what is connected to a particular node, member
or plate. It is a very handy tool if you are not sure if certain nodes. members or plates are
properly connected. For example, it will quickly tell you if a member simply passes over a
node or if it is properly connected to it.
Right-click on a single node, member or plate and then select "Connectivity Check" from the
menu that appears. The nodes, members and plates that are connected to the selected item are
then highlighted graphically. You can then proceed to click on any other nodes, members or
plates in your model to check their connectivity.
294
Graphical Input
Coordinates
The Coordinates tool shows the position of the mouse cursor while you are drawing lines or
selecting points.
The renderer version
In the renderer, the coordinates tool is for display purposes only and cannot be changed to
relative or polar. It appears in the bottom right-hand corner of the renderer as shown below.
The traditional graphics window version

This tool not only allows you to view the mouse coordinates, but you can also cycle between
cartesian and polar coordinates using absolute or relative modes.
You can change the displayed coordinates by clicking the

toolbar
button or selecting "Coordinates Display" from the Settings menu or pressing
"SHIFT+CTRL+C" on the keyboard (or just "C" if a graphics command is active).
The current COORDINATES setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated
above).
Choices are:
Cartesian,
Cartesian-Relative,
Polar,
Polar-Relative,
Off.
When a graphics operation is active, the actual coordinates of the graphics cursor are
displayed at the bottom-right corner of the screen.
If you select the second corner of a window or line and the COORDINATES setting is in a
relative mode then the coordinates displayed are relative to the first point of the window or
line. Relative coordinates are the same as absolute coordinates when you select a single point
or the start of a line.
The COORDINATES setting does not restrict your choice of Cartesian, polar, absolute
and relative modes when inputting points from the keyboard. For example, you can enter a
point from the keyboard using polar coordinates even if the COORDINATES display is set to
Cartesian coordinates (see also Using the keyboard to position points).
295
Copy
The Copy tool allows you to copy members or plates in any straight line direction, or around
an arc or helix. This is very useful for structures such as trusses where you can draw just the
first panel and then make copies of it to build up the complete structure.
After selecting the members or plates to be copied, right-click and select "Copy to Locations",
"Copy along Line", "Copy along Arc" or "Copy along Helix" from the menu that appears.
If copying to locations, you should then pick a reference point on the items being copied, fill
out the form that appears below and then simply click wherever you want to the selected
items to be copied to. You can then continue to click additional locations to have the selected
items copied there too.
If copying along a line, you should then pick two points that represent the ends of a vector
through which the items are to be copied.
296
Graphical Input
If copying along an arc, you should then pick the center of the arc and then fill out the form
that appears below.
If copying along a helix, you should then pick the center of the helix arc and then fill out the
form that appears below.
Don't forget that when drawing in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or members, or
you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an orthogonal line or an
extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You can also align with one of the three
global axes. For more information, refer to Attachment and alignment methods. Remember
also that when drawing, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of
the desired point(s). For more information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".
297
After copying some members or plates, if you are not sure that they are properly
connected to other nodes, members or plates, you can use the "Connectivity" tool.
298
Graphical Input
Copy member loads

The Copy Node Loads tool lets you copy loads from a loaded member to a selection of
destination members.
After selecting the destination members, right-click and select "Copy Member Loads" from
the menu that appears. You should then click the source member, followed by specifying the
load cases that the loads are to be copied from in the form shown below.
If you tick the "Delete and replace loads on destination members for the specified load cases"
option then all pre-existing member loads on the selected destination members contained
within the selected load cases will be deleted first. If it is unticked then the loads being copied
will be added to the pre-existing loads.

The procedure is the reverse of the renderer procedure above. After selecting the source
member, right-click and select "Copy Member Loads" from the menu that appears. You
should then select the destination members, right-click and then select Ok to have the loads
copied. All pre-existing member loads on the selected destination members contained within
the selected load cases will be deleted and replaced by the copied loads.
299
Copy member properties

The Copy Member Properties tool lets you copy the member, section, material and offset
properties of a member to a selection of destination members.
After selecting the destination members, right-click and select "Copy Member Properties"
from the menu that appears. You should then click the source member, after which its
properties are copied to the destination members.
The procedure is the reverse of the renderer procedure above. After selecting the source
member, right-click and select "Copy Member Properties" from the menu that appears. You
should then select the destination members, right-click and then select Ok to have the
properties copied.
300
Graphical Input
Copy node loads

The Copy Node Loads tool lets you copy loads, prescribed displacements and lumped masses
from a loaded node to a selection of destination nodes.
After selecting the destination nodes, right-click and select "Copy Node Loads" from the
menu that appears. You should then click the source node, followed by specifying the load
cases that the loads are to be copied from in the form shown below.
If you tick the "Delete and replace loads on destination nodes for the specified load cases"
option then all pre-existing node loads, prescribed displacements and lumped masses on the
selected destination nodes contained within the selected load cases will be deleted first. If it is
unticked then the loads being copied will be added to the pre-existing loads.

The procedure is the reverse of the renderer procedure above. After selecting the source node,
right-click and select "Copy Node Loads" from the menu that appears. You should then select
the destination nodes, right-click and then select Ok to have the loads copied. All pre-existing
node loads, prescribed displacements and lumped masses on the selected destination nodes
contained within the selected load cases will be deleted and replaced by the copied loads.
301
Copy node properties

The Copy Node Properties tool lets you copy the restraint and master-slave constraint
properties of a node to a selection of destination nodes.
After selecting the destination nodes, right-click and select "Copy Node Properties" from the
menu that appears. You should then click the source node, after which its properties are
copied to the destination nodes.
The procedure is the reverse of the renderer procedure above. After selecting the source node,
right-click and select "Copy Node Properties" from the menu that appears. You should then
select the destination nodes, right-click and then select Ok to have the properties copied.
302
Graphical Input
Copy plate loads

The Copy Plate Loads tool lets you copy loads from a loaded plate to a selection of
destination plates.
After selecting the destination plates, right-click and select "Copy Plate Loads" from the
menu that appears. You should then click the source plate, followed by specifying the load
cases that the loads are to be copied from in the form shown below.
If you tick the "Delete and replace loads on destination plates for the specified load cases"
option then all pre-existing plate loads on the selected destination plates contained within the
selected load cases will be deleted first. If it is unticked then the loads being copied will be
added to the pre-existing loads.

The procedure is the reverse of the renderer procedure above. After selecting the source plate,
right-click and select "Copy Plate Loads" from the menu that appears. You should then select
the destination plates, right-click and then select Ok to have the loads copied. All pre-existing
plate loads on the selected destination plates contained within the selected load cases will be
deleted and replaced by the copied loads.
303
Copy plate properties

The Copy Plate Properties tool lets you copy the plate, material and offset properties of a
plate to a selection of destination plates.
After selecting the destination plates, right-click and select "Copy Plate Properties" from the
menu that appears. You should then click the source plate, after which its properties are
copied to the destination plates.
The procedure is the reverse of the renderer procedure above. After selecting the source plate,
right-click and select "Copy Plate Properties" from the menu that appears. You should then
select the destination plates, right-click and then select Ok to have the properties copied.
304
Graphical Input
Delete
The Delete tool allows you to delete any or all of the structure. The items to be deleted are
first highlighted so that you can verify them before they are actually removed. Nodes
connected to deleted members or plates are also deleted unless they are connected to other
members or plates that still exist.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be deleted, press the Delete key or right-click
and select "Delete" from the menu that appears. The selected items are then deleted.
.
305
Draw
The Draw tool allows you to draw new nodes, members or plates and attach them to existing
nodes, members or plates. Nodes are automatically generated at the ends of each member or
plate vertex. If a member or plate is attached to the intermediate point of an existing member,
the existing member is subdivided into two and a node is automatically inserted at the
intersection point.
When in drawing mode you can control the numbering of
new nodes, members and plates being drawn by pressing the keyboard N, M or P keys and
then specifying the number of the next node, member or plate to be drawn. Alternatively, you
can simply let SPACE GASS find the next available node, member or plate. You can easily
renumber any nodes, members or plates later using the Renumber tool.
For members, the procedure is as follows.
1. Click the
(renderer) or
(traditional graphics window) toolbar button.
Note that you can switch to drawing plates by pressing the T key to switch to drawing
triangular plates or the Q key to switch to drawing quadrilateral plates. You can
switch back to drawing members by pressing the M key.
2. Pick the start of a new member. This can be a new point not connected to existing
members or plates, or it can be an existing member or plate end point or member
intermediate point.
Don't forget that when drawing in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or
members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an
orthogonal line or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You can
also align with one of the three global axes. For more information, refer to
Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that when drawing, you can use
the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more
information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".
3. Pick the end of the new member. Again, this can be a new point or a point on an
existing member or plate.
4. If you wish to draw another member that extends from the end of the member just
drawn then pick another end point. You can keep picking end points for additional
members.
5. Press ESC or the right mouse button to end the operation.
6. Return to step 1 above to draw another member, or press ESC or the right mouse
button to exit from the tool.
Be careful when subdividing or connecting to intermediate points on members that

have local Y or Z member offsets. Because local offsets are calculated relative to a straight
line joining the members end nodes, they will change direction if you add intermediate
306
Graphical Input
nodes. It is therefore recommended that you should always convert any local Y or Z member
offsets to global before adding intermediate nodes.
If you wish to draw multiple members between the same two nodes, you will need to
first activate the "Allow duplicates when drawing new members" option in the "General
configuration" item of the Config menu.
For plates, the procedure is as follows.
1. Click the
or
(renderer) or
(traditional graphics window) toolbar
button and then select between drawing triangular or quadrilateral plates.
Note that you can switch between drawing triangular or quadrilateral plates while
drawing by pressing the T key to switch to drawing triangular plates or the Q key to
switch to drawing quadrilateral plates. You can also switch to drawing members by
pressing the M key.
Note also that while in quadrilateral plate drawing mode, you can draw triangular
plates by simply double-clicking the 4th node.
2. Pick the start of a new plate. This can be a new point not connected to existing
members or plates, or it can be an existing member or plate end point or member
intermediate point.
Don't forget that when drawing in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or
members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an
orthogonal line or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You can
also align with one of the three global axes. For more information, refer to
Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that when drawing, you can use
the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more
3. Pick the next vertex of the new plate. Again, this can be a new point or a point on an
existing member or plate.
4. Pick the third and fourth (if a quadrilateral plate) vertices of the new plate.
5. If you wish to draw another plate that extends from the end of the plate just drawn
then pick another point. You can keep picking points for additional plates.
6. Press ESC or the right mouse button to end the operation.
7. Return to step 1 above to draw another plate, or press ESC or the right mouse button
to exit from the tool.
You can draw triangular plates while in quadrilateral plate drawing mode by doubleclicking the 4th node of quadrilateral plates.
307
While drawing, you can switch between drawing members or plates by pressing the M
key to switch to drawing members, the T key to switch to drawing triangular plates or the Q
key to switch to drawing quadrilateral plates.
Plates must be flat (ie. all vertices in the same plane).
After drawing some members or plates, if you are not sure that they are properly
connected to other nodes, members or plates, you can use the "Connectivity" tool.
308
Graphical Input
Extend
Members can be extended or shortened using this tool in the renderer.
After selecting the members to be extended or shortened, right-click and select "Extend" from
the menu that appears. You must then select a reference point graphically. This just allows
you to control which ends of the members will move and which ends will stay in place. The
form shown below then appears.
The "Mode" option lets you choose between specifying a new length or specifying an
extension or reduction. The "Move" option lets you control which ends of the members will
be moved. In the "New length" or "Extension" field at the bottom of the form, you can specify
the new length or extension (or shortening) as an absolute value or as a percentage of the
original member length.
309
Extrude
The extrude tool lets you extrude multiple members in any direction. It is extremely handy for
extruding a set of columns from the ground or from an existing floor of a multi-storey
building.
After selecting some nodes to extrude from, right-click and select "Extrude" from the menu
that appears. The nodes you select do not have to be coplanar. You should then pick two
points that represent the ends of a vector along which the members will be extruded. Note that
the position of the vector is unimportant, as it is just the length and direction of the vector that
matters.
Don't forget that when drawing the vector, you can attach to other nodes or members, or you
can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an orthogonal line or an extension
line from the "locked on" node or member. You can also align with one of the three global
axes. For more information, refer to Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that
when drawing, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of the desired
point(s). For more information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".
The extrude form then appears, allowing you to set the node increment if desired, otherwise
just leave it at 0 to use the next available node numbers. The node increment can be useful if
you have a regular node numbering scheme for each floor of a multi-storey building.
The members are then extruded from the selected nodes in accordance with the length and
direction of the extrude vector.
310
Graphical Input
When extruding members from the ground, it can be useful to set up some Gridlines and then
use the Draw Nodes tool to create nodes at the gridline intersections from which columns are
to be extruded. You can then select all the nodes just created and extrude columns from them.
311
Filters
The filter tool allows you to restrict the amount of data that is displayed in the graphics
display area or in output reports. You can use it to restrict the display to specific nodes, node
types, members, member types, plates, plate types, section properties, material properties,
load types, buckling modes, steel members, steel connections, axis limits or any combinations
of these.
To create a filter from nodes, members or plates selected graphically
Select some nodes, members or plates graphically by picking them or by using the "Find" tool
and then select "Create Filter" from the floating menu, after which the following form
appears.
To save the current selection as a filter, just click the combo box in the above form, select a
filter number and then type in the filters name. You can overwrite previously saved filters or
you can select and name an unused filter.
An alternative method of creating a filter from nodes, members or plates selected graphically
is to use the "Select" buttons in the main filters form as explained below.
To create or edit filters
Click the
312
toolbar button or select "Filters" from the View menu or the floating menu.
Graphical Input
For each filter you can select one or more check boxes and then specify the corresponding
items to be included in the filter. For example, if you specify a member list of 1,2-6,9,10 and
a section property list of 2,3, the filter will include only those members in the specified list
that use section properties 2 or 3. The more check boxes you enable and corresponding items
you specify, the more you limit the nodes, members or plates that are included in the filter.
You can define up to 200 different filters and scroll between them in the form by changing the
"Filter" numeric field.
The Include/Exclude buttons simply reverse the effect of the items in the filter line. For
example, if you specify a node list of 2-5,9,13 and select "Include" then those nodes will be
included in the filter. However, if you select "Exclude" then all the nodes except 2-5,9 and 13
will be included in the filter.
You can use the "Select" buttons in the "Nodes", "Members" and "Plates" lines to graphically
select or edit node, member and plate lists rather than having to type them in manually. You
can also use the "Select" buttons to graphically add to or modify filters that were previously
defined using other than node, member or plate lists.
Filters can also be based on lists of steel design members or connections, or steel member
design results.
The "X-axis", "Y-axis", and "Z-axis" fields allow you to specify minimum and maximum
limits for one or more axis directions. You can enter ranges into the fields manually or select
them graphically by clicking their "Select" button. Any parts of the frame which fall outside
of these limits are excluded from the filter.
The "Make filtered out members and plates" selection allows you to completely hide any
members or plates that are not included in the active filter or show them transparent. You can
also change the color and transparency of the filtered out objects.
To select and activate a filter
Click the "Filters" toolbar combo box
and make your selection.
Scrolling through the filters can be most conveniently done using the keyboard Ctrl+Page
keys as described in Shortcuts.
To import or export filters
Click the Import or Export button and then choose the type of file to import from or export to.
You can import from MS-Excel or MS-Access. You can export to MS-Excel, MS-Access, MSWord, or a text, PDF, RTF, HTML or CSV file.
The import/export tools are very handy if you want to transfer the filters from one job to
another, or if you have generated them in a program such as MS-Excel and then want to
bring them into your job.
Copy and paste
You can use the copy and paste buttons to transfer your filters from one job to another.
313
Find
You can use the Find tool to quickly locate nodes, members or plates in your model by
clicking the
button in the top toolbar.
Before clicking Ok, if you want to see which items would be found you can click the
button to have them listed as shown below. You can then click the
button if you
want to copy a list of the found items into the clipboard, ready for pasting into another part of
SPACE GASS or another program.
You can also find all the members or plates with a particular section or material by clicking
the desired section or material in its property panel and then having all the matching members
or plates selected.
314
Graphical Input
You can find nodes, members or plates by listing their numbers directly or by specifying their
properties or the nodes/members/plates to which they are connected. Only those nodes,
members or plates that satisfy all of the find criteria in the form are found.
315

When a node, member or plate is found, it is highlighted graphically the same as if you had
selected it by picking it with the mouse. You can use the highlighting simply as a visual
reference to see where the found nodes, members or plates are in your structure, or you can
click a toolbar button or click the right mouse button and choose from the floating menu that
appears to perform an operation on the selected nodes, members or plates. You can cancel the
highlighting by pressing the keyboard ESC key or by selecting "Cancel" from the floating
menu.
If you are searching for members of a certain section or
material, you can also just click the desired section or material in the properties panel of the
renderer to highlight all the members in your model that use it.
After the Find tool highlights the nodes, members or plates
you are searching for, you can perform many graphics operations on them by right-clicking
and then selecting from the menu that appears.
316
Graphical Input
Grid
A grid can be displayed as a visual aid while you are developing or viewing your model. The
grid also assists in identifying the working plane, as it is always displayed in that plane.
The Grid tool can be turned on or off via the grid button
or by pressing the G key.
in the bottom of the side toolbar
Note that if you change your working plane then the grid automatically moves to that new
plane.
For more information about the attachment, alignment, snap and working plane tools in the
renderer, refer to Attachment and alignment methods, Snap and Plane.

You can display a rectangular grid in the XY, XZ or YZ global planes by clicking the
toolbar or selecting "Grid" from the Settings menu or pressing
"SHIFT+CTRL+G" on the keyboard (or just "G" if a graphics command is active).
317

It is a useful visual reference as you move the cursor around the screen. The GRID can be set
to any desired size provided it is not too fine or too coarse to be properly displayed. The
GRID setting uses the same system of units as the structure being displayed.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking the "Grid" toolbar button or re-selecting the
"Grid" menu item.
The current GRID setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
If you change the operating plane while a grid is displayed, the grid will not be updated until
you perform an operation which refreshes the entire screen such as PAN, ZOOM,
VIEWPOINT, SCALE, REDRAW, etc.
In the traditional graphics window, the grid can only be displayed in one of the global
planes. It cannot be offset a distance out along one of the axes. If you are operating in a plane
which is offset from the 0,0,0 global origin and your viewpoint is at an angle to the plane you
are working in, do not try to use the displayed grid as a reference. It is only useful if you are
operating in the same plane as the grid or if your viewpoint is perpendicular to the operating
plane.
318
Graphical Input
Gridlines
Gridlines can be added to your model at any stage of its development. As well as providing a
visual reference, they can also be attached to when you are drawing or editing your model.
Gridlines can be created, edited or turned on or off via the

button in the bottom of the
side toolbar. You can simply enter the desired gridline tags, positions and elevations into the
appropriate tables of the form shown below. By entering more than one line of data in the
Elevations table you can have multiple sets of gridlines at different elevations.
319

Gridlines can also be generated by clicking "Auto Generate Gridlines" buttons via the form
shown below.
320
Graphical Input
Infotips
If you hover the mouse over a node, member or plate in the renderer, an infotip appears that
gives useful information about the object as shown below.
Infotips can be turned on or off by clicking the left hand part of the
button at the
bottom of the side toolbar. If the button is on but infotips don't appear when you move the
mouse over the structure, click the arrow part of the
button and check that the
"Structure Infotips" option is ticked. Note that you can also temporarily hide infotips while
you're working by holding down the I key.
See also Query analysis results.
321
Intersect
The Intersect tool allows you to join two or more members and automatically insert nodes at
the intersection points. It works with members that are not touching each other, and with
members that cross over each other.
After selecting the members to be intersected, right-click and select "Intersect Move",
"Intersect Extend" or "Intersect Offset" from the menu that appears. You should then click a
member that the selected members are to intersect with.
If you choose "Intersect Move", the ends of the selected members will be moved to the
intersection points.
If you choose "Intersect Extend", new members will be added that extend from the ends of the
selected members to the intersection points.
If you choose "Intersect Offset", member offsets will be added that offset the ends of the
selected members to the intersection points.
Because the "Move ends" or "Extend ends" selection only affects members which dont
already pass through the intersection point, the selection is irrelevant for members that cross
over each other.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Concentrated loads and distributed forces acting on a member that is subdivided as the
result of an intersect operation are now automatically re-distributed onto the subdivided
members, however in the traditional graphics window distributed torsion, thermal and
prestress loads are not!
Be careful when intersecting with members that have local Y or Z member offsets.
Because local offsets are calculated relative to a straight line joining the members end
nodes, they will change direction if you add intermediate nodes. It is therefore recommended
that you should always convert any local Y or Z member offsets to global before intersecting
at an intermediate point.
After using the Intersect tool, if you want to check that the members are properly
connected, you can use the "Connectivity" tool.
See also Connect.
322
Graphical Input
Keyboard positioning of points
If you cant easily position a point using the mouse, you can simply type in the desired
coordinates. You can enter points in cartesian or polar coordinates, using absolute or relative
modes. As soon as you start typing, the following form will appear automatically.
A point can be entered using cartesian coordinates by simply typing the X, Y and Z values
separated by commas. For example, 2.3,1.2,0.5 locates a point at X=2.3, Y=1.2 and Z=0.5.
If you type less than three values for a point, the missing values are assumed to be zero. For
example, 2.3,0,0 could be shortened to just "2.3", or 2.3,1.2,0 could be shortened to "2.3,1.2".
To locate the "0,0,0" origin very quickly, you only have to
type 0.
A point can be entered using polar coordinates by typing a distance, followed by a vertical
angle (from the global XZ plane), followed by a horizontal angle (from the global XY plane).
<s are used to separate the values rather than commas. For example, a point 10 units from the
origin with a vertical angle of 45 and a horizontal angle of 15, could be typed in as
10<45<15.
To enter points in relative mode (ie. relative to the other end of a line) apply an "@" prefix to
the coordinates. For example, a point which is 8 units in the X direction and 6 units in the Y
direction from a previous point, could be typed in as @8,6, or @10<36.9.
If you are using the renderer, you can also type a length if you are drawing a line or vector
that is aligned with a global axis or an alignment vector from a node or member that you are
"locked on" to.
Type
Alignment vector
length
Drawn line length
Absolute cartesian
Relative cartesian
Absolute polar
Relative polar
Situation
Locked to a node or
member
Aligned with a global
axis
Not locked or aligned
Format
Length
Example
10.2
Length
6.75
X,Y,Z
@X,Y,Z
Length<VertAngle<HorAngle
@Length<VertAngle<HorAngle
1.2,2.4,0.9
@0,0,6.35
6.5<45<0
@10<30<0
In the traditional graphics window, if you use the keyboard

to type in coordinates for a point that is within the aperture circle distance of a member, and
323

ATTACH is on, the point will not attach unless you make a direct hit. Any point positioned
with the keyboard is kept at the exact coordinates that you type in.
For information on attachment, alignment, working plane, grid and snap tools that allow you
to position points accurately in the renderer, refer to Attachment and alignment, Plane, Grid,
Snap and The renderer.
For information on snapping and attachment tools available that allow you to position points
accurately in the traditional graphics window, refer to The traditional graphics window.
324
Graphical Input
Load case titles

Load case titles allow you to describe your load cases so that they can be easily identified. For
each load case you can specify a short title and a longer description.
You can open the load case titles datasheet by selecting "Load Case Titles" from the Loads
menu and then entering data into the datasheet as explained in Load case title data.
Note that you can open a load case titles viewer from within the renderer that can be left open
while you work with other tools. For more information, refer to Load case titles viewer.
325
Lumped masses
This tool allows you to graphically apply lumped masses to nodes. Masses are always
referenced to the global axes system. You must apply some lumped masses before a dynamic
frequency analysis can be performed.
The procedure is as follows.
1. Select the nodes you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then select
"Lumped Masses" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Click the
toolbar button or select "Lumped Masses - Graphical" from the Loads
menu, select the nodes you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click
Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new masses then you would
probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load cases in the
datasheet that follows. If you are editing masses then you may also wish to leave the
load cases list field blank unless there are a large number of load cases and you want
to restrict the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the masses applied to each selected node
individually (ie. one line of data for each node) or applied as a group to all the
selected nodes (ie. one line of data for all the nodes). The advantage of the "group"
selection is that you only have to input one line of data in the datasheet to have it
applied to all the selected nodes. This can be particularly useful if you are applying
the same mass to a number of nodes. If you are inputting a different mass on each
node then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing "individual" can
also be useful if you are simply trying to see what masses are already applied to the
nodes you have selected.
If you have elected to show the masses applied to each node individually then you
can also choose between showing all the selected nodes or just the ones that are
loaded. If you are inputting new masses then you would probably choose to show all
the selected nodes, whereas if you are editing existing masses or just viewing masses
then showing just the loaded nodes may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing masses shown. You can add, edit or delete
masses and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the
326
Graphical Input
datasheet is the same as the non-graphical datasheets (see also Datasheets).
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
Note that static loads can be converted to masses using the static load to mass conversion tool
in the renderer. For more information, refer to Static load to mass conversion.
See also Lumped mass data.
327
Managing load cases

You can use the Manage Load Cases tool to copy, renumber or delete entire load cases by
clicking the
button in the top toolbar of the renderer.
When specifying the source load case list, you can either list them directly, or you can click
the
button to display and select from a list of the load cases currently in the job as
shown below.
328
Graphical Input
You can use the Manage Load Cases tool to copy, renumber or delete one load case at a time
by clicking the
button in the traditional graphics window.
329
Master-slave constraints
Master-slave constraints are incorporated into node properties.
See also Property panels.
330
Graphical Input
Material properties
Material properties are incorporated into the member and plate properties forms.
331
Measurements and dimensions

The Measurement and Dimensioning tool in the renderer lets you measure distances and
angles between points that you select graphically or lengths and orientations of members. You
can also add dimensions to your model.
Measure
Right-click on a member, on a node or on any point away from your model and then select
"Measure/Dimension" in the menu that appears. Alternatively, you can select two nodes or
two other points, right-click and then select "Measure/Dimension" or you can simply click the
button in the toolbar at the bottom of the side toolbar. The form that appears below
shows the actual distance (or member length), the projected distances and the angles between
the nodes, member ends or points selected.
You can then continue to click other nodes, members or points on or around your model and
see the data updated in the form.
Dimension
At any time while using the Measure tool, you can click the "Add Dimension' button in the
form to add a dimension to your model. If the dimension is not exactly how you want it, you
can experiment with the settings in the "Dimension" part of the form to adjust it as required.
Dimensions can be updated or deleted by simply selecting them, right-clicking and then
selecting "Edit Dimension" or "Delete" from the menu that appears.
Dimensions can be turned on or off via the
332
button at the bottom of the side toolbar.
Graphical Input
Don't forget that if you want to select a point that is not on a node or a member but is lined up
with one, you can simply hover over the node or member for a second until you hear the "lock
on" pop sound and you can then move away and still stay lined up. This is handy if you want
to add dimension lines some distance away from a point such as with the "12m" dimension in
the model shown above. In this case you could click the node at the bottom of the column,
hover over the apex node until it "locks on" and then move back in line with the column
staying lined up with the apex node before clicking the second dimension point (see below).
For more information, see Attachment and alignment methods.
333

This tool allows you to graphically apply force and moment concentrated loads to members.
Member loads can be referenced to the global or local axes systems and can be positioned
anywhere along the member.
1. Select the members you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then select
"Concentrated Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Click the
toolbar button or select "Member Concentrated Loads - Graphical"
from the Loads menu, select the members you wish to load, click the right mouse
button and then click Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new loads then you would
datasheet that follows. If you are editing loads then you may also wish to leave the
You should then choose between showing the loads applied to each selected member
individually (ie. one line of data for each member) or applied as a group to all the
selected members (ie. one line of data for all the members). The advantage of the
"group" selection is that you only have to input one line of data in the datasheet to
have it applied to all the selected members. This can be particularly useful if you are
applying the same load to a number of members. If you are inputting a different load
on each member then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing
"individual" can also be useful if you are simply trying to see what loads are already
applied to the members you have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each member individually then you
can also choose between showing all the selected members or just the ones that are
loaded. If you are inputting new loads then you would probably choose to show all
the selected members, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads
then showing just the loaded members may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing loads shown. You can add, edit or delete
loads and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the
334
Graphical Input
You can apply more than one concentrated load to the same
member within the same load case by specifying a different sub-load number for each
different member concentrated load.
See also Member concentrated load data.
335

This tool allows you to graphically apply distributed forces to members. Member loads can be
referenced to the global or local axes systems and can be positioned to start and finish
anywhere along the member. They can be uniformly distributed or linearly varying along the
member.
"Distributed Forces" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Click the
toolbar button or select "Member Distributed Forces - Graphical" from
the Loads menu, select the members you wish to load, click the right mouse button
and then click Ok.
336
Graphical Input
You can apply more than one distributed force to the same
different member distributed force. This allows you to apply "stepped" distributed forces
along a member without having to resort to intermediate nodes.
See also Member distributed force data.
337

This tool allows you to graphically apply distributed torsions to members. Member distributed
torsion loads are always referenced to the local axes system and can be positioned to start and
finish anywhere along the member. They can be uniformly distributed or linearly varying
along the member.
"Distributed Torsions" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Member Distributed Torsions - Graphical" from the Loads menu, select the
members you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
338
Graphical Input
You can apply more than one distributed torsion to the same
different member distributed torsion. This allows you to apply "stepped" distributed torsions
along a member without having to resort to intermediate nodes.
See also Member distributed torsion data.
339
Member offsets
Member offsets are incorporated into member properties.
340
Graphical Input

This tool allows you to graphically apply prestress loads to members.
"Prestress Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Member Prestress Loads - Graphical" from the Loads menu, select the
members you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
341
See also Member prestress data.
342
Graphical Input
Member properties
The member property forms described here are only available in the traditional graphics
window. For information about the renderer's property panels, refer to Property panels or
The renderer.
Member properties include member type, connectivity, orientation, fixity, section properties,
material properties and member offsets. Hence, selecting the graphical option for "Members",
"Section properties", "Material properties" or "Member offsets" will all take you to the same
member properties form.
There are three modes available for editing member properties as follows.
To edit or query member properties one member at a time
Simply double-click on a member.
Note "Edit/Query Member" in the title bar of the form that appears.
Although this mode only lets you edit the properties of one member at a time, you can simply
click on any other member to display and edit its properties without exiting the command.
When doing so, any changes you made to the properties of the previously displayed member
are saved.
You can also press the "Results" button and then click on any members to display their
analysis results in a scrollable window (see also Query analysis results).
To edit or query member properties for multiple members using a form
Select some members graphically, click the right mouse button and then select "Properties
(Form)" from the floating menu that appears.
Note "Edit Member Properties" in the title bar of the form that appears.
343
Edit mode works in a similar way to edit/query mode except that you cant select other
members while the form is open. You can, however select multiple members initially and
make changes to all of them simultaneously.
Blank fields
A blank field indicates that for the members selected, more than one value exists. If you leave
such a field blank then the selected members will retain their individual values. However, if
you type into a blank field then all of the selected members will receive the new value.
Special buttons
Shows or hides the section properties part of the member properties form.
Shows or hides the material properties part of the member properties form.
Shows or hides the member offsets part of the member properties form.
Allows you to input a section or material from a standard library.
Initiates the shape builder.
Initiates the standard shapes input.

Section and material properties are different to the other items in the members form because a
single section or material can be shared amongst many members. All other items of data in
the members form have their own independent values for each member. Hence, as soon as
you change the section or material property number, the rest of the section or material data
changes to match.
344
Graphical Input
You can scroll through the sections or materials in the

current job by changing the section or material number in the member properties form. All of
the properties that have been defined for that section or material will be displayed. If no
properties have been defined for that section or material then the name field will be blank, as
will the properties fields.
To edit or query member properties for multiple members using a datasheet
Select some members graphically, click the right mouse button and then select "Properties
(Datasheet)" from the floating menu that appears.
Note that the datasheet that appears is different to the normal members datasheet because it
contains extra columns for section properties, material properties and offsets.
You can view member hinges, member offsets or section properties graphically by
depressing the "View member hinges", "View member offsets" or "View rendered model"
toggle buttons in the side toolbar.
If you change any member properties that affect the structures geometry, you may not
be able to select some nodes or members until after a redraw. This is due to their displayed
position becoming out-of-date. The "Regen" check box allows you to order an automatic
redraw after you exit the node properties form.
See also Members.
See also Floating mouse menus.
345
Mesh
The Mesh tool allows you to select one or more plates and then mesh them into smaller
elements. You can also subdivide quadrilateral plates into triangles.
Unlike frame elements, plate elements (like all finite elements) are not exact and hence the
accuracy of the analysis increases as the number of plate elements is increased. It is therefore
important that your model is properly meshed.
The normal procedure for generating a well meshed model is to draw large plates that define
the overall walls, slabs and other components and then use the mesh tool to subdivide the
large plates into smaller elements.
The meshing pattern also affects the analysis results to some extent. For example, because all
of the elements in the following diagram are orientated at the same angle, an effect referred to
as "mesh induced anisotropy" occurs which results in lower computational accuracy.
A meshing pattern that will achieve more accurate results is shown below.
After selecting the plates to be meshed, right-click and select "Mesh Plates" from the menu
that appears.
346
Graphical Input
Note that if members also exist around the perimeter of the plates being meshed then they can
also be subdivided during the meshing operation if the "Split members along plate edges and
connect to newly generated intermediate nodes" option is checked.
After meshing, each plate element must be flat (ie. all vertices in the same plane), have
internal angles less than 135 and an aspect ratio less than 4:1.
347
Mirror
The Mirror tool allows you to create a mirror image of any user defined nodes, members or
plates about any user defined surface.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be mirrored, right-click and select "Mirror"
from the menu that appears. You should then pick a point that lies anywhere in the mirror
plane followed by filling out the form shown below.
Don't forget that when picking points in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or
members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an orthogonal line
or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. For more information, refer to
Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that when drawing, you can use the
mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more
348
Graphical Input
Move
The Move tool allows you to select one or more nodes, members or plates and move them in
any direction on the screen.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be moved, right-click and select "Move" from
the menu that appears. You should then pick two points that represent the ends of a vector
through which the items are to be moved.
Alternatively, if you have only selected one node to be moved, you can choose between
"Move Along Vector" or "Move To Location". The "Move to Location" option requires you
to pick a destination point rather than two ends of a vector.

There are two ways to move nodes. They are explained as follows.
1. For one node only:
Click the
toolbar button or select "Move" from the Structure menu and then
select the node you wish to move. Move the node and pick its destination point. You
can see the members attached to the node being moved and stretched as you move the
node.
OR
For one or more nodes:
Select the nodes you wish to move, click the right mouse button and then select
"Move" from the floating menu that appears. Pick two points that represent the vector
through which the selected nodes are to be moved.
Remember that when picking points, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in
the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more information, see "Using the
keyboard to position points".
2. All selected nodes are then moved.

3. Select more nodes to move, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
tool.
To remove an intermediate node from two members
connected end-to-end and convert them into a single continuous member, either use the
349

Remove intermediate nodes tool in the renderer or use the Move tool to simply move the
intermediate node onto either one of the end nodes.
Be careful when subdividing or connecting to intermediate points on members that

have local Y or Z member offsets. Because local offsets are calculated relative to a straight
line joining the members end nodes, they will change direction if you add intermediate
nodes. It is therefore recommended that you should always convert any local Y or Z member
offsets to global before adding intermediate nodes.
After moving some nodes, if you are not sure that the members and plates attached to
them are properly connected to other nodes, members or plates, you can use the
"Connectivity" tool.
350
Graphical Input
Move intermediate nodes

You can move intermediate nodes along a member using this tool in the renderer.
After selecting the two members on either side of the intermediate node to be moved, rightclick and select "Move Intermediate Nodes" from the menu that appears.
In the form shown below, you can enter the distance to be moved or the new member lengths
as absolute lengths or as percentages.
351
Moving loads
The moving loads tool generates a series of load cases that represent the effect of loads
moving along a structure. Common applications include moving or stationary vehicles on a
bridge, a crane travelling along a crane rail in a building or material moving along a conveyor.
Each load case represents a point in time, and the loads generated from the moving wheels or
pressure patches for that load case are distributed onto the closest members or plates.
Loads can be moving or stationary.

Load sources can be wheeled vehicles such as trucks or cranes, or distributed loads
such as pressure patches or line loads.
Multiple scenarios allow you to model any combinations of moving and stationary
loads.
Moving loads can be combined with other static loads.
A lane generation tool is included for roads and bridges.
Travel paths and lanes can have multiple segments, including curved segments.
Loads can be generated on nodes, members and plates.
Libraries of standard vehicles are included for various countries.
Custom vehicles and libraries can be created.
Loads can share common travel paths or lanes.
A speed, delay and start position can be specified for each load.
Load factors, lane factors and dynamic load allowances can be specified.
A loading area can be defined so that loads which move outside of it become inactive.
A vertical proximity setting enables independent generation of loads on multi-level
roadways or bridges.
Moving load data can be exported to MS-Excel, MS-Word or a text file.
Moving load data can be imported from MS-Excel or a text file.
An animated display allows you to view your loads moving along the structure.
Overview
The moving loads tool lets you define sets (scenarios) of moving loads (vehicles, cranes,
pressure patches, line loads, etc) that move along your model. As the loads move, SPACE
GASS takes a snapshot of their position at a regular time interval and creates a load case for
each point in time. If you view the load cases one after another it gives the appearance of the
loads moving along the model. Once the moving load cases have been generated you can
combine them with other load cases, analyse them or perform design checks on them.
In order to proceed, you must first create a moving load scenario that defines a set of load
cases to be generated. The scenario has a name, a starting load case number and a time
interval that represents the time between load cases. Often only one scenario is required,
however you can create multiple scenarios if you wish to examine different situations such as
various combinations of vehicles moving along a bridge.
You can then add vehicles and/or pressures to the scenario, each of which contains a name,
type, magnitude, travel path, load factors, start position, speed and delay. A vehicle consists
of a set of wheels (with their positions and loads) and can be defined directly or imported
from a standard library. A pressure consists of a width, length, pressure magnitude (in three
directions) and load spacing. Each scenario can contain multiple vehicles and pressures, each
moving at different speeds, with different magnitudes, starting positions, delays and in
different directions if required. The load's speed multiplied by the scenario's time interval
defines the distance travelled by the load from one load case to the next.
352
Graphical Input
Stationary loads can be modelled by just specifying a zero speed. Pressure loads with a zero
length are also treated as stationary and are applied to the entire travel path length. Stationary
loads can be put into just the starting load case or added to each load case that contains
moving loads.
A travel path, which determines where the vehicle or pressure travels, can have multiple
straight or curved segments that can go in any direction or around corners. If multiple loads
use the same travel path then it only needs to be created once and can then be shared between
all the loads that reference it. Travel paths can be defined graphically or via a data table, plus
a travel path generation tool lets you set up your bridge lanes or parallel travel paths quickly
in one operation.
Finally, you must select the members and/or plates that could be directly loaded by the
moving vehicles or pressures. Loads are only applied to the members or plates you have
selected, and so for bridges it is normal to select only the members and/or plates in your
bridge deck, or for cranes it is normal to select only the beams that the crane wheels are in
direct contact with.
When the moving loads tool generates the load cases for a scenario, it calculates the position
of each vehicle or pressure along its travel path at each point in time and then distributes its
loads onto the closest members or plates that support it. Each component of a vehicle or
pressure is active if it is within the ends of the load's travel path and within the loading area
that you can specify. If you have ticked the vertical proximity distance option then only the
members or plates that are within that distance vertically from the vehicle or pressure will be
loaded.
At any time after creating a scenario, you can produce an animated view of the vehicles and
pressures moving along your model. After the loads have been generated, you can use the
keyboard PageUp/Dn keys to scroll through the load cases and effectively see the loads
moving across your model.
Operating procedure
The following steps assume that your job doesn't yet contain any moving load data. If moving
load data already exists then you can simply skip the steps for which data already exists.
The order of the steps given below is a logical sequence that should work well for most jobs,
however other than having to create at least one scenario first, the order is not important and
can be changed to suit your desired workflow.
Step 1 - Getting Started

You can begin by either:
a. Clicking the "Generate Moving Loads" button in the top toolbar without first selecting
any members or plates.
This is the recommended most method for most applications. You can set up your
travel paths and select the members and plates to be loaded later.
353

b. Selecting the members or plates that will be in direct contact with the moving loads,
clicking the right mouse button and then selecting "Generate Moving Loads".
This method is recommended if the loads move along a single line of members such as
along a crane rail in a building. If the members you select form a single line of
members connected end-to-end then the moving loads tool will automatically set up an
initial travel path along this line of members, plus it will treat the members you
selected as the ones to be loaded. Of course you can change the travel path and the
loaded members from inside the moving loads tool at any stage.
Regardless of which of the above methods you use to start the process, the selection of the
members and plates to be loaded will be remembered by the module and so you don't have to
re-select them each time you open the moving loads tool.
Step 2 - Creating a Scenario

If no moving load data exists for the job then the "Scenario Properties" form will open
automatically, allowing you to create your first scenario. If moving load data already exists
then you will be taken to the main moving loads form instead, and you can create a scenario
by clicking the "Add Scenario" button.
Each scenario represents a particular configuration of loads moving along your structure. A
scenario may contain a number of vehicles, pressure patches or line loads, either stationary or
moving at different speeds with different starting positions, delays and in different directions.
In many cases you will only need one scenario, however if you are modelling something like
354
Graphical Input
a multi-lane bridge then you may need a different scenario for each combination of vehicles
in the various lanes.
When creating a scenario you must specify a scenario name, a starting load case and a time
interval. The name is simply used to identify the scenario and can be any descriptive text. The
starting load case is the first in the set of consecutive load cases that will be generated for the
scenario, and the time interval is the interval between load cases for the scenario. The
finishing load case is calculated automatically for each load and depends on a number of
parameters as follows:
Finish = Start + (TPLen + LLen - SPos) / (Speed x Interval) + Delay / Interval,
where Start is the scenario's starting load case, TPLen is the length of the load's travel path,
LLen is the length of the load (eg. 25m for an Australian M1600-6.25 vehicle), SPos is the
load's start position along the travel path, Speed is the load's speed, Delay is the load's starting
delay and Interval is the scenario's time interval.
The overall finishing load case for the scenario is the maximum of the finishing load cases for
all of the loads in the scenario.
You can also combine the moving load cases with other static load cases by filling out the
table at the bottom of the scenario properties form. For more information refer to "Combining
scenarios with other static load cases" below.
Step 3 - Adding Loads

Once the first scenario has been created, the main moving loads form appears as follows. You
are now ready to add loads to the scenario.
Adding loads is simply a matter of clicking the "Add Load" button and then inputting data
into the following form.
355
For each load you must specify its type as a vehicle or a pressure, select a travel path, and
then specify a start position, speed, delay and load factors.
Normally the front of a moving load will start at the beginning of the travel path at time zero
and continue until the rear of the vehicle reaches the end of the travel path. Alternatively, you
can start your load part-way along the travel path by specifying a non-zero start position
and/or you can change its start time by giving it a delay. Delays are very useful if you wish to
model vehicles that follow each other on a bridge for example.
The speed setting controls the distance each load travels over the scenario's time interval. This
distance is also the change in position of the load between successive load cases for the
scenario. If you wish to model a reversing vehicle then just specify a negative speed. Note
that a reversing vehicle will still move in the same direction along the travel path as a forward
moving vehicle.
Stationary loads can be modelled by simply giving them a zero speed. Note that the start
position and delay settings are still active for stationary loads.
If you have a stationary pressure or line load that extends along the entire travel path length,
you can model this by specifying a zero pressure length. In this case the speed and start
position settings will be ignored.
The load factor, lane factor and dynamic factor allow you to factor your loads up or down to
satisfy the design code requirements. For example, the lane factor usually depends on how
many lanes are loaded and, for 3 lanes or more loaded, it is typically 1.0 for the first lane, 0.8
for the second lane and 0.4 for the other lanes. The dynamic factor is equal to (1 + ), where
is the dynamic load allowance that depends on the type of vehicle being used. All three
factors are multiplied together to give an overall load factor and so if a particular factor is not
applicable to your situation, such as if you are modelling a crane travelling in a building and
so there is no lane factor, you should just set the irrelevant factor(s) to 1.0.
The "Generate in" field is enabled for stationary loads and controls whether the load is placed
just into the starting load case or into every load case. If you specify "Starting load case only"
then the stationary loads will go into the starting load case and the moving loads will begin in
356
Graphical Input
the next load case. If you specify "All load cases" then the stationary and moving loads will
be combined and will begin in the starting load case.
For a vehicle you can select from a list of vehicles that are already being used in the job,
select a vehicle from a library, create a new one or edit an existing vehicle by clicking the
following buttons in the "Load Properties" form.
Click this button to select from a list of vehicles that are already in use in the job.
Selecting an existing vehicle will allow it to be shared between multiple loads. If there are
currently no vehicles in the job then this button will be disabled.
Click this button to select a vehicle from one of the libraries supplied with SPACE GASS
or from a custom vehicle library you created previously.
357
Click this button to create a new vehicle or edit an existing one.

When editing a vehicle or creating a new one, you must specify a name, together with each
wheel's position relative to the front of the vehicle and the forces and moments that the wheel
exerts on the structure.
For a pressure you can select from a list of pressures that are already being used in the job,
create a new one or edit an existing pressure by clicking the following buttons in the "Load
Properties" form.
Click this button to select from a list of pressures that are already in use in the job.
Selecting an existing pressure will allow it to be shared between multiple loads. If there are
currently no pressures in the job then this button will be disabled.
358
Graphical Input
Click this button to create a new pressure or edit an existing one.

When editing a pressure or creating a new one, you must specify a name, together with the
width, length, load spacing and magnitude of the pressure. When a pressure is distributed onto
the members or plates in your structure it is approximated by a grid of uniformly distributed
point loads spaced at the "Load spacing" setting that you specify. If you use a small load
spacing then you will get a more accurate load distribution than you would with a large load
spacing, however a smaller load spacing will also result in many more loads being generated.
If you wish to generate a line load then you should simply specify a pressure width that is less
than the load spacing. For example, in order to generate a 6kN/m line load with a load spacing
of 0.5m you could specify a width of 0.1m and a pressure of 60kPa. Alternatively, a width of
0.25m with a pressure of 24kPa would give exactly the same result.
If you have a stationary pressure or line load that extends along the entire travel path length,
you can easily model this by specifying a zero pressure length. In this case the speed and start
position settings will be ignored.
Step 4 - Defining Travel Paths

Each load in a scenario must be associated with a travel path so that SPACE GASS knows
where the load is going. Even stationary loads need a travel path in order to identify their
position and orientation.
359
If you are modelling a multi-lane bridge then you should think of each lane as a travel path.
Once you have defined the travel path for your first lane you can use the lane generation tool
(explained below) to generate the other lanes simply by specifying the lane width and the
number of lanes required. In fact, it is often a good idea to skip "Step 3 - Adding Loads"
above, set up all your lanes first and then go back to step 3 to add your loads.
You can add a travel path or select an existing one by clicking the following buttons in the
"Load Properties" form.
Click this button to select from a list of travel paths that are already in use in the job.
Selecting an existing travel path will allow it to be shared between multiple loads. If there are
currently no travel paths in the job then this button will be disabled.
When selecting a travel path from the above list, if you are unsure of which travel path is
which, you can click the "View" button to show them all graphically.
360
Graphical Input
Click this button to create a new travel path or edit an existing one.
A travel path consists of a sequence of straight line or curved segments. Each travel path
station is defined by a node number and/or X,Y,Z coordinate. If a station is defined by a node
number and a coordinate then the coordinate is added to the node position. For example, in
the table below, the travel path is parallel to a line joining nodes 1, 43 and 12 and offset 5m in
the global Z direction from that line. If you wish to define a travel path station using just
coordinates then the node number should be zero for that station.
Curved segments can be defined by a non-zero radius at the end of the segment. The travel
path below has two segments, each with a radius of 75m. Any radius specified for the first
station of the travel path (ie. in the first line of the table) is ignored.
If you don't wish to type the travel path stations directly into the table, you can click the
"Select Graphically" button and then select the stations graphically by clicking on nodes,
members or points off the structure.
If you are modelling a multi-lane bridge then once you have defined the travel path for the
first lane, you can use the "Generate Extra Travel Paths" => "Generate Lanes" button in the
main moving loads form to generate the other lanes.
361

It is just a matter of selecting the first lane in the "Lane to copy from" field, specifying how
many extra lanes to generate and the lane spacing. The extra lanes can be generated to the left
or right of the first lane. If you're not sure which lane to select in the "Lane to copy from"
field then you can click the "View" button next to it to view the existing travel paths
graphically before proceeding with the generation. Any curved segments will have their
radius increased or decreased in the generated lanes so that the center of curvature of all lanes
is maintained.
Note that bridge lanes are no different to other travel paths. The only reason they have their
own generation form is to make it easier for the user by tailoring the generation input data to
lane specific items.
You can also generate extra travel paths by clicking the "Generate Extra Lanes" => "Generate
Along Vector" button.
It is similar to the lane generation form above except that the lane spacing field is replaced by
a copy vector. Travel paths generated this way will be identical to the original travel path and
spaced apart as defined by the copy vector. The radius in curved segments will not be
adjusted in the generated copies.
Step 5 - Selecting the Members and Plates to be Loaded

Before the moving and stationary loads can be generated, you must specify which members
and/or plates in your model that the vehicle wheel loads and pressures are distributed onto.
362
Graphical Input
After choosing "Members" or "Plates" from the following menu you should select them
graphically either by clicking them directly or via selection windows in the normal way. If
your model contains both members and plates that could be loaded then you should select
both the members and the plates. Note that you can't select members and plates at the same
time and so if you need to select both members and plates then you should select the members
first followed by the plates (or vice-versa).
It is important that you select all the members and plates that could be directly loaded by the
vehicle wheels or pressures because any that are not selected won't be loaded even if a wheel
or pressure passes directly over them. Conversely, if you select members or plates that aren't
directly loaded (such as sub-structure members below a bridge deck) then they may take
loads incorrectly that are supposed to be applied to other members or plates higher up.
Once you have made the member and/or plate selections they will be remembered and saved
with the rest of the moving load data. This means that you don't have to re-select them each
time you open the moving loads tool.
If you selected some members or plates and then opened the moving loads tool via the rightclick menu (ie. using method (b) in "Step 1 - Getting Started" above) then those members or
plates will already be selected and you don't have to re-select them here. You can, however,
use the "Select Elements to Load" button to edit your selection if required.
Step 6 - Finalizing Your Moving Load Data

As you create scenarios, add loads and define travel paths, they will appear in the tree on the
left side of the main moving loads form as shown below. You can edit any of your data by
clicking the "Add", "Delete" or "Properties" buttons at the bottom, or by clicking the "Edit"
button near the top of the right-hand side panel.
Better still, you can edit any of your data by just double-clicking the desired item in the tree
on the left.
363
In order to visually check the loads and travel paths, you can click the "View" button and then
select between loads and travel paths.
Followed by ticking the scenarios or travel paths you wish to view in the following form.
If you select loads then when you click Ok they are shown moving across your model as
follows:
364
Graphical Input
Or if you select travel paths then when you click Ok they are shown as follows:
Before generating the moving loads, you need to set the following options correctly.
Normally, loads that don't fall directly on a member are distributed to the closest surrounding
members in proportion to their distance from the load, however if the "Apply wheel loads to
closest member only" option is selected then each load will be applied only to the member
that is closest to it. This reduces the number of loads that are generated while still providing
sufficient accuracy in most cases.
Each vehicle or pressure is active while it is between normals that extend from the two ends
of its travel path. It is possible, however, that you may want wheels or parts of a pressure area
365

to become inactive at certain times even though they are still within the extents of the travel
path. For example, if a wheel moves off the side of a bridge or moves off the end of a skew
bridge, you may want it to become inactive before it reaches the end of its travel path. You
can achieve this by clicking the "Ignore loads that transfer load to just one member" option.
This has the effect of ignoring wheels or parts of a pressure area that would have their load
distributed to just one member unless the load is directly on that one member. It solves the
problem of deactivating loads that move off the structure in most cases.
For situations in which the above option is not suitable, you can specify a polygon that
defines a loading area. Wheels or parts of a pressure area that fall outside of the loading area
are treated as inactive. You can define the loading area graphically by clicking the "Select
Loading Area" button in the main moving loads form and then selecting points around your
model that represent the limits of the loading area.
When loads are distributed onto the surrounding members or plates, their vertical position is
usually ignored. The problem with this is that if you have a multi-level bridge for example,
any vehicles that are on an upper bridge deck could also have their load incorrectly applied to
a lower deck if it is vertically below the vehicle. The "Check vertical proximity" setting
solves this problem by only distributing load to the members or plates that are positioned
vertically within the "Proximity" distance of the load.
Step 7 - Generating the Moving Loads

Once you have created all the required scenarios, loads and travel paths, you should click the
Generate button to initiate the load generation.
If you don't want to generate data for every scenario then you can disable some of them by
unticking them in the tree on the left. In the following example the "M1600 - Heaviest load in
centre lane" has been unticked and so it is temporarily disabled and no loads will be generated
for it when you click the "Generate" button.
366
Graphical Input
During the generation, each wheel of a vehicle is treated as a load source that has its load
distributed onto the structure. Pressure loads are approximated by a grid of equally spaced
point loads that are also distributed onto the structure. For each wheel load or pressure point
load, if it falls on a plate then it is distributed to the plate's corner nodes in proportion to their
distance from the load. If it doesn't fall on a plate then it is distributed to the surrounding
members in proportion to their distance from the load or onto a single member if it falls
directly on that member or if the "Apply member loads to closest member only" option is
ticked.
Once the load generation has finished, you can use the keyboard PageUp/Dn keys to scroll
through the load cases and see effect of the generated loads moving across your structure.
All primary and combination load cases generated with the moving loads tool are given load
case titles that reflect their properties. Each title includes a heading and a notes field. Please
ensure that you dont edit or delete the notes field as it is the means by which the program
keeps track of which load cases belong to which scenario.
Envelopes
After the job has been analysed, you can display bending moment or shear force envelopes by
clicking the "Selected Load Cases" item in the load cases combo box in the top toolbar and
then typing in the range of load cases that have just been generated for a scenario. For
example, if load cases 1 to 35 were generated, you should type 1-35 into the load cases field.
Note that this may not always be necessary as the load cases field is automatically set by
SPACE GASS for the first scenario whenever moving loads are generated.
367
On the side toolbar, you should then ensure that the envelope button
desired bending moment
or shear force
is depressed and the
diagram button is depressed.
Combining scenarios with other static load cases

The load cases generated for a scenario can be combined with other static load cases using the
table at the bottom of the scenario properties form. This is necessary when the moving loads
need to be combined with other load cases such as dead loads, live loads, etc.
For example, in the above form, the scenario 1 moving loads will be combined with static
load case 9 to form a set of combination load cases starting at load case 500. A further set of
368
Graphical Input
combination load cases starting at 900 will combine the scenario 1 load cases (factored by
0.9) with static load case 6.
You can see this has the potential to generate a huge number of load cases and you may,
therefore, need to increase the "Maximum load cases" value via the "Problem size limits" item
of the Settings menu.
If you need to combine a scenario with more than one static primary or combination load
case, simply create a combination load case that combines the primary and combination
load cases into a new combination load case first and then combine the scenario with that
new combination load case. Remember that combination load cases can be combined into
further combinations up to four levels deep.
Combining scenarios with other load cases increases the risk of overwriting existing load
cases and having load case clashes due to overlapping of load cases between scenarios and
combinations. SPACE GASS checks for these occurrences and prevents the load generation
from proceeding if any problems are detected.
If you don't want to use the "Combining with other Load Cases" table in the scenario
properties form above then you can also combine sets of load cases using the "Generate"
button in the normal combination load cases datasheet. This has the added advantage that you
can change your combinations at any time without having to re-run the moving load
generation. The following example would combine load case 6 factored by 0.9 with load
cases 100-177 factored by 1.0 into combination load cases 900-977. It would achieve exactly
the same thing as the second line in the "Combining with other Load Cases" table above.
369
Multiple viewports
This tool is only available in the traditional graphics window.
SPACE GASS allows you to present more than one view of your structure on the screen at
any one time in the traditional graphics window. Up to four different windows, or
"viewports", can be displayed and individually configured to better display your structure.
The procedure involves clicking the
button or selecting "Viewports" from the Window
menu. Once you have opened multiple viewports you can page through the different views
using the
functions).
and
toolbar buttons (the TAB and SHIFT+TAB keys perform the same
When you click the viewport tool you are presented with a number of different
configurations. Most of these configurations are self explanatory, with the exception of the
bottom four buttons.
These four buttons allow you to select any one of the four viewports, either on their own, or in
combination. Each corner of the screen corresponds with viewports 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
If one of the viewports selected is already displayed it will return to the configuration defined
by the diagram on the button selected.
Each of the viewports which are displayed have their own unique configuration. This applies
to scales, viewpoint, filters, superimposed diagrams, toggle button settings, etc. The
configuration you specify for a viewport will be retained when you close the viewport so that,
when you open that viewport again, the same settings will be active.
You can use the viewports to display a variety of different information including different
views of the structure, graphics settings, bending moment, shear force, axial force, stress and
displacement diagrams, dynamic and buckling mode shapes, filters, load cases, member top
flanges, 3D geometry, local axes, etc. When you select a different viewport (either by clicking
on it with the mouse, selecting it via the "Viewport" toolbar buttons or Window menu, or by
using the TAB and SHIFT+TAB keys) the settings you have selected for that viewport will be
indicated via the toggle buttons.
370
Graphical Input
Graphics commands apply to the active viewport. Some graphics commands allow you to
move between viewports without exiting from the command. For instance, consider a job
where you have 4 viewports displayed with viewport 1 as the active viewport. If you select
the draw facility and start drawing a line in the active viewport, you can then move the cursor
to any other viewport without exiting from the draw command.
You will find that as you move the cursor between the viewports each viewport displays a
drawn line which has the same coordinates as in the viewport where you first started drawing
the line. This is useful in a number of situations, such as when you start drawing a line in one
viewport but cannot locate the end point in that viewport. This feature applies to some
graphics functions and can be switched on and off via the "Viewports" form (ie. by toggling
the "Activate Viewport Under Cursor" check box in the viewports form).
371
Node loads
This tool allows you to graphically apply force and moment loads to nodes. Node loads are
always referenced to the global axes system. If you wish to apply node loads in local axes you
should use member concentrated loads instead (see also Member concentrated loads).
1. Select the nodes you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then select "Node
Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Click the
toolbar button or select "Node Loads - Graphical" from the Loads
menu, select the nodes you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click
Ok.
You should then choose between showing the loads applied to each selected node
individually (ie. one line of data for each node) or applied as a group to all the
the same load to a number of nodes. If you are inputting a different load on each node
then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing "individual" can also be
useful if you are simply trying to see what loads are already applied to the nodes you
have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each node individually then you can
also choose between showing all the selected nodes or just the ones that are loaded. If
you are inputting new loads then you would probably choose to show all the selected
nodes, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads then showing
just the loaded nodes may be preferable.
372
Graphical Input
See also Node load data.
373
Node properties
The node property forms described here are only available in the traditional graphics
The renderer.
Node properties include node coordinates, node restraints and master-slave constraints.
Hence, selecting the graphical option for "Nodes", "Node restraints" or "Master-slave
constraints" will all take you to the same node properties form.
There are three modes available for editing node properties as follows.
To edit or query node properties one node at a time
Simply double-click on a node.
Note "Edit/Query Node" in the title bar of the form that appears.
Although this mode only lets you edit the properties of one node at a time, you can simply
click on any other node to display and edit its properties without exiting the command. When
doing so, any changes you made to the properties of the previously displayed node are saved.
You can also press the "Results" button and then click on any nodes to display their analysis
results in a scrollable window (see also Query analysis results).
To edit or query node properties for multiple nodes using a form
Select some nodes graphically, click the right mouse button and then select "Properties
Note "Edit Node Properties" in the title bar of the form that appears.
374
Graphical Input
Edit mode works in a similar way to edit/query mode except that you cant select other nodes
while the form is open. You can, however select multiple nodes initially and make changes to
all of them simultaneously.
Blank fields
A blank field indicates that for the nodes selected, more than one value exists. If you leave
such a field blank then the selected nodes will retain their individual values. However, if you
type into a blank field then all of the selected nodes will receive the new value.
Special buttons
Shows or hides the master-slave constraints part of the node properties form.
Allows you to graphically select a master node rather than having to type in its node number.
To edit or query node properties for multiple nodes using a datasheet
Select some nodes graphically, click the right mouse button and then select "Properties
Note that the datasheet that appears is different to the normal nodes datasheet because it
contains extra columns for restraints and master-slave constraints.
375
You can view node restraints or master-slave constraints graphically by depressing the
"View node restraints" or "View master-slave constraints" toggle buttons in the side toolbar.
If you change any node properties that affect the structures geometry, you may not be
able to select some nodes, members or plates until after a redraw. This is due to their
displayed position becoming out-of-date. The "Regen" check box allows you to order an
automatic redraw after you exit the node properties form.
You can remove restraints and/or constraints by either
blanking the restraint or constraint field or by typing "NONE" in the field or by clicking the
delete button.
See also Nodes.
376
Graphical Input
Node restraints
Node restraints are incorporated into node properties.
377
Notes
Notes can be attached to nodes, members or plates, or simply placed anywhere on or near the
model.
To add a note you can right-click anywhere in space or on a node, member or plate and then
select "Add Note" to bring up the following form. The form lets you set the note's colors,
leader length and location. When you click Ok the note appears in the renderer. Notes are
saved with the job and stay with the model unless you delete them.
378
Graphical Input
Notes can be turned on or off using the left side of the

toolbar, or by clicking the small arrow on the right side of the
the notes editor which lets you move, edit or delete notes.
button at the bottom of the side

button you can open
379
Ortho
This tool is only available in the traditional graphics window. The renderer has other
alignment tools that replicate the function of this Ortho tool.
The ortho tool limits the lines that you draw to only horizontal or vertical.
You can activate ortho mode by clicking the
toolbar or selecting "Ortho" from
the Settings menu or pressing "SHIFT+CTRL+O" on the keyboard (or just "O" if a graphics
command is active).
If ORTHO is on, it activates a secondary crosshair graphics cursor which indicates the actual
selection point and which moves in such a way that only horizontal or vertical lines (relative
to the frame global axes) can be drawn. It is a very useful aid for drawing and positioning
members, as most structures contain predominantly horizontal and vertical members.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking the "Ortho Mode" toolbar button or re-selecting
the "Ortho Mode" menu item.
The current ORTHO setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
If you are drawing new members with ORTHO on and

ATTACH set to "NEAR/END", then the attachment point for any new member which attaches
to an intermediate point on another member is positioned so that the new member stays truly
orthogonal. You can also use ATTACH set to "ORTHOGONAL" for the same result.
380
Graphical Input
Pan
This tool allows you to move the structure in any direction on the screen. It is useful if you
cannot see the entire structure at once and you don't want to change the scale. You simply
move the structure until you can see the desired portion.

Panning can be most conveniently done using the mousewheel or keyboard arrow keys as
described in "Shortcuts". For example, while viewing the structure graphically, just hold
down the CTRL key and use the mousewheel to pan up or down, or hold down the SHIFT key
and use the mousewheel to pan left or right.
Alternatively, you can pan by clicking the
View menu or the floating menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Pan" from the
The sequence of operation is as follows.

1. Pick two points that represent the relative movement through which the structure is to
be panned across the screen.
2. The structure is redrawn at the new position.
The PAN operation does not change node coordinates, it simply translates your
viewpoint.
381
Plane
The plane tool allows you to specify an operating plane in or parallel to the global XY, XZ or
YZ planes in which the graphics cursor will move.
At any time while drawing lines or just generally moving the mouse cursor, you can see its
coordinates displayed in the bottom right-hand corner of the renderer. Depending on the
current working plane, you will notice that only two of the coordinates change as you move
the mouse and the third one is held constant. You can change the working plane by pressing
the X, Y or Z keys or by right-clicking one of the view selector faces or by clicking the
working plane button
in the bottom toolbar.
Note that whenever you graphically select a point or a node, the working plane moves to the
plane of that point or node. If you have a grid displayed, it is drawn in the current working
plane.
For more information about the attachment, alignment, grid and snap tools in the renderer,
refer to Attachment and alignment methods, Grid and Snap.

You can change the plane setting by clicking the
"Operating Plane" from the Settings menu or pressing "SHIFT+CTRL+P" on the keyboard (or
"X", "Y", "Z" or "P" if a graphics command is active).
It allows you to accurately move the graphics cursor to any desired position in 3D space.
The current PLANE setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
The "Offset" field is the distance from the operating plane to the structure origin. It can be
seen by observing the coordinates display as you move the graphics cursor.
382
Graphical Input
You can often take advantage of the fact that when picking
points in any graphics operation, the operating plane offset is changed to match the
coordinates of the most recently picked point.
If you change the viewpoint such that the operating plane is
no longer visible, the program will automatically change the operating plane to a visible one.
383

This tool allows you to graphically apply pressure loads to plates. Plate pressure loads can be
referenced to the global or local axes systems.
1. Select the plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then select
"Pressure Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Click the
toolbar button or select "Plate Pressure Loads - Graphical" from the
Loads menu, select the plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then
click Ok.
You should then choose between showing the loads applied to each selected plate
individually (ie. one line of data for each plate) or applied as a group to all the
selected plates (ie. one line of data for all the plates). The advantage of the "group"
applied to all the selected plates. This can be particularly useful if you are applying
the same load to a number of plates. If you are inputting a different load on each plate
then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing "individual" can also be
useful if you are simply trying to see what loads are already applied to the plates you
have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each plate individually then you can
also choose between showing all the selected plates or just the ones that are loaded. If
you are inputting new loads then you would probably choose to show all the selected
plates, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads then showing
just the loaded plates may be preferable.
384
Graphical Input
See also Plate pressure data.
See also Varying plate pressure loads.
385
Plate properties
The plate property forms described here are only available in the traditional graphics
The renderer.
Plate properties include plate type, connectivity, orientation of local axes, plate thickness,
plate offset and material properties.
There are three modes available for editing plate properties as follows.
To edit or query plate properties one plate at a time
Simply double-click on a plate.
Note "Edit/Query Plate" in the title bar of the form that appears.
Although this mode only lets you edit the properties of one plate at a time, you can simply
click on any other plate to display and edit its properties without exiting the command. When
doing so, any changes you made to the properties of the previously displayed plate are saved.
You can also press the "Results" button and then click on any plates to display their analysis
results in a scrollable window (see also Query analysis results).
To edit or query plate properties for multiple plates using a form
Select some plates graphically, click the right mouse button and then select "Properties
Note "Edit Plate Properties" in the title bar of the form that appears.
386
Graphical Input
Edit mode works in a similar way to edit/query mode except that you cant select other plates
while the form is open. You can, however select multiple plates initially and make changes to
all of them simultaneously.
Blank fields
A blank field indicates that for the plates selected, more than one value exists. If you leave
such a field blank then the selected plates will retain their individual values. However, if you
type into a blank field then all of the selected plates will receive the new value.
Special buttons
Allows you to input a material from a standard library.
Material properties are different to the other items in the plates form because a single material
can be shared amongst many plates. All other items of data in the plates form have their own
independent values for each plate. Hence, as soon as you change the material property
number, the rest of the material data changes to match.
You can scroll through the materials in the current job by
changing the material number in the plate properties form. All of the properties that have
been defined for that material will be displayed. If no properties have been defined for that
material then the name field will be blank, as will the properties fields.
To edit or query plate properties for multiple plates using a datasheet
Select some plates graphically, click the right mouse button and then select "Properties
You can view plate offsets graphically by depressing the "View offsets" toggle button in
the side toolbar.
If you change any plate properties that affect the structures geometry, you may not be
able to select some nodes or plates until after a redraw. This is due to their displayed position
becoming out-of-date. The "Regen" check box allows you to order an automatic redraw after
you exit the node properties form.
See also Plates.
387

388
Graphical Input

This tool allows you to graphically specify displacements and rotations to nodes. The
prescribed displacements are load case specific. Node displacements are always referenced to
the global axes system and can only be applied to restrained degrees of freedom.
1. Select the nodes you wish to displace, click the right mouse button and then select
"Prescribed Node Displacements" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Prescribed Node Displacements - Graphical" from the Loads menu, select the
nodes you wish to displace, click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new displacements then you
would probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load cases in the
datasheet that follows. If you are editing displacements then you may also wish to
leave the load cases list field blank unless there are a large number of load cases and
you want to restrict the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the displacements applied to each selected
node individually (ie. one line of data for each node) or applied as a group to all the
the same displacement to a number of nodes. If you are inputting a different
displacement on each node then you should choose the "individual" selection.
Choosing "individual" can also be useful if you are simply trying to see what
displacements are already applied to the nodes you have selected.
If you have elected to show the displacements applied to each node individually then
you can also choose between showing all the selected nodes or just the ones that are
displaced. If you are inputting new displacements then you would probably choose to
show all the selected nodes, whereas if you are editing existing displacements or just
viewing displacements then showing just the displaced nodes may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing displacements shown. You can add, edit
or delete displacements and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The
operation of the datasheet is the same as the non-graphical datasheets (see also
Datasheets).
389
See also Prescribed node displacement data.
390
Graphical Input
Property panels
Node, member and plate property panels
The node, member and plate property panels operate in two slightly different modes as
described below.
Mode 1 - When you double-click on a node, member or plate in the model, the appropriate
property panel opens and you can make changes and then click the Ok button at the bottom of
the panel to confirm the changes. Alternatively, if you make some changes in a property panel
and then simply click on a another node, member or plate in your model, the previous changes
will be confirmed and the newly selected item's data will appear in the property panel.
Mode 2 - If you select one or more nodes, members or plates and then right-click and select
"View/Edit Properties" from the menu that appears, the appropriate panel will open with the
combined data for all of the selected items. When in this mode, you cannot select other nodes,
members or plates until you have clicked the Ok or Cancel buttons at the bottom of the panel.
Blank fields indicate that the data is different for the selected items. Be careful with blank
fields because if you enter data into one of them then all of the selected items will get that
data.
Single selection
Multiple selection
391
Section and material property panels

The section and material property panels are located by default on the right hand side of the
renderer and are usually closed unless you have them pinned open. To open them simply
hover over the tab.
392
Graphical Input
You can open the property panels to view the section and material properties and color match
them to the members in your model, or you can click a particular section or material in the
panel to have all the matching members in your model selected.
Controlling property panels

changes to
it changes to
393
394
Graphical Input
Query analysis results

You can query the analysis results graphically in either of two ways:
Using the mouse cursor
If you move the mouse cursor onto any load or analysis diagram, the value of the diagram at
the cursor position will be shown, together with its location, member number and load case
number.
Analysis result querying can be turned on or off by clicking the left hand part of the
button at the bottom of the side toolbar. If the button is on but analysis results don't appear
when you move the mouse over a diagram, click the arrow part of the
check that the "Analysis Results Infotips" option is ticked.
button and
Using a scrollable window

Right-click on any node, member or plate and then select "Analysis Results" from the popup
menu that appears. You can then specify the list of load cases that you want to query or just
leave the list blank to see the results for all load cases.
The scrollable results form shown below then displays a useful summary of the analysis
results for the node, member or plate you selected.
395
While the form is open, you can simply click on any other nodes, members or plates to have
their results displayed.
To get a fully detailed analysis report, refer to Output.
See also Infotips.
396
Graphical Input
Query frame
You can query any node, member or plate in your model by simply double-clicking on it.
While the form is open, you can simply click on any other nodes, members or plates to have
their attributes displayed.
For full details, refer to Node properties, Member properties or Plate properties.
397
Query steel member design results

After a steel member design, right-click on any member and then select "Steel Member
Design Results" from the popup menu that appears. The scrollable results form shown below
displays a useful summary of the design results for the member you selected.
While the form is open, you can simply click on any other members to have their design
results displayed.
To get a fully detailed steel member design report, refer to Output.
398
Graphical Input
Redraw
This tool is not applicable to the renderer, as the model is always kept up to date, however
in the traditional graphics window a redraw is sometimes required to "clean-up" the image.
You can redraw the graphics display area with the same scale, viewpoint and contents by
clicking the
menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Redraw" from the View menu or the floating
The REDRAW facility can be useful for removing stray lines

or text which are sometimes left after a MOVE, COPY, ROTATE, MIRROR or other graphics
operation.
399
Remove crossed member nodes

This renderer tool lets you remove nodes that are at the intersection of members that cross
over each other, such as you get with wall or roof cross bracing.
After selecting the nodes attached to the crossed members, right-click and then select
"Remove Crossed Member Nodes" from the menu that appears.
400
Graphical Input
Remove intermediate nodes

In the renderer you can remove intermediate nodes by selecting the desired members, rightclicking and then selecting "Remove Intermediate Nodes" from the menu that appears.
Note that intermediate nodes can only be removed from members that are straight. For
members that aren't straight you can simply use the Move tool to move an intermediate node
onto its neighbour to remove it.
401
Renumber
The Renumber tool allows you to renumber nodes, members or plates at any stage of the
program operation. Items that reference nodes, members or plates such as restraints,
constraints, loads and steel design data are automatically adjusted for the new numbering
sequence.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be renumbered, right-click and select
"Renumber" from the menu that appears. In the form shown below, the "Increment by" option
allows you to create a gap in a sequence of nodes, members or plates without having to
redefine the entire numbering sequence. You can also renumber in one, two or three
directions simultaneously if required.

After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be renumbered, right-click and select
"Renumber" from the menu that appears. In the form shown below, the "Increment by" option
allows you to create a gap in a sequence of nodes, members or plates without having to
redefine the entire numbering sequence.
402
Graphical Input
Note that if a node, member or plate is to be renumbered to a node, member or plate that
already exists, SPACE GASS displays an error message and forces you to change the
renumbering data before renumbering can proceed.
403
Repeat last command

This tool is only available in the traditional graphics window.
By pressing the keyboard spacebar, you can repeat the last command. This can be useful in
situations where you need to repeat an operation a number of times.
404
Graphical Input
Reverse member direction

This tool in the renderer allows you to reverse the direction of selected members so that their
local x-axes point in the opposite direction. It effectively swaps the node A and node B
numbers in the member data.
After selecting the members to be reversed, right-click and select "Reverse Member
Direction" from the menu that appears to display the form as shown below.
Any options that you tick in the form below will be adjusted so that they are not affected by
the reversal, otherwise they will be reversed with the member.
Note that you can see the direction of members using the View member origins tool.
405
Reverse plate direction

The Reverse Plate Direction tool lets you reverse the direction of plates, effectively swapping
their front and back faces. It also results in the plates local x and z axes having their
directions reversed.
Original Plate
Reversed Plate
After selecting the selected plates, right-click and select "Reverse Plate Direction" from the
menu that appears. If you tick the "Adjust the direction of loads so that they are unaffected by
the reversal" option then any plate loads will be adjusted so that they remain in the same
general direction as before the plates were reversed.
Note that the order of the nodes around a plate are changed after the plate has been reversed.
406
Graphical Input
Rotate
The Rotate tool allows you to select one or more nodes, members or plates and rotate them
about any user defined axis.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be rotated, right-click and select "Rotate"
from the menu that appears. You should then pick the centre of rotation and then fill out the
form that appears below. Note that the sign of the angle of rotation follows the "right hand
screw rule".
or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. For more information, refer to
Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that when drawing, you can use the
mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more
407
Scale
You can use this tool to apply a scale factor to selected nodes, members or plates. For
example, you could use it to enlarge your model by 20% or, if you had mistakenly input your
node geometry in millimetre units instead of meters, you could scale the model down by
0.001.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be scaled, right-click and select "Scale" from
the menu that appears. You should then pick a base point about which the scaling occurs,
followed by specifying the scale factor in the form shown below.
or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You can also align with one of the
three global axes. For more information, see "Aligning, snapping and attachment tools" in
The renderer. Remember also that when picking points, you can use the mouse or you can
simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more information, see "Using the
The Scale tool only affects the node coordinates. It doesnt adjust offsets, section
properties, loads or any other parts of your model.
408
Graphical Input
Scales
The Scales tool allows you to change the scales of the model or any of the superimposed
diagrams.
You can change the scale of your model by zooming using the mouse scrollwheel or you can
change the scale of load or analysis result diagrams by holding down a key while rotating the
mouse scrollwheel. For example, to change the scale of your loads hold down the "L" key
while rotating the mouse scrollwheel, or use the "D" key for deflections, "M" for moments,
"S" for shear forces, "A" for axial forces, "T" for torsions, "B" for buckling mode shapes, or
"E" for stresses.
Alternatively, you can click the
form.
button in the top toolbar to open the following scales

Changing scales can be most conveniently done using the mousewheel or keyboard arrow
keys as described in "Shortcuts". For example, while viewing the structure graphically, just
use the mousewheel to zoom in or out, or hold down the M key and use the mousewheel to
change the scale of a displayed bending moment diagram, etc.
Alternatively, you can change scales by clicking the
from the View menu or the floating menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Scale"
All scales initially default to values that allow the diagrams to fit neatly into the available
graphics display area. If you change any of the scales, they are retained with the job.
409
The "Displacements factor" and "Buckling mode factor" settings are distortion factors
rather than scales. Increasing their values causes the relevant diagrams to increase in size.
Increasing any of the other "Scale" settings causes the relevant diagrams to be reduced in
size.
410
Graphical Input
Sea Loads
This tool lets you generate wave, ocean current, marine growth and buoyancy loads on
submerged structures in marine and offshore environments where these effects impose
significant loading on the affected structure.
The procedure for load calculation starts with the analysis of the wave by an appropriate
theory to determine the water particle velocities and accelerations at various depths in the
water body. The computed velocities and accelerations are combined with any additional
water current velocities (tidal, density current, storm velocity, etc), marine growth loads and
buoyancy loads for determining the effective loading on individual structural elements. When
combining wave and water currents the Doppler effect of the current on the wave is
automatically taken into account.
Presently, Airy's linear wave theory and Stokes' 5th and 2nd order non-linear wave theories
are incorporated into this tool. Sea loads on the structure comprising drag and inertia loading
on individual structural members are computed using Morison's equation. The formulation
applies strictly to skeletal framed structures with slender tubular members, but can also be
applied to framed structures with non-tubular members applying modified coefficients for
drag and inertia. The tool is not suitable for the computation of sea loads on large bodies such
as vessels, ship-shaped or boxed and/or plate structures where the length to effective diameter
ratio of any individual element is small.
The sea load generator uses the concept of "scenarios", each of which represents the motion
of a wave and generates multiple load cases that correspond with the various positions of the
wave. It is normal for a scenario to represent a full wavelength, however you can reduce it to
part of a wavelength by changing the "Phase increment" and "Steps" variables so that their
product is less than 360 degrees if desired.
The procedure is as follows:
1.
From within the renderer, select the members that are flooded, click the right mouse button
and then select "Generate Sea Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
Note that all of the submerged members in your model will be loaded, regardless of whether
you select them or not. The members you select will indicate which of them are to be regarded
as "flooded". The unselected (non-flooded) members will be subjected to buoyancy loads if
they are tubular, whereas the selected (flooded) members will not.
2.
In the sea load form that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your requirements and
411
General Parameters:
The following parameters are general in nature and apply to all the sea load cases.
Water depth
This is the depth of water above the mudline (or seabed).
Mudline level
The mudline level is essentially the seabed level. It is the level relative to the global origin of
the SPACE GASS model and is negative if the mudline is below the SPACE GASS origin
(the normal situation).
412
Graphical Input
It may be prudent to set up your model so that its origin is at the waterline and therefore
Mudline level = - (Water depth). This also means that any "Levels" such as the mudline level,
marine growth levels or ocean current levels would always be negative if below the waterline.
Water density
The normal density of water.
Kinematic viscosity
This varies with the water temperature. The default value is based on a water temperature of
15 deg C.
Surface roughness
The surface roughness affects the drag of the water on the structure. The surface roughness
value you specify is only used on surfaces that have no marine growth. For surfaces that have
marine growth the surface roughness is taken as the marine growth thickness up to a
maximum of 50mm.
Member segments
The number of segments that a distributed load is broken into along a member to simulate the
curved profile of the applied load.
Marine growth load case
This is the load case that the self weight of the marine growth will go into. Because marine
growth doesn't change with waves or currents its self weight is put into its own load case. You
can the combine it with the wave and current load cases using combination load cases in the
normal way.
CDM parameters
These are the drag (CD), inertia (CM) and lift coefficients that are used in the sea load
calculations on submerged members. Guidance for selection of these parameters is available
in various code standards including API RP 2A. In the absence of any other information you
could consider using CD=0.65 & CM=1.60 for clean tubular members or CD=1.05 &
CM=1.20 for fouled tubular members. Values of CD and CM for other cross section types
may be obtained from international codes and standards including DnV codes.
The "Smooth" coefficients are used if k/D <= 0.0001, the "Rough" coefficients are used if k/D
>= 0.01 and an interpolation between the "Smooth" and "Rough" coefficients are used if
0.0001 < k/D < 0.0, where k is the surface roughness and D is the largest dimension or
diameter of the member.
Marine growth parameters

Any structural element submerged in water will have marine growth developed on its wetted
surfaces. Such growth effectively increases the element's exposed area to waves which in turn
attracts higher wave loading. For this reason the marine growth parameters applicable to the
region where the structure is located needs to be considered in the sea load analysis.
413

At least two lines of marine growth data are required, with the marine growth only occurring
between the levels and not outside them. If the thickness or density is different in adjacent
levels then they are assumed to vary linearly between the levels. Marine growth levels are
relative to the SPACE GASS origin and are negative if the location is below the origin.
Scenarios
Each scenario represents the motion of a wave and normally covers a full wavelength. If the
"Selection Criterion" is set to "None" then multiple load cases representing the various
positions of the wave are generated for each scenario. If the "Selection Criterion" is set to
"Maximum overturning moment" or "Maximum base shear" then only one load case will be
generated for each scenario. You can specify multiple scenarios, each with its own direction
and load case(s).
The following parameters are scenario specific.
414
Graphical Input
Load case / Starting load case

This is the first of the load cases that will be generated for the current scenario. If the
Selection Criterion is set to None then the last load case for the scenario =
Starting load case + Steps 1, otherwise there is only one load case per scenario.
Still water depth
Is based on the general water depth, but also includes any tide and/or storm surge at the time
of occurrence of waves. It cannot be less than the general water depth.
Wave kinematics factor
Guidance for selection of the wave kinematics factor is available in various code standards
including API RP 2A. In the absence of any other information you could consider using 0.85
to 0.95 for extreme cyclonic or storm waves, or 1.00 for normal operating and fatigue waves.
Wave height
The wave height is the vertical distance between the wave crest and the trough.
Wave period
The wave period is the time it takes for the wave to travel through one wavelength (ie. the
distance between consecutive wave crests) relative to a stationary point. The sea load output
also reports the "Apparent Period", which is the wave period relative to a point travelling with
the current (if a current exists). A current in the wave direction tends to stretch the wavelength
and increases the apparent period, while an opposing current shortens them. This is the
Doppler effect of the current on the wave.
Start phase and phase increment
Sea loading on a marine structure varies continuously as the wave passes through the structure
with the maximum loading occurring at a specific position of the wave with respect to the
structure. To determine the maximum loading, the wave is simulated to pass through the
structure beginning with the start phase position and stepping the wave at the specified phase
increment. A phase of 0 degrees corresponds with the wave crest at the origin (ie. the 0,0,0
position) of your model. 360 degrees is equivalent to one wavelength.
Steps
This is the number of phase increment steps considered during the analysis. End
phase = Start phase + (Steps x Phase increment). If the Selection Criterion is set to
None then the number of load cases generated for a scenario is equal to the
number of steps, otherwise there is just one load case per scenario.
415
Wave theory
Selection of the wave theory for analysis of any wave depends on the wave parameters and
the water depth. A general guidance for selection of the wave theory can be obtained from the
American Petroleum Institute's Recommended Practice API RP 2A. In the absence of other
information the following could be considered as a rough guideline:
if 0.000 <= H/(g.T^2) <= 0.001 and 0.01 <= d/(g.T^2) <= 0.2 then select Airy's linear theory
if 0.001 <= H/(g.T^2) <= 0.02 and 0.005 <= d/(g.T^2) <= 0.2 then select Stokes' 5th Order
non-linear theory
where H = wave height, d = still water depth, T = wave period and g = gravitational
acceleration.
Selection criterion
Sea loading on the structure is evaluated at each position of the wave as it passes through the
structure and, depending on the "Selection criterion" specified in the form, the critical position
is selected as the position of the wave that results in the maximum base shear or the maximum
overturning moment at the mudline. If set to "None" then a load case is generated at each
wave position and no attempt is made to determine the critical one.
Note that the base shear and overturning moment calculations are based on the horizontal
wave and current loads only and exclude any vertical loads from buoyancy, self weight,
marine growth or other applied loads.
Wave and current direction
These are the directions of the approaching wave and water current relative to the global Xaxis. Direction angles are positive anti-clockwise from global X when viewed in plan.
Ocean currents
Currents occurring simultaneously with waves significantly influence the total sea loading
and need to be considered in the analysis. Current profiles should be input for each scenario.
They are combined with the wave velocities determined by the wave analysis before
Morison's equation is applied.
At least two lines of ocean current data are required, with the currents only occurring between
the levels and not outside them. If the current is different in adjacent levels then it is assumed
to vary linearly between the levels. Ocean current levels are relative to the SPACE GASS
origin and are negative if the location is below the origin.
The "Blockage Factor" controls how much the current stream in the vicinity of the structure is
reduced from the specified "free stream" value by blockage. In other words, the presence of
the structure causes the incident flow to diverge. Some of the incident flow goes around the
structure rather than through it, and the current speed within the structure is reduced.
Blockage factors ranging from 0.7 to 1.0 are typical, with 1.0 representing no blockage.
416
Graphical Input
Doppler effect
When waves and currents occur together, an "Apparent Period" relative to the current is
determined, accounting for the Doppler effect of the current on the wave. A current in the
wave direction tends to stretch the wavelength and increases the apparent period, while an
opposing current shortens them. The apparent wave period is determined from API RP 2A
Figure 2.3.1-2 if -0.015 <= V/gT <= 0.025, where V is the current component in the wave
direction, g is the acceleration due to gravity and T is the actual wave period relative to a
stationary point. If V/gT is outside of the above mentioned limits then a warning is issued and
the results may not be accurate.
417
Section properties
Section properties are incorporated into member properties.
418
Graphical Input
Select all
The Select All tool lets you quickly select all visible nodes, members or plates and then
perform an operation on them.
1. Click the right mouse button and then select "Select All" from the floating menu that
appears. Alternatively, press Ctrl-A on the keyboard or select "Select All" from the
Structure menu.
The visible nodes, members or plates are highlighted graphically the same as if you
had selected them by picking them with the mouse.
Note that any nodes, members or plates outside the graphics window or those that are
suppressed due to being filtered out are not selected.
2. You can then click on a toolbar button or click the right mouse button and choose
from the floating menu that appears to perform an operation on the selected items.
You can cancel the highlighting by pressing the keyboard ESC key or by selecting
"Cancel" from the floating menu.
419
Selection methods
normal selection window is drawn as a rectangular box, whereas a crossing window is shown
as a filled rectangle. The two types of selection window are shown below.
In order to de-select nodes, members or plates, you simply select them again, either by
420
Graphical Input
Note that you can select all nodes, members or plates by holding down Ctrl and pressing the
A key.
421
Self weight
Self weight or self mass can be input into any load cases by simply specifying the acceleration
due to gravity in any of the three global axis directions.
You can open the self weight datasheet by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting "Self
Weight" from the Loads menu and then entering data into the datasheet as explained in Self
weight data.
422
Graphical Input
Snap
The snap tool causes the cursor to move in discrete steps and allows you to accurately
position points on an imaginary snap grid.

The Snap tool which can be turned on or off via the snap button
in the bottom of the side
toolbar or by pressing the S key. The snap spacing can be set to any desired increment or it
can be made to match the currently displayed grid spacing.
For more information about the attachment, alignment, grid and working plane tools in the
renderer, refer to Attachment and alignment methods, Grid and Plane.

You can activate snap mode by clicking the
toolbar or selecting "Snap" from
the Settings menu or pressing "SHIFT+CTRL+S" on the keyboard (or just "S" if a graphics
command is active).
It allows you to accurately position the graphics cursor. The SNAP facility can be set to any
desired increment which may or may not match the GRID setting (as desired). The SNAP
increment uses the same system of units as the structure being displayed.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking the "Snap" toolbar button or re-selecting the
"Snap" menu item.
The current SNAP setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
423
For convenience, SNAP is automatically turned off temporarily during some graphics
operations such as when you are simply picking members. This avoids the problem of not
easily being able to pick objects due to the SNAP stepping effect.
When SNAP is turned off, you may notice that the graphics cursor moves in very small
increments which are not useful fractions of whole numbers. These increments actually
represent the distance between pixels on the screen. When you position the cursor on a known
point, the coordinates display sometimes indicates that the cursor is not exactly on the point.
This is because there is no pixel exactly on the point and the cursor has therefore moved to
the closest pixel. SPACE GASS, however ignores the small movement to the closest pixel and
assumes that the cursor is located exactly on the desired point. When SNAP is turned on this
does not occur.
424
Graphical Input
Spectral loads
Spectral loads must be defined for each load case that you wish to include in a dynamic
spectral response analysis.
You can open the spectral loads datasheet by selecting "Spectral Load Data" from the Loads
menu and then entering data into the datasheet as explained in Spectral load data.
Note that spectral curves can be created, imported or exported via the spectral curve editor.
For more information, refer to Spectral curve editor.
425
Static load to mass conversion

Static loads such as dead loads and live loads can be converted to masses if you want to use
them in a dynamic analysis and you don't want to re-enter them from scratch as masses. You
can select the "Static Load to Mass Conversion" option from the Loads menu in the renderer
to bring up the form below.
You can convert a number of static load cases at once by entering them as a list in the "Static
load case list" field. You must also enter a corresponding list of mass load cases in the "Mass
case list" field. They can have the same load case numbers as the static loads, however for
your own organizational purposes it is usually a good idea to keep them separate.
It is usual to have the "Create mass in all three directions regardless of static load direction"
option ticked, as masses generally have inertia in all three directions. As such, static loads that
have components in more than one direction on a single object are first resolved into the
resultant direction and then converted to a single mass. Alternatively, if the "Create mass in
all three directions..." option is not ticked then the masses will simply be placed in the same
directions as their source static loads.
If the "Delete masses in destination mass cases first" option is ticked then all masses in the
destination mass cases will be deleted first, otherwise they will be added to.
Note that self weight static loads are not converted with this tool because self mass can be
generated automatically in the dynamic analysis. Note also that moments and torsions are not
converted to rotational masses.
426
Graphical Input
Stretch
The Stretch tool lets you stretch all or part of your model.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be stretched, right-click and select "Stretch"
from the menu that appears. You should then pick an anchor point, plus two points that
represent the ends of a vector through which the items are to be stretched.
Each selected item is then moved parallel to the stretch vector by an amount that is
proportional to its distance from the anchor point. The distance by which a point is moved
parallel to the stretch vector is given by:
where D is the distance moved, Lv is the length of the stretch vector, Dn is the distance from
the node to the anchor point in the direction of the stretch vector, and Dv is the distance from
the start of the stretch vector to the anchor point in the direction of the stretch vector.
427
Subdivide
The Subdivide tool allows you to select one or more members and subdivide them by
inserting intermediate nodes at regular or irregular positions along them.
After selecting the members to be subdivided, right-click and select "Subdivide" from the
menu that appears. You should then specify the number of subdivisions and their spacing in
the form shown below.
If the node insertion points are irregular, you can nominate "Insertion points" to be expressed
as inclined distances, or as projected distances along one of the global axis directions.
Naturally, you cannot nominate projected distances along a global axis which is at right
angles to the axis of the member being subdivided.
Insertion points are referenced from the node A end or Node B of the members. They can be
expressed as actual distances or as percentages. For example, to subdivide a 10m beam into
2m, 3m, and 5m beams, you could type 2,5, or 2,50%, or 20%,50% into the "Insertion
points" field. In all three cases, the final result is the same.
If you are using percentages for all of the insertion points, then the inclined or projected axis
specification is irrelevant.
Subdividing relative to an external point

If you wish to subdivide members relative to a point external to the members then you should
choose the "Point" option, click the "Select" button and then select the point to subdivide
from. This point can be a node or any point in space. For example, if you have a model in
which you want to subdivide all the columns at a level that is 5.5m from the ground, you
could select all the columns and then from within the subdivide tool, choose "Y-axis projected
distances" (assuming Y is vertical), choose the "Point" option and select a point that is at
ground level.
428
Graphical Input
Taper plates
For retaining structures such as tanks or retaining walls, a varying wall thickness can be
generated using this tool.
The tool works by you defining the thickness at the start and finish of the taper and a "taper
axis" along which the taper is defined. The taper is then projected normal to the axis onto each
plate that you have selected. The thickness of each plate is then set according to its projected
distance along the taper axis. Note that after applying a taper, each plate still has a uniform
thickness but the thickness varies from one plate to the next.
The lateral position of each plate relative to the taper axis is not important. For example, a
plate a long way from the axis will get the same thickness as a plate close to it. Similarly, a
plate on one side of the axis will get the same thickness as a plate on the other side.
Plates that are beyond the ends of the taper axis are given the thickness at the closest end of
the axis. For example, if you have a tank that is 4m high and the taper axis extends from the
base of the tank (with a starting thickness of 300mm) vertically up to the 3m mark (with a
finishing thickness of 100mm), the plates in the top 1m of the tank walls would be given the
100mm thickness.
1. Select the plates you wish to taper, click the right mouse button and then select
"Taper Plates" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Taper Plates" from the Structure menu, select the plates you wish to taper,
click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
2. Pick two points that represent the axis along which the taper will be defined.
3. In the form that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your requirements and
When applying the thickness to each plate, you can specify whether the new thickness
is applied to the front face, back face or both faces. This is achieved by applying an
429

offset to each plate so that you can effectively align the adjusted plates by their front
face, back face or centerline.
If you applying a taper to plates that have already been tapered then you should
generally untick the "Keep plate offsets" option so that the offsets are not doubled up.
4. The thicknesses are then calculated and applied to the selected plates.
430
Graphical Input
Taper/haunch generation
The Taper/Haunch generation tool lets you model tapered members with or without haunches.
A member can be tapered by varying its depth, width or both depth and width. If the depth is
varied, the taper can be applied to the top of the member, the bottom of the member, or evenly
to both the top and bottom. If the width is varied, the taper is applied evenly to both sides of
the member. If a haunch is selected, its depth is varied and is applied to the bottom of the
haunch only.
SPACE GASS uses a series of prismatic member segments to approximate the exact taper.
You can use up to 50 segments per taper, however usually 3 segments is enough to get very
close to the exact solution. The cross section dimensions for each prismatic member can be
set equal to the tapers largest end dimensions, smallest end dimensions or average
dimensions for the segment under consideration.
After selecting the members to be tapered or haunched, right-click and select "Generate
Taper/Haunch" from the menu that appears. If you have selected more than one member then
they must be a continuous run of members with no gaps in-between. Each selected member
will become a segment of the total taper or haunch. Alternatively, if you have selected just
one member then it will be subdivided as part of the taper/haunch process.
The member that you select first determines the start of the taper/haunch. If there was only
one member then the node A end will be the start of the taper/haunch. If you selected the
members using a selection window or if you selected an intermediate member first, the start
of the taper/haunch will be at the end with the lowest numbered member.
The following form shows an example of generating a taper.
The following form shows an example of generating a haunch.
431
Note that whenever a taper or haunch is generated, member offsets are also calculated and
applied to the tapered/haunched members. The offsets take into account the changed centroid
location in the built-up sections and ensure that the tapered/haunched members are correctly
positioned relative to each other.
If you applying a taper or haunch to members that have already been tapered or haunched
then you should generally untick the "Keep member offsets" option so that the offsets are not
doubled up.
432
Graphical Input
Textures
Textures can be applied to members and plates depending on their material. For example, if
the material name starts with "Steel" then the steel texture is used, or if it starts with "Conc"
then the concrete texture is used. Textures are also available for aluminium, timber and
brickwork. They can then be turned on or off via the
toolbar.
button in the bottom of the side
Textures off
433
Textures on
434
Graphical Input
Thermal loads
This tool allows you to graphically apply thermal loads to members or plates.
1. Select the members or plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then
select "Thermal Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Thermal Loads - Graphical" from the Loads menu, select the members or
plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
or plate individually (ie. one line of data for each member or plate) or applied as a
group to all the selected members or plates (ie. one line of data for all the members or
plates). The advantage of the "group" selection is that you only have to input one line
of data in the datasheet to have it applied to all the selected members or plates. This
can be particularly useful if you are applying the same load to a number of members
or plates. If you are inputting a different load on each member or plate then you
should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing "individual" can also be useful if
you are simply trying to see what loads are already applied to the members or plates
you have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each member or plate individually
then you can also choose between showing all the selected members or plates, or just
the ones that are loaded. If you are inputting new loads then you would probably
choose to show all the selected members or plates, whereas if you are editing existing
loads or just viewing loads then showing just the loaded members or plates may be
preferable.
435
See also Thermal load data.
436
Graphical Input
Transparency
When in rendered mode, the appearance of members, plates, diagrams and filtered out items
can be adjusted to be fully or partially transparent by clicking the
side toolbar.
in the bottom of the
The transparency can then be adjusted by sliding the transparency controls followed by
clicking anywhere in the graphics area of the renderer.
The following before and after images show how members and plates can be made to look
transparent.
437
438
Graphical Input
Varying plate pressure loads

For retaining structures such as tanks or retaining walls, or structures subjected to other
variable pressure distributions from wind and the like, the resulting pressure loads on plates
can be generated using this tool. The pressure variation can be linear or based on an equation
that you specify.
The tool works by you defining the pressure variation and a "load axis" along which the
pressure distribution is defined. The pressure is then projected normal to the load axis onto
each plate that you have selected.
The lateral position of each plate relative to the load axis is not important. For example, a
plate a long way from the load axis will get the same pressure as a plate close to it. Similarly,
a plate on one side of the load axis will get the same pressure as a plate on the other side.
For calculating the pressure on the walls of tanks or retaining structures, the load axis would
normally be vertical and the pressure on a plate with its centre at height h would be the same
as the pressure on the load axis at height h.
For other structures, such as a distribution of wind loads applied to a roof, it might be more
convenient to have the load axis horizontal or maybe even parallel to the roof slope.
Plates that are beyond the ends of the load axis are not loaded. For example, if you have a
tank that is 4m high and the load axis extends from the base of the tank vertically up to the 3m
mark, the plates in the top 1m of the tank walls will not be loaded.
Load Axis and Pressure Distribution
439
Resulting Pressure Applied to the Plates
If the pressure variation is defined by an equation, the equation must have "x" as the variable
representing the distance along the load axis and can include any of the operators "+", "-",
"*", "/", "\, "%" and "^". It can also include any of the functions sin, cos, tan, asin, acos, atan,
sqrt, factorial, abs, log, ln and exp.
For example, the pressure on the walls of a bulk solids container could be represented by the
equation Pressure = rc(1-e(-z/z0))/, where, for a typical coal container could have values of
=10.8, rc=0.88, z0=4.03 and =0.62.
This could be entered into the SPACE GASS equation field as
10.8*0.88*(1-exp(-x/4.03))/0.62, where "x" is the distance along the load axis and represents "z" in the
original equation.

1. Select the plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then select
"Varying Pressure Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Varying Plate Pressure Loads" from the Loads menu, select the plates you
wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
2. Pick two points that represent the load axis along which the pressure variation will be
distributed.
440
Graphical Input
3. In the form that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your requirements and
then click the Ok button. The graph at the bottom of the form represents the shape of
the pressure variation along the load axis.
The pressure variation can be linear for cases such as tanks subjected to hydrostatic
loads or, for more complex profiles, can be defined by an equation that you specify as
explained above.
If you specify "Local" axes then the pressure load will be applied in the local z-axis
direction (ie. normal to the plane of the plate). If you specify "Global" axes then you
must also specify a global XYZ vector that represents the direction of the pressure
load.
441

4. The pressure loads are then calculated and applied to the selected plates.
See also Plate pressure data.
442
Graphical Input
View buckling mode shapes

After a buckling analysis, you can display the buckling mode shapes by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting "Buckling Mode Shapes" from the View menu.
You can limit the number of buckling modes shown by defining a filter and specifying a list
of the buckling modes required.
For 2D models, it is a good idea to view the buckling mode shapes from a 3D viewpoint so
that any out-of-plane buckling modes can be observed.
443
View diagrams
You can show loading diagrams, displacement diagrams, bending moment diagrams, shear
force diagrams, axial force diagrams, torsion diagrams, stress diagrams and reactions by
clicking the
,
,
,
,
,
matching items in the View menu.
or
toolbar buttons or selecting from the
Diagrams of different types can be superimposed together. For example, it is possible to

include both bending moment and shear force diagrams together. In addition, diagrams can be
toggled on and off by clicking the button repeatedly.
444
Graphical Input
View dynamic mode shapes

After a dynamic frequency analysis, you can display animated mode shapes for all the modes
analysed by clicking the
View menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Dynamic Mode Shapes" from the
Once initiated, the following keyboard commands are available.

Operation
Display mode shapes 1 to 9
Display the next mode shape
Display the previous mode shape
Change to load case <case>
Change the display from animated to static
Change the display from static to animated
Increase the amplitude (scale)
Decrease the amplitude (scale)
Increase the frequency (speed)
Decrease the frequency (speed)
Keystrokes
1-9
Page down
Page up
C <case>
S
A
Right arrow
Left arrow
Up arrow
Down arrow
You can exit from the dynamic mode shapes commands by pressing ESC or the right mouse
button. This also causes any animation to stop and revert back to a static display.
If you use REDRAW or any other tool which causes the graphics display area to be
regenerated while a dynamic mode shape is displayed, it will revert back to an animated
display, and the dynamic mode shapes commands will again become active.
Some examples of mode shapes for a plane grid from the dynamic frequency analysis module
are shown following.
1st dynamic mode shape for plane grid
4th dynamic mode shape for plane grid
445
View envelope
You can display an envelope of any currently displayed diagrams by clicking the
button or selecting "Envelope" from the View menu.
toolbar
You can specify (a) just minimums, (b) just maximums, (c) both minimums and maximums or
(d) absolute maximums.
The load cases included in the envelope are the ones currently selected and displayed in the
load case selection combo box in the top toolbar. If you change the load case selection then
the envelope will be updated accordingly.
Envelopes of analysis results can also be obtained in output reports, including envelopes that
take their maximums and minimums from end A, end B or both ends of a member. For more
information, refer to Output
446
Graphical Input
View global origin

You can show the global origin by clicking the
(renderer) or
(traditional graphics
window) toolbar button or selecting "Global Origin" from the View menu.
447
View labelling and annotation

You can show various text labelling and annotation options by clicking the down arrow part
of the
button in the side toolbar. Once you have selected or de-selected the desired
labelling items you can click the Ok button at the bottom or must click anywhere in the
graphics area to have the labelling change applied.
Clicking the "More options..." item takes you to the following form from where you can
change colors, formatting, etc.
448
Graphical Input

You can show various text labelling and annotation options by clicking the
toolbar button
or selecting "Labelling and Annotation" from the View menu or the floating menu.
449
450
Graphical Input
Load case titles viewer

The load case titles viewer can be opened from within the renderer by clicking the load case
titles viewer button
. The viewer stays open until you close it or change jobs. It is a
handy means of seeing the details of your load cases while you are working with other tools.
Note that many of the load case input fields have a

button next to them. Clicking this
button also lets you see which load cases exist in your job, plus you can select from the
displayed list.
451
Load case titles can be input via the load case titles datasheet from within the traditional
graphics window. For more information refer to Load case titles.
You can also input/edit load case titles via the combination load cases grid in the renderer by
right-clicking a column heading or a cell in the first column.
452
Graphical Input
View local axes

You can show the member and plate local axes by clicking the
"Local Axes" from the View menu.
453
View manager
In the renderer you can save the current view for later recall by clicking the
button in the
top toolbar or by right-clicking anywhere in the graphics area and then selecting "Save View"
from the menu that appears. The view is saved as soon as you enter a name and click Ok in
the form shown below.
The view manager (located in a panel on the right side of the renderer) lists all of the saved
views. You can recall a view by simply clicking on it in the View Manager panel.
Note that the View Manager panel can be pinned open by clicking the button at the top of the
panel so that it changes to
. If you click it again, it changes to
, indicating that the
panel is not pinned and will slide closed as soon as you move away from it. Note also that you
can drag the View Manager panel away from the side of the renderer and dock it to another
location or you can just place it anywhere on your screen.
454
Graphical Input
View member origins

It is often useful to be able to see at which end of a member is its origin, as it affects the
placement of member fixities, offsets, loads, etc. You can show the member origins (shown in
red below) by clicking the
button in the bottom toolbar of the renderer.
Note that you can reverse the direction of members using the Reverse member direction tool.
455
View node / member / plate properties

You can show graphical representations of node restraints, member hinges, master-slave
constraints or offsets by clicking the
,
,
or
toolbar buttons or selecting "Node
Restraints", "Member Hinges", "Master-Slave Constraints" or "Offsets" from the View menu.
456
Graphical Input
View nodes / members / plates

You can show or hide nodes, members or plates by clicking the
,
or
buttons or selecting "Nodes", "Members" or "Plates" from the View menu.
toolbar
If the nodes, members or plates are hidden then any tools that require nodes, members or
plates to be selected are suppressed. For example, if the nodes are hidden then node loads
cannot be input or edited graphically.
457
View plate contours

You can use the 3D renderer to show colored contour diagrams for plate forces, moments and
stresses by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting "Plate Contours" from the View menu.
The following form allows you to select the type of contour diagram you wish to display as
well as specifying its smoothing, color and labelling settings.
If contour smoothing is turned on then the contours appear as continuous color gradients
rather than a discrete color for each plate element.
Contour diagrams are generated from the force, moment and stress values at each node. The
value at a given node can be determined by simply averaging the values from each element
that connects to it (non-weighted averaging) or the contribution from each element can be
weighted depending on how far the centre of the element is from the node (weighted
averaging).
For full details of the force, moment and stress contours that can be displayed, refer to "Sign
conventions".
The colors in a contour diagram can be changed by double-clicking any of the three color
icons and then selecting the desired color, or by clicking the "Color Picker" button.
If you wish to display the full range of contour values, ensure that the "Full range" option is
ticked. If not, you can "zoom in" on a particular range of contour values by unticking the
"Full range" option and specifying upper and lower limits. Values that fall within the upper
and lower limits will be colored depending on where they fall within the specified color
458
Graphical Input
spectrum, and any values that fall outside the limits will be given the same color as values that
fall on the upper and lower limits.
If you find that the contour diagram is predominantly showing the "middle" color, you may be
able to display more color detail by setting a narrower contour range.
Each plate can be labelled with its contour value if desired.
459
View results in local XY or XZ plane

You can restrict the bending moment, shear force or stress diagrams to either or both of the
members local XY or XZ planes by clicking one of the
or
toolbar buttons or
selecting "Results in Local XY Plane" or "Results in Local XZ Plane" from the View menu.
460
Graphical Input
View steel member design groups

You can switch into steel member viewing mode by clicking the
toolbar.
button in the side
This causes the display to switch from this:
to this:
The steel members are shown slightly shorter than their actual length so that you can easily
see where they start and finish.
When in steel member viewing mode the steel group numbers can be displayed instead of the
analysis member numbers as shown in the second diagram above. The numbers can be turned
on via the "Show steel member numbers" item in the
button in the side toolbar.
You can also hover over any steel member while in steel member viewing mode to display its
steel input data in an information panel as shown below. If the information panel doesn't
appear then you should turn it on via the "Show Infotips" button
side toolbar.
at the bottom of the
461
To view or edit the properties of a steel member you can simply click the right mouse button
on any part of a steel member and then select "View/Edit Steel Member (Form)" from the
popup menu that appears. Note that this can be done regardless of whether you are in steel
member viewing mode or not.
You cannot select individual analysis members while you are in steel member viewing
mode.
See also Steel member design data
462
Graphical Input
View steel member design results

If a steel member design has been performed, this tool shows the design results color coded
for the various levels of load factor or stress ratio achieved.
You can view the design results by clicking the
You can also change the pass/fail colors and threshold values by clicking the arrow on the
right of the
button.
463
To view brief design result details of a steel member design group (see below) you can simply
click the right mouse button on any part of a design group and then select "Steel Member
Design Results" from the floating menu. You can then simply click on other members to view
their results. Note that this can be done regardless of whether the design results are displayed
or not.
You can also use filters to restrict the display of members based on their design results.
464
Graphical Input
465
View steel member flange restraints

If you are not sure where your steel design flange restraints are actually located along the
members, you can use this tool to show them graphically.
You can show the flange restraints by clicking the
Displays all of the flange restraints that you have specified for each design group. The flange
restraints are shown adjacent to their location on the top and bottom flanges.
466
Graphical Input
View steel member top flanges

It is important to know which is the top flange for steel members so that the restraints you
specify for the top and bottom flanges do not get mixed up. This tool lets you display them as
small triangles that touch the top flange of each analysis member.
You can show the top flanges by clicking the
The top flange for a steel design group is taken to be the same as the top flange for the first
analysis member in the design group. Therefore, to find the top flange of a design group you
must look at just the first member in the group.
467
Viewpoint
This tool allows you to rotate your viewpoint around the structure. You can obtain an
elevation from any side, a plan view or a view from any other position. In the renderer you
can also switch between orthographic and perspective viewing modes.
Rotate the viewpoint by holding down the left mouse button while moving the mouse. An
alternative to rotating the model by dragging it around directly is to drag the view selector
around. You can also click one of the view selector faces, edges or corners to go straight to a
specific viewpoint. If you click on the small square attached to the front face it will take you
to the 30,10 viewpoint.

Changing the viewpoint can be most conveniently done using the mousewheel or keyboard
arrow keys as described in "Shortcuts". For example, while viewing the structure graphically,
just hold down the H key and use the mousewheel to rotate your viewpoint horizontally, or
hold down the V key and use the mousewheel to rotate your viewpoint vertically.
Alternatively, you can rotate your viewpoint by clicking the
"Viewpoint" from the View menu or the floating menu.
The current viewpoint setting is displayed near the top-right corner of the graphics display
area together with a small set of axes. You can watch the axes move as you change the
viewpoint or, by activating real-time structure rotation, you can also watch the entire structure
rotating as you change the viewpoint.
There are a number of ways to change the viewpoint as explained as follows.
1. Clicking the arrow buttons above the side toolbar buttons (as follows) allows you to
change the viewpoint quickly without having to first click on any other buttons. After
reaching the desired viewpoint, pick a point anywhere inside the graphics display area
to cause a redraw at the new viewpoint.
468
Graphical Input
2. Choosing "Viewpoint-View real-time" from the View menu or the floating menu
allows you to rotate the entire structure on the screen using the keyboard arrow keys.
After reaching the desired viewpoint, pick a point anywhere inside the graphics
display area to cause a redraw at the new viewpoint.
3. Choosing one of the "View front/View plan/View (30,10)/etc." items after clicking
the "Viewpoint" toolbar button or from the "Viewpoint" item of the View menu or the
floating menu causes the structure to be immediately redrawn at the new viewpoint.
The "(30,10)" item corresponds to a horizontal angle of 30 and a vertical angle of
10. It is a useful viewpoint for 3D structures.
4. Choosing "Select" after clicking the "Viewpoint" toolbar button or from the
"Viewpoint" item of the View menu or the floating menu causes the following form
to appear.
You can change the viewpoint by editing the "Horizontal angle" and "Vertical angle"
text boxes directly, or you can click on one of the arrow buttons at the bottom-left
corner of the form. When using the arrow buttons, the amount by which the viewpoint
changes can be controlled by setting the value in the "Angle increment" field.
Alternatively, you can click on one of the seven plane buttons which take you
immediately to a front, plan, left, (30,10), right, back or bottom viewpoint.
SPACE GASS normally assumes that the global Y-axis is vertical when displaying
the structure graphically, however the viewpoint form allows you to change the
vertical axis to one of the other global axes.
469
The viewpoint settings (including the "Vertical axis" setting) only affect the graphics
display. They dont affect the local axis definitions, the steel design top flange definitions, or
the analysis and design modules in any way.
470
Graphical Input
Views
This tool lets you save everything about the current graphics display including its load case
selections, filter selection, viewpoint, and any diagrams or node, member or plate properties
that might be shown.
This is fully explained in View manager.

To save the current display as a view or to manage the currently saved views, click
the
toolbar button or select "Views" from the View menu or the floating menu.
You must then select "Save the Current View" from the floating menu that appears.
To save the current view, just click the combo box in the above form, select a view number
and then type in the views name. You can overwrite previously saved views or you can select
and name an unused view. You can save up to 100 different views.
To manage (delete, renumber or rename) previously saved views, click the
toolbar button or select "Views" from the View menu or the floating menu. You must
then select "Manage the Saved Views" from the floating menu that appears.
471

To delete, renumber or rename any of the previously saved views, click the desired view in
the datasheet shown above and then delete or edit it as required.
To select and activate a view, click the "Views" toolbar combo box
and make your selection.
Scrolling through the saved views can be most conveniently done using the keyboard
Shift+Ctrl+Page keys as described in Shortcuts.
472
Graphical Input
Zoom
The Zoom tool allows you to zoom in or out on the entire structure or just a part of it.
using the left or right mouse buttons as shown below. Alternatively, you can press the right
arrow key to "Zoom full" or the left arrow key to "Zoom previous". You can also zoom in on
a selection of nodes, members or plates by selecting the desired items, right-clicking and then
selecting "Zoom Selected" from the menu that appears.

Zooming can be most conveniently done using the mousewheel or keyboard arrow keys as
described in "Shortcuts". For example, while viewing the structure graphically, just use the
mousewheel to zoom in or out. Alternatively, you can zoom by clicking the
button or selecting "Zoom" from the View menu or the floating menu.
toolbar
There are four zoom modes as follows.

1. ZOOM full - redraws the entire structure at a scale that allows it to fit comfortably on
the screen.
2. ZOOM window - requires you to place a window around a portion of the structure
which it then enlarges and redraws to fill the screen.
3. ZOOM in/out - requires you to position the graphics cursor at the zoom centre and
then click the left mouse button to ZOOM in or the right mouse button to ZOOM out.
4. ZOOM previous - reverts back to the previously displayed view.
If you have selected ZOOM Window, you can revert to
ZOOM Full or ZOOM Previous by pressing the keyboard F or P keys while selecting the
window.
473
Analysis
Analysis
SPACE GASS uses the well documented stiffness method combined with a wavefront
equation solver to model the elastic behaviour of structures. It is capable of performing five
types of analysis, as follows.
Linear (1st order) static analysis

Non-linear (2nd order) static analysis
Buckling analysis
The SPACE GASS analysis modules can accurately deal with semi-rigid joints, elastic
supports, master-slave constraints, offsets, tension/compression-only members, and cable
members (static and buckling analysis only).
Although the wavefront method is not highly sensitive to badly numbered structures, a
wavefront optimizer which automatically minimizes the frontwidth is also available with
SPACE GASS. The wavefront optimizer means that both the node, member and plate
numbering sequences are incidental to the program.
SPACE GASS has been dimensioned dynamically. This means that during the analysis phase
SPACE GASS automatically adjusts its memory requirements according to the size of the job.
If the available memory in your computer is enough to solve the structure entirely in memory
then the analysis phase will be extremely fast. If you run out of memory during an analysis
then some of the analysis data will be automatically written to disk and the analysis phase will
not be quite as fast. You should aim to have as much of the data as possible held in memory
during the analysis by minimizing the frontwidth or by increasing the memory capacity of
your computer.
475
Static analysis
Static analysis
The SPACE GASS static analysis module is capable of performing linear or non-linear
analyses. Furthermore, you can analyse some load cases linearly and others non-linearly in
the same model.
For non-linear analysis, SPACE GASS offers a choice of small, finite or large displacement
theories in its non-linear static analysis solver.
For cable members, SPACE GASS always uses a large displacement theory that has been
designed to cope with the highly non-linear behaviour and large deflections that occur within
cables (see also Cable members). For structures that contain both cables and non-cable
members, it is important to note that while the large local cable deflections are allowed for in
the analysis, the non-cable parts of the structure are still analysed using small displacement
theory.
The plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements only and therefore no P- or P- effects are
considered for them during a non-linear analysis.
Although a SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis includes simple buckling checks on
individual members and on the frame as a whole, a full buckling analysis is usually required
in addition to the static analysis. If the buckling capacity of the frame has been exceeded then
the static analysis results are invalid and should not used!
If the static analysis results are to be used for a steel design to AISC-LRFD, Eurocode
3, AS4100 or NZS3404, the load cases used in the strength design must be analysed nonlinearly unless you know that the second order effects are negligible.
The non-linear static analysis facility available with SPACE GASS considers geometric nonlinearities rather than material non-linearities.
Material non-linearities occur as a result of the non-linear stress-strain relationship of most
materials. This effect becomes more significant as the material reaches its yield point and the
stress-strain curve flattens out. SPACE GASS does not consider material non-linearities
because they are relatively insignificant in comparison with geometric non-linearities and
because their effect only becomes noticeable when the material is highly stressed.
There are many types of geometric non-linearities, some of which can be significant and
many of which are relatively insignificant. The most important geometric non-linearities are:
P- effect
P- effect
Axial shortening effect
Tension/compression-only effect
Catenary cable effect
Some sources refer to the additional effects of shear deformations and rigid end gussets as
being geometric non-linearities also. While SPACE GASS fully considers these additional
effects during the analysis phase, it does not consider them to be non-linearities because they
can be solved directly in one analysis and do not require an iterative procedure.
476
Analysis
Because the plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements only, no P- or P- effects are
477
Displacements, actions and reactions

During the static analysis phase, there are three basic groups of data that have to be
calculated. They are node displacements, member and plate actions (forces and moments) and
support reactions.
Node displacements
Node displacements are calculated for each load case being analysed and for every
unrestrained degree of freedom in the structure. Each node may translate along or rotate about
any or all of the three global axis directions. Restrained (fixed or deleted) degrees of freedom
are automatically assigned displacements of zero except for those nodes that have prescribed
displacements specified. In such cases those nodes are assigned the prescribed displacement
only for the particular load case in which they were specified.
Member actions
There are twelve forces and moments that can be calculated for each member. Each end of a
member is subjected to an axial force, a torsion, bending moments about its y and z axes and
shear forces along its y and z axes.
The program is also capable of calculating forces and moments at user defined intermediate
points along members. These intermediate values, however are not calculated during the
analysis phase. Instead they are calculated as required when the output report is produced.
For more information, refer to Sign conventions.
Plate actions
Three forces and three moments are calculated for each plate node, making a total of 18
actions per triangular plate and 24 actions per quadrilateral plate. Two axial stresses, three
shear stresses and three bending stresses are also calculated for each plate.
These are later used to calculate the 17 different force, moment and stress values for each
plate that can be shown graphically as colored contours or included in text reports.
For more information, refer to Sign conventions.
Reactions
External node reactions are the forces and moments exerted by the structure on the supports.
They are calculated only for restrained nodes and are referenced by the global axes system.
478
Analysis
P-D effect
The P- effect occurs as a result of the ends of an axially loaded member moving laterally
with respect to each other. A moment of P. is induced which alters the members
equilibrium and causes the relative member end movement to change further.
P- effect
Unless the axial load P exceeds the members critical buckling load, a point of equilibrium
eventually occurs such that the P- moment is balanced by moments applied by other
members or restraints.
The P- effect is not considered for plate elements.
479
P-d effect
The P- effect occurs as a result of lateral curvature being induced in an axially loaded
member. A parabolic moment distribution is induced along the length of the member which
alters the members effective stiffness and causes the curvature to change further.
P- effect
Unless the axial load P exceeds the members critical buckling load, a point of equilibrium
eventually occurs such that the P- moments are balanced by internal flexural resistance built
up within the member.
The P- effect is not considered for plate elements.
480
Analysis
Tension-only and compression-only effects

While in tension, tension-only members act identically to normal members with axial,
flexural, torsional and shear capacity. However, if they go into compression then they are
automatically disabled and act as if they have been removed from the model. Similarly,
compression-only members act identically to normal members unless they are disabled as a
result of going into tension.
Although the solution of tension-only or compression-only members requires an iterative
analysis method, SPACE GASS puts it into a slightly different category to the other nonlinear effects and makes it available in either a linear or a non-linear static analysis.
Unlike the P- and P- effects, tension-only and compression-only effects result in an exact
solution provided that convergence can be achieved.
For tension/compression-only effects, convergence is sometimes difficult (if not impossible),
especially if the frame is highly symmetrical. If convergence is not achieved after three
iterations, SPACE GASS relaxes the tension/compression-only criteria slightly in an attempt
to improve the chances of reaching convergence.
During the first three iterations SPACE GASS disables tension-only members which have
either end in compression. During iterations four and five it disables tension-only members
which have the average of their end forces in compression. During the sixth and further
iterations it disables tension-only members which have both ends in compression. A similar
procedure is followed for compression-only members which have tensile forces at their ends.
If tension/compression-only effects have been activated with "No reversal" then convergence
is usually achieved after two or three iterations, even for highly symmetrical structures. This
"No reversal" method is not usually recommended, however because it sometimes results in
members being prematurely disabled and then not being able to be re-enabled in later
iterations after the axial forces have been redistributed around the frame.
Tension/compression-only effects are ignored by the dynamic frequency analysis

module. No tension-only or compression-only members are disabled in a dynamic frequency
analysis, regardless of their axial force.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Tension-only members should not be used to model cables.
See also Members.
481
Cable members
The analysis of cable members requires special treatment because of their pure axial capacity,
large displacements and highly non-linear behaviour.
Cable members never actually go into compression, they simply sag or change their shape so
that they are in equilibrium at all times. They have no flexural, torsional or shear capacity,
and resist lateral loads by tension alone.
Cable loading
Cable members can be loaded with UDLs, thermal loads, prestress loads and self weight. For
"Local" or "Global projected" UDLs, the total load is equal to the load per unit length
multiplied by the actual (for "Local") or projected (for "Global projected") distance between
the end nodes. For "Global inclined" UDLs, the total load is equal to the load per unit length
multiplied by the unstrained cable length.
Cables must be loaded with at least one uniformly distributed load (self weight will do) in
every load case they are analysed for. If there is no UDL on a cable, SPACE GASS will apply
an artificial lateral UDL equal to one-tenth of the self-weight of the cable. While this adds a
non-existent load to the model, it is not likely to affect the results significantly due to the
small magnitude of the load.
Note that the procedure of converting cables without UDLs to tension-only members in
SPACE GASS 9.03 and earlier versions is no longer done.
Restraining nodes connected to cables
Cable members have zero moment capacity and must be assumed to be pin-ended even if the
end fixities are input as FFFFFF. This would normally cause rotational instabilities in the
nodes that are connected only to cables, however SPACE GASS recognises this and
automatically restrains these rotations if instabilities would occur.
Cable convergence
Convergence is often a problem for structures which contain cables because of their large
deflections and highly non-linear behaviour. There are four recognized methods for obtaining
convergence.
1.
2.
3.
4.
One load step, many iterations, no damping.

One load step, many iterations, deflection related damping.
One load step, many iterations, damping with uniform relaxation.
Many load steps, one iteration per load step, no damping.
All four methods give the same results for the same final convergence. Methods 1 and 2 are
generally the fastest but they dont achieve convergence in all structures, especially flexible
structures. Methods 3 and 4 are more likely to achieve convergence but sometimes require
more iterations. For methods 3 and 4, the number of iterations required is pre-defined by the
number of relaxation steps or load steps that you specify at the start of the analysis.
For each method, but methods 3 and 4 in particular, it is generally apparent after only a few
iterations whether convergence is going to be achieved or not. If the convergence level is not
steadily creeping upwards or has not reached about 60% or 70% by 5 or 6 iterations then it is
unlikely that convergence will be achieved. If this happens, it is generally best to stop the
analysis and then start it again with a different method, or change the damping, or increase the
number of load steps. For example, using method 4, it is quite feasible that 50 load steps will
converge where 40 load steps will not.
482
Analysis
If you lower the convergence accuracy, the analysis may not converge sufficiently and you
risk getting incorrect results. It is particularly important that you dont lower the
convergence accuracy for highly non-linear structures such as those that contain cables.
Cable prestress
The prestress load you apply to a cable is not likely to be the final axial force in the cable at
the end of the analysis. This is because the axial force changes as the cable stretches or sags
as its end nodes move. If you wish to achieve a particular axial force at the end of the analysis
then a trial and error process is required. This involves setting an initial prestress force,
performing the analysis, checking the final axial force, adjusting the prestress and repeating
the process until the desired axial force is achieved. This is a common requirement in posttensioned concrete applications where the tendons are jacked to a known tension.
In some instances, you may wish to apply a prestress load to
a cable member instead of specifying a non-zero unstrained cable length. The prestress load
P that is equivalent to an unstrained cable length L is given by the equation:
where
D = chord length,
A = cross sectional area,
E = Youngs modulus of elasticity.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
If cable members exist in your structure, it is imperative that you specify them as "Cable"
members in your SPACE GASS model. If you try to model them as "Normal" or "Tensiononly" members, the results will be incorrect.
See also Members.
483
Non-linear analysis procedure

The procedure that SPACE GASS adopts to perform a non-linear static analysis is as follows.
1. An initial linear static analysis is performed.
2. For each element in each load case, a modified stiffness matrix is assembled.
For non-cable members, the modified stiffness is based on the deformation of the
structure and the member axial forces calculated in the previous analysis iteration.
The modifications to the stiffness matrix are in accordance with the theory presented
by Ghali and Neville (2) for small displacement theory or the theory presented by
Hancock (24) for finite and large displacement theory. They involve changes to the
axial and flexural stiffness terms, taking into account P- P- and axial shortening
effects (if activated).
For cable members, the modified stiffness is based on the unstrained cable length, the
cable lateral loads and the deflected position of the cable ends calculated in the
previous analysis iteration.
For plate elements, the stiffness matrix is unchanged.
3. If P- effects are turned on with finite or large displacement theory, the non-cable
member fixed end actions are adjusted for the deformation of the structure.
4. If P- effects are turned on, the non-cable member fixed end actions are adjusted for
the change in flexural stiffness of the member.
5. The frame is re-analysed with the modified member stiffness matrices. In this and
later analysis iterations, each load case must be solved separately because the
structure stiffness matrix is now different for each load case. This can take
considerably longer than the initial linear analysis, especially if there are numerous
load cases.
6. The results of the latest analysis are compared with the previous analysis and the level
of convergence is displayed on the screen. If the level of convergence has reached the
requested convergence accuracy then the results have converged and the analysis
terminates. If not, steps 2 and 3 are repeated for the unconverged load cases until a
solution is reached. If some load cases have still not converged after the specified
number of iterations per load step then the program pauses and asks if further
iterations are required. If no further iterations are requested, the analysis terminates
and the results for the converged load cases only are saved.
Because the plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements, no P- or P- effects are
484
Analysis
Static analysis buckling

Although a SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis does not perform a full buckling analysis,
it does include some buckling checks as described below. For details of the capabilities of a
full buckling analysis, refer to Buckling analysis.
1.
The SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis includes a simple buckling check on individual
members that is intended to alert you if a member is being removed from the model due to its
Euler buckling load being exceeded. However, it is not a full buckling check that considers
groups of members or the structure as a whole.
A common misconception appears to be that if the static analysis passes this simple single
member buckling check then buckling is not a problem. Another misconception is that if the
simple buckling check fails, you can just subdivide the buckled member until the error goes
away and everything will be Ok. Clearly, this doesn't fix the problem, it just transfers the
buckling from a single member mode to a multi-member mode that is no longer detected by
the single member buckling check. The only way to be sure that buckling is not a problem is
to perform a full buckling analysis.
2.
The SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis also includes a frame buckling check that simply
alerts you if the structure's buckling capacity has been exceeded. This will allow you to
determine if the static analysis results are reliable or not, and nothing more. It will not
calculate member effective lengths or the buckling load factor, and hence will not be able to
alert you if buckling is close to happening. Consequently, a full buckling analysis will still be
required for most structures.
It is very important to note that the results of a static analysis will be incorrect if the
structure's buckling capacity has been exceeded, and hence one of the key roles of a
buckling analysis is to ratify the static analysis results.
Although most practical structures do not come close to reaching their buckling load, unless
you know that your frame has not reached its buckling load, you should perform a buckling
analysis.
Because the plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements, they will not buckle
regardless of the load applied.
See also Buckling analysis.
485
The wavefront optimizer

The SPACE GASS wavefront optimizer temporarily re-organises the structure during the
analysis phase to achieve close to the smallest possible frontwidth with the fastest possible
analysis time.
The basic philosophy behind the optimizer is quite simple. It alters the order in which
members and plates are loaded into the stiffness array by starting at one end of the structure
and proceeding through it to the other end in one complete pass. Depending on the operating
mode selected, the optimization can follow an irregular path, a straight line path or a circular
path.
The optimizer usually reduces the frontwidth to within 95% of the optimum, however some
structures such as large cubes which do not have a well defined "long dimension" can reduce
its efficiency to almost 60%. Large cubic structures therefore may require careful member
and/or plate numbering if they produce excessively large frontwidths.
If you have already numbered the members and plates to achieve the smallest possible
frontwidth then the optimizer will of course not have much effect. If, however you have
numbered the elements badly, the optimizer will probably have a dramatic effect. The most
noticeable effect will be the smaller analysis time which is partly proportional to the
frontwidth squared.
You can control the direction along which the optimization proceeds by selecting the
optimization mode at the start of the analysis. The various optimization mode settings are
described in the following sections.
Not activated
If the optimizer is not activated, the members and plates are loaded into the stiffness array in
the order that they are numbered. If they have been badly numbered and the structure is large
then excessive analysis times may result.
Auto mode
SPACE GASS trials the "General" and various "Linear" modes and then uses the one that
gives the smallest frontwidth. It doesn't add significant time to the analysis and is the
recommended setting.
General mode
SPACE GASS starts at the lowest numbered member or plate and then loads all of the
elements that are connected directly to it. It then takes each of the connected elements in turn
and loads all of the elements that are connected to them. This process continues until all
elements in the structure have been loaded. This mode results in very efficient frontwidths for
most structures.
Linear mode
This mode instructs the optimizer to proceed through the structure in a straight line direction
parallel to one of the global X, Y or Z axes or along a vector that you specify. After you have
specified linear mode, you must also nominate the axis or vector along which optimization
will proceed. This should generally be in the direction of the long dimension of the structure.
Linear mode is ideally suited to long thin structures which have a well defined long
dimension. The "long dimension" of a structure is not necessarily the dimension with the
greatest length, rather it is defined such that if you make a cut through the structure at right
486
Analysis
angles to the long dimension at its widest point, you will cut through the least number of
elements.
In the truss in the following diagram, the most efficient direction for the optimizer to proceed
is horizontally. This is because a cut at right angles to the horizontal cuts through only four
members.
Horizontal optimization
Vertical optimization
In the 2D multi-storey frame above, the most efficient direction for linear optimization is
vertical even though the frame height is less than the frame width.
Circular mode
This mode instructs the optimizer to proceed through the structure around an arc with the axis
of rotation parallel to one of the global X, Y or Z axes. After you have specified circular
mode, you must also nominate the axis about which optimization will proceed, followed by
the coordinates for the centre of rotation.
Circular mode is ideally suited to curved structures such as the circular frame shown
following. Structures which are not perfectly circular but which have a general shape which is
arranged around a central point can also be optimized very efficiently using circular mode.
The centre of rotation should generally be near the centre of the structure, however this is not
absolutely essential.
487
Circular optimization
Circular mode can also be used to great advantage with structures that require linear
optimization in two directions.
A three dimensional multi-storey frame for example would probably require its primary
optimization direction to be vertical. As the optimizer reached each floor, however a
secondary horizontal direction would also need to be specified otherwise it would not know in
which direction to go along the floor. Without a secondary direction, the optimizer would
simply have to load the floor elements in the order of their numbering and this could result in
an unnecessarily large frontwidth if the elements were badly numbered.
It is not possible to specify a primary and secondary direction with the optimizer in linear
mode, however it is possible to do this in circular mode by having the centre of rotation a
large distance away from the structure. Using circular mode in this way is very similar to
linear mode except that as the optimizer progresses across (or up) the structure, the angle of
attack also changes slightly as it moves around the arc.
488
Analysis
Bi-directional optimization
Consider for example the three dimensional multi-storey frame shown above. The primary
optimization direction is vertical and the secondary direction for each floor is to the left. By
using circular mode and positioning the centre of rotation at a large distance away from the
frame as shown in the following diagram, the desired result can be achieved.
Bi-directional optimization using circular mode
489

As the optimization line progresses up the structure, it reaches the right hand side of each
floor before the left hand side. Thus, the structure as a whole is optimized from bottom to top
and each floor is optimized from right to left.
Note that this method of optimization is usually the best way to deal with large cubic shaped
structures.
If you are not sure which optimizer mode to use for a
particular structure, it is recommended that you experiment with various modes to see how
small a frontwidth can be achieved. You can do this by running the analysis and then
terminating it by pressing ESC or the right mouse button after the frontwidth has been
calculated and displayed on the screen. Once you have found the most efficient mode, you can
simply let the analysis continue to the end as normal.
490
Analysis
The wavefront analysis method

Conventional structural analysis programs utilizing the stiffness method generally use a
bandwidth equation solver which requires that nodes be numbered correctly to ensure the
smallest possible bandwidth.
The wavefront method, however requires that the members and plates be numbered correctly
to ensure the smallest possible frontwidth. The optimum wavefront numbering sequence,
however is quite logical and is not sensitive to adding more nodes, members and plates at a
later stage which are out of sequence. This can be quite a problem with the bandwidth
method.
For most structures, the element numbering sequence doesnt matter because the frontwidth
capacity of SPACE GASS is quite large. Large structures, however can be made to analyse
faster by optimizing the frontwidth. The displacements calculation time is roughly
proportional to the square of the frontwidth.
A wavefront optimizer is available with SPACE GASS which internally re-orders the stiffness
matrix and which generally reduces the frontwidth to within 95% of the optimum. The
optimizer adds only a few seconds to the analysis time and gives you the freedom of not
having to concern yourself with element numbering sequences even for the largest structures.
For those of you who are interested in the wavefront solution method, the following sections
should give you an insight into the inner workings of the SPACE GASS analysis module.
491
A quick frontwidth calculation method

In order to minimize the frontwidth, members and plates should be numbered from side to
side across the structures shortest dimension while gradually proceeding up the length of the
structure. The numbering should proceed up the entire length of the structure in one pass. A
tall multistorey building for example would have the ground floor columns numbered first,
followed by first floor beams, first floor columns, second floor beams, second floor columns
etc., right up to the top.
A quick frontwidth calculation can be done as follows.
1.
This procedure assumes that the element numbering sequence proceeds generally from one
end of the structure to the other in a single pass as described in the paragraph above.
2.
Make an imaginary cut through the structure at its widest point and at right angles to the
general direction of element numbering. For example, the multistorey frame described above
would have a horizontal cut at any one of its levels.
3.
On one side of the cut only, count the number of nodes that are connected to elements that
have been cut.
4.
Add 1 to the number of nodes in step 3 above and multiply by the degrees of freedom (DOF)
per node. For 3D frames this will generally be 6 DOF per node.
5.
Subtract the number of restrained DOF (ie. the restraints applied to the nodes counted in step
3).
The final figure is the structure frontwidth.

It is generally not necessary for you to know any more about the wavefront method than has
been described above, however for those of you wishing to know more, a detailed explanation
of the wavefront analysis method follows.
492
Analysis
The wavefront method in more detail

Both the bandwidth and wavefront methods are primarily concerned with the assemblage and
solution of a very large structure stiffness array. This array equates node displacements to
externally applied loads as follows.
[P]=[K][D], where
[P] = Load array

[K] = Structure stiffness array
[D] = Node displacement array
[P] and [K] are fully defined while [D] is the unknown.
The wavefront method is different to the bandwidth method in that the structure stiffness
array is assembled in order of element numbering rather than node numbering, and a much
smaller portion of the array is required in memory at any one time.
In the wavefront method, the program loads each element into the stiffness array in order of
the element numbering sequence. The nodes associated with each element have stiffness
equations that occupy certain rows and columns in the array.
This loading process continues until one or more nodes have been fully assembled. A node is
said to be fully assembled when all elements connected to it have been loaded into the array.
At this point the equations associated with that node can be solved and removed, thus leaving
space in the array for other nodes.
Further elements are then loaded and their nodes take the place of nodes that have previously
been solved and removed. More node equations are eliminated and the whole process
continues until the entire structure has been fed in and the stiffness array emptied. The
frontwidth is equal to the largest number of node equations that occupied the stiffness array at
one time.
493
Running a static analysis

You can run a static analysis by selecting "Linear Static Analysis" or "Non-linear Static
Analysis" from the Analysis menu or you can change from linear to non-linear or vice-versa
using the Type analysis parameter in the form shown below.
Load case list

If you want to analyse all load cases then this field can be left blank, otherwise you should
type in a list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes) that you want analysed.
For the fastest analysis time you should generally analyse only the load cases that can occur in
reality. For example, there is no point in analysing a live load case on its own because it can't
occur in real life without being combined with dead load. This means that you should
generally analyse just the combination load cases and not the primary load cases that the
combinations are made from.
It is sometimes also possible to achieve time savings by analysing non-linearly only those
load cases that cause 2nd order effects, and analysing all of the other load cases linearly. This
would have to be done in two runs, however because a non-linear analysis can take
considerably longer than a linear analysis (especially if there are a large number of load
cases), it is often worthwhile.
Further time savings can be made by not analysing linear combination load cases. "Linear
combination load cases" are combinations that have all of their primary load cases analysed
linearly. Results for non-analysed linear combinations are assembled from the primary load
cases at the time a report or graphics output is generated. If a combination load case has one
or more of its primary load cases analysed non-linearly or if the structure contains tensiononly or compression-only members then the combination will have to be analysed in order to
obtain results for it.
When specifying the load case list, you can either list them directly, or you can click the
button to display and select from a list of the load cases currently in the job as shown below.
494
Analysis
Tension/Comp-only effects
Tension/compression-only effects can be "fully operational", "operational with no reversal" or
"fully de-activated".
"Fully operational" means that tension-only or compression-only members which have been
disabled during the analysis are able to be re-enabled if their axial force is reversed.
"Operational with no reversal" means that once they have been disabled they cannot be reenabled even if their axial force has reversed. No reversal is useful if the fully operational
analysis will not converge, however you should check the results and, if required, manually
disable some tens/comp-only members and then re-analyse.
No reversal normally applies from the first iteration onwards, however you also have the
option of activating it after a specified number of iterations. This means that the analysis will
initially proceed with tension/compression-only effects fully activated and, if convergence
hasnt been achieved after a specified number iterations, it will change to "no reversal" mode.
"Fully de-activated" means that they are treated as normal members, able to take tension and
compression.
See also Tension-only and compression-only effects.
Cable damping factor
This allows you to apply damping to the cable connected nodes. It does this by multiplying
the stiffness terms of the unrestrained cable-only node degrees of freedom by the factor:
where Ratio depends on the damping relaxation and Damping is the cable damping factor.
495

Damping relaxation steps
If cable damping is used, it must be relaxed as the solution proceeds so that at convergence
there is no damping at all.
Setting the damping relaxation steps to zero causes the damping to be relaxed in direct
proportion to the change in deflection between the current and previous iterations. As
convergence approaches 100%, the change in deflections approaches zero and hence the
damping approaches zero.
Alternatively, setting the damping relaxation steps to a finite value causes the damping to be
relaxed in uniform steps down to zero. If this method is used, the analysis keeps iterating until
the damping is fully relaxed, regardless of whether convergence has been achieved earlier or
not.
Number of load steps
This allows you to apply the load gradually in a number of small load steps. If you specify a
single load step then all of the load is applied in the first iteration (this is how the program
worked in all previous versions). If cable damping is also being used, the damping relaxation
process begins anew for each load step.
Iterations per load step
This parameter allows you to specify the maximum number of iterations that will occur in a
load step before the program begins prompting you for extra iterations. A special case occurs
if you specify just one iteration per load step, in which case the program proceeds to the next
load step after one iteration regardless of whether convergence has been achieved or not.
The analysis will finish if the convergence accuracy is satisfied, even if the number of
iterations per load step hasnt been completed.
Convergence accuracy (%)
The convergence accuracy is only applicable for non-linear analyses. After each iteration,
SPACE GASS compares the results of the latest analysis with the results of the previous
analysis. If the comparison shows that the level of convergence has reached or exceeded the
specified convergence accuracy then the analysis is assumed to have converged.
If you lower the convergence accuracy, the analysis may not converge sufficiently and you
risk getting incorrect results. It is particularly important that you dont lower the
convergence accuracy for highly non-linear structures such as those that contain cables.
Retain results of other load cases
If you have specified that not all load cases are to be analysed and, if results already exist for
some of the non-specified load cases, you can choose to retain them or have them deleted.
Show messages from single member buckling check
During a non-linear analysis, SPACE GASS performs a simple Euler buckling check on each
member individually (regardless of whether you have the buckling analysis module or not). If
the buckling check fails then the member is disabled for the remainder of the analysis. If you
select the "Show messages from single member buckling check" check box then a message is
496
Analysis
displayed whenever a member fails the simple buckling check. For more information, refer to
Static analysis buckling.
Perform frame buckling check
SPACE GASS can optionally perform a frame buckling check during a non-linear analysis
that simply alerts you if the structure's buckling capacity has been exceeded. If this happens,
you cannot use the results of the static analysis because they will most likely be invalid and
you should run a full buckling analysis to get the buckling load factor and find out where the
buckling is occurring. For more information, refer to Static analysis buckling and Buckling
analysis.
Check for non-existent load cases
If you have defined combination load cases that contain other load cases which dont yet
exist, this option will detect and report them. It is optional because some users prefer to have
a standard set of combination load cases that contain primary load cases which are just
ignored during the analysis if they dont exist.
Stabilize unrestrained nodes
Nodes that are free to rotate or translate in one or more directions without resistance from
interconnecting members, plates, restraints or constraints can be automatically restrained
during the analysis so that instabilities dont occur.
For example, if a node was connected to a number of members, all of which were pin-ended,
a rotational instability would normally result due to the unrestrained rotation of the node.
However, the stabilize option would apply a temporary rotational restraint to the node during
the analysis, preventing an instability.
Although this solves many instabilities, it doesnt fix them all, and the prevention of nontrivial instabilities is still dependent on good modelling practice.
Rotate local loads with member chord rotation
If this option is ticked then after the first analysis iteration any local member loads will be
rotated with the chord rotation of the members to which they are applied. It can be used to
ensure that wind loads or hydrostatic loads remain normal to the member direction as the
model deforms. This option is only enabled with finite or large displacement theory in a nonlinear analysis.
Type
Even though you have already chosen "Linear" or "Non-linear" from the Analysis menu, this
pair of radio buttons allows you to change your mind without having to exit the form. A linear
analysis generally involves only one iteration and does not adjust the stiffness of the structure
based on its deformation. It is suitable for simple beams or fully braced frames, but not for
sway frames or flexible structures in which non-linear effects are significant. A non-linear
analysis involves an iterative procedure that updates the stiffness of the structure after each
iteration and gives more realistic results than a linear analysis.
Solver
The "Paradise" solver is a new parallel multi-core sparse solver that fully utilizes the multiple
cores in a modern computer's CPU. All of the available cores are run in parallel to get the
maximum possible analysis speed. It also takes full advantage of the sparseness of the
structural matrix during the solution to minimize memory requirements and further increase
the speed. The Paradise solver is the recommended setting for all static analyses.
497

The "Wavefront" solver also takes into account the sparseness of the matrix but doesn't run in
multi-core mode. It is generally slower than the Paradise solver and can be used if the
Paradise solver is unable to obtain a solution.
The "Watcom" solver is the one used in pre-SPACE GASS 12 versions. It is considerably
slower than the Paradise and Wavefront solvers and is therefore of limited use.
All three solvers should yield virtually identical results.
Theory
Small displacement theory (based on Ghali and Neville (2)) is the default setting and is
suitable for most structures in which the members aren't subjected to significant chord
rotations (changes in direction of members). Small displacement theory results are output in
the undeformed axes system. The finite and large displacement theories (based on Hancock
(24)) take member chord rotations into account and base their equilibrium equations on the
deformed geometry. Finite and large displacement theory results are output in the deformed
axes system.
Large displacement theory uses more exact methods than finite theory when adjusting the
stiffness matrix to allow for the deformation of the structure, however for many structures
they yield very similar results.
Note that although the finite and large displacement theories can handle larger
displacements, it is often harder to achieve convergence with them than with small
displacement theory, especially when large displacements occur.
Matrix
The main stiffness matrix can be a secant matrix (relating the full loads to the total
displacements) or a tangent matrix (relating the residual loads to incremental displacements).
A tangent matrix generally reaches convergence in a smaller number of iterations than a
secant matrix and is more suited to large displacements, however this is not always the case.
They both yield similar results. Note that small displacement theory always uses a secant
matrix.
Residual loads are the imbalance between the applied loads and the internal frame forces at
each node. Incremental displacements are the difference in displacements between the current
and the previous iteration. The residual loads and the incremental displacements both
approach zero as the solution approaches convergence.
Note that if you use a secant matrix with finite or large displacement theory and full loading,
the stiffness matrix is non-symmetrical. This means that during the analysis, the stiffness
matrix uses up twice as much memory as it otherwise would and so it should be avoided if
your model is large.
Loading
For a secant matrix, you can choose between full or residual loading (see above), whereas the
tangent matrix always uses residual loading. They both yield similar results, but if
convergence is a problem then it may be worth experimenting with this setting.
Convergence
Convergence can be based on deflections or residuals or both and is achieved when they
approach zero. It is recommended to have them both selected.
498
Analysis
P-Delta (P- effect
For a non-linear analysis, you are able to activate or de-activate P- effects. The P- effect is
usually the most significant 2nd order effect and is mandatory for non-linear analyses which
comply with most limit states design codes of practice. See also P-D effect.
P-delta (P- effect
For a non-linear analysis, you are able to activate or de-activate P- effects. The P- effect is
mandatory for non-linear analyses which comply with most limit states design codes of
practice. See also P-d effect.
Axial shortening effect
For a non-linear analysis, you are able to activate or de-activate axial shortening effects. The
axial shortening effect models the effect of the "shortening" of the distance between the ends
of a member due to its curvature. Axial shortening induces extra tension in a member that has
a significant curvature. It is turned off by default and generally has a minimal effect on the
analysis results.
Optimization method
The wavefront optimizer can be de-activated or it can be operated in one of four modes as
follows.
1. No optimization
2. Auto mode - SPACE GASS trials the "General" and various "Linear" modes and then
uses the one that gives the smallest frontwidth. It doesn't add significant time to the
analysis and is the recommended setting.
3. General mode - SPACE GASS determines the path along which optimization
proceeds through the structure.
4. Linear mode - You select from the X, Y or Z axes or a vector along which
optimization proceeds in a straight line through the structure.
5. Circular mode - You select either of the X, Y or Z axes about which optimization
proceeds around an arc through the structure.
See also The wavefront optimizer.
Optimization axis
If you have selected "Linear" or "Circular" for the wavefront optimization mode then you
must select the axis or vector along or about which optimization will proceed.
Coordinates of optimization centre
If you have selected "Circular" for the wavefront optimization mode then you must select the
centre of rotation about which optimization will proceed.
When all of the information has been entered, the static analysis module calculates the
displacements, forces, moments and reactions for each load case and then saves them ready
for graphical or text report output.
499
If you want to terminate the analysis before it is finished, just press ESC or the right mouse
button. If you terminate the analysis in this way, the results for any load cases which have
already converged are saved. This applies to non-linear analyses and to linear analyses with
tension-only or compression-only members.
500
Analysis
Static analysis results

At the end of the static analysis, a message stating whether the analysis was successful or not
is displayed together with a number of possible warnings and errors.
Refer to "Ill-conditioning and instabilities" for details of what to do if an ill-conditioning or
instability message is displayed.
Refer to "Static analysis buckling" for details of what to do if a frame buckling message is
displayed.
Displacements, forces, moments and stresses
The displacements, forces, moments and stresses calculated during the static analysis can be
included in a report. They can also be viewed graphically in diagrams superimposed over the
undeformed frame as described in "View diagrams". For plate elements, contour diagrams can
be displayed as described in "View plate contours".
You can also query individual nodes, members or plates graphically to find their
displacements, forces and moments as described in "Query analysis results".
For full details of the forces, moments and stresses in members and plates, refer to
"Sign conventions".
Bill of materials
A bill of materials report showing quantities, lengths and masses of each type of component
in the structure can be included in a report. It bundles members of the same type and length
together and shows their individual and total lengths and masses. It also shows the total
structure mass and centre of gravity location.
Centre of gravity
The SPACE GASS bill of materials report includes the coordinates of the structure centre of
gravity.
501
Buckling analysis
Buckling analysis
The SPACE GASS buckling analysis module performs a rational elastic buckling analysis of
a frame to determine its buckling load factors, buckling mode shapes and member effective
lengths.
The buckling load factor is the factor by which the loads need to be increased to reach the
buckling load. A load factor less than 1.0 means that the working loads exceed the structures
buckling capacity.
For information about displaying buckling mode shapes and finding out where buckling is
occurring, refer to "Buckling analysis results".
The buckling modes considered in the buckling analysis involve flexural instability due to
axial compression in the members (also known Euler buckling) and should not be confused
with flexural-torsional buckling (torsional instability due to bending moments) or axialtorsional buckling (torsional instability due to axial loads).
An accurate buckling analysis such as the one available in SPACE GASS looks at the
interaction of every member in the structure and detects buckling modes that involve one
member, groups of members, or the structure as a whole.
A buckling analysis is an essential component of every structural design because it:
1.
Determines if the loads exceed the structure's buckling capacity and by how much.
2.
Calculates the member effective lengths for use in the member design.
3.
Determines if the static analysis results are useable or not.
Points 1 and 3 above highlight the fact that a buckling analysis must always be performed
unless you are certain that the structure's buckling capacity exceeds the applied loads by a
suitable factor of safety.
Important points
1. The results of a static analysis will be incorrect if the structure's buckling capacity has
been exceeded (see point 3 above), and hence one of the key roles of a buckling
analysis is to ratify the static analysis results.
2. If you get buckling load factors that are below the minimum allowable value (eg.
shown as "<0.001" when the minimum allowable value is 0.001), this could indicate
an instability problem rather than a buckling problem. It is even more likely to be an
instability problem if the low buckling load factors occur in every load case.
3. If the model contains instabilities, the buckling analysis may, in some cases, give
invalid results. In the absence of instability or buckling messages from the static
analysis, you should always check the deflections to see if they are excessive or not.
Excessive deflections are sometimes the only indicator of instabilities.
4. Spectral load cases are not included in a buckling analysis. Furthermore, if you
perform a buckling analysis on a combination load case that contains spectral load
502
Analysis
cases, only the non-spectral load cases in that combination will be considered. This
means that if you transfer member compression effective lengths from a buckling
analysis into a steel member design, any spectral load cases considered in the design
will not be involved in the calculation of the effective lengths.
5. Because plate elements are linear elements only, they will not fail during a buckling
analysis regardless of the magnitude of the applied load. This means that their
capacity and restraining effect on other members may be overestimated during a
buckling analysis.
Once the buckling load factors have been determined, a simple formula is used to calculate
the member effective lengths as described in the next section. The effective lengths can then
be automatically transferred into the steel member design modules.
The method that SPACE GASS uses to calculate the buckling factors (eigenvalues) and
corresponding mode shapes (eigenvectors) is based on the theory developed by Wittrick and
Williams (12).
Note that the magnitudes of the effective lengths or the effective length factors (k factors)
from a buckling analysis cannot be used to determine if buckling is a problem or not. This
can only be determined by looking at the buckling load factor.
Refer to "Static analysis buckling" for details of some simple buckling checks that are
included in non-linear static analyses.
Refer to "Special buckling considerations" for details of items to be aware of when preparing
your model for a buckling analysis.
Refer to "Buckling analysis results" for details and interpretation of the results of a buckling
analysis.
503
Buckling effective lengths

The effective length of a compression member is the length of an equivalent pin-ended strut
that has an Euler buckling capacity equal to the axial force Pcr in the member at the point of
frame buckling. It can be determined from:
It is evident from the formula that because the member actual length is not involved in the
calculation, subdividing the member into smaller segments does not change its effective
length. Thus, the effective length of a strut is the same as the effective length of one of its
segments if it has been subdivided.
Effective lengths calculated by the buckling analysis can be automatically transferred into the
steel member design modules. This has the obvious advantage that effective lengths don't
have to be transferred manually, but it also offers design efficiencies in that the effective
lengths will be calculated specifically for each design load case rather than having to use one
set of effective lengths for all load cases.
If you are manually specifying the compression effective lengths in the steel member design
data rather than having them transferred automatically from the buckling analysis, for design
groups that consist of a number of analysis members connected end-to-end, you should use
the MAXIMUM (not the sum!) of its individual analysis member effective lengths.
Overestimation of effective lengths
Effective lengths from a buckling analysis are sometimes overestimated because the portion
of the frame that buckles first determines the buckling load factor (BLF) and, consequently,
controls the effective lengths of all the members in the frame. The buckled portion of the
frame may just involve one or two members and may be remote from many of the members
that are having their effective lengths controlled by it.
For example, the buckling collapse of the left-hand column of a portal frame due to a heavy
load applied to it can control the effective length of the right-hand column which has no such
load applied. Consequently, each column would have a different effective length.
It would be ideal if the buckling analysis could increase the BLF beyond the first buckling
mode so that the effective length for each member could be based on a buckling mode that
involved that member. Unfortunately, this is not often possible because once the frame has
reached its first buckling mode, it has generally collapsed and cannot resist any increase in
load.
However, if the first buckling mode involves only minor members such as bracing or similar,
rather than a collapse of the frame, it may be possible to continue the buckling analysis to a
higher order buckling mode in order to get more realistic effective lengths.
You can see from the above discussion that members which are lightly loaded at the point of
frame buckling will get a long effective length because of their small Pcr (see the equation
above). In some cases, this may result in conservative designs, however there are a few
factors that can help as follows:
1.
504
Members that have long effective lengths are generally lightly loaded axially, and these two
effects tend to cancel each other out during the design phase.
Analysis
2.
For codes such as AS4100 that don't require it, turn off the slenderness ratio check at the start
of the design phase. This is often very effective because, in the slenderness ratio check, a long
effective length does not benefit from being cancelled out by a small axial force.
3.
For sway members, you can limit the effective lengths to a multiple of the actual member
length by entering a factor into the "compression effective length ratio limit" field at the start
of the design phase. In fact, effective lengths charts in most design codes limit the effective
lengths for sway members to not more than 5.0 times the actual member length.
4.
For braced members, you can simply specify them as "braced" in the steel member design data
for the direction(s) in which they are braced. This will limit the effective lengths from the
buckling analysis to the actual member length.
505
Special buckling considerations

Although a buckling analysis requires no more input data than a standard static analysis, there
are a number of items to be aware of when preparing a model for a buckling analysis.
Restraining the structure for buckling
It is important that you restrain the appropriate degrees of freedom to prevent buckling modes
that cant occur in the real structure. For example, if a plane frame is braced in the out-ofplane direction, you must ensure that the braced nodes are restrained in that direction,
otherwise the buckling load factor may apply to an unexpected out-of-plane buckling mode. A
general restraint is usually the most convenient way to achieve this. For example, applying a
general restraint of RRFRRR to a plane frame in the XY plane will prevent all out-of-plane
translations.
Conversely, it is also important that you dont prevent node movements that can occur in the
real structure. For example, consider a plane frame rafter that is restrained in the out-of-plane
direction at the two ends via an RRFRRR general restraint, but which is able to buckle in the
out-of-plane direction between the ends. If you subsequently add some intermediate nodes to
the rafter, they will also get the general restraint and this will prevent them from translating
out-of-plane, changing the out-of-plane buckling characteristics of the rafter. To avoid this,
you could apply restraints of RRRRRR to the intermediate nodes so that they dont get the
general restraint.
Note that a static analysis of a plane frame is not as sensitive to out-of-plane restraints as a
buckling analysis because static analysis out-of-plane displacements generally only occur if
out-of-plane loads are applied. This is not true of a buckling analysis which can cause
buckling in any direction, even if there are no loads in that direction.
Buckling analysis with secondary members
Structures are often modelled with the secondary members such as ties or bracing removed. If
these members are required to prevent buckling of the major members in the real structure
then they should be included in the buckling analysis model, otherwise the buckling capacity
of the structure will be underestimated by the analysis.
This is particularly true of tower structures that contain large numbers of slender members
that prevent buckling of the major support members.
Buckling analysis with tension-only or compression-only members
Extra care must be taken with buckling analysis of structures that contain tension-only or
compression-only members.
For example, consider a portal frame building modelled in 3D with tension-only wall bracing
members that prevent the building from swaying longitudinally. Special treatment is required
for the load cases that contain predominantly gravity loads which would cause all the wall
braces to go into compression and therefore become disabled. In such load cases, the buckling
analysis would yield very low buckling load factors because the wall bracing members would
have been disabled and a longitudinal sway buckling mode at very low load would result. Of
course, in the real structure this could not happen because the wall brace members would
prevent it as soon as the sway mode was initiated.
One solution is to introduce a very small horizontal load into these load cases which is small
enough to have a negligible effect on the static analysis results but large enough to cause the
wall brace members to go into tension. The result is that they are not removed from the
buckling analysis model and are therefore able to prevent the unrealistic longitudinal sway
buckling mode.
506
Analysis
Similar situations can occur in any structures that contain tension-only or compression-only
members.
Buckling analysis with cable members
Extra care is needed for structures containing cable members because of their highly nonlinear nature. Because the axial force distribution in cable structures can change dramatically
as the load factor is increased beyond the working load, it is recommended that the buckling
analysis be performed on combination load cases that factor the working loads up close to the
buckling load and result in buckling load factors that are close to 1.0.
For example, if a buckling analysis of a working load case for a cable structure yields a
primary buckling load factor of 5.2, you could create a combination load case which factors
up the working loads for the particular load case by 5.0 say, and then re-do the buckling
analysis for the combination load case instead. If the subsequent buckling load factor is 0.90
say, then the final load factor (for the working load case) is 5.0 x 0.90 = 4.50.
Buckling analysis with plate elements
Because the plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements with no adjustment of stiffness due to
P-delta effects, they will not buckle regardless of the load applied.
Buckling instabilities
Occasionally, you may find that a requested buckling mode can't be calculated and "Unstable"
appears in the buckling output report. This occurs when a node floats free due to local
buckling of all of the members to which the node is connected. Sometimes it is possible to
avoid this problem and calculate higher order buckling modes by adding intermediate nodes
to the members which have buckled.
Modelling multiple structures in one job
It is sometimes useful to model more than one structure in a single job, however this is not
recommended if you are performing a buckling analysis to obtain compression effective
lengths. The buckling analysis finds the lowest buckling load factor for the entire model and
then calculates the effective lengths for all the members in the model based on that buckling
load factor. For example, if you have modelled structure A and structure B in one job, and
structure A has the lowest buckling load factor, the effective lengths for structure B will be
incorrectly based on the buckling load factor from structure A. SPACE GASS can't detect if
there are multiple structures in a single model and therefore you need to put them into
separate jobs if you want to use effective lengths from a buckling analysis.
Buckling analysis of spectral load cases
Spectral load cases are not included in a buckling analysis. Furthermore, if you perform a
buckling analysis on a combination load case that contains spectral load cases, only the nonspectral load cases in that combination will be considered.
507
Running a buckling analysis

You can run a buckling analysis by selecting "Buckling Analysis" from the Analysis menu.
The input data requirements for a buckling analysis are the same as those for a static analysis.
No extra buckling data is required.
You do not have to run a static analysis before a buckling analysis.
Load case list

For the fastest analysis time you should generally analyse only the load cases that can occur in
reality. For example, there is no point in analysing a live load case on its own because it can't
occur in real life without being combined with dead load. This means that you should
generally analyse just the combination load cases and not the primary load cases that the
combinations are made from.
508
Analysis
Tolerance
The accuracy to which the buckling load factors will be calculated. For example, a tolerance
of 0.01 means that the load factors will be within +/- 0.01 of the exact value.
Each extra decimal place in the tolerance will increase the number of iterations per
mode by 3 or 4. For example, a tolerance of 0.001 will require 3 or 4 more iterations per
mode than a tolerance of 0.01.
Load factor upper limit
The upper limit above which the buckling analysis will no longer search for buckling load
factors. Once this limit is reached, the analysis will stop, even if not all requested buckling
modes have been calculated.
Load factor lower limit
The lower limit below which the buckling analysis will not search for buckling load factors.
Buckling modes
The number of buckling modes that are required. Normally only the first buckling mode is of
interest, because beyond that the structure has usually collapsed and further modes are of
academic use only.
If the first buckling mode is caused by local buckling of a slender member or group of
members rather than the frame as a whole, the model should be changed so that overall frame
buckling occurs instead. One way of achieving this could be to change the slender members
into tension-only members so that they become disabled rather than buckle (see also
Members).
You should view the buckling mode shapes graphically to determine whether or not overall
frame buckling has occurred.
509

If you have defined combination load cases that contain other load cases which dont yet
exist, this option will detect and report them. It is optional because some users prefer to have
a standard set of combination load cases that contain primary load cases which are just
ignored during the analysis if they dont exist.
interconnecting members, restraints or constraints can be automatically restrained during the
analysis so that instabilities dont occur.
Extra iterations for mode shape accuracy
The buckling analysis is complete when the buckling load factor has reached the desired
accuracy (as specified by the tolerance), however it is possible that at this point the buckling
mode shapes are not totally accurate. Mode shape accuracy can be achieved by turning on the
"Extra iterations for mode shape accuracy" option, however because buckling mode shapes
are only used as a visual aid to assess the buckling location and its shape then the extra
iterations and analysis time involved is not usually warranted.
Solver
the speed. The Paradise solver is the recommended setting for all static analyses.
One current restriction of the Paradise solver is that it doesn't generate buckling mode shapes
and so if mode shapes are essential then you should use the Wavefront solver instead. This
restriction is likely to be removed in a future version. Note that buckling mode shapes are for
visual purposes only and do not affect the calculation of the buckling load factor, the member
effective lengths or any of the other modules that use the buckling analysis results.
Paradise solver is unable to obtain a solution or if you require buckling mode shapes.
Optimization method
follows.
510
Analysis
1. No optimization
Optimization axis
Axial force distribution
The buckling properties of a structure are largely dependent on the axial force in the
members. The buckling analysis module performs its own static analysis first to determine the
axial force distribution and you can nominate either linear or non-linear for this initial static
analysis phase. Generally, the choice between linear or non-linear doesn't significantly affect
the buckling load factor and, because linear is faster, it is recommended for most frames.
Naturally, some structures, such as those containing cable members, which cannot be
analysed linearly, require you to select non-linear.
When all of the information has been entered, the buckling analysis module calculates the
buckling load factor and mode shapes for each load case and then saves them ready for
graphical or text report output.
button.
Because plates are linear elements, they will not buckle regardless of the load applied.
511
Buckling analysis results

At the end of the buckling analysis, a message showing the lowest buckling load factor is
displayed as follows.
This gives an instant indication of whether the buckling capacity of the frame has been
exceeded or not. A buckling load factor of less than SF x 1.0, where SF is a suitable safety
factor would be unsatisfactory.
Based on the buckling load factor for each load case, a simple formula is then used to
calculate the member effective lengths as described in "Buckling effective lengths". The
effective lengths can then be automatically transferred into the steel member design modules.
For a more detailed list of the buckling load factors and member effective lengths for each
load case, you should view or print a report that includes the buckling load factors and/or
buckling effective lengths.
If you get buckling load factors that are below the minimum allowable value (eg. shown as
"<0.001" when the minimum allowable value is 0.001), this could indicate an instability
problem rather than a buckling problem. It is even more likely to be an instability problem if
the low buckling load factors occur in every load case.
By displaying the buckling mode shapes, you can generally see where the buckling would
occur, however some models show no movement at all. In these cases, the buckling generally
involves node rotations without any translations, making it difficult to see the source of the
buckling. The buckling load factor report, however, gives the locations of the maximum node
translations and rotations which can help to identify where the buckling is happening.
Load Load Node at Node at
Case Mode Factor Tolerance Iterations Max Trans Max Rotn
1 1 3.207 0.008 11 4 (X) 3 (Z)
2 1 0.801 0.008 8 4 (X) 3 (Z)
In the above example, the buckling mode involves translations in the X-axis direction and
rotations about the Z-axis.
If you want to display any higher order mode shapes, just press the "Filters" toolbar button
and then list the mode shapes required in the "Buckling modes" field.
512
Analysis
If a frame appears to buckle in the wrong direction, it is because the buckling mode
shape diagrams are only intended to show the mode of buckling and not its direction or
magnitude.
When displaying the buckling mode shapes graphically,
SPACE GASS makes no attempt to show the member curvature between end nodes (ie. the
node positions are simply joined by straight lines). You can, however improve the look of the
mode shapes by adding intermediate nodes to the members.
513

The SPACE GASS dynamic frequency analysis module is able to analyse multiple mass load
cases consisting of self mass and/or user defined lumped masses in a single run. For each
mass load case it calculates the natural frequency (eigenvalue), period and mode shape
(eigenvector) for any user defined number of vibration modes. The natural frequencies,
periods and mode shapes comprise the dynamic properties of the structure.
Important points
1. A dynamic frequency analysis is linear only and therefore cannot be performed if
your model contains cable elements.
2. Because it is linear, a dynamic frequency analysis treats tension-only and
compression-only members as normal members that can take tension and
compression.
You must perform a dynamic frequency analysis before performing a dynamic spectral
response analysis.
514
Analysis
Modelling considerations
The dynamic properties of a structure are dependent only on its geometric properties, stiffness
and mass. The geometric properties and stiffness of the structure are determined automatically
from the node coordinates, member connectivity and fixity, plate connectivity, node
restraints, section properties and material properties. The structure mass is made up of self
mass (applied as lumped masses on every node) and extra applied lumped masses. Self mass
can be calculated automatically during the dynamic frequency analysis if requested, while any
extra lumped masses must be pre-defined by the user.
In most cases, lumped masses placed at nodes are an adequate means of defining the mass
distribution throughout the structure. However, where the distribution of mass is critical, extra
nodes may be required. For example, consider a vertical cantilevered structure (such as a pole
or tower). In order to accurately determine the natural frequencies you must define the
distribution of mass up the cantilever by adding intermediate nodes with masses applied to
them. A similar situation applies with a continuous beam where the mode shapes between
supports are important.
As a general rule, extra intermediate nodes (with masses applied) should be added to
members for which the mass is a significant part of the total mass of the structure. Structures
with a small number of members are often affected in this way.
Dynamic mode shape deflections are calculated and output
at nodes only. Therefore, in order to get realistic looking mode shapes it is sometimes
necessary to add intermediate nodes to some members, particularly if the deflected shapes of
these members have significant curvature. If the local deflected shape of a member is of
interest then the distribution of mass along it will also be important and the requirement for
intermediate nodes will apply anyway.
The dynamic frequency analysis module cannot analyse structures that contain cable
members.
515
Running a dynamic frequency analysis

You can run a dynamic frequency analysis by selecting "Dynamic Frequency Analysis" from
the Analysis menu.
The dynamic frequency analysis is a linear analysis and hence cannot be used with models
that contain cable members. Furthermore, it treats tension-only and compression-only
members as normal members that can take tension and compression.
Note that the requirement to save the stiffness matrix during an initial static analysis is no
longer required for a dynamic frequency analysis.
Load case list

516
Analysis
Note that only the load cases that contain lumped masses or self-weight are considered during
a dynamic frequency analysis. Load cases that contain self-weight with other static loads and
no lumped masses are not considered, however load cases that contain only self-weight are
considered. Any static loads that exist in the dynamic load cases are ignored.
Consider the following examples:
Contents of load case
Masses only
Self-weight only
Static loads only
Masses + self-weight
Masses + static
Masses + self-weight + static
Self-weight + static
Considered
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes (static loads ignored)
Yes (static loads ignored)
No
Self mass
The self mass of the structure can be calculated automatically by SPACE GASS and included
in the dynamic frequency analysis. This can be done either by adding self-weight to a load
case that contains lumped masses or by combining lumped mass and self-weight load cases
into a combination load case.
Self mass is applied by calculating the mass of each member and then applying half of it as
translational lumped masses to each of the member end nodes in each of the unrestrained X,
Y and Z global axis directions. The mass of each plate is also calculated and applied to its
perimeter nodes
Self mass generation does not calculate rotational masses because of the large number of extra
masses that would be calculated for a fairly insignificant improvement in results accuracy. If
required, rotational self mass must be manually applied as rotational lumped masses.
See also Self-weight.
517

Tolerance (Hz)
The accuracy to which the dynamic natural frequencies will be calculated. For example, a
tolerance of 0.001 means that the frequencies will be within +/- 0.001 of the exact value.
The tolerance can also have a significant effect on the accuracy of the mode shapes. While the
mode shapes are usually of secondary importance if only a dynamic frequency analysis is
done, they are very important if the frequency analysis is followed by a dynamic response
analysis. Inaccurate mode shapes from the frequency analysis can cause significant errors in
the mass participation factors from the response analysis and its results in general.
Even if a natural frequency is accurate to within 0.01Hz, its corresponding mode shape may
not be accurate enough for a dynamic spectral response analysis. If the "Extra iterations for
mode shape accuracy" option is turned on (see below) then SPACE GASS will detect
significantly incorrect mode shapes during the frequency analysis and will correct them
automatically by doing more iterations. Small mode shape inaccuracies cannot be detected by
the frequency analysis, however they sometimes make themselves evident in the response
analysis by mass participation factors that exceed 100%. A warning is given if this occurs and
you should repeat the frequency analysis using a smaller tolerance.
If the results of the frequency analysis wont be used in a response analysis then a tolerance of
0.01 is more than enough, however if a response analysis is to follow then a tolerance of
0.001 or less should be used.
Each extra decimal place in the tolerance will increase the number of iterations per
mode by 3 or 4. For example, a tolerance of 0.0001 will require 3 or 4 more iterations per
mode than a tolerance of 0.001.
Frequency upper limit (Hz)
The upper limit above which the dynamic frequency analysis will no longer search for natural
frequencies. Once this limit is reached, the analysis will stop, even if not all requested
dynamic modes have been calculated.
Frequency lower limit (Hz)
The lower limit below which the dynamic frequency analysis will not search for natural
frequencies.
Dynamic modes
The dynamic frequency analysis module calculates the mode shapes, natural frequencies and
natural periods for the number of dynamic modes requested. It also sorts them into ascending
frequency order.
Frequency shift (Hz)
The dynamic frequency analysis normally calculates natural frequencies starting from 0Hz
and working upwards, however if a frequency shift is specified then the frequencies below the
frequency shift value are skipped.
For example, if your structure has natural frequencies of 1.2Hz, 3.2Hz, 6.7Hz, 10.2Hz,
15.3Hz and 16.1Hz but you are only interested in the frequencies above 10Hz, you could
specify a frequency shift of 10Hz. This would skip the lower three modes (saving you
considerable analysis time) and just calculate frequencies 10.2Hz, 15.3Hz and 16.1Hz.
518
Analysis
If you have defined combination load cases that contain other load cases that dont yet exist,
this option will detect and report them. It is optional because some users prefer to have a
standard set of combination load cases that contain primary load cases which are just ignored
during the analysis if they dont exist.
interconnecting members, plates, restraints or constraints can be automatically restrained
during the analysis so that instabilities dont occur.
Extra iterations for mode shape accuracy
The dynamic frequency analysis is complete when the natural frequencies have reached the
desired accuracy (as specified by the tolerance), however it is possible that at this point the
dynamic mode shapes are not totally accurate. Mode shape accuracy can be achieved by
turning on the "Extra iterations for mode shape accuracy" option, however if the dynamic
mode shapes are only used as a visual aid to assess the vibration location and its shape then
the extra iterations and analysis time involved may not be warranted.
If, however, a dynamic response analysis is to be done based on the frequency analysis then
the mode shapes are very important and it is imperative that the "Extra iterations for mode
shape accuracy" option is turned on. Even with the extra iterations, in some cases the mode
shapes may still not be accurate enough (as sometimes evidenced by a mass participation
factor from the response analysis that exceeds 100%) and further accuracy can then only be
achieved by using a smaller tolerance.
Solver
the speed. The Paradise solver is the recommended setting for all dynamic frequency
analyses.
Paradise solver is unable to obtain a solution.
519

Optimization method
follows.
1. No optimization
Optimization axis
When all of the information has been entered, the dynamic frequency analysis module
calculates the natural frequencies, periods and mode shapes for each load case and then saves
them ready for graphical or text report output.
button.
520
Analysis
Dynamic frequency analysis results

The natural frequencies, periods and mode shapes calculated during the static analysis can be
included in a report. They can also be viewed graphically in animated diagrams superimposed
over the undeformed frame as described in "View dynamic mode shapes".
Mode shape displacements are relative only. They define the mode shape, not its magnitude.
You cant compare the displacements of different mode shapes in an attempt to determine
which mode will result in the largest displacements. The scale factor for the displacements of
each mode shape is unique to that mode.
The mode shapes in SPACE GASS are normalized. This means that the translations and
rotations in a mode shape will have been adjusted such that each translation or rotation is
divided by the absolute value of the largest translational displacement for the mode shape
under consideration. This makes it easier for you to relate the displacement of a particular
node to the maximum displacement within a mode shape. For example, a normalized
displacement of 0.60 indicates that the node moves by an amount which is 60% of the
maximum displacement in that particular mode shape.
If you wish to use the dynamic frequency analysis results to perform an earthquake analysis,
refer to "Dynamic spectral response analysis".
521

The SPACE GASS spectral module performs a dynamic spectral response analysis of
structures subjected to earthquake loads given in the form of acceleration response spectra. Its
general approach means that the spectral module is not just restricted to earthquakes, but can
calculate the maximum response of a structure subjected to any ground vibration provided
that all supports are vibrating in phase (ie. the same response spectrum is applied at all
supports simultaneously).
The spectral module considers the vibration of the structure and identifies the maximum
values that result from the vibration. Generally, the maximums at different points of the
structure occur at different times during the dynamic event. Consequently, the spectral results
do not represent an equilibrium state of the structure, rather an envelope of the maximums.
Furthermore, because the earthquake action has no sign (ie. its accelerations are both positive
and negative), the maximum values have no sign and hence the sign of the results is
indeterminate. Usually, the results are dominated by one of the mode shapes which SPACE
GASS can identify and apply its sign to the results. Alternatively, you can select which mode
shape the sign should be taken from.
The spectral module is not code specific, however for ease of use with the Australian, New
Zealand and Indian loading codes, many of the analysis input parameters have alternative
code specific input options. These options require you to simply select from tables taken from
the code rather than having to type in numeric values. Future versions will include these input
aids for other international codes also.
The earthquake loads are provided in the form of curves called "acceleration response
spectra" which graph acceleration versus period. Each spectral curve is derived from the timehistory record of a ground vibration for a specific level of damping, and is not dependent in
any way on the properties of the structure being analysed. Usually, for one earthquake, there
are several spectral curves for different damping ratios (eg. 0%, 1%, 2%, 5% and 10% of the
critical damping). In the design codes, the spectral curves are derived from a set of earthquake
records which are smoothed and averaged.
A spectral curve library containing some standard (unauthorised) curves is supplied with
SPACE GASS. The built-in graphical spectral curve editor allows you to modify or create
your own spectral curves as required. The acceleration values in a spectral curve are always
specified in terms of g (acceleration due to gravity) units. Before being used in an analysis,
SPACE GASS automatically multiplies them by the dimensionless spectral curve multiplier
and by the appropriate value of g to yield acceleration units that are consistent with the
currently selected units system.
For an accurate spectral analysis, it is important that the spectral load cases have been defined
correctly and that appropriate combinations of the spectral load cases have been specified. For
more information, refer to "Spectral load data".
The results of the spectral analysis include deflections, forces, moments and reactions that can
be displayed graphically, printed, or used in a steel design in the same way as the results from
a static analysis. It is also possible to combine spectral load cases with static load cases in
combination load cases.
Important points
522
Analysis
1. A dynamic spectral response analysis is linear only and therefore cannot be
performed if your model contains cable elements.
2. Because it is linear, a spectral analysis treats tension-only and compression-only
members as normal members that can take tension and compression.
3. P-andP- effects are not taken into account during a spectral analysis.
4. The spectral analysis must be repeated after a static or dynamic frequency analysis
because its results will have been deleted.
Refer to "Dynamic response analysis results" for details and interpretation of the results of a
dynamic spectral response analysis.
523
Running a dynamic spectral response analysis

You can run a dynamic spectral response analysis by selecting "Dynamic Response Analysis"
from the Analysis menu.
Before a dynamic spectral response analysis can proceed, you must have performed a
dynamic frequency analysis.
Load case list

Leave blank if you want to analyse all spectral load cases, otherwise enter the load cases
(separate by commas/dashes) you want analysed.
524
Analysis

Check this box if you want to keep the analysis results of previously analysed spectral load
cases. Otherwise, if they are not being re-analysed in the current session, they will be
discarded.
Loading code
This allows you to select the loading code to be used. If you choose the AS, NZS or IS code,
you should ensure that you have also selected spectral curves for that same code in your
spectral load data.
One major difference between the "General" loading code and the other codes is that the
spectral curve multiplier must be manually defined for General, whereas it can be calculated
based on code specific factors for the AS, NZS and IS codes.
Limit state - NZS1170.5 only
For NZS, you must choose between serviceability or ultimate limit states together with an
appropriate ductility factor.
The selected ductility factor is only used if a non-NZS spectral curve is used in the
spectral load data. If you have used a predefined NZS spectral curve then the ductility factor
is derived from it.
Auto scaling of base shear
This is a code related parameter that instructs the program to scale the results so that the sum
of the support reactions obtained from the spectral analysis is not less than a user defined
proportion of the total static force (or a user defined percentage of the structures weight for
the "General" code).
The static force for each mode is calculated based on the mass in the structure multiplied by
the acceleration obtained from the spectral curve being used. It is calculated for each axis
direction and for the earthquake direction as defined by the direction vector in the spectral
load data. The static force used for base shear scaling is taken from the static force in the
earthquake direction for the dominant mode (ie. the mode with the largest mass participation
factor). If the base shear is less than the user defined percentage of the static force (NZS) or
525

100% of the static force (IS) then the results (deflections, forces, moments and reactions) are
scaled up accordingly. No scaling is done for the AS code.
For the "General" code, the results are scaled up if the base shear is less than the user defined
percentage of the mass in the structure. This is equivalent to scaling based on a static force
calculated using an acceleration of 1g.
Site subsoil class - NZS1170.5 only
The site subsoil class is only used when non-NZS spectral curves are used. A setting of
"Auto" forces the site subsoil class to be taken from the spectral curve and is not suitable for
non-NZS spectral curves. For NZS spectral curves the site subsoil class is always taken from
the curve.
Horizontal base shear factor (%) - General only
A "General" loading code specific factor that controls the scaling of the results so that the sum
of the support reactions resolved along the axis of the direction vector equals the weight of the
structure (including applied lumped masses) multiplied by the horizontal base shear factor. It
is used if the direction vector is predominantly horizontal. For example, if you select a
horizontal base shear of 3% the total reaction vector must be equal to 3% of the weight of the
structure.
Vertical base shear factor (%) - General only
A "General" loading code specific factor that controls the scaling of the results so that the sum
of the support reactions resolved along the axis of the direction vector equals the weight of the
structure (including applied lumped masses) multiplied by the vertical base shear factor. It is
used if the direction vector is predominantly vertical. For example, if you select a vertical
base shear of 2% the total reaction vector must be equal to 2% of the weight of the structure.
Base shear factor (%) - NZS1170.5 only
Controls the scaling of the results so that the sum of the support reactions resolved along the
axis of the direction vector is not less than the total static force (resolved in the same
direction) multiplied by the scaling factor. For example, if you select a scaling factor of 80%
the total reaction vector will be not less than 80% of the total static force vector.
Factors
There are a number of code specific factors that can be typed in directly or calculated
automatically based on descriptions of the structure location, structure importance and
construction method. They are used to calculate the spectral curve multiplier and other
parameters in the spectral analysis.
Sign of the results
Because the results of a response spectrum analysis are a combination of a number of mode
shapes, the final sign of the results has to be determined. Choosing "No sign" is of limited use
and means that all deflections, forces, moments and reactions will be positive. Choosing
"Auto Sign" means that the sign of the predominant mode shape will be applied to the results.
Choosing "Select Mode" tells the program to extract the sign from a nominated mode shape.
Spectral curve multiplier
The spectral curve multiplier is used to control the scale of the spectral curve acceleration
values. It can be typed in directly or, by clicking the button next to the spectral curve
multiplier field, can be defined via various code specific factors. For AS1170.4 it is based on
probability, hazard, structural ductility and performance factors, for NZS1170.5 it is based on
hazard, return period, near-fault and structural performance factors, and for IS1893 it is based
on the zone factor, damping multiplying factor, importance factor and response reduction
526
Analysis
factor. Each of the code specific factors can be typed in directly or calculated automatically
based on descriptions of the structure location, structure importance and construction method.
Mode combination method
The results for spectral load cases that contain more than one mode shape are obtained by
combining the results for each of the mode shapes. You can choose between:
SRSS - Square Root of the Sum of Squares

The simplest and most commonly used mode combination method that works well for
most situations.
CQC - Complete Quadratic Combination

Recommended when some of the mode shapes to be combined have natural
frequencies that are close together.
Either method can be used regardless of the spectral curve damping factors.
When all of the information has been entered, the dynamic spectral response analysis module
performs its calculations for each load case and then saves them ready for graphical or text
report output.
button.
527
Dynamic spectral response procedure

For each spectral load case, the analysis module calculates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Total static (earthquake) force in each global axis direction.

Dominant period in each global axis direction.
Mass participation factor for the dominant mode in each global axis direction.
Total mass participation factor in each global axis direction.
Total mass participation factor.
The mode to be used for determining the sign of the results.
Node displacements for each mode.
Mass participation factor in the earthquake direction for each mode.
The following calculations are then performed:

1.
Forces, moments and reactions are calculated from the node displacements for each mode.
2.
Displacements, forces, moments and reactions for each mode are combined into a single set of
values for all the modes combined. This is done using SRSS or CQC as specified by the user.
3.
If base shear scaling is requested, the displacements, forces, moments and reactions are then
scaled by a factor so that the base shear is equal to the base shear factor times the total mass
(for "General") or not less than the base shear factor times the total static force for the
dominant mode (for NZS or IS loading codes).
Note that the base shear is simply the X, Y and Z reactions resolved into a vector in the
direction of the earthquake. Similarly, the total static force is the X, Y and Z static forces
resolved into a vector in the direction of the earthquake.
For "General", if the direction vector is predominantly horizontal then the horizontal base
shear factor is used (this is the normal case), otherwise the vertical base shear factor is used.
For a detailed explanation of the dynamic spectral response analysis results, refer to
"Dynamic response analysis results".
528
Analysis
Dynamic spectral response analysis results

The results of a spectral response analysis include normal deflections, forces, moments and
reactions that can be displayed graphically, printed or used in a steel design in the same way
that the results of a static analysis are used. In addition, spectral load cases and static load
cases can be mixed together in combination load cases.
The output results also include a summary of the analysis input parameters and details of the
governing mode shapes, total static forces, total masses and mass participation factors. Details
are given for the three global axis directions and for the direction vector.
The key output results are explained in more detail as follows:
Total static force
The earthquake force calculated by an equivalent static method for each global axis direction.
Total mass
The total mass (including self mass if self weight is included in the mass load cases)
applied to the model for each global axis direction. Note that any mass applied to restrained
degrees of freedom is ignored.
Mass participation factor
The results are highly sensitive to the number of mode shapes included in the analysis. An
insufficient number of modes will result in an inaccurate solution. The mass participation
factor (MPF) represents the contribution of a particular mode shape to the overall dynamic
response of the structure. Each mode has its own MPF.
The total MPF for each direction is a reliable indicator of the number of modes required. If all
modes are considered then the sum of the MPFs (the total MPF) will be 100%. In reality, we
only consider a finite number of modes and the total MPF should be at least 90% for a good
result. If the total MPF is less than 90% then more modes should be included in the analysis.
Usually, an earthquake is applied along one of the two horizontal axes, as defined by the
direction vector. For example, an earthquake acting in the X direction would have a direction
vector of Dx = 1.0, Dy = 0.0 and Dz = 0.0. In this case, the total MPF in the X direction
should be greater than 90%. The values of the total MPFs in the other two directions are not
important.
A MPF that exceeds 100% indicates that the mode shapes from the dynamic frequency
analysis are not accurate enough. If this happens, you should repeat the dynamic frequency
analysis using a smaller tolerance.
Base shear
The horizontal reaction in each global axis direction shown as a percentage of the total mass.
This should match the reactions shown graphically.
The table in the output report showing the mass participation factors for each mode shape
individually gives a good indication of the contribution of each mode shape in the overall
dynamic response of the structure. From it you can quickly see which mode is dominant.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE SPECTRUM (kN,T,Sec,Hz)
------------------------Spectral case 5: Sample AS1170.4 Case
Mass load case: 3
529

Direction vector: Dx = 1.000, Dy = 1.000, Dz = 1.000
Auto scaling of base shear: AS1170.4
Vertical direction: Y-Axis
Base shear: Not less than 80% of total static force
Results scaled by factor: 2.825
Site factor: 0.670
Sign of the results: Mode shape 1 (Calculated)
Acceleration coefficient: 0.080
Importance factor: 1.000
Structural response factor: 4.500
Spectral curve multiplier: 0.017778
Mode combination method: SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of Squares)
Total MPF for Total
Dominant Static Total Dominant Mass Part Base
Direction Mode Force Mass Mode Factor Shear
X-Axis 1 0.5371 2.1209 99.999% 100.000% 1.056%
Y-Axis 3 0.2686 1.1209 29.745% 29.745% 0.023%
Z-Axis 0 0.0000 0.0000 0.000% 0.000% 0.000%
Mode Damping Natural Natural Mass Part
Direction Shape Spectral Curve Factor Period Frequency Factor
Vector 1 NEWCASTLE 2% 2.0% 0.4378 2.284 65.419%
Vector 3 NEWCASTLE 0% 0.1% 0.0133 75.470 10.365%
Total 75.783%
Spectral case 6: Sample General Case

Mass load case: 2
Direction vector: Dx = 1.000, Dy = 1.000, Dz = 0.000
Auto scaling of base shear: AS1170.4
Vertical direction: Y-Axis
Base shear: Not less than 80% of total static force
Results scaled by factor: 1.532
Site factor: 0.670
Sign of the results: Mode shape 1 (Calculated)
Acceleration coefficient: 0.080
Importance factor: 1.000
Structural response factor: 4.500
Spectral curve multiplier: 0.017778
Mode combination method: SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of Squares)
Total MPF for Total
Dominant Static Total Dominant Mass Part Base
Direction Mode Force Mass Mode Factor Shear
X-Axis 1 0.8363 4.1209 99.999% 100.000% 2.244%
Y-Axis 3 0.4182 4.1209 50.829% 91.077% 0.239%
Z-Axis 0 0.0000 0.0000 0.000% 0.000% 0.000%
Mode Damping Natural Natural Mass Part
Direction Shape Spectral Curve Factor Period Frequency Factor
Vector 1 AS1170.4
Vector 2 AS1170.4
Vector 3 AS1170.4
Vector 4 AS1170.4
Total 95.514%
530
S=.67
S=.67
S=.67
S=.67
5.0%
5.0%
5.0%
5.0%
0.6102
0.0253
0.0206
0.0153
1.639 50.096%
39.566 2.584%
48.544 25.278%
65.291 17.556%
Analysis
Analysis warnings and errors

SPACE GASS performs numerous checks for illegal and inconsistent data. Many of these
checks are done in the data input modules and any errors detected there must be corrected
immediately. However, some errors and warnings such as instabilities and ill-conditioning
cannot be detected until the analysis phase.
If any errors in the data are detected, SPACE GASS lists them on the screen, aborts the
analysis and then returns to the main menu, ready for correction of the offending items.
Warnings are displayed at the end of the analysis and do not cause it to abort.
Node # not found for member #
A member is connected to a non-existent node.
Direction node # not found for member #
A member has referenced a non-existent direction node.
Section # not found for member #
A member has referenced a non-existent section property.
Section # has impractically large section properties for the frame size
The properties of a section are too large for the frame dimensions. This error is often due to
the section properties being input in the wrong units.
Material # not found for member #
A member has referenced a non-existent material property.
Member # has zero length
A member is connected to two nodes with identical coordinates.
Restraint applied to non-existent node #
A restraint has been applied to a node which doesnt exist.
Slave node # not found
A non-existent node has been specified as a slave node.
Master node # not found for slave node #
A non-existent node has been specified as a master node.
A constraint has been applied to a restrained DOF on node #
Any restrained degrees of freedom for a slave node cannot be constrained to a master node.
Node # has been specified as both slave and master
A master node cannot be the slave of another master node.
Member # with PA<>0.0 must have identical Y and Z axis fixities at an end
Because of the difficulty involved in calculating the stiffness matrix for a member with a nonzero principal angle when the member end fixities are about its non-principal axes, the Y and
Z fixities at an end must be the same.
Cable member # must not have any translational fixities released
For stability, cable members must have all of their translational fixities fixed.
Cable member # must not have member offsets
531

Cable members cannot have member offsets.
Cable member # must not have semi-rigid joints
Cable members are always assumed to be pin-ended, and hence cannot have semi-rigid joints.
Member # must not have shear fixity released with semi-rigid joints
Members with semi-rigid joints cannot have shear fixities released. This restriction only
applies when the semi-rigid joint and the shear fixity act in the same plane.
Node load on non-existent or dummy node #, load case #
A node load has been applied to a non-existent node.
Prescribed displacement on non-existent or dummy node #, load case #
A prescribed displacement has been applied to a non-existent node.
Concentrated load on non-existent member #, load case #
A concentrated member load has been applied to a non-existent member.
Distributed force on non-existent member #, load case #
A distributed member force has been applied to a non-existent member.
Distributed torsion on non-existent member #, load case #
A distributed member torsion has been applied to a non-existent member.
Prestress load on non-existent member #, load case #
A prestress load has been applied to a non-existent member.
Prescribed displacement applied to end of cable member #, load case #
Nodes at the ends of cable members must not have prescribed displacements applied to them.
Prescribed displacement applied to released restraint on node #, load case #
Prescribed displacements can only be applied to node degrees of freedom which are
restrained.
Prescribed displ. applied to master constraint DOF on node #, load case #
Prescribed displacements must not be applied to master node degrees of freedom which are
constraining a slave node.
Concentrated load is off the end of member #, load case #
A concentrated member load has been located beyond the ends of the member.
Concentrated load applied to cable member #, load case #
Concentrated member loads must not be applied to cable members.
Distributed force is off the end of member #, load case #
A distributed member force has been located beyond the ends of the member.
UDL must act over full length of cable member #, load case #
Uniformly distributed loads applied to cable members must act over the entire cable length.
Trapezoidal load applied to cable member #, load case #
Distributed trapezoidal loads must not be applied to cable members.
Distributed torsion is off the end of member #, load case #
A distributed member torsion has been located beyond the ends of the member.
532
Analysis
Distributed torsion applied to cable member #, load case #

Distributed torsion loads must not be applied to cable members.
Load case # has been specified as both primary and combination
Load cases can be primary or combination, but not both.
Combination # contains non-primary load case #
Combination load cases can only be made up from primary load cases. Combination load
cases cannot be further combined.
None of the load cases selected exist
There are no valid load cases in the load cases list selected for analysis.
Insufficient space on drive C, # bytes extra required
The analysis module has detected that there is not enough space left on the hard disk for the
analysis to run to completion. Extra space equal to the number of bytes shown is required.
You should terminate the analysis, remove any unwanted data files or programs and then try
the analysis again.
Cable member # is ill-conditioned in load case #
The program was unable to accurately calculate the cable geometry and stiffness matrix.
Member # has buckled in load case #, axial load = 123.23. Continue?
During a non-linear analysis, the program was unable to calculate the stiffness matrix for the
member because its Euler buckling load was exceeded. If you continue, the member is simply
disabled for the rest of the analysis iterations. Note that this message is the result of a simple
local member buckling check only. Overall frame buckling or buckling of multiple members
is not considered! The local member buckling messages can be suppressed by clearing the
appropriate check box at the start of the analysis.
Instability found at member # in load case #
An instability has been detected at a specified member. The instability could be located at
either end of the member.
Not all load steps were completed
The load was applied in more than one step, however it was stopped before all steps were
completed. Because the full load was not reached, the results cannot be used for the load cases
being analysed.
WARNING: Possible ill-conditioning detected, check reactions
Ill-conditioning may have been detected. If the reactions equal the applied loads then no illconditioning has occurred. This message is only a warning which can be suppressed from the
output reports if necessary.
WARNING: Analysis did not reach desired convergence in all load cases
The level of convergence in a non-linear analysis has not reached the required convergence
accuracy for some load cases. This is not necessarily fatal if the convergence achieved is close
to that requested. Note also that some of the load cases may have fully converged and this can
be checked by looking at the output reports.
533
Steel Member Design

Steel member design
Throughout this chapter it can be assumed that all information applies equally to all of
the supported steel member design codes unless specifically stated otherwise.
This chapter describes in detail the data required to be input before a design or check can
proceed. It discusses the internal methods, philosophies and assumptions that the program
uses as it designs or checks members, and it explains how to initiate the actual design or
checking process once the steel member design data has been input.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Before you use the steel member design module, you should read all of the assumptions
described later in this chapter (see also "Steel member design/check assumptions") to
verify that its performance and capabilities are adequate for your situation. It is up to you
to determine whether or not the steel member design module is suitable for your
requirements.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Adjustments are required when designing or checking US HSS sections due to the practice
of some steel manufacturers producing HSS sections with a wall thickness at the very low
end of what the specifications allow. To account for this, the US section libraries supplied
with SPACE GASS 12.27 and later include adjustments to the HSS section properties
(depending on the type of HSS section) and no extra adjustments are made to their
properties during an AISC 360-10 design or check. In SPACE GASS 12.26 and earlier, the
US section libraries contained non-adjusted properties for HSS sections and so to allow for
this their wall thickness was multiplied by 0.93 during an AISC 360-10 design or check.
It is therefore important that you match the version of the US library with the same version
of SPACE GASS, otherwise unsafe designs of HSS sections could result. It is also
important that you don't use HSS sections from SPACE GASS 12.26 and earlier with other
non-US design codes.
The steel member design module is a general purpose design and code checking program
which reads the frame analysis output data, calculates the critical location and load case for
each member and then selects the most suitable steel member size from a library of standard
sections. Alternatively, you may specify a steel member size to be checked and the program
determines whether or not the member is adequate. For a given frame, you can specify any
selected number of members to be designed or checked.
The design module is also capable of passing the designed steel sizes back into the frame
analysis data and re-analysing the structure. This process can be iterated until the results
converge. It usually only takes two or three iterations.
During the design/check phase SPACE GASS automatically calculates the load factor for
limit states codes or combined stress ratio for working stress codes at numerous stations along
each member. It considers yielding of the cross section, lateral buckling, slenderness ratios,
and all possible combinations of shear, tension, compression and bending for both in-plane
and out-of-plane failure.
535
The steel member design module doesnt consider torsional effects.

After all specified members have been designed or checked, a detailed report can be produced
for each member showing the critical location or segment on the member, the critical load
case, section properties, effective lengths, and the complete computations involved in the
design. Sections of the report can be suppressed if required. A color-coded graphical
representation of the design/check results can also be displayed.
The SPACE GASS steel member design module can handle most types of steel members
including beams, columns, ties, struts, braces, and members subjected to combinations of
axial loads, shear forces and bending moments (uniaxial or biaxial).
All references to BS5950 in this document apply to BS5950-1:2000. Although SPACE GASS
still has a design module for BS5950:1990, it is now obsolete and is not referred to in this
document.
The AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100, NZS3404, BS5950 and HK CP2011 modules
assume that second order effects have been taken into account by a second order elastic
analysis. Moment magnification is not considered.
Refer to "Steel member input methods" for details on how to input steel member design data.
Refer to "Running a steel member design" for details on how to perform a steel member
design.
Refer to "Steel member design results" for details and interpretation of the results of a steel
member design.
536
Steel Member Design
Steel member input methods

Before you can perform a steel member design, you must define each of the steel members
you wish to design and then input some design parameters for each of them. This can be done
in three ways as follows.
1.

This option performs a quick initial input of the steel members and their design parameters for
the entire model or for any part of it that you wish to select.
After the quick initial input, you can refine the design parameters for each steel member by
using a steel member input form or datasheet (see items 2 and 3 below). You can also skip the
auto-create step completely if you prefer to input the steel design data from scratch using a
steel member input form or datasheet.
2.

This option allows you select a steel member graphically and then define or edit its design
parameters via a form. It is restricted to one steel member at a time.
3.

This option lets you select one or more steel members graphically and then define or edit their
design parameters via a datasheet. It can handle multiple steel members, however they must
have been previously defined using methods 1 or 2 above.
Alternatively, you can select "Steel Member Design Input-Datasheet" from the Design menu
to open a datasheet and input or edit design parameters for steel members regardless if they
have previously been defined or not.
The recommended procedure is to use the auto-create tool to perform a quick initial setup of
the steel members and then refine them using a steel member input form or datasheet.
Each of the three input methods are explained in detail in the following sections.
If you want to have multiple steel members with identical design parameters, you can copy
the design parameters from one steel member to many others by using the "Copy steel
member properties" tool. Note, however, that you cant copy to steel members that havent
been defined yet.
537

This tool automatically creates multiple steel design members (also known as "design
groups") from a selection of analysis members. Each generated steel design member can
contain multiple analysis members connected end-to-end, provided they are of the same cross
section, are generally collinear and dont extend past a major axis support.
You can access the auto-create steel members tool by selecting "Steel Member Design InputAuto create multiple steel members" from the Design menu or selecting "Auto-create multiple
steel members" from the floating menu.
You can select analysis members from different locations throughout the model and with
different section properties, and SPACE GASS will automatically sort through them and
group them appropriately into steel design members.
You can even select the entire model and have all of the steel design members created
automatically. However, you should check the generated members to ensure that their
effective lengths, restraints and other data are correct.
The numbering convention adopted by this operation is such that the number of each
generated steel design member is set to match the number of the first analysis member that it
contains. This makes it easy to keep track of how the steel design members relate to the
analysis members. However, please be aware that any existing steel design members that
dont follow this convention will be overwritten if their numbers clash with the new steel
design members being generated. Of course, any steel design members that contain the
selected analysis members will also be overwritten during the generation.
After you have selected the analysis members to be grouped into steel design members, click
the right mouse button and select "Auto-create multiple steel members" from the floating
menu (or select "Ok" if you initiated the operation from the menu). You can then specify
restraint, effective length and other data for the generated steel members via the forms shown
below.
538
Steel Member Design
Specify Flange Restraints Manually

Select this option if you want to directly specify all of the flange restraints along the generated
steel members in the next form. Otherwise, the flange restraints will be placed in accordance
with the data you specify in this form.
End Flange Restraints
These are the flange restraints that will be placed at the ends of the generated steel members.
Intermediate Flange Restraints
Flange restraints will be placed at the intermediate nodes along the generated steel members
depending on which options you select in this area of the form. Your choices are any or all of
the following:
1.
Apply flange restraints to all intermediate nodes
539

If selected, intermediate flange restraints of the type you specify will be placed on both
flanges at every intermediate node.
2.
Apply flange restraints to nodes connected to other members

If selected, intermediate flange restraints of the type you specify will be placed at the
intermediate nodes that are connected to other members. You have the option of ignoring
interconnecting members that lie in the plane of the steel member (ie. in the plane of the steel
members web). You can also control which flanges to which the restraints are applied.
3.
Apply flange restraints to restrained intermediate nodes

If selected, intermediate flange restraints of the type you specify will be placed at the
intermediate nodes that have analysis restraints applied to them. Analysis restraints that only
apply in the direction of the plane of the steel members web are ignored.
Note that this only applies to normal analysis restraints and not the general restraint.
Tolerances
The tolerances affect whether or not a selection of analysis members are suitable for grouping
into a steel design member. A selection of analysis members of the same cross section
connected end-to-end will be able to be grouped into a steel design member provided the bend
angle, twist angle or step distance between adjacent analysis members do not exceed the
tolerances you specify.
Delete all Existing Design Groups First
If you select this option, all steel design members will be deleted before the new steel
members are generated. Otherwise, only those steel design members that contain the selected
analysis members will be deleted before the generation.
After clicking the "Next" button, the following form appears. For detailed information about
the data in the form, refer to "Steel member design data".
540
Steel Member Design
All steel design members generated will be created with the data that you specify in this form.
After the steel design members have been created, you should check each one, paying
particular attention to the following:
1.
You should split any steel design member that extends past an interconnecting member that
effectively acts as a major axis support point for the design member.
2.
If you have specified that bending effective lengths are to be calculated automatically based
on the flange restraints, they will be calculated such that they never substantially exceed the
actual length of the steel design member. If the unrestrained flange length is longer than this
(ie. the bending effective length is longer than the steel design member length) then you
should specify them manually rather than having them calculated automatically.
You can show the steel design members graphically by clicking the
button near the
bottom of the side toolbar. They show up as thickened lines that are drawn slightly shorter
than their actual length so that you can easily see where they start and finish.
541
Steel design members can be viewed or edited graphically on an individual basis as described
in "Steel member input form", "Steel member input datasheet" or via the steel member design
datasheet.
For an overview of the various methods available for inputting steel member design data,
refer to "Steel member input methods".
542
Steel Member Design

This tool allows you to graphically define and edit steel design members (also known as
"design groups"). Note that multiple steel design members can be defined in a single
operation using the "Auto-create steel members" tool.
You can access the steel member input form by selecting "Steel Member Design InputGraphical" from the Design menu or selecting some members and then "Steel Member Design
Input (Form)" from the floating menu.
It is recommended that you initially generate all the steel design members using the "Autocreate steel members" tool and then check and edit them on an individual basis using the
procedure described here.
Each steel design member contains one or more analysis members connected end-to-end.
After you have selected the analysis members that you wish to include in a steel design
member, click the right mouse button and select "Steel Member Design Input (Form)" from
the floating menu (or select "Ok" if you initiated the operation from the menu).
Because the top flange for a steel design group is taken to be the same as the top flange for
the first member in the design group, it is important to be able to control which member
comes first in the design group. Flange restraint positions are also referenced from the end of
the first member in the design group.
If you are inputting a new design group, the member that you select first will be placed first in
the design group (assuming that it is at either end of the group). If you want to select a "first"
member, you should pick it directly or ensure that it is the only member selected if you use a
window.
If you use a window and select a group of members initially, then the end one with the lowest
member number will be placed first in the design group.
In the steel member form that appears, type in the data for the selected design group, and then
click the form Ok button.
For detailed information about the data in the form, refer to "Steel member design data".
543
"Use Previous" button

Click the "Use Previous" button to set all the data in the form to the same as when the form
was previously used.
You can show the steel design members graphically by clicking the
button near the
bottom of the side toolbar. They show up as thickened lines that are drawn slightly shorter
than their actual length so that you can easily see where they start and finish.
You can also show the flange restraints graphically by clicking the
button near the bottom
of the side toolbar. It enables you to see exactly where the flange restraints are and whether
they are on the correct flange or not.
544
Steel Member Design

This tool allows you to graphically edit steel design members (also known as "design
groups") that were previously defined using the "Auto-create steel members" and/or "Steel
member input form" tools.
You can access the steel member input datasheet by selecting "Steel Member Design InputDatasheet" from the Design menu or selecting some members and then "Steel Member Design
Input (Datasheet)" from the floating menu.
After you have selected one or more steel design members, click the right mouse button and
select "Steel Member Design Input (Datasheet)" from the floating menu (or select "Ok" if you
initiated the operation from the menu).
For detailed information about the data in the datasheet, refer to "Steel member design data".
545
Copy steel member properties

This tool lets you copy the design properties of a steel design member (also known as a
"design group") to a selection of destination steel design members.
Note that the properties can only be copied to members that have already been set up as steel
design members.
1.
Select the source member that you wish to copy the properties of, click the right mouse button
and then select "Copy Steel Member Properties" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Copy Steel Member Properties" from the Design menu and then select the source
member that you wish to copy the properties of.
2.
Select one or more destination members by picking them individually or by putting a selection
window around them and then click the right mouse button and click "Ok".
3.
The steel design properties of the source member will then be copied to the selected
destination members.
4.
Select another source member, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the tool.
After the copy, you should check the destination members to ensure that the effective lengths,
flange restraints and other data are appropriate. In particular, check that the effective lengths
are correct and that the flange restraints are not located off the ends of the steel design
member.
546
Steel Member Design
Steel member design data

This section describes the steel member design data that is required to be input before you can
design and/or check steel members that are part of a frame analysis model.
The form that appears when you input steel member design data graphically is shown above.
The steel member datasheet contains the same information in a different format.
Group
Each steel design member is made up of one or more analysis members. Hence, the concept
of steel design groups is introduced. A steel design group usually represents a single piece of
steel in the real structure. It could be modelled as a single member or a number of members in
the analysis model.
547
In order to make it easier to relate member numbers to group

numbers, it is often a good idea to give the design group the same number as the first member
in the group. Otherwise, there is sometimes a tendency to confuse member numbers and
group numbers when scanning the design output data. By default, SPACE GASS will give a
design group a number corresponding to the first of the members selected (when performing a
graphical steel frame data input). You can, of course, change this if you wish.
Description
An optional brief description of the steel design group.
Member list
A list of analysis members to be combined into the steel design group. This is often only one
member in each group.
Because the top flange for a steel design group is taken to be
the same as the top flange for the first member in the design group, it is important to control
which member comes first in the design group. Flange restraint positions are also referenced
from the end of the first member in the design group.
See also Member groups.
Strength grade
The strength grade for members can be set to normal or high. The actual yield strengths are
taken from the standard section libraries supplied with SPACE GASS. All of these libraries
can be viewed or edited (see also Section libraries).
Choices are:
Normal,
High.
Units
The compression effective lengths and flange restraint positions can be specified as actual
distances or as ratios of the design group length.
Choices are:
Actual,
Ratio.
Load height position

The load height position is used to allow for the case when a member is subjected to a
downwards load acting above its shear centre causing an increased tendency for the flange to
buckle laterally (out-of-plane). The load height position can be set to "Top flange" if this
occurs, or "Shear centre" if the predominant load is positioned at the shear centre or below
such that it resists lateral buckling of the flange.
Choices are:
Shear centre,
Top flange.
The load height position affects the value of the load height factor kl which is used to
calculate the bending effective length of the member.
548
Steel Member Design
Destabilizing and stabilizing loads
See also Load height factor.

Scan code
In order to control the types of steel sections that the program selects during the course of a
design, a library scan code is required. This allows you to select the types of sections that
should only be considered for each member. For example, you could use it to tell the program
that only I-sections were to be considered for the design of a portal frame column. Without
the library scan code the program would simply choose the lightest adequate steel section
from the library, regardless of its type or shape.
The library scan code is simply a list of up to four characters that contains the group codes of
sections that are to be considered during the design of a member. You can input the scan code
directly or click the "Select" button and then choose the section types you require and the scan
code will be created for you.
Compression effective lengths (Lc major and minor)
These are the effective lengths for overall buckling about the major and minor axes due to
axial compression. Depending on the "Units" selected, the Lc values may be expressed as an
absolute length or as a ratio of the total group length.
Compression effective lengths can be calculated from a buckling analysis, however you can
elect to input them directly if you prefer. To have them calculated, select the "Calculate from
Buckling Analysis" check box. Of course to have Lc calculated, you must have the buckling
analysis module (it is not a standard program feature) and you must run a buckling analysis
before you can run the steel member design.
Having the Lc values calculated automatically is generally more efficient than specifying
them directly because case specific Lc values can be calculated for each design load case.
However, the buckling analysis sometimes over-estimates the Lc values for members that are
not directly involved in the buckling of the model (refer to "Overestimation of compression
effective lengths" in Buckling effective lengths for further information). If you specify Lc
values directly then they are used for every load case.
If the Lc values are not being transferred automatically from a buckling analysis, for design
groups that consist of a number of analysis members connected end-to-end, you should use
the MAXIMUM (not the sum!) of its individual analysis member effective lengths.
549
The "Braced in Position at Both Ends of Group" check boxes indicate whether or not the
group is braced for each of the major and minor axis directions. If you specify that the group
is braced then its compression effective length in the direction you specify will not be allowed
to exceed the overall group length, regardless of whether it was calculated from a buckling
analysis or specified directly by you. Because this can substantially reduce the effective
lengths used in the design, please use this option with care!
It is sometimes useful to model more than one structure in a single job, however this is
not recommended if you are performing a buckling analysis to obtain compression effective
lengths. The buckling analysis finds the lowest buckling load factor for the entire model and
then calculates the effective lengths for all the members in the model based on that buckling
load factor. For example, if you have modelled structure A and structure B in one job, and
structure A has the lowest buckling load factor, the effective lengths for structure B will be
incorrectly based on the buckling load factor from structure A. SPACE GASS can't detect if
there are multiple structures in a single model and therefore you need to put them into
separate jobs if you want to use effective lengths from a buckling analysis.
If the compression effective lengths are calculated from a buckling analysis, they are
always taken from the first buckling mode regardless of how many buckling modes were
calculated.
During the design phase, the compression effective lengths as calculated or defined by
you may be adjusted depending on parameters you specify at the start of the design phase.
For more information about this, refer to Running a steel member design.
For single angle sections, the compression effective lengths must be input relative to
the non-principal axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD, AISC-ASD,
HK CP2011, EUROCODE 3 and IS800, they are optionally converted to the principal axes
during the design/check phase. To prevent this conversion, refer to Running a steel member
design.
In order to cater for all design code naming conventions, the compression effective
lengths are referred to as "Lc major" and "Lc minor" in this document and in the data entry
parts of the program. However, in the design output reports, they are changed to match the
notation of the design code that was used.
See also Buckling effective lengths.
Bending effective lengths (Lb +ve and ve)
Bending effective lengths for positive moments (Lb +ve) and for negative moments (Lb ve)
are normally calculated based on the flange restraints that you specify, however you can elect
to input them directly if you prefer. To have them calculated, select the "Calculate from
Flange Restraints" check box.
During the design, if you have elected to have the bending effective length calculated, it is
taken as the length of the segment under consideration multiplied by three additional factors
550
Steel Member Design

kt twist factor), kl (load height factor) and kr (lateral rotation factor) such that Lb = Lseg x kt
x kl x kr.
Alternatively, if you have specified the bending effective length directly then the specified
value is used without modification.
kt, kl and kr are fully explained in AS4100/NZS3404 clause 5.6.3. In AS1250, SABS0162,
BS5950, AS3990, HK CP2011 and EUROCODE 3 there are no kt kl and kr factors and so
SPACE GASS uses the rules of AS1250 clause 5.9, SABS0162 clause 7.2.3, BS5950 clause
4.3.5, AS3990 clause 5.9, HK CP2011 clause 8.3.4 or EUROCODE 3 clause F.1.2 to
calculate equivalent kt, kl and kr factors which, when multiplied together, produce an overall
effective length factor kb.
Because the steel member design module can't detect if the member being designed is a
cantilever or not, it is recommended that for cantilevers (for which the critical flange may be
the tension flange) you check that the calculated bending effective length is correct and, if
not, specify it manually.
S
In order to cater for all design code naming conventions, the bending effective length
is referred to as "Lb" in this document and in the data entry parts of the program. However, in
the design output reports, it is changed to match the notation of the design code that was used.
ee also Twist factor.
See also Load height factor.
See also Lateral rotation factor.
Indian seismic checks (IS800 chapter 12)
Seismic checks for IS800 were added in SPACE GASS 12.27.368. In order to activate these
checks for a particular steel member you must specify its seismic classification as an ordinary
concentrically braced frame (OCBF), special concentrically braced frame (SCBF), ordinary
moment frame (OMF) or special moment frame (SMF), and member type as beam, column,
brace or non-specific. The following IS800 code clauses are checked:
Clause 12.3 and table 23 - All member types.
Clause 12.2.3 - Columns.
Clause 12.5.1 - Columns.
Clause 12.5.1.1 - Columns.
Clause 12.7.1.1 - All member types.
Clause 12.7.2.1 - Braces.
Clause 12.8.4.1 - Columns.
Clause 12.11.1 (steel grade check only) - All member types.
551
For a "Non-seismic" member classification, none of the above checks are performed. For a
"Non-specific" member type (with OCBF, SCBF, OMF or SMF classification), only the "All
member types" checks are performed.
The checks for "E250B steel of IS2062 only" in clauses 12.8.2.1 and 12.11.1 simply look for a
yield stress of between 230MPa and 250MPa and an ultimate stress of 410MPa. Because
these yield and ultimate stress properties apply equally to E250A, E205B and E250C steel,
and because SPACE GASS can't detect the difference between them, it is up to the user to
ensure that E250A and E250C steel is not used when clauses 12.8.2.1 or 12.11.1 apply.
It is up to the user to create the load combinations in clause 12.2.3 and include them in the
list of load cases to be considered in the design/check. The IS800 module will identify the
clause 12.2.3 load combinations SOLELY by the presence of a multiplying factor of 2.5 and
will use those load combinations for columns ONLY if clause 12.5.1 is satisfied.
Any load combinations containing a multiplying factor of 2.5 will only be used if they are
included in the list of load cases to be considered, seismic checks are activated, and clause
12.5.1 for columns is satisfied. Furthermore, only their axial forces will be considered.
New Zealand seismic checks (NZS3404 chapter 12)

Seismic checks for NZS3404 were added in SPACE GASS 12.20.205. In order to activate
these checks for a particular steel member you must specify its seismic classification as
category 1, 2, 3 or 4, and member type as beam, column, brace or non-specific. The following
NZS3404 code clauses are checked:
Table 12.4 (items 1 and 3) - All member types.
Clause 12.5.2 - All member types.
Table 12.5 - All member types.
Clause 12.7.2.1 - Beams.
Clause 12.8.3.1(a) - Columns and braces.
Clause 12.8.3.1(b) - Columns.
Clause 12.8.3.1(c) - Columns and braces.
Clause 12.10.3.1 - Beams.
For a "Non-seismic" member classification, none of the above checks are performed. For a
"Non-specific" member type (with category 1-4 classification), all of the above checks are
performed.
Note that the item 1 check in NZS3404 Table 12.4 uses the actual yield stress rather than the
12 < t <= 20 mm grade reference yield stress.
Flange restraints
Flange restraint positions are referenced from the end of the first member in a design group.
SPACE GASS assumes that there is a restraint at each end of a group and you should
therefore specify the intermediate restraint positions only.
Restraint positions should be specified independently for the top and bottom flanges. Up to
100 intermediate positions can be specified for each flange. If there are no intermediate
restraints for a particular flange then the restraint positions field should be left blank.
552
Steel Member Design

When specifying restraint positions, you can use @s to specify relative positions or groups of
equally spaced positions. For example, restraint positions of 1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4
could be specified as 5@1.2,4@0.6, or positions of 1.2,1.8,2.7,3.3 could be specified as
1.2,1@0.6,2.7,1@0.6.
Depending on the "Units" selected, the restraint positions may be expressed as an absolute
distance or as a ratio of the total group length.
Flange restraint types must be specified for each intermediate restraint position and for the
two ends of the design group. Refer to "Flange restraints" for restraint definitions.
Choices are:
Full (F)
Partial (P)
Lateral (L)
Full and rotational (R)
Partial and rotational (S)
Unrestrained at end (U)
Continuous lateral restraint (C)
Ignore segment (I)
The top flange of a member is the flange on the positive local y-axis (or z-axis if the
section has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a group as a whole is defined
such that it is the same as the top flange of the first member in the group.
You can verify graphically which is the top flange by clicking the
button near the bottom
of the side toolbar. It displays a small triangle that points to the top flange of each member.
For single angle sections, flange restraints must be input relative to the non-principal
axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISC-ASD, they are
converted to the principal axes during the design/check phase.
See also Flange restraints.
See also Effective flange restraints.
Consider eccentric effects
For members that have eccentric end connections, you can elect to consider or ignore the
resulting eccentric moments. Eccentric moments are only added if they increase the normal
design moments.
Note that even if you select this check box, you can disable eccentric effects globally by
deselecting the eccentric effects check box in the steel member design/check form.
Maximum bolts in cross section
In order to calculate the effective web and flange areas, and subsequent member capacities,
the presence of bolt holes at the member ends must be taken into account. SPACE GASS
requires you to estimate the number and diameter of bolts per cross section at the ends of each
member to be designed or checked. A bolt count of zero indicates that the member end is
welded.
During the design, SPACE GASS checks to see that the bolts per cross section specified can
be fitted into the cross section. If not, the number is reduced to the maximum that can be
553

accommodated. If the member is too small to take even a single bolt then the connection is
assumed to be welded.
Bolt diameter
End connection bolt diameter.
Angle type
In order to define the geometry of single or double angle sections, SPACE GASS requires the
angle section type to be input.
Choices are:
Single angle,
Double angle with short legs connected,
Double angle with long legs connected,
Double angle starred (equal angles only).
Double angle sections are assumed to have no space between the individual angle
sections.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules assume that double angles are connected
together at intermediate points sufficient to ensure that half of the design axial compressive
force for the combined section does not exceed the compressive capacity of each angle
section considered individually using an effective length (for buckling of the sections away
from each other) equal to the distance between connection points.
The AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100, NZS3404, BS5950 and HK CP2011 modules
convert double angle sections into the equivalent Tee section and then treat them as a solid
Tee shape. They do not support double starred angles.
554
Steel Member Design

Angle section orientation
All of the possible arrangements involving single and double angles are shown in the
diagrams above. It is important to note that the major axis of a single or double angle section
is assumed to be parallel to the short leg(s) of the section as shown in the diagrams.
For double equal angles, the long leg is assumed to be the vertical leg in the
diagrams above. Note that in SPACE GASS 10 and earlier, double equal angle
sections with long legs connected were adjusted internally and treated as though
their short legs were connected. This adjustment was removed in SPACE GASS 11
and later versions.
The design procedure for angle sections is considerably more complicated than for most other
sections. This is due to the significant moments generated by eccentric end connections which
cannot usually be avoided when working with angles. SPACE GASS is capable of taking
these effects into account for both single and double angle sections.
When designing/checking single or double angle sections for AS1250, SABS0162 or

AS3990, SPACE GASS considers only axial forces and shears. Normal bending moments are
not considered. The only moments considered are those due to the eccentric end connections.
This is not the case with the other design modules. They consider all axial forces, shears and
moments together with any extra eccentric moments (if appropriate).
Furthermore, for single angle sections, the effective lengths and flange restraints must be
input relative to the non-principal axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISCLRFD and AISC-ASD, they are converted to the principal axes during the design/check
phase.
End connection
For non-symmetric members subjected to axial loads, such as angle sections, channels and
Tees, the program needs to know which leg, flange or web is connected so that the extra
moments due to possible eccentric end connections can be calculated (if appropriate).
Choices are:
Concentric,
Flange(s) (for I, H, T or channel sections),
Web (for channel or T sections),
Angle short leg,
Angle long leg (vertical leg for equal angles before being
flipped or a direction angle, direction node or direction axis
applied).
Design criteria
Most designs aim to minimize the structure weight, however if you are constrained to a
certain member depth then you can elect to minimize the member depth instead.
Choices are:
Weight,
Depth.
Use Previous button

Click the "Use Previous" button to set all the data in the form to the same as when the form
was previously used.
555
See also Steel member input methods.

See also Steel member design text.
See also Running a steel member design.
556
Steel Member Design
Steel member design sign conventions

The steel member design module deals only with the member cross section axes. The
longitudinal axis of the member is of no relevance.
For most section types, steel member design input and output data always relates to the major
and minor principal cross section axes. The only exception is for single angle sections where
the effective lengths and flange restraints must be input relative to the non-principal axes
(the axes parallel to the angle legs) for all design codes.
During the design phase, the data for single angle sections is converted to the principal axes
for AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISC-ASD. Output reports for
those codes also show the data in principal axes for single angle sections.
See also Column and beam Tees.
557
Member groups
In a typical structure, the actual beams, columns, struts, ties, etc. are modelled in SPACE
GASS as members connected together at nodes. Sometimes, however it is convenient and
often necessary for members to have nodes placed at intermediate positions along them so
that they are subdivided into smaller members. This can occur when another member
intersects a member at an intermediate point or when a node is simply placed at an
intermediate point so that deflections, forces and moments are calculated at that point during
the analysis.
Quite often the placement of intermediate nodes along a member is done purely for frame
analysis modelling purposes rather than due to an actual discontinuity or connection in the
real structure. For this reason, SPACE GASS allows you to group frame analysis members
together and design them as though they are a single entity (as they are in the real structure).
In the remainder of this manual a "design group" represents an actual member in the real
structure which consists of one or more frame analysis members grouped together end-to-end.
Note that in the following discussion, members in a group can be listed in either
direction. For example, "1,3,8,5" and "5,8,3,1" are both suitable. The direction can, however
affect the definition of the top flange (see also Flange restraints).
Consider, for example, a simply supported beam with a node at each end which is subjected to
an axial compressive force and a uniformly distributed dead load. When analysed, the
deflected shape and bending moment distribution along its length is calculated by SPACE
GASS. If the structural adequacy of this member is then checked against one of the design
codes, various factors are calculated based on the deflected shape and the bending moment
distribution. These factors are then used in the calculations to determine if the member is
adequate or not.
If the same beam is modelled with a third node at midspan, you would still get the same
deflected shape and bending moment distribution, however unless you were able to group the
two halves of the beam together and design them as though they were a single member you
would get a completely different design result. This is because the factors and the combined
actions moments and axial forces would be based on the deflection and moment distributions
for only half of the beam rather than its full length.
If a member has been subdivided into smaller members in the analysis model, it is
important that these sub-members are grouped together in the design model.
The rules for deciding whether or not a run of frame analysis members should be grouped into
a design group are as follows.
1.
Each member in a design group must be rigidly connected to each other end-to-end, they must
lie generally in a straight line, and they must have the same section properties.
2.
The length of a design group should not be less than the major axis span.
3.
A design group must be long enough to include all of the flange restraints that affect its
bending effective lengths. Furthermore, under no circumstances should the design group
558
Steel Member Design

length be less than the unrestrained lengths of the top and bottom flanges. This rule is not
applicable if the bending effective lengths are specified directly rather than being calculated.
4.
Each end of a design group should coincide with the physical end of a member or a significant
change in direction of a member, or a support point for a member. It shouldnt normally
extend past a support or past an intersecting member that effectively acts as a support.
"Support" refers to a support for the major axis span.
If it is not possible for all of the above rules to be satisfied then you should not use
SPACE GASS to design the steel members involved.
Consider the following examples, indicating how members in typical frames can be grouped
together.
Member grouping for gable portal
Group 1:
Group 2:
Group 3:
Group 4:
1,2
3,4,5
6
7,8
Member grouping for flat portal
Group 1:
Group 2:
Group 3:
1,2
3,4,5,6
7,8
559
Member grouping for truss
Group 1:
2,6,10,14,18,22
Group 2:
4,8,12,16,20,24
Group 3:
1
Group 4:
3
(Some of the non-critical members have not been grouped)
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The above grouping assumes that local bending of the chords between panel points is
insignificant compared with overall bending between the end supports (ie. the panel points
are not really acting as support points for the chords). If the chords were effectively
spanning L/6 instead of L then the chord members could not be grouped.
Member grouping for multi-storey frame
Group 1:
Group 2:
Group 3:
Group 4:
Group 5:
Group n:
etc...
560
1
2
3
4
5
n
Steel Member Design

No grouping of multiple members can occur in this case because each member acts as a single
span. The horizontal beams act as supports for the columns at each floor and the columns act
as supports for the beams.
Note that, if there was no significant axial forces in the beams such that they were not acting
as supports for the columns then the columns could be grouped into one design group from
bottom to top. This would not, however be a common situation.
Member grouping for continuous beam
Group 1:
Group 2:
1,2,3,4
5,6
561
Flange restraints
Flange restraints must be specified for both top and bottom
flanges at each end of a design group and at each
intermediate restraint position.
Because the positions of the start and finish flange restraints is known, only the intermediate
restraint positions should be specified. However, the end and intermediate restraint types
should be specified.
The top flange of a member is the flange on the positive local y-axis (or z-axis if the section
has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a group as a whole is defined such
that it is the same as the top flange of the first member in the group.
You can verify graphically which is the top flange by clicking the
button near the
bottom of the side toolbar. It displays a small triangle that points to the top flange of each
member.
There are two classes of restraint types; those that occur at a discrete point and those that
occur over a continuous length of flange between two point restraints. The number of point
restraint types should exactly match the number of restraint positions.
When @ multipliers are used in the restraint positions lists, the corresponding restraint types
must have only one character for each @ multiplier. For example, restraint positions of
1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4 with corresponding restraint types of LLLLLPPPP could
be specified as 5@1.2,4@0.6 and LP. If the restraint types were LLPLLPPPP, however then
they would have to be specified as 2@1.2,3.6,2@1.2,4@0.6 and LPLP.
SPACE GASS accepts six point flange restraint types and two continuous flange restraint
types. They are defined as follows. Note that these definitions are slightly different to the ones
in the design codes because the code definitions apply to the cross section rather than to each
flange. The cross section restraints are determined from the flange restraints during the
design or check phase.
Full restraint (F)
Prevents lateral deflection of the flange

to which it is applied and fully prevents
twist rotation of the section.
Partial restraint (P)

to which it is applied and partially
prevents twist rotation of the section.
Lateral restraint (L)

to which it is applied but is ineffective
in preventing twist rotation of the
section. A lateral restraint can only be
considered to be effective when it is
positioned between full or partial
restraints.
Full & rotational restraint (R)
The same as full restraint above but

also with significant restraint against
lateral rotation of the flange about the
562
Steel Member Design

cross sections minor axis.
Partial & rotational restraint (S)
The same as partial restraint above but

also with significant restraint against
lateral rotation of the flange about the
cross sections minor axis.
Unrestrained (U)
There is no resistance to lateral

deflection of the flange to which it is
applied or twist rotation of the section.
This can only be used at the end of a
design group.
An "unrestrained" end does not necessarily imply a cantilever. Flange restraints are
independent of the member support system. Cantilevers or beams with supported ends could
be restrained or unrestrained.
The following flange restraint types do not occur at a point but are continuous between two
adjacent point flange restraints.
Continuous lateral restraint (C)
Prevents lateral deflection of the flange to

which it is applied but is ineffective in
preventing twist rotation of the section. A
continuous lateral restraint can only be
considered to be effective when it is
positioned between full or partial
restraints.
Ignore segment (I)
This is not really a flange restraint, rather

it instructs SPACE GASS to skip past the
ignored segment length when designing or
checking. It can be used very conveniently
to ignore the very rigid area where
intersecting members connect so that
members are designed from the face of
intersecting members rather than from
their centrelines. It is also very handy for
when a member is stiffened over part of its
length and is not required to be designed
over that portion.
The above definitions allow for full, partial, lateral or no restraint against twist of the cross
section (about its longitudinal axis) (F,P,L,C or U). They also allow for full or no restraint
against lateral rotation of the critical flange (about the minor cross section axis) in the
presence of full or partial twist restraint (R or S). An extra restraint condition which is catered
for in AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, AS3990 and HK CP2011 only, that provides partial
restraint against lateral rotation of the critical flange is not supported by SPACE GASS.
For single angle sections, it is unclear whether or not lateral restraints applied to
either leg are effective in providing any restraint to the section. Consequently, you should
be very careful when applying lateral restraints to single angle sections and you should use
563

them only if you are sure they are effective in restraining the section. SPACE GASS will
apply them if you specify them and so the decision about whether or not they should be
used is entirely up to you.
Note that the design/check calculations are based on the effective cross section restraint
rather than the restraint on a particular flange. The effective cross section restraint
depends on which flange is the critical one and on what flange restraints are applied to the
critical and the non-critical flanges. Refer to "Effective flange restraints" for more
information.
The following diagrams are a collection of some fairly typical support and fly brace
connection details. The type of restraint that applies to each flange is shown as either "full",
"partial", "lateral" or "unrestrained". Note that the diagrams apply regardless of whether or
not rotational restraints also exists. The terms "full" or "partial" could also read "full and
rotational" or "partial and rotational" in each of the diagrams.
564
Steel Member Design
Flange restraint types
Consider, for example, the portal frame below. The roof bracing system laterally braces each
rafter at the eaves and apex. Purlins are positioned at ninth points along each rafter and fly
braces are attached to each third purlin at rafter third points. Girts are positioned at the midheight of each column.
565
Portal frame flange restraints
We will assume that the roof sheeting has enough rigidity to allow the purlins to prevent
lateral deflection of the rafter top flange. Note that if the roof sheeting has insufficient rigidity
to prevent lateral deflection then the fly braces will not be capable of providing any restraint
to the bottom flange and will thus be totally ineffective.
The frame could be set up with four design groups, each containing the following members.
Group 1:
Group 3:
Group 6:
Group 7:
1,2
3,4,5
6
7,8
When determining flange restraint positions and types, we will assume that the footing, eave
and apex connections provide F (full) restraint to both flanges of each member framing into
them.
There is no fly bracing attached to the wall girts and they provide lateral restraint only to the
outside flange of the columns. Thus, groups 1 and 7 have top flange restraints of F (full) at
each end and L (lateral) at mid height, and bottom flange restraints of F (full) at each end
only. If there had been fly bracing to the girts then there would also be a bottom flange mid
height restraint of L (lateral). Note that the top flange for groups 1 and 7 is the outside flange
because the local y-axis for members 1, 2, 7 and 8 points towards the outside of the frame.
566
Steel Member Design

Similarly, groups 3 and 6 have top flange restraints of F (full) at each end and L (lateral) at
each purlin, and bottom flange restraints of F (full) at each end and L (lateral) at each fly
brace location. Thus, the restraint arrangements for the frame are:
Groups 1 and 7: FLF
FF
Groups 3 and 6: FLLLLLLLLF
FLLF
(Outside flange)
(Inside flange)
(Top flange)
(Bottom flange)
Note that by applying L (lateral) restraints to both flanges at each fly brace location we are
assuming that the purlins are flexurally stiff enough to fully prevent twist rotation of the
rafter. If they can only partially prevent twist rotation of the rafter then the group 3 and 6
restraints would become FLLPLLPLLF on the top flange and FF on the bottom flange.
Restraint Forces
The brace, purlin, girt or other member that provides full, partial or lateral restraint to the
critical flange of a member must be capable of resisting the force required to provide such
restraint. This is not automatically allowed for in the analysis or design. If you wish to take
this into account then you should add the restraint forces to your applied loads. The restraint
forces are code specific and you should refer to the appropriate clauses for the design code
you are using.
This effect is particularly important for deep beams where the forces required to restrain
the critical flange can be quite high. You should check that your model is capable of
withstanding these forces.
567
Column and beam Tees

Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are therefore assumed to be lying on
their side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping). They are
orientated at right angles to normal beam Tees which have the major axis parallel to the
flange.
Tee section orientation
Note that although beam Tees are supported by all of the steel member design modules, only
the AS4100, NZS3404, AISC-ASD, AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, HK CP2011 and BS5950
modules support column Tees.
See also Steel member design sign conventions.
568
Steel Member Design
Running a steel member design

You can run a steel member design or check by selecting one of the "Steel Member
Design/Check" items from the Design menu.
Limit state codes such as AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100, NZS3404, BS5950 and
HK CP2011 require second order effects to be taken into account by either performing a
first order (linear) elastic analysis with moment magnification or a second order (nonlinear) elastic analysis with no moment magnification. Because a non-linear analysis is
generally more efficient and accurate than moment magnification, and because SPACE
GASS has no facilities for moment magnification, it is recommended that a non-linear
analysis be used at all times for these codes.
Design / Check mode
You can select between design mode or check mode as follows.
1. Design mode
Works its way up from the smallest library section that conforms with the specified
library scan code until it finds a section that passes the code requirements for the
design group being designed.
2. Check mode
Just checks the section from the analysis data for the design group being checked.
Note that SPACE GASS can now do a steel member check using sections that haven't
been imported from a library, however you must have specified their steel design
properties via the Shape builder.
Member groups list
If you want to consider all design groups (for which steel member design data has been input)
then this field can be left blank, otherwise you should type in a subset of design groups
(separated by commas or dashes).
569
Section properties list

If you want to consider all design groups (or a subset as specified above), regardless of
section type, leave this field blank. Otherwise, type in a list of section property numbers
(separated by commas or dashes) to limit the number of design groups.
For example, if the columns in a frame all have section property number 3, you could instruct
the program to design only the columns by entering "3" in the section properties list.
Alternatively, you could type in all of the groups containing columns in the member groups
list above, however this would be much more cumbersome.
Load cases list
If you want to consider all load cases then this field can be left blank, otherwise you should
type in a list of incorporating the load cases (separated by commas or dashes) that you want
considered.
Default section library
During the frame analysis section property input phase, sections that are read from a library
have the library name stored with their section property data. Sections that have not been read
from a library do not have a library name stored with their data.
For members with analysis section properties that were read from a library, the steel member
design module uses that library to get information about the strength grade, properties, cross
section shape, etc. of the member.
For members with analysis section properties that were not read from a library, the design
module uses the default section library to get its information.
Intermediate stations per member
During the design process, each analysis member in a design group is subdivided into small
increments using intermediate member stations. You must define the number of equally
spaced intermediate stations that are to be positioned along each analysis member.
SPACE GASS automatically adds an extra station at each end of an analysis member, at each
point of application of a concentrated member load, at each flange restraint position, and at
the quarter points between flange restraints. If a design group consists of more than one
analysis member then the member stations are simply added together to give a total number of
stations for the design group as a whole.
The member stations are the points at which deflections, forces and moments are calculated.
They are also the points at which code checks are carried out. It is therefore important that
there are enough stations located along the design group to give a good representation of the
deflected shape, bending moment diagram and shear force diagram so that the design results
are accurate.
9 intermediate stations for each analysis member is normally quite accurate, however this can
be increased to 75 if required. Note that the speed of the design process is approximately
proportional to the number of stations per design group.
Compression effective length ratio limit
Because the compression effective lengths from a buckling analysis can sometimes be
overestimated, you can specify an upper limit that will be imposed during the design phase.
570
Steel Member Design

Compression effective lengths from a buckling analysis are limited to Ratio x GLen, where
Ratio is the compression effective length ratio limit that you specify and GLen is the overall
design group length.
Note that this limit applies only to compression effective lengths from a buckling analysis and
not to those specified directly.
Load factor limit or Combined stress ratio limit
Firstly, the terms "load factor" and "combined stress ratio" are defined as follows.
The load factor applies to all limit state codes such as AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3,
AS4100, AS4600, BS5950, NZS3404 and HK CP2011. It is the amount by which the design
actions can be increased before the point of failure is reached.
For example, if the steel design returns a load factor of 1.12, you could theoretically increase
your loads by 12%, repeat the analysis and design, and expect the load factor to reduce to
1.00. This is not always the case however, because the non-linearity of the analysis means that
increasing your loads by 12% does not guarantee that the design actions will also increase by
exactly 12%.
For members designed in accordance with these codes, the load factor must be greater than
1.0. This means that the design actions can be factored up by an amount greater than 1.0
before the member becomes inadequate.
Because the relationship between design actions and design capacity is not linear, the
load factor is not equal to the inverse of the (design actions)/(design capacity) failure
equation at the end of the detailed calculations for each member in the steel design report.
The combined stress ratio applies only to AISC-ASD, AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990. It
is the ratio of the actual stresses to the permissible stresses for the governing combined stress
equation.
For members designed in accordance with AISC-ASD, AS1250, SABS0162 or AS3990, the
combined stress ratio must be less than 1.0. This means that the combined stresses in the
member are less than the combined permissible stresses.
During the design process, if the load factor is slightly less than 1.0 or if the combined stress
ratio is slightly greater than 1.0, the member is deemed to have failed. In a real design
situation however, you may decide to accept members which are very slightly overloaded. In
order to cater for this reality, SPACE GASS allows you to decrease the load factor limit or
increase the combined stress ratio limit so that the design program can accept a small amount
of overload.
Alternatively, you can increase the load factor limit or decrease the combined stress ratio limit
if you wish to design conservatively.
Slenderness ratio limit
This setting affects a simple slenderness ratio check that is only applicable to AISC-ASD,
AISC-LRFD, AS1250, AS3990 and SA0162. The other codes have more sophisticated
slenderness checks built into their standard equations.
571

For the applicable design codes, recommendations for maximum slenderness ratios range
from 180 to 300 for struts, 300 to 350 for ties and 250 to 300 for beams. The maximum values
depend on various factors including whether the predominant load is due to wind or not.
For tension members and members that have zero axial load, there is no slenderness check for
compression effective lengths, however there is a slenderness check for bending effective
lengths. Because of this, you may notice that in some cases the output report shows a value of
l/r (compression) which exceeds the permissible l/r ratio without the member failing.
Interrupted check (check mode only)
If the checking procedure is uninterrupted, then after each member check, the results are
saved and the program moves on to the next member regardless of the outcome of the check.
Using this procedure, it is possible to check a large numbers of members without any operator
intervention.
Alternatively, you can elect to have interrupted checking which causes the program to stop
after each member check, notifying you of the results of the check and allowing you to
manually select other member sizes for checking. If you decide not to try other member sizes,
the program saves the results of the check and moves on to the next member.
Equalizing the design sizes for matching analysis sections
SPACE GASS allows you to specify that all members with the same analysis section property
number should finish up with the same section size in the design results. Note that this only
applies to running the steel member design module in "design" mode. For example, consider a
portal frame with one analysis section for the two columns and another for the two rafters.
When you perform a steel member design (as opposed to a check), you can specify that
because the two columns share the same analysis section property number, their final design
sizes should also match. Similarly, the two rafters can also be kept equal on each side because
they share a single analysis section property number.
If this option is not selected, the design module will design each member independently rather
than matching a single section size to all members that share the same analysis section
property number. For the portal frame example mentioned above, this could results in four
different member sizes rather than two.
Adjustment of minor axis compression effective lengths
Flange restraints capable of preventing lateral buckling of the flanges are sometimes also
capable of preventing lateral buckling of the overall cross section. This depends on the type of
the flange restraint and on the shape of the cross section and, if applicable, means that the
minor compression effective length can be reduced to the length of the segment under
consideration.
This happens regardless of whether the compression effective lengths are calculated from a
buckling analysis or specified directly.
If you select the "Adjust based on flange restraints generally" check box, the minor
compression effective length will be adjusted if:
a. both ends of the segment have full or partial flange restraints; or
b. both ends of the segment have full, partial or lateral flange restraints and the member
is a tube or box section.
If you also select the "Adjust for L restraints on equal flanged I or W shapes" check box then
condition (b) above will also be extended to apply to equal flanged I or W shapes. Note,
572
Steel Member Design

however, that there is some recent doubt as to whether lateral restraints on equal flanged I or
W shapes can restrain the overall cross section laterally and therefore this check box defaults
to off.
Consider eccentric effects
Members such as angles, channels and Tees are sometimes connected at their ends by one
flange or plate only. Depending on the shape of the section and the distance from the point of
connection to the centroid of the section this can induce eccentric moments into the member.
This check box only affects the design groups that have eccentric effects enabled in their
design input data. For design groups that have their individual eccentric effects disabled, this
check box setting has no effect.
See also Eccentric effects for compression members.
See also Eccentric effects for tension members.
Convert single angle compression effective lengths
For single angle sections, the compression effective lengths must be input relative to the nonprincipal axes. These lengths are normally converted to principal axes during the design phase
if required, however you can prevent this by unticking the "Convert single angle compression
effective lengths" option. One reason for this might be that you have already input the
compression effective lengths in principal axes and you don't want them to be converted.
Use Kt factor for tension members
When considering eccentric end connection effects, the extra eccentric moments are usually
calculated and then added to the other bending moments in the member.
For tension members with AS4100/NZS3404, however the code allows you to use the above
approach or simply ignore the extra eccentric moments and apply a correction factor (Kt)
which is based on the cross section shape and the location of the point of connection (see
AS4100/NZS3404 clause 7.3.2). By default the steel member design module defaults to using
the Kt factor because it tends to give a more economical design in most cases, however you
can elect to use the eccentric moments approach instead if you wish.
See also Eccentric effects for tension members.
Other factors
Various other factors can also be defined depending on the design code being used. They
include AISC-ASD and AISC-LRFD U and Cb factors, Eurocode UK and Dutch factors, an
AS4600 appendix F switch and HK CP2011 mLT factors.
The HK CP2011 module also allows you to choose between using clause 8.9.2 or
clause 6.8.3. If you choose clause 8.9.2 then the analysis does not need to include initial
member imperfections or P- effects because they are accounted for in the design phase
(although it may be prudent for you to use both P- and P- effects in the analysis anyway).
Alternatively, if you choose clause 6.8.3 then you must include initial member imperfections
and both P- and P- effects in the analysis.
573

Frame and Member Imperfections
Most design codes require you to include initial frame and member imperfections in the
analysis. The analysis module does not do this automatically and so you must build the
required imperfections into your model.
Frame imperfections can be modelled by applying notional horizontal forces or initial
deflections to nodes. Member imperfections can be modelled by applying initial curvature to
members. These must both be done in accordance with the relevant clauses of the design code
you are using.
When all of the information has been entered, the SPACE GASS steel member design/check
proceeds.
If you want to terminate the process before it is finished, just press ESC or the right mouse
button. If you terminate the process in this way, the results for any groups that have already
been designed or checked are saved.
574
Steel Member Design

The accuracy of any steel member design is dependent on the accuracy of the analysis on
which it was based. A truly accurate design can only be obtained when the design member
sizes agree with those used in the preceding analysis.
SPACE GASS has the ability to iterate the analysis-design process until the results converge.
The design sizes can then be printed out and used in the final computations.
You can access the updating tool by answering "Yes" to the "Do you wish to update the
analysis section properties with the new design member sizes?" question at the end of a steel
member design or by selecting "Update Analysis Member Sizes" from the Design menu.
Note that this tool only works if you have run the steel member design module in design mode
(as opposed to check mode).
After an initial design, you can use this tool to update the analysis section property data based
on the new design member sizes. You can also re-run the analysis and design modules, and
automatically iterate the entire update-analysis-design process until the analysis and design
member sizes match.
If a buckling analysis is included in the iterative procedure, after the update-analysis-design
procedure has finished, if the lowest buckling load factor is less than the value you specify in
the above form, a warning is given. Keep in mind that you may want to adjust the buckling
load factor warning threshold depending on whether you are analysing working loads or
factored loads.
The iterative procedure does not currently include re-running the dynamic analysis
modules. Hence, if your steel member design is based on some dynamic spectral response
analysis results, you must re-run the dynamic analysis manually for each iteration.
575
Serviceability check
The SPACE GASS steel member design module does not consider serviceability
requirements other than slenderness effects during the course of a design or check.
This is because there are numerous ways to limit excessive deflections, many of which
require extensive engineering judgement. The only deflections that can easily be checked for
adequacy by an automatic design program such as SPACE GASS are the local member
deflections that apply to each member individually. It is quite appropriate to check local
member deflections for simple beams and columns, however for sway frames and for
members that have been subdivided into smaller segments, the local member deflections
become meaningless.
Take for example a portal frame building that is found to have excessive lateral sway
deflections. The deflections could be reduced in many ways such as by increasing the size of
the columns, increasing the size of the rafters, introducing a haunch, increasing the size of the
haunch, adding extra roof and end wall bracing or by adding an external restraint such as
brickwork.
The optimum method in controlling deflections is determined often by architectural
constraints, cost constraints, engineering preferences and other constraints that are not
immediately obvious to a design program. Some of these parameters could possibly be built
into SPACE GASS, however the extra data required to be input would make the program very
cumbersome and unwieldy compared to the method recommended in the following paragraph.
In order to satisfy serviceability requirements, it is recommend that the frame first of all be
designed to satisfy strength requirements. This includes the initial design and subsequent
analysis-design iterations (see also Updating analysis member sizes). It is then a simple matter
to obtain a graphical display or printout of the deformed geometry shape and simply observe
whether the frame has excessive deflections or not. If the deflections are excessive, you can
increase member sizes manually or add bracing as required, followed by another analysis and
obtain a revised deformed geometry display. If the deflections are satisfactory it is then a
matter of performing a final code check to ensure that the changes have not caused any
members to become inadequate.
576
Steel Member Design
The steel member design/check process

This section describes in detail the internal procedures and assumptions used as the program
calculates the capacity of a design group and determines whether it is adequate or not.
Because the procedure is very similar for all codes, you can assume that all of the discussion
in this section applies equally to all codes unless specifically stated otherwise.
The steps involved in a design are the same as those for a check except that a design tries
various member sizes until it finds one that is adequate, while a check simply tries a single
member size only and saves the results regardless of whether it is adequate or not. This
process is repeated separately for each design group.
In the remainder of this section, the process of trying a member size for compliance
with one of the steel codes will be referred to as "checking" regardless of whether it is done
as part of a steel member design or a steel member check.
577

The analysis members that make up the design group are assembled together into one
complete design member. The intermediate member stations for each analysis member are
positioned along the design group and then for each flange additional stations are positioned
at the points of flange restraints and at quarter points between adjacent flange restraints.
For each load case being considered, the deflections, forces and moments are calculated at
each station along the entire design group. For single angle sections, they are calculated
relative to the cross section principal axes for AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISCLRFD and AISC-ASD, and relative to the non-principal axes for AS1250, SABS0162,
AS3990, EUROCODE 3 and HK CP2011.
578
Steel Member Design
Design segments
The program begins working its way along the design group until it gets to the end of a
segment. A segment end occurs at the start of the design group, at the end of the design group,
and wherever a full, partial or lateral flange restraint has been applied to the critical flange.
Thus the current design segment is the portion of the design group that extends from the
current critical flange restraint location back to the end of the previous design segment (or
start of the design group).
For each station in the segment, the program does a cross section capacity check using the
forces and moments which occur simultaneously at that point. It also does various member
checks for the segment as a whole using all possible combinations of maximum forces and
moments that occur anywhere in the segment.
579
Section check
A section check simply considers the capacity of a cross section and is not related to effective
lengths or any other conditions that occur away from the cross section. The forces and
moments used are those which occur simultaneously at the cross section.
580
Steel Member Design
Member check
A member check considers the capacity of a member segment. The member check is affected
by the compression and bending effective lengths of the segment and the shape of the
deflection and bending moment diagrams along the segment. The forces and moments used in
a member check are the maximum values taken from anywhere along the segment.
581
Critical flange
The critical flange at any point within a segment is assumed to be the compression flange
unless either end of the segment is laterally unrestrained in which case it is assumed to be the
tension flange.
Because the steel member design module can't detect if the member being designed is a
cantilever or not, it is recommended that for cantilevers (for which the critical flange may be
the tension flange) you check that the calculated bending effective length is correct and, if
not, specify it manually.
SPACE GASS is not able to determine whether a loading condition is predominantly

due to gravity or wind and you should therefore check that the above rule is valid for your
situation.
For more information refer to AS1250 clause 3.3.4.7, AS4100 clause 5.5, SABS0162 clause
7.2.3, BS5950 clause 4.3, NZS3404 clause 5.5, AS3990 clause 3.3.4.7 or HK CP2011 clause
8.3.
582
Steel Member Design
Effective flange restraints

In the following discussion, the "segment length" is the distance between two adjacent cross
sections that are restrained or between a cross section that is restrained and the end of the
design group. A cross section is assumed to be restrained when a full or partial restraint is
applied to either flange or when a lateral restraint is applied to its critical flange.
Member design segments
The design group in the diagram above consists of three analysis members of different
lengths. The group has full or partial restraints at the ends and three equally spaced lateral
restraints on the top flange. For the bending moment diagram shown, the first top flange
lateral restraint is ineffective because the bottom flange is the critical flange at that point.
Thus, the first segment continues past the first top flange restraint to midspan where the top
flange has become the critical one.
When determining the effective restraint at a cross section, SPACE GASS looks at the
restraint applied to the critical flange, however it also looks at the other flange to see if a
restraint has been applied to it and, if so, whether or not it affects the cross section restraint.
Thus, the effective restraint for the cross section can be dependent on the restraint applied to
both flanges.
In the following table, the "critical flange" is as per the critical flange definition, the "other
flange" is the non-critical flange and the "effective restraint" is the cross section restraint that
SPACE GASS uses in the code check.
For restraint type definitions see also Flange restraints. A C (continuous) flange restraint is
assumed to be equivalent to a series of L (lateral) flange restraints spaced at increments of
1mm for the entire length of the continuous restraint.
Restraint on Critical
Flange
None or U
L
P or F
S or R
None or U
None or U
None or U
Restraint on Other Flange Effective

Restraint
None or U
None
None or U
L
None or U
F
None or U
R
L
None
P or F
P
S or R
S
583

L, P or F
S or R
L, P, F, S or R
L, P, F, S or R
F
R
For single angle sections, it is unclear whether or not lateral restraints applied to
either leg are effective in providing any restraint to the section. Consequently, you should
be very careful when applying lateral restraints to single angle sections and you should use
them only if you are sure they are effective in restraining the section. SPACE GASS will
apply them if you specify them and so the decision about whether or not they should be
used is entirely up to you.
584
Steel Member Design
Twist factor
The twist factor kt depends upon the flange restraint conditions and the cross section shape. If
the critical flange switches from top to bottom within the segment, the critical flange
thickness is assumed to be the thickness of the flange at the end of the segment. For AS4100
and NZS3404, kt is calculated from table 5.6.3(1), while for AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950,
HK CP2011, EUROCODE 3 and AS3990 it is taken as 1.0.
585
Load height factor

The load height factor kl relates to the point of application of gravity loads as specified by the
load height position (see also "Load height position" in Steel member design data). It is
always 1.0 if the loads are applied at or below the member's shear centre, however for nonvertical members it can exceed 1.0 if the top of the member is subjected to a downwards load
that causes a destabilizing effect.
If the top of the member is loaded within the segment then kl = 1.2 for all codes, except
AS4100 and NZS3404 where kl = 1.4 if both ends of the segment are fully, partially or
laterally restrained or kl = 2.0 if either end is unrestrained.
If the top of the member is not loaded within the segment but shear force is detected at the
end of a segment that is unrestrained then kl = 1.2 for all codes, except AS4100 and NZS3404
where kl = 2.0.
If you specify the load height position as "Shear centre" then kl=1.0 regardless of the loading
condition.
For vertical members, kl=1.0 regardless of the load height position setting or the loading
condition.
The definition of "top of the member" in the above discussion is the side or flange that
is physically on top (ie. furthest from the ground). This definition is different to "top flange"
used elsewhere in this manual which can actually be on the bottom if you have rotated the
member about its own axis (eg. if the member is upside down).
586
Steel Member Design
Lateral rotation factor

The lateral rotation factor kr is based solely on the flange restraint conditions. Its value for
some codes is given in the following table. The restraint codes given represent the flange
restraints at each end of the segment under consideration. For example, PP represents partial
restraint at both ends, while PF represents partial restraint at one end and full restraint at the
other end.
End
Restraints
RR
SR
FR
PR
LR
UR
SS
FS
PS
LS
US
FF
PF
LF
UF
PP
LP
UP
LL
UU
AS3990/
AS1250
0.70
0.77
0.85
.935
1.00
.935
0.84
.935
1.02
1.00
1.02
1.00
1.10
1.00
1.10
1.20
1.00
1.20
1.00
1.20
AS4100
0.70
0.70
0.85
0.85
1.00
1.00
0.70
0.85
0.85
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
SABS0162
0.70
0.77
0.85
.935
1.00
.935
0.84
.935
1.02
1.00
1.02
1.00
1.10
1.00
1.10
1.20
1.00
1.20
1.00
1.20
NZS3404
0.70
0.70
0.85
0.85
1.00
1.00
0.70
0.85
0.85
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
The values of kr in the table are taken from AS1250 clause 5.9, AS4100 table 5.6.3(3),
SABS0162 clause 7.2.3, BS5950 clause 4.3.5, NZS3404 table 5.6.3(3) and AS3990 clause
5.9.
There are some specific assumptions affecting kr which you should be aware of, as follows:
AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and AS3990 do not give specific rules for
calculating kr for all combinations of flange restraints at the ends of the segment. In such cases
interpolation has been used to calculate some of the values of kr given in the table.
The extra restraint condition in AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and AS3990
which provides partial restraint against lateral rotation (about the cross section minor axis) of
the critical flange is not supported in SPACE GASS.
Because it is difficult for SPACE GASS to determine whether a member is a true cantilever or
not, AS1250 clause 5.9.4, SABS0162 clause 7.2.3(b), BS5950 clause 4.3.5.4/4.3.5.5, HK
CP2011 clause 8..4.3 and AS3990 clause 5.9.4 have not been considered. This may cause the
bending effective length for cantilevers to be underestimated and you should therefore check
the bending effective length for cantilevers calculated by the AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950,
HK CP2011 and AS3990 modules.
587
Before accepting the bending effective length calculated by SPACE GASS, it is

recommended that you verify for yourself that the values of kr given in the previous table are
a suitable interpretation of the code that you are using.
588
Steel Member Design
End moment ratios and other factors

During a member check, various factors are calculated. In most cases, these factors are largely
dependent on the moments at the ends of the segment under consideration. Some of them,
however depend on the values of moments and/or displacements at mid or quarter points
along the segment. It is not always possible to have stations positioned exactly at the mid or
quarter points required because even though stations are positioned at mid and quarter points
between adjacent flange restraints, segments do not always extend between adjacent flange
restraints (particularly when the critical flange changes due to moment reversal). In such
cases, SPACE GASS simply takes the moment and/or displacement values from the station
nearest to the required point.
For the AS4100 and NZS3404 modules, m is calculated using the formula in clause
5.6.1.1(a)(iii) when the segment is restrained at both ends.
If the segment is unrestrained at one end, AS4100 and NZS3404 require the bending moment
diagram to be matched to one of the three diagrams shown in table 5.6.2. This is very difficult
when the bending moment diagram could be any conceivable shape. Therefore, SPACE
GASS uses m = 0.25 if there is a non-zero moment at the unrestrained end, m = 2.25 if the
mid-segment moment is less than 25% of the restrained end moment, m = 1.25 if the midsegment moment is less than 50% of the restrained end moment or otherwise m = 1.0. This is
less conservative than the approach adopted in v12.25.334 and earlier versions.
589
Eccentric effects for compression members

Eccentric end connection effects for angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to axial
compression are normally taken into account by calculating the extra eccentric moments and
then adding them to the normal design moments along the entire length of the design group
(unless they cause a net reduction in the final design moment).
For all codes, the eccentric moments are calculated by multiplying the axial force by the
distance from the centroid of the connected plate to the centroid of the cross section.
Eccentric effects for compression members can be suppressed if required.
590
Steel Member Design
Eccentric effects for tension members

Eccentric end connection effects for angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to axial
tension are taken into account in various ways depending on the design code being used.
For AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990, SPACE GASS simply calculates the extra eccentric
moments and then adds them to the normal design moments along the entire length of the
design group provided that they dont cause a net reduction in the final design moment. This
method is used instead of reducing the effective area of the cross section in accordance with
AS1250 clause 7.3.2, SABS0162 clause 9.2 or AS3990 clause 7.3.2.
The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules also use the above method of calculating and adding
eccentric moments if the Kt method is not used. Alternatively, if the Kt method is used then
Kt is calculated in accordance with AS4100/NZS3404 clause 7.3.2 and used to reduce the
member tensile capacity rather than eccentric moments being added. The Kt method also
applies to I, H or channel sections which are connected by their flanges only. For these
sections, SPACE GASS assumes that the provisions of AS4100/NZS3404 clauses 7.3.2(b)(i)
and (ii) have been met and uses Kt = 0.85.
Eccentric effects for tension members can be suppressed if required.
591
The code check

When all of the member properties, effective lengths, design loads and other factors have
been calculated, they are fed into the appropriate code specific subroutines to determine the
success or failure of the code check.
During this process the subroutines also calculate the load factor or the combined stress ratio
which is then passed back to SPACE GASS along with many other design result parameters.
If the latest check is more critical than any previous checks for the design group then the
results of the latest check are retained as the governing case until another check further along
the design group yields a smaller load factor or a larger combined stress ratio.
After considering every segment in the design group for each design load case, SPACE GASS
saves the data for the governing section and member check cases and moves on to the next
design group.
592
Steel Member Design
Steel member design results

At the end of a steel member design or check, you can produce a full report showing the
results of the design or check.
The pass/fail status of each member can also be shown graphically in a color-coded display as
described in "View steel member design results". Filters can also be created to filter members
in accordance with their pass/fail status as described in "Filters".
You can also query individual members graphically to get an abbreviated report showing the
results of the design or check as described in "Query steel member design results".
Reports for single angle sections are in principal axes for AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404,
AS4600, AISC-LRFD, AISC-ASD and IS800.
If you have performed a design (as opposed to a check), the final design member sizes are
probably slightly different to those in the analysis section property data. So that the design is
based on the same member sizes as the analysis, the new design member sizes should be
transferred back into the analysis and then the analysis and design process iterated until the
analysis and design sizes are the same. This is described in detail in "Updating member sizes".
Member, section and shear checks
For each steel design member in a full report, three lines of information relating to section,
member and shear checks are presented. These represent summaries of the results of the three
main checks that are performed when a steel member is designed or checked.
The section and shear checks are performed at numerous points along each design group.
They consider the capacity of a cross section and are not related to effective lengths or any
other conditions which occur away from the cross section under consideration. The forces and
moments used in a section or shear check are the ones which occur simultaneously at the
cross section. The governing location for the section and shear checks is shown under the
"Start Posn" heading.
The member check is performed for each segment between adjacent points of critical flange
restraint. The member check is affected by the axial and bending effective lengths of the
segment and the shape of the deflection and bending moment diagrams along the segment.
The forces and moments used in a member check are the maximum values taken from
anywhere along the segment. The governing segment for the member check has its start and
finish locations shown under the "Start Posn" and "Finish Posn" headings.
Load factor
The load factor applies only to AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100, AS4600, BS5950,
NZS3404, HK CP2011 and IS800. It is the amount by which the design actions can be
increased before the point of failure is reached.
For example, if the steel design returns a load factor of 1.12, you could theoretically increase
your loads by 12%, repeat the analysis and design, and expect the load factor to reduce to
1.00. This is not always the case however, because the non-linearity of the analysis means that
increasing your loads by 12% does not guarantee that the design actions will also increase by
exactly 12%.
593

For members designed in accordance with these codes, the load factor must be greater than
1.0. This means that the design actions can be factored up by an amount greater than 1.0
before the member becomes inadequate.
Because the relationship between design actions and design capacity is not linear, the
load factor is not equal to the inverse of the (design actions)/(design capacity) failure
equation at the end of the detailed calculations for each member in the steel design report.
Zero variables in reports
You may notice that some variables in the steel member design output report are shown as
zero when it appears that they should have a non-zero value. This occurs because the steel
member design modules only calculate the values that are applicable to the design actions and
section type. Variables which are not applicable for the governing failure mode are not
calculated and hence appear as zero in the output report.
Weighted average load factors (WALF)
A weighted average load factor (WALF) gives an overall indication of the efficiency of the
design for each load case. The WALF for a given load case is calculated by summing the load
factors and masses for each member according to (LF x Mass) / (Mass), where LF is the
load factor for each steel member and Mass is its mass. The WALF should be greater than
1.0, and the closer to 1.0 the more efficient the design. A WALF significantly greater than 1.0
could indicate that many of the steel members are not working to their full capacity.
594
Steel Member Design
Steel member design/check assumptions

This section lists the main assumptions that are made in the steel member design module.
Some of these assumptions are also described in the previous sections of this chapter and
others are listed only in this section. It is up to you to check that these assumptions are
suitable for your situation.
Note that some of the following general assumptions may be overridden by the code specific
items listed in the sections immediately following this one.
1. Frame imperfections are not automatically allowed for during the design phase. When
applicable (usually for multi-storey frames), you should apply notional horizontal
forces or initial deformations to the analysis model in accordance with the
requirements of the design code.
2. The top flange of a member is the flange on the positive local y-axis (or z-axis if the
section has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a member can be
easily determined by displaying the member local axes graphically and observing the
direction of the local y-axis (or z-axis if flipped).
3. The top flange of a group as a whole is defined such that it is the same as the top
flange of the first member in the group.
4. The critical flange at any point within a segment is assumed to be the compression
flange unless either end of the segment is laterally unrestrained in which case it is
assumed to be the tension flange. SPACE GASS is not able to determine whether a
loading condition is predominantly due to gravity or wind and you should therefore
check that the above rule is valid for your situation.
5. All section and member capacities are calculated assuming that stiffeners do not exist.
6. The AS4100, AISC-LRFD, BS5950, EUROCODE 3, HK CP2011 and NZS3404
modules assume that second order effects have been taken into account by a second
order elastic analysis. Moment magnification is not considered.
7. The AS4100, AISC-LRFD, BS5950, EUROCODE 3, HK CP2011 and NZS3404
modules assume that the design load cases are factored (ultimate).
8. For single angle sections, the effective lengths and flange restraints must be input
relative to the non-principal axes. For all other sections, they must be input relative to
the principal axes.
9. The compression effective lengths Lmx and Lmy, used by AS4100 and NZS3404 in
clause 8.4.2.2 for the calculation of Nc when ke=1.0, are assumed to be equal to the
lesser of the total design group length and the normal compression effective lengths
for the segment under consideration. Lmx = MIN(Ltot,Lcmajor) and Lmy =
MIN(Ltot,Lcminor), where Ltot is the total design group length and Lcmajor and
Lcminor are the normal compression effective lengths.
10. The torsion effective length used by AS4100 and NZS3404 is assumed to be equal to
the distance between adjacent full or partial restraints.
11. A C (continuous) flange restraint is assumed to be equivalent to a series of L (lateral)
flange restraints spaced at increments of 1mm for the length of the continuous
595

restraint.
12. If C (continuous) or I (ignore) flange restraints are repeated without R, S, F, P or L
restraints inbetween (eg. CCC, III or CI) then the last C or I restraint is used and the
previous repeated ones are discarded.
13. If an intermediate flange restraint is positioned at the beginning or end of a design
group then it is ignored in favour of the appropriate end flange restraint.
14. Member offsets are automatically ignored (skipped over) during a steel member
design/check provided that they occur at the ends of a design group. They are treated
the same as I (ignore) flange restraints.
15. The extra restraint condition in AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and
AS3990 that provides partial restraint against lateral rotation (about the cross section
minor axis) of the critical flange is not supported.
16. Because it is difficult for SPACE GASS to determine whether a member is a true
cantilever or not, AS1250 clause 5.9.4, SABS0162 clause 7.2.3(b), BS5950 clause
4.3.5.4/4.3.5.5, HK CP2011 clause 8.3.4.3 and AS3990 clause 5.9.4 have not been
considered. This may cause the bending effective length for cantilevers to be
underestimated and you should therefore check the bending effective length for
cantilevers calculated by the AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and AS3990
modules.
17. When calculating kt for AS4100 or NZS3404, if the critical flange switches from top
to bottom within the segment, the critical flange thickness is assumed to be the
thickness of the flange at the end of the segment.
18. When calculating kl, SPACE GASS assumes conservatively that top flange loads
always occur within the segment rather than at the segment end(s).
19. kl is calculated for "downwards" loads regardless of the member orientation and
flange positions. A "downwards" load is assumed to act in the direction from the top
flange to the bottom flange. If you want kl=1.0 for columns, sloping beams or beams
on their side then you should set the load height position to "Shear centre" regardless
of the loaded flange or the load direction.
20. The direction of the transverse load acting on a segment is determined by the sign of
the difference in shear force between the two segment ends.
21. AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and AS3990 do not give specific rules for
calculating kr for all combinations of flange restraints at the ends of the segment. In
such cases interpolation has been used to calculate some of the values of kr.
22. Eccentric end connection effects (if not suppressed) are taken into account in different
ways depending on the design code being used. In most cases, the eccentric end
moments are simply added to the normal design moments for the entire design group.
Exceptions are BS5950 which optionally uses the provisions of clauses 4.6.3
(tension) or 4.7.10 (compression) and AS4100 and NZS3404 which use a Kt factor
for tension members (if activated).
23. Where applicable (see previous item), moments due to eccentric end connection
effects for angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to axial loads are added to the
normal design moments only if they dont cause a net reduction in the final design
596
Steel Member Design

moment.
24. Eccentric end moments are calculated by multiplying the axial force by the distance
from the centroid of the connected plate to the centroid of the cross section.
25. The major axis of a single or double angle section is assumed to be parallel to the
short leg(s) of the section.
26. Double angle sections are assumed to have no space between the individual angle
sections.
27. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules assume that double angles are
connected together at intermediate points sufficient to ensure that half of the design
axial compressive force for the combined section does not exceed the compressive
capacity of each angle section considered individually using an effective length (for
buckling of the sections away from each other) equal to the distance between
connection points.
28. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules consider only axial forces and shears
for single or double angle sections. Bending moments are not considered. Eccentric
end moments are considered where applicable. The AS4100, BS5950, HK CP2011,
EUROCODE 3 and NZS3404 modules consider axial forces, shears (along minor
axis) and bending moments (about both axes) for single or double angle sections.
29. The AS4100, NZS3404, AISC-ASD, AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, BS5950 and HK
CP2011 modules convert double angle sections into the equivalent Tee section and
then treat them as a solid Tee shape. The AS4100, NZS3404 and HK CP2011
modules do not support double starred angles.
30. Beam Tees have the major axis parallel to the flange and are therefore assumed to
have their web vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping).
31. Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are assumed to be lying on
their side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping).
32. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules do not support column Tee sections.
33. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules do not support welded Tee sections unless they
are beam Tees with d/t<15 (lightly welded longitudinally) or d/t<14 (heavily welded
longitudinally).
34. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules assume that heavily welded (longitudinally) I
and H sections with equal flanges are flame cut. Lightly welded (longitudinally) or
unequal flanged I and H sections and all plate web girders are assumed to be welded
"as rolled".
35. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules do not support welded box sections.
36. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules do not support welded circular hollow sections,
channels or angles.
37. The AS4100, BS5950, HK CP2011 and NZS3404 modules assume that channel
sections have equal flanges.
597

38. The AS4100, BS5950, HK CP2011 and NZS3404 modules assume that angle
sections have uniform plate thicknesses throughout the section.
39. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules do not support solid sections.
40. The BS5950 and HK CP2011 modules assume that solid sections are class 1.
41. When calculating the area removed from the section due to a bolted end connection,
SPACE GASS assumes that the bolts are through the web(s) unless the end
connection type is specified as "F", in which case the bolts are assumed to be through
the flange(s).
42. The area removed from the section due to a bolted end connection is assumed to
apply for a distance of 250mm from each end of the design group.
43. The BS5950 module assumes conservatively that single angle sections are connected
with a single fastener for clause 4.7.10.
44. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules perform a web capacity check in accordance
with appendix I. If the check fails, SPACE GASS treats it as a warning rather than a
failure condition.
45. Serviceability requirements are not considered automatically. They must be checked
manually by direct inspection of displacement diagrams.
46. Torsional effects are not considered.
47. Member end bearing capacity is not considered.
48. For the AS4100 and NZS3404 modules, m is calculated using the formula in clause
5.6.1.1(a)(iii) when the segment is restrained at both ends. If the segment is
unrestrained at one end, AS4100 and NZS3404 require the bending moment diagram
to be matched to one of the three diagrams shown in table 5.6.2. This is very difficult
when the bending moment diagram could be any conceivable shape. Therefore,
SPACE GASS uses m = 0.25 if there is a non-zero moment at the unrestrained end,
m = 2.25 if the mid-segment moment is less than 25% of the restrained end moment,
m = 1.25 if the mid-segment moment is less than 50% of the restrained end moment
or otherwise m = 1.0. This is less conservative than the approach adopted in
v12.25.334 and earlier versions..
49. The AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules do not consider shear force in the major
axis direction.
50. If any term in the steel member design failure equation becomes negative, it is
assumed that the section has failed and a value of 9.99 is used in place of the negative
value.
51. The brace, purlin, girt or other member that provides full, partial or lateral restraint to
the critical flange of a member must be capable of resisting the force required to
provide such restraint. This is not automatically allowed for in the analysis or design.
If you wish to take this into account then you should add the restraint forces to your
applied loads. The restraint forces are code specific and you should refer to the
appropriate clauses for the design code you are using.
598
Steel Member Design

This effect is particularly important for deep beams where the forces required to
restrain the critical flange can be quite high. You should check that your model is
capable of withstanding these forces.
599
BS5950-1:2000 code specific items

Sections considered
Incorporates Corrigendum No 1
3 Properties of materials and section properties
3.1 Structural steel
3.1.1 Design Strength
3.1.3 Other properties
3.4 Section properties
3.4.1 Gross cross-section
3.4.2 Net Area
3.4.3 Effective net area
3.4.4 Deductions for bolt holes
3.5 Classification of cross sections
3.5.1 General
3.5.2 Classification
3.5.5 Stress ratios for classification
3.5.6 Effective plastic modulus
3.5.6.1 General
3.5.6.2 I or H sections with equal flanges
3.5.6.3 Rectangular Hollow Sections
3.5.6.4 Circular Hollow Sections
3.6 Slender cross-sections
3.6.1 Effective section properties
3.6.2 Doubly symmetric cross-sections
3.6.2.1 General
3.6.2.2 Effective area
3.6.2.3 Effective modulus when web is fully effective
3.6.2.4 Effective modulus when web is slender
3.6.3 Singly symmetric and unsymmetrical cross-sections
3.6.6 Circular hollow sections
4 Design of structural members
4.1 General
4.1.1 Application
4.1.2 Class of cross section
4.2 Members subject to bending
4.2.1 General
4.2.1.1 General conditions
a, c, d, e
4.2.3 Shear Capacity
4.2.5 Moment Capacity
4.2.5.1 General
4.2.5.2 Low Shear
4.2.5.3 High Shear
4.2.5.5 Bolt holes
4.3 Lateral-torsional buckling
4.3.1 General
4.3.4 Destabilizing load
4.3.6 Resistance to lateral-torsional buckling
4.3.6.1 General
4.3.6.2 I, H, channel and Box sections with equal flanges
4.3.6.3 I-sections and box sections with unequal flanges
600
Steel Member Design

4.3.6.4 Buckling resistance moment
b,c
4.3.6.5 Bending strength pb
4.3.6.6 Equivalent uniform moment factor mLT
4.3.6.7 Equivalent slenderness LT
4.3.6.8 Buckling parameter and torsional index
4.3.6.9 Ratio W
4.3.8 Buckling resistance moment for single angles
4.3.8.1 General
4.3.8.2 Basic method
4.4 Plate Girders
4.4.1 General
4.4.3 Dimensions of webs and flanges
4.4.3.1 General
4.4.3.2 Minimum web thickness for serviceability
a
4.4.3.3 Minimum web thickness to avoid compression flange
buckling
a
4.4.4 Moment Capacity
4.4.4.1 Web not susceptible to shear buckling
4.4.4.2 Web susceptible to shear buckling
4.4.5 Shear buckling resistance
4.4.5.1 General
4.4.5.2 Simplified method
4.6 Tension members
4.6.1 Tension capacity
4.6.2 Members with eccentric connections
4.6.3 Simple tension members
4.6.3.1 Single angle, channel or T-section members
4.7 Compression members
4.7.2 Slenderness
4.7.4 Compression resistance
4.7.5 Compressive strength
4.7.6 Eccentric connections
c
4.7.10 Angle, channel or T-section struts
4.7.10.1 General
4.7.10.2 Single angles
a (welded connection)
c
4.7.10.4 Single channels
b
4.7.10.5 Single T-sections
b
4.8 Members with combined moment and axial force
4.8.1 General
4.8.2 Tension members with moments
4.8.2.1 General
4.8.2.2 Simplified method
4.8.2.3 More exact method
4.8.3 Compression members with moments
4.8.3.1 General
4.8.3.2 Cross section capacity
601

4.8.3.3 Member buckling resistance
4.8.3.3.1 Simplified method
4.8.3.3.2 More exact method for I or H sections with
equal flanges
4.8.3.3.3 More exact method for CHS, RHS, or box
sections with equal flanges
4.8.3.3.4 Equivalent uniform moment factors
4.9 Members with biaxial moments
6 Connections
6.2 Connections using bolts
6.2.3 Effect of bolt holes on the shear capacity
B Lateral-torsional buckling of members subject to bending
B.1 Basic case
B.2 Buckling resistance
B.2.1 Bending strength
B.2.2 Perry factor and Robertson constant
B.2.3 Uniform I,H and channel sections with equal flanges
B.2.4 Uniform I and H sections with unequal flanges
B.2.4.1 Equivalent slenderness
B.2.4.2 Double curvature bending
B.2.6 Box sections (including RHS)
B.2.6.2 Torsion constant for a box section
B.2.6.3 Torsion constant for an RHS
B.2.7 Plates and flats
B.2.8 T-sections
B.2.8.1 Axes
B.2.8.3 Warping constant
B.2.9 Angle sections
B.2.9.1 Axes
B.2.9.2 Equal angles
B.2.9.3 Unequal angles
C Compressive strength
C.1 Strut formula
C.2 Perry factor and Robertson constant
H Web buckling resistance
H.1 Shear buckling strength
H.3 Resistance of a web to combined effects
H.3.1 General
H.3.2 Reduction factor for shear buckling
H.3.3 Sections other than RHS
H.3.3.1 Combined shear, moment and axial compression
H.3.3.2 Combined shear, moment and axial tension
H.3.4 RHS sections
H.3.4.1 Combined shear, moment and axial compression
H.3.4.2 Combined shear, moment and axial tension
I Combined axial compression and bending
I.1 Stocky members
I.2 Reduced plastic moment capacity
602
Steel Member Design

I.2.1 I or H section with equal flanges
I.4 Single angle members
I.4.1 General
I.4.2 Basic method
Assumptions
3.1.1 Design strength py obtained from fy in SPACE GASS library.
A warning, not a failure is given if py exceeds Us/1.2.
py is not adjusted.
3.4.3 The determination of steel grade for calculating the Ke value is based on the SPACE
GASS library fy value, falling between the ranges specified in Table 9.
3.4.4 The bolt hole area is based on the values specified in the SPACE GASS Steel Member
Design data.
3.5 Solid square and solid circle sections are assumed to be a Class 1.
Solid rectangle is assumed to be an I beam with no flange outstands.
I and Box shapes use the "Generally" limits in Tables 11 and 12.
3.5.5 Unequal flanges for box sections use r1 eq 3.5.5b divided by 2.0 to allow for the 2
webs.
Outstands of box girders are not taken into account for the calculation of r1.
3.6.2.4 When used for webs for channels, webs are assumed to be 40t instead of 120t in
accordance with Table 11 and the use of 3.6.3.
4.2.3 Only vertical projection of inclined box girder web considered in shear capacity.
4.2.5.1 A warning, not a failure is given if the 1.2pyZ limit is reached.
4.2.5.2 Alternative for Class 3 sections used.
4.2.5.3 Alternative for Class 3 sections used.
Alternative with regards to reference H.3 for Class 3 and 4 sections not considered.
4.2.5.5 Bolt holes assumed to be distributed equally between top and bottom flange for
flanges and for webs equally distributed between the tension and compression
zone in bending.
4.3.6.7b Channels are loaded through their shear centre.
4.4.4.2c When using H3 and the section has two webs, the web forces are equally shared
between the webs - class 4 flanges - only the effective parts of the flanges are
used for calculation of flange capacity.
4.4.5 Simplified method used with stiffener spacing equal to infinity.
4.4.5.2 When using H1 to determine qw, sections other than I beams are assumed to be
applied in the same way where there are two webs (boxes), the web capacity is
for each web.
4.6 Full section properties used except where explicitly specified Zxeff and Sxeff.
4.6.2 If no eccentric moments are added and the section's connected elements cause
eccentricity then 4.6.3 used.
4.7.2 The 20% increase in slenderness for alternating restraints has not been allowed for.
4.7.5 Reduced py is used for all welded sections.
Table 23 welded angles, channels and Tees are assumed to be rolled but py is reduced as per
4.7.5.
Notes 2 and 3 not allowed for.
4.7.6c If no eccentric moments are added and the section's connected elements cause
eccentricity then 4.7.10 used.
4.7.10.1 The 20% increase in slenderness for alternating restraints has not been allowed for.
4.7.10.2 If there is a bolt area in one flange only then a single bolt hole is assumed, 80%
reduction allowed for.
4.7.10.4 If there is a bolt hole in the web then a single row is assumed.
4.7.10.5 If there is a bolt hole in the flange then a single row is assumed.
4.8.2.3 Only equal flanged I shapes, box shapes and CHS class 1 or 2 use this clause. Other
sections use 4.8.2.2.
4.8.2.2 App I.3 not used for asymmetric sections.
603

4.8.3.2 App I.3 not used for asymmetric sections.
4.8.3.3 App I.1 is used for stocky members.
4.8.3.3.4 mLT is based on the segment length, mx is based on the Group length, my is based
on the segment length, myx is based on the group length
B.2.4 Channels with unequal flanges treated the same as unequal I beams refer 4.3.6.7b.
B.2.9.2 Star angles treated same as single angle but combined properties used.
H.3.1 Strut action and moment amplification not allowed for.
604
Steel Member Design

Sections considered
3 Materials
3.1 Structural Steel
3.1.2 Design strength for normal strength steels
3.1.6 Other properties
6 Design Methods and Analysis
6.8 Second-Order P- Elastic Analysis
6.8.2 Method of Analysis items (1) and (2) only
6.8.3 Applications and Limitations
7 Section Classification
7.1 General
7.2 Classification
7.3 Stress Ratios for Classification
7.5 Effective Plastic Modulus
7.5.1 General
7.5.2 I or H Sections with equal flanges
7.5.3 Rectangular hollow sections
7.5.4 Circular hollow sections
7.6 Effective Width method for slender cross sections
7.8 Shift of the centroid of the effective cross section
8 Design of Structural Members
8.1 General
8.2 Restrained Beams
8.2.1 Shear capacity
8.2.2 Moment capacity
8.2.2.1 Low Shear condition
8.2.2.2 High Shear condition
8.3 Lateral-Torsional buckling of Beams
8.3.3 Normal and destabilising loads
8.3.5 Moment resistance to Lateral-torsional buckling
8.3.5.1 Limiting slenderness
8.3.5.2 Buckling resistance moment
8.3.5.3 Equivalent dlenderness for flexural-torsional buckling
8.4 Plate Girders
8.4.1 Design strength
8.4.2 Minimum web thickness for servicability
8.4.3a Minimum web thickness to avoid compression flange buckling
8.4.4 Moment Capacity of restrained girders
8.4.4.1 Web suspectible to shear buckling
8.4.4.2 Web susceptible to shear buckling
8.4.5 Effects of Axial force
8.4.6 Shear buckling resistance
8.5 Buckling resistance moment for a single angle member
8.6 Tension members
8.6.1 Tension Capacity
8.6.2 Members with eccentric connections
8.6.3 Single and double angle, channel and T sections
8.7 Compression Members
605

8.7.4 Slenderness
8.7.5 Compression resistance
8.7.6 Compressive strength
8.7.7 Eccentric connections
8.8 Tension members under combined axial force and moments
8.9 Compression Members under combined axial force and moments
8.9.1 Cross section capacity
8.9.2 Member buckling resistance
9 Connections
9.3.4.4 Effective area for tension
9.3.4.5 Effective area for shear
Appendix 8.1
Appendix 8.2
Appendix 8.3
Assumptions
3.1.2 Class 1 and 1H steels assumed.
6.8.2(3) Frame and member imperfections are not automatically considered in the analysis,
however if clause 8.9.2 is used instead of clause 6.8.3 then there is no
requirement for member imperfections in the analysis.
1. Mcx and Mcy = Zpy.
7.5.1 I or H sections with unequal flanges Seff = Z as per other sections.
7.6 Same method as BS5950-2000 is adopted to calculate effective section and change in
centroid and properties for slender sections but with HK element limits.
8.2 Beam checked whether fully restrained or not.
8.3.5.2 Mb = Mcx from 8.2.2 if Lateral Torsional Buckling need not be checked.
8.3.5.3 Box sections use this code section.
8.3.5.3 Channels assume that loads pass through shear centre - warning given.
8.4 Webs without intermediate or transverse stiffeners assumed (a = infinity).
8.4.2 Warning given if eq 8.30 not met.
8.4.3 Warning given if eq 8.33 not met.
8.7 No check is done for compressive resistance if clause 6.8.3 is used instead of clause
8.9.2.
8.8 Only eq 8.77 is applied.
8.9.2 If clause 8.9.2 is used instead of clause 6.8.3 then second-order moments are used in
equation 8.79, making it slightly conservative. MLT is max moment in segment,
Mx is max moment in group and My is max moment in segment.
606
Steel Member Design
AISC 360-10 code specific items

Sections considered
B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
B3. Design Basis
1. Required Strength
2. Limit States
3. Design for Strength Using Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
4. Design for Strength Using Allowable Strength Design (ASD)
5. Design for Stability
B4. Member Properties
1. Classification of Sections for Local Buckling
1a. Unstiffened Elements
1b. Stiffened Elements
2. Design Wall Thickness for HSS
3. Gross and Net Area Determination
3a. Gross Area
3b. Net Area
D. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION
D2. Tensile Strength
D3. Effective Net Area
E. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMPRESSION
E1. General Provisions
E2. Effective Length
E3. Flexural Buckling of Members without Slender Elements
E4. Torsional and Flexural-Torsional Buckling of Members Without Slender Elements
E5. Single Angle Compression Members
E7. Members with Slender Elements
1. Slender Unstiffened Elements, Qs
2. Slender Stiffened Elements, Qa
F. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE
F1. General Provisions
F2. Doubly Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent About Their Major
Axis
1. Yielding
2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
F3. Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members With Compact Webs and Noncompact or
Slender Flanges Bent About Their Major Axis
2. Compression Flange Local Buckling
F4. Other I-Shaped Members With Compact or Noncompact Webs Bent About Their Major
Axis
1. Compression Flange Yielding
4. Tension Flange Yielding
F5. Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric I-Shaped Members With Slender Webs Bent
About Their Major Axis
1. Compression Flange Yielding
4. Tension Flange Yielding
F6. I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent About Their Minor Axis
1. Yielding
607

2. Flange Local Buckling
F7. Square and Rectangular HSS and Box-Shaped Members
1. Yielding
2. Flange Local Buckling
3. Web Local Buckling
F8. Round HSS
1. Yielding
2. Local Buckling
F9. Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of Symmetry
1. Yielding
3. Flange Local Buckling of Tees
4. Local Buckling of Tee Stems in Flexural Compression
F10. Single Angles
1. Yielding
3. Leg Local Buckling
F11. Rectangular Bars and Rounds
1. Yielding
F12. Unsymmetrical Shapes
1. Yielding
3. Local Buckling
F13. Proportions of Beams and Girders
1. Strength Reductions for Members With Holes in the Tension Flange
2. Proportioning Limits for I-Shaped Members
G. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR
G1. General Provisions
G2. Members With Unstiffened or Stiffened Webs
1. Shear Strength
2. Transverse Stiffeners
G3. Tension Field Action
1. Limits on the Use of Tension Field Action
2. Shear Strength With Tension Field Action
3. Transverse Stiffeners
G4. Single Angles
G5. Rectangular HSS and Box-Shaped Members
G6. Round HSS
G7. Weak Axis Shear in Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric Shapes
H. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
H1. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Force
1. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Compression
2. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Tension
3. Doubly Symmetric Rolled Compact Members Subject to Single Axis Flexure and
Compression
H2. Unsymmetric and Other Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Force
H3. Members Subject to Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or Axial force
1. Round and Rectangular HSS Subject to Torsion
2. HSS Subject to Combined Torsion, Shear, Flexure and Axial Force
3. Non-HSS Members Subject to Torsion and Combined Stress
H4. Rupture of Flanges With Holes Subject to Tension
Limit state equations used
D. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION
608
Steel Member Design

D2-1 Pg 16.1-26 - section,member
D2-2 Pg 16.1-26 - section,member
E. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMPRESSION
E3-1 Pg 16.1-33 - member
E4-1 Pg 16.1-34 - member
E7-1 Pg 16.1-40 - member
F, DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE
F2-1 Pg 16.1-47 - section, member
F2-2 Pg 16.1-47 - member
F2-3 Pg 16.1-47 - member
F4-2 Pg 16.1-50 - member
F4-3 Pg 16.1-50 - member
F5-2 Pg 16.1-54 - member
F9-4 Pg 16.1-58 - member
F10-2 Pg 16.1-60 - member
F10-3 Pg 16.1-61 - member
F11-2 Pg 16.1-63 - member
F11-3 Pg 16.1-63 - member
G. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR
G2-1 Pg 16.1-67 - section, member, shear
G6-1 Pg 16.1-72 - section, member, shear
H. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
H1-1a Pg 16.1-73 - member
H1-1b Pg 16.1-73 - member
H1-2 Pg 16.1-75 - member
H2-1 Pg 16.1-76 - section, member
609

H3-1
H3-6
H3-8
H4-1
Pg 16.1-77 - section, member

Pg 16.1-79 - section
Assumptions
GENERAL
The root radius for square and rectangular tubes is taken as the inside radius.
Flange bolt holes equally divided between flanges.
Web bolt holes equally divided between webs where applicable.
If the design calculates a high Ultimate Load Factor then a default failure equation (Yield
about xx axis) will be returned.
Warning - If a value has exceeded a limit related to a warning, the value is NOT adjusted to
be within that limit, its actual value is used in the calculation.
Section B4.2 Design Wall Thickness for HSS
This issue comes about due to the practice of some steel manufacturers producing HSS
sections with a wall thickness at the very low end of what the specifications allow.
To account for this, the US section libraries supplied with SPACE GASS 12.27 and later
include adjustments to the HSS section properties (depending on the type of HSS section)
and no extra adjustments are made to their properties during an AISC 360-10 design or
check. In SPACE GASS 12.26 and earlier, the US section libraries contained non-adjusted
properties for HSS sections and so to allow for this their wall thickness was multiplied by
0.93 during an AISC 360-10 design or check.
It is therefore important that you match the version of the US library with the same
version of SPACE GASS, otherwise unsafe designs of HSS sections could result. It is
also important that you don't use HSS sections from SPACE GASS 12.26 and earlier
with other non-US design codes.
Section B4.3b. Net Area
1/16" or 2 mm allowance for hole diameter already assumed to be allowed for in the design
data input.
No allowance for chain holes made.
Chapter D Design of Members for Tension
Pin connected members not checked.
Block shear strength not checked.
Eyebars not checked.
Section D3. Effective Net Area
A number of factors are unknown ie the length of the connection, number of bolts in line
and the type of the weld used. The user has the choice to leave U as 1.0 via the U flag or
turn it on and use the conservative approach as detailed in the Commentary Page 16.1-250
where the net area of the connected elements are used as Ae. A U value is returned to
indicate the reduction from the net area ie U = Ae/An.
Circular, square or rectangular solid sections plus circular tubes use a worst case
assumption of U = 0.75.
Section E5 Single Angle Compression members
Section E5.(a) used - group length used as they are individual members or web members.
Section F
Outstands on box girders treated as tee flanges.
Non double symmetric box girders are not supported by F7, each flange and web is still
checked individually.
No allowance made for loads placed above or below the centroid.
No allowance for cantilevers in calculation of Cb.
Section F10. Single Angles
Bending about principal axis only.
Section F11.1
610
Steel Member Design

Yielding of solid bars, warning issued if slenderness limit exceeded, capacities still
calculated.
Section F13.2 Proportions limits for I shaped members
Warning given if limits exceeded, calculations still done even though limits have been
exceeded.
Section G
No reduction in shear areas for bolt holes.
No web transverse stiffeners assumed.
No shear tension field action is considered (Sect G3).
Solid circle shear done same as CHS with wall thickness equal to radius.
Section G4 Single Angles
Star shapes have double shear capacity of equivalent single angle.
Section G5 Rectangular HSS and Box shaped members
Box sections with different thickness flanges and possibly outstands, the element that
produces the worst Cv value is used as the controlling cv and the sum of all of the
contributing shear elements is used for Aw.
If there is a flange outstand on the box girder these are treated like a T stem kv = 1.2.
Section G7 weak axis shear
If any torsion then equation H3-8 used.
Section H1.3
Applied if section is rolled compact in flexure about major axis (axial class ignored).
611
Eurocode EN 1993-1-1:2005 code specific items

Sections considered
1. General
1.1.2(1) Scope of Part 1.1 of Eurocode 3
1.7 Conventions for member axes
3. Materials
3.2.2(1) Ductility requirements fu/fy
3.2.6(1) Design values of material coefficients
5. Structural analysis
5.5 Classification of cross sections
5.5.1 Basis
5.5.2 Classification
(1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6),(7),(8),(10)
6. Ultimate limit states
6.1 General
(1),(3),(4)
6.2.2 Section properties
6.2.2.1 Gross cross-section
6.2.2.2 Net area
(1),(2),(3)
6.2.2.5 Effective cross-section properties for Class 4 cross-sections
(1),(2),(3),(4)
6.2.3 Tension
(1),(2),(3),(5)
6.2.4 Compression
(1),(2),(3),(4)
6.2.5 Bending moment
(1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6)
6.2.6 Shear
(1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6),(7)
6.2.8 Bending and shear
(1),(2),(3),(5)
6.2.9 Bending and axial force
6.2.9.1 Class 1 and 2 cross-sections
(1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6)
6.2.9.2 Class 3 cross-sections
6.2.9.3 Class 4 cross-sections
(2)
6.2.10 Bending, shear and axial force
(1),(2),(3)
6.3 Buckling resistance of members
6.3.1 Uniform members in compression
6.3.1.1 Buckling resistance
(1),(2),(3),(4)
6.3.1.2 Buckling curves
(1),(2),(4)
6.3.1.3 Slenderness for flexural buckling
(1),(2)
6.3.1.4 Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling
(1),(2),(3)
6.3.2 Uniform members in bending
6.3.2.1 Buckling resistance
(1),(2),(4)
612
Steel Member Design

6.3.2.2 Lateral torsional buckling curves General case
(1),(2),(4)
6.3.2.3 Lateral torsional buckling for rolled sections or equivalent welded sections
(1),(2)
6.3.2.4 Simplified assessment methods for beams with restraints in buildings
(1),(2),(3)
6.3.3 Uniform members in bending and axial compression
(2),(3),(4),(5)
Annex A Method 1: interaction factors kij for interaction formula in 6.3.3(4)
Annex B Method 2: interaction factors kij for interaction formula in 6.3.3(4)
UK National Annex to Eurocode EN 1993-1-1:2005
NA.2.15 Partial safety factors for buildings
NA.2.16 Imperfection factors for lateral torsional buckling
NA.2.17 Lateral torsional buckling for rolled sections or equivalent welded sections
NA.2.18 Modification factor, f
NA.2.19 The slenderness limit lambdac0
NA.2.20 Modification factor, kfl
NA.2.21 Interactions factor kyy,kyz,kzy and kzz
NA3.1 BS EN 1993-1-1:2005, Annex A
NA3.2 BS EN 1993-1-1:2005, Annex B
Eurocode EN 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F: Lateral torsional buckling
Eurocode EN 1993-1-5:2006 Plated structural elements
4 Plate buckling effects due to direct stresses at the ultimate limit state
4.1 General
4.2 Resistance to direct stresses
4.3 Effective cross section
(3),(4)
4.4 Plate elements without longitudinal stiffeners
(1),(2)
5 Resistance to shear
5.1 Basis
(1),(2)
5.2 Design resistance
(1)
5.3 Contribution from the web
(1),(3)a
5.5 Verification
7 Interaction
7.1 Interaction between shear force, bending moment and axial force
(1),(2),(4)
UK National Annex to Eurocode EN 1993-1-5:2005
NA.2.4 Basis
Eurocode EN 1993-1-8:2005 Design of joints
3.10.3 Angles connected by one leg and other unsymmetrically connected members in
tension
(1),(2)
4.13 Angles connected by one leg
(1),(2),(3)
613
Limit state equations used

6.2.3 Tension
(6.5) page 49 section
6.2.4 Compression
6.2.6 Shear
(6.17) page 50 section, shear
6.2.9 Bending and axial force
6.3.1.1 Compression buckling resistance
(6.46) page 56 - member
6.3.2.1 Bending buckling resistance
(6.54) page 60 - member
6.3.3 Uniform members in bending and axial compression
(6.61) page 65 member
(6.62) page 65 member
EN 1993-1-5:2006 5 Resistance to shear
EN 1993-1-5:2006 7.1 Interaction between shear force, bending moment and axial force
Assumptions
Torsion is not considered.
No block or shear lag effects considered.
Hybrid girders not considered.
Webs are unstiffened.
Flange bolt holes equally divided between flanges.
Web bolt holes equally divided between webs where applicable.
If the design calculates a high Ultimate Load Factor then a default failure equation (Yield
about xx axis) will be returned.
3.2.6 G = 80769.231.
6.2.3(5) Tension Channels connected only through the web and tees connected only through
the flange, the effective area is taken as the effective area of the connected element plus half
the area of the outstanding elements.
6.2.6(2) check is done even if there is torsion (torsion is not considered).
6.2.6(5) smallest flange area used.
6.2.9.1(4) I, channel and box shapes considered.
6.2.9.2(1) equation (6.44) used.
6.3.2.2(2) Mcr is calculated using EN 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F, including channel and unequal
angles.
Table A.2 Cmi0 based on member group.
Table B3 the highest Cm value calculated for uniform or concentrated load is used.
Table B.3 Cmy based on member group.
Table B.3 Cmz based on member segment.
Table B.3 CmLT based on member segment.
EN 1993-1-5:2006 5.2 Design resistance to shear No contribution from flanges allowed.
EN 1993-1-8:2005 3.10.3 1 bolt, 1 row assumed.
614
Steel Member Design
AS/NZS 4600:2005 code specific items

Sections considered
AS/NZS 4600:2005 Cold-formed steel structures (incorporating amendment 1)
SECTION 1 SCOPE AND GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE (thickness)
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.5 Bend
1.5 MATERIALS
1.5.1.4 Ductility (fu/fy ratio)
1.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.6.3(a) Design capacity
Table 1.6 (b),(c),(d),(e),(f)
SECTION 2 ELEMENTS
2.1 SECTION PROPERTIES
2.1.1 General
2.1.2 Design procedures
2.1.2.1 Full section properties
2.1.2.2 Effective section properties
(b) local instabilities
2.1.3 Dimensional limits
2.1.3.1 Maximum flat-width-to-thickness ratios
(a)(i),(b),(c)
2.1.3.4 Maximum web depth-to-thickness ratio
(a) unreinforced webs
2.2 EFFECTIVE WIDTHS OF STIFFENED ELEMENTS
2.2.1 Uniformly compressed stiffened elements
2.2.1.1 General
2.2.1.2 Effective width for capacity calculations
(a),(c),(i),(ii)
2.2.1.3 Effective width for deflection calculations
(a) Procedure I
2.2.3 Stiffened elements with stress gradient
2.2.3.1 General
2.3 EFFECTIVE WIDTHS OF UNSTIFFENED ELEMENTS
2.3.1 Uniformly compressed unstiffened elements
2.3.1.1 General
2.3.2 Unstiffened elements and edge stiffeners with stress gradient
2.3.2.1 General
2.4 EFFECTIVE WIDTH OF UNIFORMLY COMPRESSED ELEMENTS WITH AN
EDGE STIFFENER
2.4.1 General
2.4.2 Effective width for capacity calculations
2.4.3 Effective width for deflection calculations
615

SECTION 3 MEMBERS
3.1 GENERAL
3.2 MEMBERS SUBJECT TO AXIAL TENSION
3.2.1 Design for axial tension
3.2.2 Nominal section capacity
3.2.3 Distribution of forces
3.2.3.1 End connections providing uniform force distribution
3.2.3.2 End connections providing non-uniform force distribution
3.3 MEMBERS SUBJECT TO BENDING
3.3.2 Nominal section moment capacity
3.3.2.1 General
3.3.2.2 Based on initiation of yielding
3.3.3 Nominal member moment capacity
3.3.3.1 General
3.3.3.2 Members subject to lateral buckling
3.3.3.2.1 Open section members
3.3.3.2.2 Closed box members
3.3.3.3 Members subject to distortional buckling
3.3.3.4 Beams having one flange through-fastened to sheeting
3.3.4 Shear
3.3.4.1 Shear capacity of webs without holes
3.4 CONCENTRICALLY LOADED COMPRESSION MEMBERS
3.4.1 General
3.4.2 Sections not subject to torsional or flexural-torsional buckling equation 3.4.2(1)
only
3.4.3 Doubly- or singly-symmetric sections subject to torsional or flexural-torsional
buckling
3.4.4 Point-symmetric sections
3.4.5 Non-symmetric sections
3.4.6 Singly-symetric sections subject to distortional buckling
3.4.7 Columns with one flange through-fastened to sheeting
3.6 CYLINDRICAL TUBULAR MEMBERS
3.6.1 General
3.6.2 Bending
3.6.3 Compression
3.6.4 Combined bending and compression
APPENDIX D DISTORTIONAL BUCKLING STRESSES OF GENERAL
CHANNELS, LIPPED CHANNELS AND Z-SECTIONS IN COMPRESSION AND
BENDING
D2 SIMPLE LIPPED CHANNELS IN COMPRESSION
D3 SIMPLE LIPPED CHANNELS OR Z-SECTIONS IN BENDING ABOUT THE AXIS
PERPENDICULAR TO THE WEB
Assumptions
fy and fu are read directly from section properties. No reductions or increases in fy from
Clause 1.5.1.2 - Strength increase resulting from cold forming, or Clause 1.5.1.4(b) Ductility.
Shapes with intermediate stiffeners and stiffened lips are not supported. If they are used then
the resulting design or check will be conservative because the effect of the stiffeners will not
have been taken into account.
Unlipped (plain) Cee flanges are assumed to be an unstiffened element and the web a
stiffened element.
616
Steel Member Design

Webs of top hats that have edge stiffened bottom flanges are assumed to be a stiffened
element (ie. flanges are assumed to provide sufficient edge support to the web to have the web
classified as stiffened).
A ratio of effective section I to gross section I is included in the design report to provide a
deflection factor approximating the increase in gross section deflections at the reported design
load forces and moments. The SPACE GASS analysis deflections are based on gross sections.
Clause 1.3.39 - a single lateral restraint 'L' not combined with any other flange restraint is not
recognised as an effective restraint for a segment as they do not meet the requirements of a
partially retrained cross section for a segment.
Clause 1.3.39 - a continuous lateral restraint 'C' is recognised as a restraint and assumed to
meet the requirements of a partially restrained cross section for a segment.
Clause 2.1.1 - full section properties and yield strengths read directly from section properties.
Clause 2.1.2.1 - actual shape including bends is used to calculate effective section properties.
Clause 2.1.3.1 - failure if elements exceed prescribed ratios, warning given if elements exceed
clause note's ratios.
Clause 2.1.3.3 - shear lag effects not considered. A warning given if group length < 30 *
flange width.
Clause 2.2.1.3 - procedure I used, Procedure II not used.
Clause 3.2.3.1 - it is assumed (a) and (b) are satisfied for concentric end connections.
Clause 3.2.3.2 - for channels connected by flanges only, it is assumed b(i) and b(ii) are
satisfied.
Clause 3.3.3.2.1(b) - Iyc for zeds taken as geometric axis Iy/2.
Clause 3.3.2.3 - section moment capacity based on inelastic reserve capacity NOT considered.
Clause 3.3.3 - unequal angles, equation 3.3.3.2(13) used for bending in x and y axis.
Clause 3.3.3 - Mo is NOT calculated using a rational flexural-torsional buckling analysis.
Clause 3.3.3.3 - only lipped cee, lipped cee back to back and zed sections considered for
distortional buckling .
Clause 3.3.3.2.1(a) - alternative for Z-sections restrained by sheeting against lateral
movement NOT considered.
Clause 3.3.3.4 - only (i),(ii),(iii),(iv),(v),(vii)(vii based on group length) requirements are
checked, assumed other requirements checked by user.
Clause 3.3.4.1 - no shear buckling check on CHS sections.
Clause 3.3.4 - for top hat sections, shear in x axis carried by top flange and horizontal
component of web, shear in y axis carried by vertical component of the web.
Clause 3.4.1 - holes have not been allowed for in the calculation of Ae for Nc.
Clause 3.4.2 - grade 550 shapes less than 0.9mm thickness not supported.
Clause 3.4.2 - clause notes not applied. User to specify effective lengths in steel member
design group properties.
Clause 3.4.3 - alternative equation 3.4.3(2) not considered.
Clause 3.4.3 - equal angles, if no area reduction due to fy, foc based on maximum
compressive length and smallest radius of gyration in either axis.
Clause 3.4.6 - only lipped single or back to back cee considered for axial compression
distortional buckling.
Clause 3.4.6 - Fod calculated using Appendix D2.
Clause 3.4.7 - s = 0.5 (fastener in centre of flange), smallest flange width used for zed
sections.
Clause 3.4.7 - only (i),(ii),(iii),(iv),(v),(vi),(ix),(x based on group length) requirements are
checked, assumed other requirements checked by user.
Clause 3.5 - equations 3.5.1(2) and 3.5.2(2) are included in section checks. Msx and Msy are
used in equation 3.5.1(2)for the section check.
Clause 3.5.1 - equations 3.5.1(1) and 3.5.1(2) are included in member checks, equation
3.5.1(3) is used if N*/phicNc <= 0.15.
Clause 3.5.1 - actual group length used for L in the L/1000 centroid shift for angles.
Clause 3.5.2 - equation 3.5.2(1) is included in member checks only.
617

Clause 3.5.2 - equation 3.5.2(1) the axial tension term is conservatively ignored (N* is always
zero) if axial tension exists.
Clause 3.6.3 - axial compression section capacity for CHS is based on gross area.
Appendix D - for zeds, the widest flange is used determining flange and lip properties.
Appendix D - flange and lip properties represented as square corners and centrelines.
Appendix D3 - no reduction in lambda for any bracing interval.
618
Steel Member Design
IS800 code specific items

Sections considered
IS800 : 2007 - General Construction in Steel - Code of Practice (Third Revision)
SECTION 2 MATERIALS
2.1 General
2.2 Structural Steel
2.2.4 Properties
SECTION 5 LIMIT STATE DESIGN
5.4 Strength
5.4.1 Design strength
5.5 Factors Governing the Ultimate Strength
5.6 Limit State of Serviceability
SECTION 6 DESIGN OF TENSION MEMBERS
6.1 Tension Members
6.2 Design Strength Due to Yielding of Gross Section
6.3 Design Strength Due to Rupture of Critical Section
SECTION 7 DESIGN OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS
7.1 Design Strength
7.3 Design Details
7.3.1 Thickness of Plate Elements
7.3.2 Effective Sectional Area (Ae)
SECTION 8 DESIGN OF MEMBERS SUBJECTED TO BENDING
8.2 Design Strength in Bending (Flexure)
8.4 Shear
8.6 Design of Beams and Plate Girders with Solid Webs
8.6.1.1a and 8.6.1.2a Minimum web thickness when transverse stiffeners are
not provided
8.6.2 Sectional Properties
8.10 Bending in a Non-Principal Plane
8.10.2 Member loaded in a non-principal plane
SECTION 9 MEMBER SUBJECTED TO COMBINED FORCES
9.1 General
9.2 Combined Shear and Bending
9.3 Combined Axial Force and Bending Moment
SECTION 12 DESIGN AND DETAILING FOR EARTHQUAKE LOADS
12.1 General
12.2 Load and Load Combinations
12.5 Columns
12.7 Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames (OCBF)
12.8 Special Concentrically Braced Frames (SCBF)
12.9 Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF)
12.10 Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF)
12.11 Special Moment Frames (SMF)
ANNEX E ELASTIC LATERAL TORSIONAL BUCKLING
E-1 Elastic Critical Moment
619
Steel member design/check errors

SPACE GASS performs numerous checks for illegal and inconsistent data. Many of these
checks are done in the steel member design data input modules and any errors detected there
must be corrected immediately. However, some errors such as faulty member groupings
cannot be detected until the design/check phase.
All of the errors in the following list cause SPACE GASS to abort the design or check of the
current design group and move on to the next group. If an error occurs during a design or an
uninterrupted check, the program continues without alerting you and puts the error message in
the output report. Alternatively, if an error occurs during an interrupted check, the program
pauses to display the message and, if it is a section related error, gives you the opportunity to
manually select other sections to be checked.
Warnings also appear in the output report but they do not cause SPACE GASS to abort the
design or check of the current design group.
This group contains a non-existent or repeated member
One of the analysis members nominated in the design group does not exist or has been
repeated.
Members in this group are not of the same section type
All analysis members in the design group must have the same section property number.
This group does not have a contiguous run of members
All of the analysis members nominated in the design group must be connected together endto-end in the frame analysis model. They must also be listed in the design group in the order
that they are connected (from either end).
A tens/comp-only member in this group is disabled
One of the analysis members in the design group is a tension-only or compression-only
member which has been disabled during the analysis, thus leaving a gap in the group.
A member in this group has buckled
One of the analysis members in the design group has buckled during the analysis, thus leaving
a gap in the group.
Stations per member limit has been exceeded
The stations per analysis member limit has been exceeded or the stations per design group
limit has been exceeded.
There is a limit of 500 stations per analysis member which must be enough for the number of
intermediate member stations that you specify, plus the extra stations at the ends, at
concentrated member loads and at flange restraint points. The solution is to either add a node
at midspan of the analysis member which has too many stations or decrease the number of
stations that you specify at the start of the member design/check phase.
A flange restraint is off the end of the member group
One or more flange restraints have been specified beyond the end of the design group.
Inappropriate group code or shape not supported
The section data from the library has an invalid group code or shape code (see also Section
libraries).
620
Steel Member Design

Starred angles cannot be made up from unequal angles
Starred angles can only be made from equal angle sections.
Starred angles are not supported for this design code
This is a restriction in the AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules.
This section shape not supported for this design code
The selected steel member design module does not support the shape of the section currently
being designed or checked.
Inappropriate end connection code for this section
An end connection code which is inappropriate for the section being considered has been
input. For example, an I or H section can have end codes of "Flange(s)", "Web" or "Centroid",
or a single angle section can have end codes of "Short" or "Long". Note that single angle
sections cannot have end connection codes of "Centroid". If eccentric effects for angles are to
be ignored, they must be disabled at the start of the member design/check phase.
Invalid fabrication code for this section
The section data from the library has an invalid fabrication code (see also Section libraries) or
a rolled section has a fabrication code which shows it to be welded.
Inappropriate section dimensions for this design code
A code specific constraint on section dimensions has not been met. For example, the BS5950
module requires channels to have equal flanges. For dimension constraints, see also Steel
member design/check assumptions.
No suitable section found
The steel member design module has found that all sections from the library which comply
with the library scan code are inadequate.
WARNING: You have suppressed eccentric end connection effects
If eccentric end effects for members which are not connected concentrically have been
disabled at the start of the design/check phase then this warning appears in the output report.
WARNING: Not all load cases considered have been analysed non-linearly
For AS4100 and NZS3404, a warning appears in the output report if any member
design/check load cases have only been analysed linearly.
WARNING: Web is inadequate for combined actions (App I) (Lf=#.##)
For AS4100 and NZS3404, a warning appears in the output report if the web is inadequate. It
suggests that web stiffeners may be required. The web failure load factor is also given.
WARNING: Angle calculations do not consider bending moments. Do a manual check
For AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990, the calculations for angle sections do not consider
bending moments (apart from eccentric end moments). They should be checked manually.
621

The SPACE GASS steel connection design module lets you design or check any of the
connections in a structural model.
Some key features of the module are as follows:
Fully integrated into SPACE GASS.

Design actions obtained directly from the analysis results.
Multiple load cases considered simultaneously.
Design and checking modes available.
Fully rendered 3D images of each connection generated.
Annotated elevations detailing all the connection components.
Connections able to be exported to other programs.
Fully compliant with the 2007 - 2014 ASI Steel Connection Design Guides.
All bolts, welds, plates, cleats, stiffeners and doubler plates designed/checked.
A video showing the steel connection design module in action can be viewed at
www.spacegass.com/connect.
623

Note that if you haven't purchased the steel connection design module, you can still run it in a
free trial mode that limits you to using minimum design actions, and prevents you from
The connection design module is currently limited to open sections, however connections for
closed (tubular) sections are currently under development and are expected to become
available in the second half of 2014.
Refer to "Creating and editing connections", "The connection manager", "Design
considerations", "Connection reports" and "Connection preferences" for full details of the
connection design module.
624
Creating and editing connections

In order to define a steel connection, it is simply a matter of selecting the members to be
connected, clicking the right mouse button and then selecting "Input/Edit Steel Connection"
from the menu that appears or by clicking the button in the top toolbar and then selecting
"Input/Edit Steel Connection".
Note that most connections require two members to be selected, however for base plates,
single member stiff seats and some of the tubular connections, only one member needs to
be selected.
You must then select the type of connection you want from the following table. Connections
that are invalid for the number of members you selected will be disabled in the table.
625
Alternatively, if you wish to make it the same as a connection that has already been created,
you can click the "Copy from Existing Connection" button and then select from a list of the
existing connections.
626
Note that if your model already contains connections, you can see which ones are attached to
a particular member by selecting that member, clicking the right mouse button, choosing
"Steel Connection Design" from the menu and, if the selected member already has
connections they will be displayed in the following table. You can then click "Add New
Connection" to create a new connection for that member or edit one of its existing ones.
Regardless of which of the above methods you used, the connection is then designed (or
checked if you have copied from an existing connection) and the results are presented in the
connection editor shown below.
627
From there, you can examine the connection, click the Ok button to save and exit if you
happy with it, or make changes to customize it to your exact requirements.
Connection viewer
The connection viewer in the right-hand side of the editor gives you a realistic 3D rendered
view of the connection.
You can zoom, pan and rotate the image using the mouse in the normal way.
Or you can click the buttons at the top of the connection viewer to do a "Zoom fit", display
annotated 2D elevations or switch back to the 3D rendered image.
628
629
Input/edit fields
In order to edit the connection, you can change any of the data fields in the left-hand side
panel. Some of the key input fields are as follows:
Connection number
This is the unique identification number of each connection. By default it is set to the node
number at the connection, however if that number is already taken by another connection then
it uses the next available number. You can manually set it to comply with whatever
numbering scheme you prefer.
Design code
Currently only AS4100 is available.
Title
You can specify an optional title that helps you to identify each connection. If you leave it
blank then the connection is referred to by its number and connection type.
Supporting and supported member
These are the members that are connected to each other. When you first create the connection,
SPACE GASS automatically determines which member is the supporting member and which
one is supported, however if you wish to swap them you can do so in this form. You can also
set the strength for each of the members.
Connection type
If you wish to change the connection type to one of a similar category then you can do so with
this field. For example, you could change a bolted end plate to a welded moment connection
or a web side plate to a flexible end plate, however you couldn't change a bolted end plate to a
web side plate because they are in different categories. If you wish to change to a connection
of a different category then you must click the "Change Connection Type" button on the right
side of the editor and then re-select from the table of connection types.
Stiffen web/flange if necessary
Ticking these options means that web or flange stiffeners will be included in a design only if
required. If you untick these options and stiffeners are required then the connection will fail.
Stiffen end plate
If you tick this option then the end plate will always be stiffened and this may result in a
thinner end plate than would otherwise be required.
630

Load cases
If you want to consider all load cases then this field should be left blank, otherwise you
should type in your desired list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes). Alternatively,
you can click the "..." button to the right of the input field and then select the load cases you
want from the list that appears as shown below.
Minimum design actions

In order to ensure that each connection is well proportioned and robust, especially when the
analysis design actions are quite low, the code nominates minimum design actions that should
be complied with. Normally you would leave this option ticked, however you can turn it off if
required.
Note that if you haven't purchased the steel connection design module, you can still run it in a
free trial mode that limits you to using minimum design actions. When running in this mode,
any load cases you type into the "Load cases" field are ignored and you can't turn off the
"Minimum design actions" option.
Haunches, plates, welds, bolts, stiffeners and cleats
The remainder of the input fields involving haunches, plates, bolts, stiffeners and cleats are
connection dependent. You can change any of them to configure a connection to exactly what
you want. Any fields with a
library button give you access to the relevant library for the
type of data being input.
Designing and checking
When you first create a connection, it is automatically designed and the results are presented
in the connection editor. You can either accept it in that state or you can proceed to make
changes and then have it checked.
If you change one of the input fields that could be overwritten by a design, the connection
becomes locked. This is a safety feature that guards against you inadvertently clicking the
"Design" button and losing your changes. If you really want to design the connection after
making changes that lock it then you must first click the padlock button to unlock it.
631
Note that some input fields do not cause the connection to be locked, as they are input fields
only and are not overwritten when you perform a design. Examples of these are bolt strength,
bolting procedure, weld strength, etc.
Locking a connection
If you wish to prevent any further changes to a connection that isn't already locked, you can
lock it by clicking the padlock button. This will stop any of the components of the connection
from being changed if a batch design is performed via the connection manager.
Auto check
If the "Auto check" option is ticked then a check is automatically done as soon as you make a
change to any component of your connection. If it is unticked then no checking is done until
you click the "Check" button.
Status bar
The status bar at the bottom of the editor indicates whether the connection has passed, failed
or passed with a warning. It includes the critical load case, the utilization ratio and a brief
explanation of the failure mode or warning message. A green line indicates it has passed, red
indicates failure and yellow is for a pass with a warning message. All of these colors can be
changed via the "Preferences" button.
Key diagrams
The symbols used in the connection input fields match the ASI design guides, however some
of the commonly used ones are also shown in key diagrams that you can view by clicking the
"Key Diagram" button.
632
Hiding components
If you wish to examine components of the connection that may be difficult to see or partially
obscured, you can turn on or off the members, plates, bolts or welds using the buttons shown
below. They are all on by default.
633
Reset
If you wish to undo all the changes made to a connection (except for its connection number
and title), you can click the "Reset" button. This will put it back to its default state, the same
as if you deleted the connection and then re-created it.
Reports
A single report (including a graphical representation of the connection) for the connection
currently in the editor can be obtained by clicking the "Report" button. Alternatively, you can
generate text reports for multiple connections via the report panel of the connection manager
or via the normal SPACE GASS report generator in the non-renderer window. Refer to
"Connection reports" for more information.
Exporting
You can export the current connection to a CAD system via the "DXF" or "DWG" buttons. It
can then be imported into AutoCAD or any other program that supports those formats.
Preferences
The "Preferences" button lets you change various connection parameters and colors. For more
information refer to "Connection preferences".
634

Infotips
Once you have created some connections, you can hover over a node or member in your
model to see which connections are attached to it.
635
The connection manager

The connection manager is at the heart of the steel connection design module. It presents all
of your connections in a table and lets you scroll through them, viewing each one as you go.
You can also delete connections, edit them, generate reports or perform a batch design/check
on multiple connections.
You can get to the connection manager by clicking the
renderer or via its Design menu.
button in the top toolbar of the
Connection table
You can click on any connection in the table to see it in the connection manager viewer or
you can scroll through them by using the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard. You can
double-click any connection in the table to open it in the connection editor or alternatively
you could use the "Edit Connection" button at the bottom of the table.
The colored blocks in the first column signify whether the connection has passed (green),
failed (red), passed with a warning (yellow) or has not yet been designed or checked (white).
If the colored block contains a small padlock
then it means that the connection is locked
and cannot be designed unless you unlock it first or tick the "Include locked connections"
option below when designing in batch mode. By hovering over the colored block for a
particular connection you can obtain its critical load case, utilization ratio, failure mode (if
failed) or warning message (if there is one). Note that any of the colors can be changed via
the "Preferences" button.
636

The second column indicates whether the connection has been design ("D") or checked ("C").
The remaining columns list the members involved in each connection, the connection type
and its title.
Connections can be added or deleted by using the "Add Connection" or "Delete Connection"
buttons at the bottom. It is recommended that new connections are added by using the
procedure explained in "Creating and editing connections" rather than via the "Add
Connection" button here.
Batch design/check
You can use this section of the manager to design or check all of your connections or just
some of them. This will be required from time to time if your model has been changed and/or
re-analysed.
Connections
If you want to design/check all connections then this field should be left blank, otherwise you
should type in your desired list of connections (separated by commas or dashes).
637

Alternatively, you can click the "..." button to the right of the input field and then select the
connections you want from the list that appears as shown below.
Load cases
Check
Tick this option if you want the locked connections (marked with
in the first column) to be
checked. These are the connections that have been locked manually via the padlock button or
locked automatically due to changes made to them in the connection editor. They will simply
be checked for adequacy and none of their components or design parameters will be changed
during the check. Note that if the "Design" option is unticked then the locked and unlocked
connections will be checked.
638

Design
Tick this option if you want the unlocked connections (not marked with
in the first
column) to be designed. During the design some of their components may be changed if the
model or the design actions have changed since the last design.
Include locked connections
If you want to override any locked connections and design them anyway then you should tick
this option. During the batch design/check, all the connections encountered that are locked
will be designed instead of being checked, however at the end they will be re-locked. Note
that any changes you have made to the connection components will be lost during this
process.
Skip connections already designed or checked
If you have a large number of connections in your model, you may be able to save some
design/check time by ticking this option to skip the ones that have already been designed or
checked. For most jobs this time saving will be minimal and so you should generally leave it
unticked.
Reports
Text reports for multiple connections can be generated by filling out the following form and
then clicking the "Generate Report" button. Alternatively, you can click the "Report" button
in the connection editor to obtain a report (including a graphical representation of the
connection) for the connection currently in the editor. You can also obtain text reports via the
normal SPACE GASS report generator in the non-renderer window. Refer to "Connection
reports" for more information.
Exporting and importing connections

Connection data can be exported to various file formats including MS-Excel and MS-Access.
You can also import from MS-Excel and MS-Access.
To export from the connection table you should select all of the connections to be exported,
click the right mouse button, select "Export" and then choose the desired export format. To
import, just click the right mouse button and choose "Import".
Note that the data being exported/imported is limited to the connection number, the
associated member numbers, the connection type and its title. None of the detailed connection
data is included. This means that any changes you have made to a connection will not be
included in the exported file and will be lost if you then re-import the file. For designed
connections however, once you import the data and re-design the connections, all of the
detailed connection data will be reinstated.
639
Preferences
The "Preferences" button lets you change various connection parameters and colors. For more
information refer to "Connection preferences".
640
Design considerations
Design procedure
The design procedure varies for each connection type, however the general procedure is as
follows:
1. An initial plate size is chosen from the plate library, starting with the smallest size.
2. An initial bolt size and bolt count is chosen from the bolt library, starting with the
smallest size. The bolt count depends on the bolt size, the plate size and the
connection type.
3. An initial weld is chosen from the weld library, starting with the smallest size.
4. A number of checks are performed to determine the adequacy of each component and
the overall adequacy of the connection. If everything passes then the design stops. If
not, it continues as follows.
5. If any weld checks fail, the weld size is incremented (or is changed from a fillet to a
butt weld) and the procedure returns to step 4. If the maximum weld size has been
reached without a solution, the procedure continues as follows.
6. If any bolt checks fail, the bolt size is incremented and the procedure returns to step 3.
If the maximum bolt size has been reached without a solution, the procedure
continues as follows.
7. If any plate checks fail, the plate size is incremented and the procedure returns to step
2. If the maximum plate size has been reached without a solution then the connection
fails.
Note that the actual procedure is somewhat more complicated than described above due to the
differing nature of the interaction between the plates, bolts and welds for each connection
type.
Design actions
Some of the design actions that occur at a connection are not relevant for every connection
type. The design actions considered for each connection type are listed in the following table.
Fx (Axial force)
Open Connections
Bolted end plate
Welded moment
Bolted apex
Fully bolted splice
Fully welded splice
Bolted / welded splice
Web side plate
Flexible end plate
Bolted angle cleat
Bolted angle seat
Welded angle seat
Bearing pad
Stiff seat
Pinned baseplate
Fy (Major axis
shear)
Fz (Minor axis
shear)
Mx (Torsion)
641

Moment baseplate
Tubular Connections
Slotted end plate
Welded tee end plate
Flattened end
Bolted end plate splice
Bolted moment end plate
KN gap
KN overlap
KT gap
KT overlap
Mitred knee
Note that tubular connections containing a gusset plate and involving multiple members
consider the shear forces and moments generated by the eccentricity of the connected
members.
Zero member strength
During a connection design/check, the module also checks that the member has sufficient
section capacity to transfer the design actions to the connection. If you get an error message
stating that "The supporting or supported member has zero strength...", it means that the
member's Fy or Fyw value is zero. To fix this, you should open the shape builder for the
member in question, click the "Design Properties" button and then ensure that the Fy and Fyw
values are non-zero. Note that if the Fy and Fyw are already non-zero, it means that the shape
builder has obtained them and put them into the fields for you. You should save the new
properties, re-analyse the model and then try the connection design again.
642
Connection reports
Text reports can be generated via the following form in the connection manager, via the
normal SPACE GASS report generator in the non-renderer window or via the "Report" button
in the connection editor.
After specifying which connections are to be included in the report and ticking the other
desired options in the above form, you should click the "Generate Report" button.
The following report is for a single connection that was generated from within the connection
editor.
643
644
Connection preferences
You can change the defaults for various connection parameters such as dimensions, size
ranges, strength grades, colors and other options.
Note that not all parameters are used in all connections. For example, the default bolt gauge is
overridden by other requirements in the bolted end plate connection and others.
The bolt size, weld size and plate thickness ranges limit the size of the bolts, welds and plates
in a design and allow you to exclude sizes that are unavailable or not desired.
Most colors can also be changed and you can see the immediate effect of your changes in the
sample image on the right and in the sample pass/warning/fail status bars at the bottom.
645

Concrete beam design
The SPACE GASS reinforced concrete beam design module lets you design or check any
reinforced concrete beams in a structural model.

Fully rendered 3D images and 2D cross sections of each beam designed or checked.
Flexural and shear reinforcement designed or checked.
Rectangular, "T" and "L" cross sections are supported.
Development lengths calculated.
Straight, hooked or cogged bar ends.
Moment, shear, torsion, deflection, seismic and fire considerations taken into account.
Priority settings available for "minimum steel", "minimum layers" or "minimum bars".
Moment redistribution available.
Reinforcing bar libraries.
Fully compliant with AS3600 and IS456.
A video showing the reinforced concrete beam design module in action can be viewed at
www.spacegass.com/rcbeam.
Note that if you haven't purchased the concrete beam module, you can still run it in a free
trial mode that limits you to using predefined cross section dimensions, and prevents you from
Refer to "Creating and editing concrete beams", "The concrete manager" and "Concrete beam
preferences" for full details of the concrete beam design module.
647
648
Creating and editing concrete beams

In order to define a concrete beam, it is simply a matter of selecting the members that make
up the beam, clicking the right mouse button and then selecting "Input/Edit Concrete Beam"
from the menu that appears or by clicking the
"Input/Edit Concrete Beam".
button in the top toolbar and then selecting
Note that the reinforced concrete beam module does not let you input the cross section
shape or dimensions. The cross section geometry is taken from the beam's section
properties and must have been defined earlier by you using the shape builder.
The beam is then designed and the results are presented in the concrete beam editor shown
below.
649
From there, you can examine the beam, click the Ok button to save and exit if you happy with
it, or make changes to customize it to your exact requirements.
Before accepting the design results, you must ensure that the beam's supports have been
correctly detected! See "Supports" below for further information.
The status bar
The status bar at the bottom of the editor indicates whether the beam has passed, failed or
passed with a warning. It includes the critical load case, the critical zone, the utilization ratio
and a brief explanation of the failure mode or warning message. A green line indicates it has
passed, red indicates failure and yellow is for a pass with a warning message. All of these
colors can be changed via the "Preferences" button.
Blue may also be used in some circumstances to display other types of messages.
650

Data panel
The data panel on the left of the beam editor lets you make changes to the design data which
are then reflected in the diagrams and tables in the concrete beam editor. More information
about specific items in the data panel is presented in the following sections below.
651
652
Checking and Designing

When you first create a beam and open it in the beam editor it does an initial design and then
displays "Design" at the end of the status bar. If you make changes that initiate a check or if
you click the "Check" button then "Check" is displayed at the end of the status bar instead.
Many of the input parameters affect both checks and designs (eg. ultimate load case list,
minimum design actions, cover, etc), whereas other parameters are design-specific (eg. design
priorities, bar size ranges, etc) or check-specific (eg. bar sizes, layers, etc). If you change a
parameter that affects both checks and designs then the previous action (ie. check or design)
will be repeated, whereas if you change a check-specific or design-specific parameter then it
will perform the action appropriate for that change.
Each time you make a change that triggers an automatic re-design or re-check there is a small
pause while the action is performed. If you don't want this to happen or if it becomes
annoying you should untick the "Auto" option at the bottom and then just click the Design or
Check buttons whenever you're ready.
If you have made changes to the reinforcement or layers then the beam will become locked to
guard against you accidently performing a design and losing your changes. If you really want
to do a design then you must click the red locked button first to unlock it.
General data
In this panel you can specify the beam number, design code, descriptive title, analysis
member list, load case lists and torsion switch. The beam number and analysis member list
are normally predefined based on which members you selected when you created the concrete
beam, however you can change them here if required.
It is important that you correctly specify the load case lists and don't just leave them blank.
The ultimate load cases are the ones that the strength design is based on and they are usually
the combination load cases that have been factored up to ultimate. The serviceability load
cases are used to calculate the short term deflections based on the cracked moments of inertia.
They are usually the short term primary live load and wind load cases. Finally, the sustained
load cases are used to calculate the long term deflections based on creep and usually consist
of just the long term dead loads. Neither the serviceability or sustained load cases are used in
the design calculations.
If you leave the ultimate load case list blank then all analysed load cases will be considered,
whereas if you leave the serviceability or sustained load case lists blank then they will not be
considered, effectively rendering them inactive.
If you wish to consider torsion then you should tick the "Torsion" checkbox. Enabling torsion
requires extra longitudinal reinforcement to resist the torsion moment. For AS3600 you can
specify "Indirect" torsion if torsional strength is not required for the equilibrium of the
653

structure and the torsion in the beam is induced solely by the angular rotation of adjoining
members. For further information refer to AS3600 clause 8.3.2.
When specifying load case lists, you can either list them directly, or you can click the "..."

In order to guarantee a robust design, most concrete design codes impose lower limits on the
design actions. You can comply with these limits for positive and/or negative moments.
Design priorities
When performing a design, the module evaluates many solutions (sometimes hundreds),
discards the impractical ones and then sorts the rest according to the "Design Priority" setting
that you have selected. For example, if you have selected "Minimum bars" then it will put the
solution that has the minimum number of bars first and present that as the optimal solution.
"Minimum steel" gives the most efficient design in terms of total area of steel, however it
usually results in many different bar sizes throughout the beam and so is often impractical.
"Minimum layers" or "Minimum bars" give the best results in most circumstances.
654
Beam data panel

The information in this panel applies to the whole beam.
By default there are five "Zones per span", consisting of a zone at the supports at each end of
the span plus three zones in the span. You can change the number of zones per span or, if you
want different numbers of zones in some spans, you should click the "..." button and specify
the number of zones in each span individually.
If you tick the "Same bar size in all zones" option then a bar that continues through multiple
zones will maintain a constant size.
For "T" or "L" beams, if the top bars don't fit inside the stirrups and "Keep inside stirrups" is
not ticked then the excess bars will be placed in the slab or flange.
During the shear design, the stirrups are kept at the size you specify and only their spacing is
changed. The stirrup size is always constant for the entire beam.
The "Top and bottom bar size ranges" simply limit the size of bars that will be used in a
design.
The "Layer spacing" is the centerline distance between bars in adjacent layers.
For AS3600, the "Crack control" requirements are more stringent if the beam is in an exterior
environment. For further information refer to AS3600 clause 8.6.1.
For IS456, the "Effective width" of a "T" or "L" beam depends on whether the beam is
integrated with a slab or is an isolated beam. For further information refer to IS456 clause
23.1.2.
Zones
By default there are five zones per span, consisting of a zone at the supports at each end of the
span plus three zones in the span. The number of zones per span can be changed in the beam
data panel described above.
In the zones panel you can change the current zone by selecting it in the "Zone" field at the
top or you can cycle through them by clicking the "Prev" or "Next" buttons. The current zone
655

is highlighted in the beam view panel at the top, in the bending moment, shear force or
deflection diagram in the middle, and in the cross section panel.
For each zone you can specify the number of layers, the bars per layer and the bar sizes. You
can also specify the stirrup details and, for AS3600, the Vuc criterion for crack control in
accordance with clause 8.2.7.4. Whenever you make changes to the reinforcement or layers,
the changes are locked to guard against you doing an accidental design and losing your
changes. If you really want to perform a design you must first unlock the beam before you can
click the "Design" button as described in "Checking and Designing" above.
The "Minimum top/bot steel (% of max)" parameters place a lower limit on the area of steel in
the current zone based on a percentage of the maximum area of steel used elsewhere in the
beam. For example, if the maximum top area of steel in the beam is 2575mm^2 and you have
specified a "Min top steel (% of max)" of 33% then the top area of steel for that zone will be
limited to no less than 850mm^2.
The "Copy to all zones" buttons allow you to copy the data from the current zone to all other
zones in the beam.
Development lengths
Development lengths are calculated automatically based on the bar size, bar type, end
anchorage, concrete properties and bar stress. They are included in the reports and are
displayed in the beam view panel. To see them more clearly you can turn them on or off in the
beam view panel by clicking the "View development lengths" button.
Bar anchorage
Bars can be left straight at the ends of the beam or they can be hooked or cogged.
656
Cover
The cover is specified as the clear distance from the edge of the bars and stirrups to the edge
of the concrete.
Moment redistribution
Moment redistribution allows you to reduce the bending moments at the supports with a
resulting increase in the span moments. It is generally only applied to the internal supports of
statically indeterminate beams, but you can also choose to redistribute the moments at the
beam's end supports if appropriate. When moment redistribution is activated you must choose
the amount of redistribution and specify whether that amount applies at the support
centerlines or at the faces of the supports. During moment redistribution the shear forces are
also adjusted to maintain static equilibrium.
Moment redistribution should be used with utmost care and if used inappropriately could
result in unsafe designs. You should ensure that there is adequate rotation capacity in
critical moment regions to allow the assumed redistribution of bending moments to be
achieved.
Supports
The beam's supports are automatically detected based on node restraints and steps in the shear
force diagram, however it is possible that for some beams, supports may be missed or nonexistent supports may be detected. The supports are shown in the bending moment, shear
force and deflection diagrams as small black triangles and so it is easy for you to visually see
if they are correct or not.
Because the beam design or check relies on knowing where the supports are, it is
imperative that the supports are correct before you accept any results.
657
If a support occurs at a node that doesn't have a vertical node restraint, such as if the beam is
supported on columns or other beams, it is detected by measuring the upwards step in the
shear force diagram and if the shear step exceeds the "Shear step threshold" percentage then a
support is assumed to exist at that location. The shear step threshold is determined by
calculating the maximum shear force anywhere in the beam from all analysed load cases and
then multiplying it by the threshold percentage that you specify. 5% has been found to
produce good results, but if supports are being missed or non-existent supports are being
detected then you should adjust the threshold until all the supports are found correctly.
Beam view panel

The panel at the top of the beam editor shows a 3D side view of the entire beam. By clicking
on any part of the beam you can select a zone so that its reinforcement and other details are
shown in the data panel on the left, and its dimensions and reinforcement are displayed in the
cross section panel at the bottom of the editor.
You can also zoom, pan and rotate the beam to show the dimensions, cross section and
reinforcement in more detail.
658
You can also click the "2D View" tab to display a 2D drawing of the beam.
The buttons at the top of the panel let you do a "zoom fit" or quickly switch to a side view or
"30,10" view. You can also turn on/off the stirrups, main bars, development lengths or
dimensions for a clearer view.
Moment, shear and deflection diagrams

The diagram in the middle panel by default shows the bending moment envelope for the
ultimate load cases. By clicking the radio buttons at the top you can change it to show the
envelopes for the serviceability or sustained load cases instead. You can also switch it to show
shears or deflections by clicking the tabs at the top.
After a design, the critical zone is selected and is shown shaded in the moment, shear and
deflection diagrams. You can also click on any zone in the diagram to select that zone so that
its reinforcement and other details are shown in the data panel on the left, and its dimensions
and reinforcement are displayed in the cross section panel at the bottom of the editor.
The green lines above and below the bending moment envelope represent the bending
capacity of the beam and give a very good indication of how efficient your beam design is.
The closer they track the bending moment envelope the more efficient your beam design is.
Note however that if torsion is included then the capacity lines may overstate the bending
659

capacity because some of the steel will be required to resist torsion and will not be available
for bending. In this case there will be a gap between the bending moment envelope and the
capacity lines, with the gap representing the reduction in bending capacity due to the torsion
requirement. If minimum design actions govern then there may also be a significant gap
between the capacity lines and the moment envelope.
You can hover the mouse cursor over any part of the diagram to show the underlying values
at the cursor's location.
You can also zoom the diagram by placing the mouse cursor at the desired location and then
using the mouse scrollwheel. If the zoom feature doesn't work then it is because the diagram
doesn't have focus, in which case you should click on it and then try again.
The shear tab displays the shear force envelope for the ultimate load cases.
660
The deflections tab displays the elastic, short term, long term and total deflections based on
the "Serviceability" and "Sustained" load cases specified above the diagrams. The elastic
deflections match the deflections from the SPACE GASS analysis and are based on the
serviceability load cases using the gross moment of inertia (Ig). The short term deflections are
also based on the serviceability load cases but using the cracked moment of inertia (Iefs),
whereas the long term deflections are based on the sustained load cases using the moment of
inertia adjusted for creep (Iefl). You can see graphs of Ig, Iefs and Iefl by clicking the "Ig, Ief"
radio button. The total deflections are the sum of the short term and long term deflections.
Note that all deflections displayed in the diagram include the free body movement of the
beam based on the elastic deflections of the supports and so if you are manually checking the
total deflections by simply summing the short and long term deflections you must also
subtract the deflections at the supports so that they are not doubled up. If your supports have
short term or long term deflections that are significantly different to their elastic deflections,
such as if the beam is supported on other beams for example, then you may need to adjust the
short and long term deflections along the beam to allow for those support deflections.
The lines below the deflection curves are based on the L/d limits you can specify in the data
panel to provide an indication of whether the deflections are excessive or not. Note that the
L/d limits are purely for your visual checking and are not used in the design calculations.
661
Cross section panel

The cross section panel shows the shape, dimensions and reinforcement for the currently
selected zone. You can select a different zone by clicking it in the beam view panel at the top
or by selecting it in the data panel on the left.
You can also click the "DXF/DWG" or "Save Image" buttons on the right side of the editor to
export the cross section to a DWG or DXF file, or save the cross section image to a metafile
(EMF) file. An EMF file can be used to generate a high quality image with no pixilation
regardless of how much it is enlarged.
Reinforcement and output panel

The panel at the bottom-right shows a summary of the reinforcement for the entire beam.
You can also click the Output tab to show a list of the main checks and variables used in the
design/check.
662
Preferences
You can click the "Preferences" button to open the concrete beam preferences form and then
change the defaults for various concrete parameters such as the default bar library,
dimensions, clearances, zones, cover, size ranges, design priorities, code specific parameters,
colors and other options.
Reports
The reports button lets you generate various types of reports for the concrete beam.
To see a video that shows the reinforced concrete beam module in action, visit
www.spacegass.com/rcbeam.
663

The concrete manager is at the heart of the reinforced concrete beam, column and footing
modules. It presents all of your beams, columns and footings in a table and lets you scroll
through them, viewing each one as you go. You can also delete beams, columns and footings,
edit them, generate reports or perform a batch design/check on multiple beams, columns and
footings.
You can get to the concrete manager by clicking the
Beams/columns/footings table
You can click on any beam, column or footing in the table to see it in the concrete manager
viewer or you can scroll through them by using the up and down arrow keys on your
keyboard. You can double-click any item in the table to open it in the editor or alternatively
you could use the "Edit..." button at the bottom of the table.
The colored blocks in the first column signify whether the beam, column or footing has
passed (green), failed (red), passed with a warning (yellow) or has not yet been designed or
checked (white). If the colored block contains a small padlock
then it means that the item
is locked and cannot be designed unless you unlock it first or tick the "Include locked
beams/columns/footings" option below when designing in batch mode. By hovering over the
colored block for a particular item you can obtain its critical load case, critical zone,
utilization ratio, failure mode (if failed) or warning message (if there is one). Note that any of
the colors can be changed via the "Preferences" button.
The second column indicates whether the beam, column or footing has been design ("D") or
checked ("C"). The remaining columns list the item number, the members involved and the
title.
664

Beams, columns and footings can be added or deleted by using the "Add..." or "Delete..."
buttons at the bottom. It is recommended that new beams are added by using the procedure
explained in "Creating and editing concrete beams" rather than via the "Add..." button here.
Batch design/check
You can use this section of the manager to design or check all of your beams, columns and
footings or just some of them. This will be required from time to time if your model has been
changed and/or re-analysed.
Beams/columns/footings
If you want to design/check all items these fields should be left blank, otherwise you should
type in your desired list of beams, columns or footings (separated by commas or dashes).
Alternatively, you can click the "..." button to the right of the input fields and then select the
items you want from the list that appears as shown below.
665
Load cases
The following options let you decide which beams, columns and footings should be checked
or designed.
Check
Tick this option if you want the locked items (marked with
checked. These are the items that have been locked manually via the padlock button or locked
automatically due to changes made to their reinforcement or layers in the editor. They will
666

simply be checked for adequacy and none of their input parameters will be changed. Note that
if the "Design" option is unticked then both the locked and unlocked items will be checked.
Design
Tick this option if you want the unlocked items (not marked with
designed. During the design their reinforcement may be changed if the model or the design
actions have changed since the last design.
Include locked beams/columns/footings
If you want to override any locked beams, columns or footings and design them anyway then
you should tick this option. During the batch design/check, all the items encountered that are
locked will be designed instead of being checked, however at the end they will be re-locked.
Note that any changes you have made to reinforcement or layers will be lost during this
process.
Skip beams/columns/footings already designed or checked
If you have a large number of beams, columns or footings in your model, you may be able to
save some design/check time by ticking the "Skip..." option shown below to skip the ones that
have already been designed or checked.
Reports
Text reports for multiple beams, columns and footings can be generated by filling out the
following form and then clicking the "Generate Report" button. Alternatively, you can click
the "Report" button in the editor to obtain a report (including a graphical representation of the
beam, column or footing) for the item currently in the editor. You can also obtain text reports
via the normal SPACE GASS report generator in the non-renderer window.
Exporting and importing

Beam, column and footing data can be exported to various file formats including MS-Excel
and MS-Access. You can also import from MS-Excel and MS-Access.
To export from the table you should select all of the items to be exported, click the right
mouse button, select "Export" and then choose the desired export format. To import, just click
the right mouse button and choose "Import".
667

Note that the data being exported/imported is limited to the beam/column/footing number, the
associated member numbers and the title. None of the detailed data is included. This means
that any changes you have made to a beam, column or footing will not be included in the
exported file and will be lost if you then re-import the file. For designed beams, columns and
footings however, once you import the data and re-design the items, all of the detailed data
will be reinstated.
Preferences
The "Preferences" button lets you change various beam, column and footing parameters and
colors. For more information refer to "Concrete beam preferences".
668
Concrete beam preferences

You can change the defaults for various concrete parameters such as the default bar library,
dimensions, clearances, zones, cover, size ranges, design priorities, code specific parameters,
colors and other options.
The bar size ranges limit the size of the reinforcing bars in a design and allow you to exclude
sizes that are unavailable or not desired.
669
670
AS3600 2009 code specific items for beams

Sections considered
AS3600-2009 Concrete Structures Code (incorporating amendments 1 and 2)
1.1 SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1.2 Application
(a)(i)
SECTION 2 DESIGN PROCEDURES, ACTIONS AND LOADS
2.2 DESIGN FOR STRENGTH
2.2. Strength check procedure for use with linear elastic methods of analysis
(ii) Table 2.2.2
2.3 DESIGN FOR SERVICEABILITY (Informative only)
SECTION 3 DESIGN PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
3.1 PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE
3.1.1 Strength
3.1.1.1 Characteristic compressive strength
(a)
3.1.1.3 Tensile strength
3.1.2 Modulus of elasticity
(c) Table 3.1.2
3.1.4 Stress-strain curve
(a)
3.1.7 Shrinkage (Informative only)
3.1.7.1 Calculation of design shrinkage strain
(c)
3.1.7.2 Design shrinkage strain
3.2 PROPERTIES OF REINFORCEMENT
(a)
SECTION 5 DESIGN FOR FIRE RESISTANCE (Informative only)
5.2 DEFINITIONS
5.2.1 Average axis distance
5.2.2 Axis distance
5.4 FIRE RESISTANCE PERIODS (FRPs) FOR BEAMS
5.4.1 Structural adequacy for beams incorporated in roof or floor systems
(a),(b)
SECTION 6 METHODS OF STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
6.2 LINEAR ELASTIC ANALYSIS
6.2.3 Critical sections for negative moments (optional)
6.2.7 Moment redistribution in reinforced and prestressed members for strength design
6.2.7.2 Deemed-to-comply approach for reinforced and prestressed members
SECTION 8 DESIGN OF BEAMS FOR STRENGTH AND SERVICEABILITY
8.1 STRENGTH OF BEAMS ON BENDING
8.1.1 General
8.1.2 Basis of strength calculations
8.1.3 Rectangular stress block
8.1.5 Design strength in bending
671

(b)
8.1.6 Minimum strength requirements
8.1.6.1 General
8.1.9 Spacing of reinforcement and tendons
8.2 STRENGTH OF BEAMS IN SHEAR
8.2.1 General
8.2.2 Design shear strength of a beam
(a),(c)
8.2.4 Maximum transverse shear at support
8.2.5 Requirements for shear reinforcement
(a),(b)
8.2.6 Shear strength limit by web crushing
8.2.7 Shear strength of a beam excluding shear reinforcement
8.2.7.1 Reinforced beams
8.2.8 Minimum shear reinforcement
8.2.9 Shear strength of a beam with minimum reinforcement
8.2.10 Contribution to shear strength by the shear reinforcement
(a),(b)
8.2.12 Detailing of shear reinforcement
8.2.12.1 Types
(a)
8.2.12.2 Spacing
8.3 STRENGTH OF BEAMS IN TORSION
8.3.1 General
8.3.2 Secondary torsion
8.3.3 Torsional strength limited by web crushing
8.3.4 Requirements for torsional reinforcement
(a),(b)
8.3.5 Torsional strength of a beam
(a),(b)
8.3.6 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement
(a),(b)
8.3.7 Minimum torsional reinforcement
(a),(b),(i),(ii)
8.3.8 Detailing of torsional reinforcement
(a),(b),(c)
8.5 DEFLECTION OF BEAMS (Informative only)
8.5.1 General
8.5.3 Beam deflection by simplified calculations
8.5.3.1 Short-term deflection
(a),(b),(c)
8.5.3.2 Long-term deflection
8.6 CRACK CONTROL OF BEAMS (Informative only)
8.6.1 Crack control for tension and flexure in reinforced beams
(a),(b),(d),(i),(ii)
8.6.3 Crack control in the side face of beams
8.8 T-BEAMS AND L-BEAMS
8.8.2 Effective width of flange for strength and serviceability
(a),(b)
SECTION 13 STRESS DEVELOPMENT OF REINFORCEMENT AND TENDONS
(Informative only)
13.1 STRESS DEVELOPMENT IN REINFORCEMENT
13.1.1 General
13.1.2 Development length for a deformed bar in tension
672

13.1.2.1 Development length to develop yield strength
13.1.2.2 Basic development length
13.1.5 Development length of deformed bars in compression
13.1.5.1 Development length to develop yield strength
13.1.5.2 Basic development length
APPENDIX C REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURES SUBJECT TO
EARTHQUAKE ACTIONS
C4.2 Beams
C4.2.1 Longitudinal reinforcement
(a),(b),(i),(ii)
C4.2.2 Shear reinforcement
(a),(b)
Assumptions
Serviceability and deflection results are informative only. No serviceability or deflection limit
checks control the results.
Clause 3.1.1.3 - f'ct.f is taken as 0.6(f'c)^0.5.
Clause 3.1.2 - Ec is taken from Table 3.1.2 for standard f'c values, where f'c is taken from the
material properties of the member in the SPACE GASS model. For non-standard f'c values,
Ec is taken from the material properties of the member in the SPACE GASS model.
fsy and reinforcement ductility is taken from the SPACE GASS reinforcing bar library. If the
section contains a mixture of bars with different fsy and ductility values, the fsy and ductility
of the first bar on the bottom layer is used.
Fire resistance results are informative only. No fire resistance limit checks control the results.
Clause 6.2.3 - Optional preference to reduce maximum negative bending moment at support.
Clause 8.1.6 - Optional setting to comply with minimum design actions for positive and/or
negative moments.
Clause 8.1.9 - User specified preference for minimum clear bar distance.
Clause 8.1.10.3 - Not checked, but a zone setting is available for design mode where the user
can specify minimum steel top and bottom based on a percentage of the steel required for the
respective maximum moment along the entire beam.
Clause 8.2.4 - Optional preference to specify location or not. No checks done for
8.2.4(b)(i),(ii), or (iv).
Clause 8.2.5(a) - In design mode, shear reinforcement at 300 centres is always provided.
Clause 8.2.7.4 - A zone setting is provided to set Vuc to be equal to zero, else Vuc will be
calculated as per normal code requirements.
Clause 8.2.12.2 - Transverse spacing only checked for single fitments, transverse spacing not
checked for double fitments.
Clause 8.3.2 - A beam setting is provided to specify if the torsion being applied is an indirect
(secondary) torsion or direct torsion. If indirect is chosen, the torsion capacity is still
calculated for informative purposes only.
673
Clause 8.3.8(b) - Closed fitments are assumed if torsion is to be considered. Only spacing
check is considered.
Clause 8.5.3.1 - The gross I can be optionally based on the steel transformed to an equivalent
concrete area or just on a homogeneous section. The alternative equation for Ief is not used.
Clause 8.5.3.2 - The alternative kcs method is used to calculate additional long term
deflection. The Asc/Ast is based on each specific zone reinforcement.
Clause 8.6.1 - Crack control is informative only. No crack control limit checks control the
results.
Clause 8.8 - No checks are done for flange-web connection capacities of T and L beams.
Clause 13.1 - Development length calculations are informative only.
674
IS456 2000 code specific items for beams

Sections considered
IS456:2000 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Code of Practice (Fourth Revision)
SECTION 2 MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP, INSPECTION AND TESTING
5 MATERIALS
5.3 Aggregates
5.3.3 Size of Aggregate
6 CONCRETE
6.2 Properties of Concrete
6.2.2 Tensile Strength of Concrete
6.2.3 Elastic Deformation
6.2.4 Shrinkage
6.2.5 Creep of Concrete
6.2.5.1 (Creep Coefficient)
21 FIRE RESISTANCE
21.2 Minimum Requirement of Concrete Cover
22 ANALYSIS
22.1 General
22.2 Effective Span
26 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING REINFORCEMENT AND DETAILING
26.2 Development of Stress in Reinforcement
26.2.1 Development Length of Bars
26.3 Spacing of Reinforcement
26.3.2 Minimum Distance Between Individual bars
26.3.3 Maximum Distance Between Bars in Tension
(a) Beams
26.4 Nominal Cover to Reinforcement
26.4.3 Nominal Cover to Meet Specified Period of Fire Resistance
26.5 Requirements of Reinforcement for Structural Members
26.5.1 Beams
26.5.1.1 Tension Reinforcement
26.5.1.2 Compression Reinforcement
26.5.1.5 Maximum Spacing of Shear Reinforcement
26.5.1.6 Minimum Shear Reinforcement
26.5.1.7 Distribution of Torsion Reinforcement
SECTION 5 STRUCTURAL DESIGN (LIMIT STATE METHOD)
37 ANALYSIS
37.1 Analysis of Structure
37.1.1 Redistribution of Moments in Continuous Beams and Frames
38 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: FLEXURE
38.1 Assumptions
40 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: SHEAR
40.2 Design Shear Strength of Concrete
40.2.1 Beams
40.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement
40.5 Enhanced Shear Strength of Sections Close to Supports
41 TORSION
41.1 General
41.2 Critical Section
41.3 Shear and Torsion
41.4 Reinforcement in Members Subjected to Torsion
675

43 LIMIT STATE OF SERVICEABILITY: CRACKING
43.1 Flexural Members
ANNEX C: CALCULATION OF DEFLECTION
C-1 TOTAL DEFLECTION
C-2 SHORT-TERM DEFLECTION
C-3 DEFLECTION DUE TO SHRINKAGE
C-4 DEFLECTION DUE TO CREEP
Assumptions
Serviceability and deflection results are informative only. No serviceability or deflection limit
checks control the results.
If there are bars with different fy values, the fy design is the fy of the first bar at the bottom
layer and the design/check process assumes all bars have the same fy.
Clause 5.3.3 - Size of aggregate: The default aggregate size is 20 mm, but the user can change
the value (General Preferences).
Clause 6.2.5.1 - Creep coefficient: The user has options for creep coefficients.
Clause 22.2 - Effective span is assumed to be centre-to-centre between supports.
Clause 22.6 - Critical sections for moment and shear: The user has the option to take the
moment and shear at the face of the support or at a user-defined distance from the face of the
support.
Clause 26.2 - Development lengths are calculated so that at any point within the considered
zone the bond capacity between concrete and steel is sufficient to carry the maximum tensile
or compressive stress in the zone.
Clause 26.3.2c - The requirement for vertical spacing between layers of reinforcement is not
checked.
Clause 26.5.1.3 - The side face reinforcement for crack control is not checked.
Clause 38.1c - A rectangular stress block is assumed:
The uniform stress level = 0.4 * fck (Ref: P.C. Varghese, "Limit State Design of
Reinforced Concrete", Second Edition, Chapter 5).
The depth of the stress block is to the neutral axis.
The uniform stress level already includes the partial safety factor 1.5 for concrete.
The design compressive strength of concrete = 0.66 of the characteristic strength of
concrete.
Clause 41 - Torsion: Closed fitments are assumed if torsion is to be considered. If there is
torsion, the actions (V* and M*) have been increased based on the code requirements to take
into account the torsion effects.
676

Concrete column design
The SPACE GASS reinforced concrete column design module lets you design or check any
reinforced concrete columns in a structural model.

677

Fully rendered 3D images and 2D cross sections of each column designed or checked.
Flexural and shear reinforcement designed or checked.
Circular, rectangular, tee, trapezoidal, cruciform and flat oval cross sections are
supported.
Multiple voids of any shape or size.
Moment (uniaxial and biaxial) and shear considerations taken into account.
Calculation and display of interaction curves.
Reinforcing bar libraries.
Fully compliant with AS3600 and IS456.
A video showing the reinforced concrete column design module in action can be viewed at
www.spacegass.com/rccolumn.
Note that if you haven't purchased the concrete column module, you can still run it in a free
trial mode that limits you to using predefined cross section dimensions, and prevents you from
Refer to "Creating and editing concrete columns", "The concrete manager" and "Concrete
column preferences" for full details of the concrete column design module.
678
Creating and editing concrete columns

In order to define a concrete column, it is simply a matter of selecting the members that make
up the column, clicking the right mouse button and then selecting "Input/Edit Concrete
Column" from the menu that appears or by clicking the
selecting "Input/Edit Concrete Column".
button in the top toolbar and then
Note that the reinforced concrete column module does not let you input the cross section
shape or dimensions. The cross section geometry is taken from the column's section
properties and must have been defined earlier by you using the shape builder.
The column is then designed and the results are presented in the concrete column editor
shown below.
679
From there, you can examine the column, click the Ok button to save and exit if you happy
with it, or make changes to customize it to your exact requirements.
The status bar

The status bar at the bottom of the editor indicates whether the column has passed, failed or
passed with a warning. It includes the critical load case, the utilization ratio and a brief
explanation of the failure mode or warning message. A green line indicates it has passed, red
indicates failure and yellow is for a pass with a warning message. All of these colors can be
Blue may also be used in some circumstances to display other types of messages.
Data panel
The data panel on the left of the column editor lets you make changes to the design data
which are then reflected in the diagrams and tables in the concrete column editor. More
information about specific items in the data panel is presented in the following sections
below.
680
Checking and Designing

When you first create a column and open it in the column editor it does an initial design and
then displays "Design" at the end of the status bar. If you make changes that initiate a check
or if you click the "Check" button then "Check" is displayed at the end of the status bar
instead.
Many of the input parameters affect both checks and designs (eg. ultimate load case list,
minimum design actions, cover, etc), whereas other parameters are design-specific (eg. design
priorities, bar size ranges, etc) or check-specific (eg. bar sizes, bar counts, etc). If you change
a parameter that affects both checks and designs then the previous action (ie. check or design)
681

will be repeated, whereas if you change a check-specific or design-specific parameter then it
will perform the action appropriate for that change.
Each time you make a change that triggers an automatic re-design or re-check there is a small
pause while the action is performed. If you don't want this to happen or if it becomes
annoying you should untick the "Auto" option at the bottom and then just click the Design or
Check buttons whenever you're ready.
If you have made changes to the reinforcement then the column will become locked to guard
against you accidently performing a design and losing your changes. If you really want to do
a design then you must click the red locked button first to unlock it.
General data
In this panel you can specify the column number, design code, descriptive title, analysis
member list, load case list, and the biaxial bending and shear check switches. The column
number and analysis member list are normally predefined based on which members you
selected when you created the concrete column, however you can change them here if
required.
The ultimate load cases are the ones that the strength design is based on and they are usually
the combination load cases that have been factored up to ultimate. If you leave this list blank
then all analysed load cases will be considered.
Biaxial bending checks are important and so you should always tick the "Biaxial bending
check" option unless you specifically want to check uniaxial moments only. For circular
columns, the normal procedure for handling biaxial moments is to combine them into a single
moment at an angle to the cross section axes and then just treat it as a uniaxial moment
problem. You can do this by ticking the "Combine Mx and My moments" option. For circular
columns with "Combine Mx and My" unticked or non-circular columns, the biaxial checks
are done using the equations in AS3600 clause 10.6.4 or IS456 clause 39.6.
Note that because AS3600 clause 10.6.4 applies to rectangular sections only, you should
perform your own independent checks if you have biaxial moments in non-circular
columns or non-combined moments in circular columns.
Shear in columns rarely governs, however if you wish to consider shear then you should tick
the "Shear check" check box. If shear is being checked then you must also specify a shear
area ratio (see below).
682
When specifying load case lists, you can either list them directly, or you can click the "..."

In order to guarantee a robust design, most concrete design codes impose lower limits on the
design actions. The minimum design actions can be calculated automatically based on code
specific requirements or you can click the "Custom" option and then specify them manually.
AS3600
IS456
Moment magnifiers
Moment magnifiers (AS3600) or additional moments (IS456) are calculated automatically if
the "Calculate" options are ticked, otherwise you can specify them manually.
For AS3600, the moment magnifiers are affected by whether the column is braced or
unbraced as defined in the "Column effective lengths" panel below and by whether the design
actions are from a linear or non-linear analysis. If braced or non-linear analysis, the moment
magnifier is calculated in accordance with equation 10.4.2, using the value of d that you
specify. For an unbraced column with a linear analysis, the moment magnifier is also based
683

on uc in equation 10.4.3(2). uc should be set by you based on the results of a buckling
analysis using reduced section properties of 0.4Ec.If for flexural members and 0.8Ec.Ic for
columns. A handy way of applying the reduced section properties is to give the flexural
members and the columns separate concrete materials in your SPACE GASS model and then
manually reducing the Ec for each material to 0.4Ec and 0.8Ec respectively before performing
the buckling analysis. Note that for a non-linear analysis, uc is not used.
AS3600
IS456
Column effective lengths

Column effective lengths are not calculated automatically! They are based on the column's
overall length multiplied by the kx and ky factors that you specify in this panel.
The "Braced" options (AS3600 only) affect how the moment magnifiers are calculated (see
above) and whether or not the column is deemed to be "short" or "slender" based on clause
10.3.1. They do not affect the column effective length calculations.
Shear area ratio

If shear is being checked then the effective area of the cross section resisting shear must be
known. This is calculated by multiplying the shear area ratio (Av/Ag) by the gross cross
sectional area (Ag). You should check that the ratio is correct for the cross section shape and
the governing shear direction.
Reinforcement
When performing a concrete column design, SPACE GASS calculates the optimal
reinforcement (subject to the steel range % and bar size range limits that you specify at the
top of the reinforcement panel) and presents it in the lower part of the panel. If you have the
"Auto" option at the bottom of the form ticked and the column is not locked (ie. the padlock
button at the bottom is green) then whenever you make a change to any of the design
parameters, the reinforcement could change.
If you manually change any of the bar counts or sizes in this panel then the column will
become locked (ie. the padlock button at the bottom will become red) and any further changes
you make to the design parameters will simply cause the reinforcement to be checked rather
than be changed. Alternatively, if you wish to lock the bar counts, but still allow the bar sizes
684

to change then you could tick the "Lock bar count" option. In this case a re-design could
cause the bar sizes to change but the number of bars would remain as they were.
If you wish to change the size of all your bars, you can click the library button (circled below)
in the "Total bars" row and then select a new size from the reinforcing bar library. Sometimes
this row will also contain the word "Variable" if you have a mixture of different bar sizes in
your column.
If you wish to change the position or size of individual bars then you can click the "Bar
Table" button and then make your changes in the table below. The bar table also lets you add,
delete or generate bars, or unify the bar sizes.
685
Design priorities
When performing a design, the module evaluates many solutions (sometimes hundreds),
discards the impractical ones and then sorts the rest according to the "Design Priority" setting
that you have selected. For example, if you have selected "Minimum bars" then it will put the
solution that has the minimum number of bars first and present that as the optimal solution.
"Minimum steel" gives the most efficient design in terms of total area of steel, however it
usually results in quite small bar sizes and so is often impractical. "Minimum bars" gives the
best result in most circumstances.
Column view panel

The panel at the top of the column editor shows a 3D or 2D view of the entire column.
686
687
You can also zoom, pan and rotate the column to show the dimensions, cross section and
reinforcement in more detail.
The buttons at the top of the panel let you do a "zoom fit" or quickly switch to a side view or
"30,10" view. You can also turn on/off the stirrups, main bars or dimensions for a clearer
view.
Interaction diagram
The interaction diagram represents the capacity of the column in terms of its axial load versus
moment envelope. Interaction curves are included for the actual reinforcement (shown in red)
together with the 1%, 2%, 3% and 4% reinforcement percentages. Note that you can vary the
1%, 2%, 3% and 4% values via the concrete column preferences form if you wish to change
the steel percentages for the extra curves.
Each load case is shown as a green dot in the diagram and should fall within the red curve. If
a load dot falls outside the red curve then failure has occurred. Note that the interaction
diagram applies to uniaxial moments only and so you could get a biaxial failure even if all the
load dots fall within the curve.
The special points labelled as "Ecc", "Dec" and "Bal" are defined as follows:
688

Ecc: The minimum eccentricity point that coincides with M=e.N, where e is the minimum
eccentricity, M is the moment and N is the axial compression. e = 0.05D for AS3600 (clause
10.1.2) and e = max(L/500 + D/30, 20mm) for IS456 (clause 25.4). If minimum moments are
complied with then all the load points should be located on the high moment side of the line
connecting the origin with the Ecc point.
Dec: The decompression point that coincides with the extreme tension fibre being zero. This
is the point at which it switches from being partially in tension to fully in compression.
Bal: The balanced point at which the tensile steel reaches yield. This is the point at which it
switches from a compression failure to a tension failure.
You can hover the mouse cursor over any part of the diagram to show the underlying values
at the cursor's location.
You can also zoom the diagram by placing the mouse cursor at the desired location and then
using the mouse scrollwheel. If the zoom feature doesn't work then it is because the diagram
doesn't have focus, in which case you should click on it and then try again.
689
Panels to the right of the interaction diagram let you combine the curves for positive and
negative moments or turn on/off various display options.
690

Confinement region (AS3600 only)
The confinement region is defined by AS3600 as the "Region where the design action effects
of combined axial force and bending on a section require confinement to the core". If a load
falls within the confinement region and f'c does not exceed 50MPa then SPACE GASS
provides confinement to the core in the form of fitments that comply with clause 10.7.4. If a
load falls within the confinement region and f'c exceeds 50MPa then SPACE GASS treats this
as a failure.
Cross section panel

The cross section panel shows the shape, dimensions and reinforcement for the currently
selected zone. You can select a different zone by clicking it in the beam view panel at the top
or by selecting it in the data panel on the left.
You can also click the "DXF/DWG" or "Save Image" buttons on the right side of the editor to
export the cross section to a DWG or DXF file, or save the cross section image to a metafile
(EMF) file. An EMF file can be used to generate a high quality image with no pixilation
regardless of how much it is enlarged.
Voids
Multiple voids of any shape or size can be included in the cross section and taken into
consideration in the column calculations. You simply add them as negative shapes in the
shape builder when you are creating your cross section for the analysis model.
691
Preferences
You can click the "Preferences" button to open the concrete column preferences form and
then change the defaults for various concrete parameters such as the default bar library,
spacings, cover, size ranges, colors and other options.
Reports
The reports button lets you generate a concise or a full report for the concrete column.
To see a video that shows the reinforced concrete beam module in action, visit
www.spacegass.com/rccolumn.
692

The concrete manager is at the heart of the reinforced concrete beam, column and footing
modules. It presents all of your beams, columns and footings in a table and lets you scroll
through them, viewing each one as you go. You can also delete beams, columns and footings,
edit them, generate reports or perform a batch design/check on multiple beams, columns and
footings.
You can get to the concrete manager by clicking the
Beams/columns/footings table
You can click on any beam, column or footing in the table to see it in the concrete manager
viewer or you can scroll through them by using the up and down arrow keys on your
keyboard. You can double-click any item in the table to open it in the editor or alternatively
you could use the "Edit..." button at the bottom of the table.
The colored blocks in the first column signify whether the beam, column or footing has
passed (green), failed (red), passed with a warning (yellow) or has not yet been designed or
checked (white). If the colored block contains a small padlock
then it means that the item
is locked and cannot be designed unless you unlock it first or tick the "Include locked
beams/columns/footings" option below when designing in batch mode. By hovering over the
colored block for a particular item you can obtain its critical load case, utilization ratio, failure
mode (if failed) or warning message (if there is one). Note that any of the colors can be
The second column indicates whether the beam, column or footing has been design ("D") or
checked ("C"). The remaining columns list the item number, the members involved and the
title.
693

Beams, columns and footings can be added or deleted by using the "Add..." or "Delete..."
buttons at the bottom. It is recommended that new columns are added by using the procedure
explained in "Creating and editing concrete columns" rather than via the "Add..." button
here.
Batch design/check
You can use this section of the manager to design or check all of your beams, columns and
footings or just some of them. This will be required from time to time if your model has been
changed and/or re-analysed.
Beams/columns/footings
If you want to design/check all items these fields should be left blank, otherwise you should
type in your desired list of beams, columns or footings (separated by commas or dashes).
Alternatively, you can click the "..." button to the right of the input fields and then select the
items you want from the list that appears as shown below.
694
Load cases
The following options let you decide which beams, columns and footings should be checked
or designed.
Check
Tick this option if you want the locked items (marked with
checked. These are the items that have been locked manually via the padlock button or locked
automatically due to changes made to their reinforcement or layers in the editor. They will
695

simply be checked for adequacy and none of their input parameters will be changed. Note that
if the "Design" option is unticked then both the locked and unlocked items will be checked.
Design
Tick this option if you want the unlocked items (not marked with
designed. During the design their reinforcement may be changed if the model or the design
actions have changed since the last design.
Include locked beams/columns/footings
If you want to override any locked beams, columns or footings and design them anyway then
you should tick this option. During the batch design/check, all the items encountered that are
locked will be designed instead of being checked, however at the end they will be re-locked.
Note that any changes you have made to reinforcement or layers will be lost during this
process.
Skip beams/columns/footings already designed or checked
If you have a large number of beams, columns or footings in your model, you may be able to
save some design/check time by ticking the "Skip..." option shown below to skip the ones that
have already been designed or checked.
Reports
Text reports for multiple beams, columns and footings can be generated by filling out the
following form and then clicking the "Generate Report" button. Alternatively, you can click
the "Report" button in the editor to obtain a report (including a graphical representation of the
beam, column or footing) for the item currently in the editor. You can also obtain text reports
via the normal SPACE GASS report generator in the non-renderer window.
Exporting and importing

Beam, column and footing data can be exported to various file formats including MS-Excel
and MS-Access. You can also import from MS-Excel and MS-Access.
To export from the table you should select all of the items to be exported, click the right
mouse button, select "Export" and then choose the desired export format. To import, just click
the right mouse button and choose "Import".
696

Note that the data being exported/imported is limited to the beam/column/footing number, the
associated member numbers and the title. None of the detailed data is included. This means
that any changes you have made to a beam, column or footing will not be included in the
exported file and will be lost if you then re-import the file. For designed beams, columns and
footings however, once you import the data and re-design the items, all of the detailed data
will be reinstated.
Preferences
The "Preferences" button lets you change various beam, column and footing parameters and
colors. For more information refer to "Concrete column preferences".
697
Concrete column preferences

You can change the defaults for various concrete parameters such as the default bar library,
spacings, cover, size ranges, colors and other options.
The bar size ranges limit the size of the reinforcing bars in a design and allow you to exclude
sizes that are unavailable or not desired.
698
AS3600 2009 code specific items for columns

Sections considered
AS3600-2009 Concrete Structures Code (incorporating amendments 1 and 2)
1.1 SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1.2 Application
(a)(i)
SECTION 2 DESIGN PROCEDURES, ACTIONS AND LOADS
2.2 DESIGN FOR STRENGTH
2.2. Strength check procedure for use with linear elastic methods of analysis
(ii) Table 2.2.2
2.3 DESIGN FOR SERVICEABILITY (Informative only)
SECTION 3 DESIGN PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
3.1 PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE
3.1.1 Strength
3.1.1.1 Characteristic compressive strength
(a)
3.1.1.3 Tensile strength
(c) Table 3.1.2
3.1.4 Stress-strain curve
(a)
3.1.7 Shrinkage (Informative only)
3.1.7.1 Calculation of design shrinkage strain
(c)
3.1.7.2 Design shrinkage strain
3.2 PROPERTIES OF REINFORCEMENT
(a)
SECTION 8.2 STRENGTH OF BEAMS IN SHEAR
Shear strength in columns is calculated based on the procedure set out in Section 8.2
SECTION 10 DESIGN OF COLUMNS FOR STRENGTH AND SERVICEABILITY
10.1 GENERAL
10.1.2 Minimum bending moment
10.1.3 Definition
10.1.3.1 Braced column
10.1.3.2 Short column
10.1.3.3 Slender column
10.2 DESIGN PROCEDURES
10.2.1 Design procedure using linear elastic analysis
10.2.2 Design procedure incorporating secondary bending moements
10.3 DESIGN OF SHORT COLUMNS
10.3.1 General
10.4 DESIGN OF SLENDER COLUMNS
10.4.1 General
10.4.2 Moment magnifier for a braced column
10.4.3 Moment magnifier for an unbraced column
699

10.4.4 Buckling load
10.5 SLENDERNESS
10.5.1. General
10.6 STRENGTH OF COLUMNS IN COMBINED BENDING AND COMPRESSION
10.6.2 Strength of cross-sections calculated using the rectangular stress block
10.6.2.2 Squash load
10.6.2.3 Decompression point
10.6.2.4 Transition from decompression point to squash load
10.6.2.5 Transition from decompression point to bending strength
10.6.3 Design for biaxial bending and compression
10.7 REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR COLUMNS
10.7.1 Limitations on longitudinal steel
10.7.2 Functions of fitments (NOTE: shear check included, torsion check NOT included)
10.7.3 Confinement to the core
10.7.3.1 (a) General requirements
10.7.4 Restraint of longitudinal reinforcement
10.7.4.1 (a) General requirements
10.7.4.3 Diameter and spacing of fitments and helices
Assumptions
Clause 3.1.1.3 - f'ct.f is taken as 0.6(f'c)^0.5.
Clause 3.1.2 - Ec is taken from Table 3.1.2 for standard f'c values, where f'c is taken from the
material properties of the member in the SPACE GASS model. For non-standard f'c values,
Ec is taken from the material properties of the member in the SPACE GASS model.
fsy and reinforcement ductility is taken from the SPACE GASS reinforcing bar library. If the
section contains a mixture of bars with different fsy and ductility values, the fsy and ductility
of the first bar on the bottom layer is used.
Clause 8.1.6.1 - If the user has elected to comply with minimum design actions, Equation
8.1.6.1(1) is used even if Ast is sufficient to satisfy Equation 8.1.6.1(2).
Clause 10.5.3 - The effective lengths of columns are not automatically calculated by the
reinforced concrete module. Instead, the user must provide the effective length factors kx and
ky.
Clause 10.6.4 - Equation 10.6.4 is used for biaxial bending checks with rectangular, Tee,
cruciform, trapezoidal and flat oval cross sections even though it is intended for rectangular
cross sections only. It is expected that a future version will offer a method that combines the
biaxial moments and calculates an interaction diagram about axes that are aligned with the
combined moment.
Clause 10.7.2 - Shear checks are automatically performed, however torsion checks are not.
The user must manually check if columns are adequate for torsion.
Clause 10.7.3.1(b) - If a load falls within the confinement region of a column with f'c >
50MPa it is treated as a failure. In such cases the column strength may pass the AS3600 code
checks but the user must ensure that sufficient confinement to the core is provided based on
AS3600 10.7.3.
Clause 10.7.4.3 - Bundled bars are not considered.
Shear checks are based on single stirrups (ie. two legs) even if additional stirrups have been
provided to restrain the longitudinal bars.
700
No checks are done to detect bars positioned inside or too close to a void.
No checks are done to detect voids positioned too close to the edge of the column.
701
IS456 2000 code specific items for columns

Sections considered
IS456:2000 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Code of Practice (Fourth Revision)
SECTION 2 MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP, INSPECTION AND TESTING
5 MATERIALS
5.3 Aggregates
5.3.3 Size of Aggregate
6 CONCRETE
6.2 Properties of Concrete
6.2.2 Tensile Strength of Concrete
6.2.3 Elastic Deformation
21 FIRE RESISTANCE
21.2 Minimum Requirement of Concrete Cover
22 ANALYSIS
22.1 General
22.2 Effective Span
26 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING REINFORCEMENT AND DETAILING
26.4 Nominal Cover to Reinforcement
26.4.2.1 Column Durability
26.5 Requirements of Reinforcement for Structural Members
26.5.3 Columns
26.5.3.1 Longitudinal Reinforcement
26.5.3.2 Transverse Reinforcement
SECTION 5 STRUCTURAL DESIGN (LIMIT STATE METHOD)
38 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: FLEXURE
38.1 Assumptions
39 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: COMPRESSION
39.1 Assumptions
39.2 Minimum Eccentricity
39.3 Short Axially Loaded Members in Compression
39.5 Members Subjected to Combined Axial Load And Uniaxial Bending
39.6 Members Subjected to Combined Axial Load and Biaxial Bending
39.7 Slender Compression Members
39.7.1 Addition Moments
40 LIMIT STATE of COLLAPSE: SHEAR
40.1 Nominal Shear Stress
40.2 Design Shear Strength of Concrete
40.2.1 Shear Strength of Concrete Without Shear Reinforcement
40.2.2 Shear Strength of Members Under Axial Compression
40.2.3 With Shear Reinforcement
40.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement
Assumptions
Clause 38.1c - A rectangular stress block is assumed:
The uniform stress level = 0.4 * fck (Ref: P.C. Varghese, "Limit State Design of
Reinforced Concrete", Second Edition, Chapter 5).
The depth of the stress block is to the neutral axis.
The uniform stress level already includes the partial safety factor 1.5 for concrete.
The design compressive strength of concrete = 0.66 of the characteristic strength of
concrete.
702

Clause 41 - Torsion: No torsion checks are performed.
Shear checks are based on single stirrups (ie. two legs) even if additional stirrups have been
provided to restrain the longitudinal bars.
No checks are done to detect bars positioned inside or too close to a void.
No checks are done to detect voids positioned too close to the edge of the column.
703
Output
Output
Text and graphics reports can be viewed or printed. Print previews can be obtained and the
page setup form gives you full control over the printer selection, paper size, orientation,
margins, layout, scales and output format.
You can initiate a report by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting the Output menu. You
can then choose between viewing a text report, printing a text report or printing graphics.
For text reports, the output can be limited to just input data or just output data and even to
specific nodes, members, section properties and load cases if required. You can also limit the
output to the data specified in any of the graphical filters.
Prior to generating a report, you must choose the items that you want to include in the report
by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the above form. You can turn a whole column of
check boxes on or off by clicking the "All on" or "All off" buttons at the bottom of the form.
After completing your selections, you can proceed to the following form.
705
Filters
You can select from any of the graphical filters to limit the output report to the data defined in
a filter. Alternatively, you can select "Use Filter Selected in Main Toolbar" so that the data
included in the output report always matches what is shown in the graphics display area.
You can also further limit the output data by specifying lists of nodes, members, section
properties, load cases, etc. If you want to include all items for a particular list then the list
field should be left blank, otherwise type in a list of items (separated by commas or dashes)
that you want to include in the report.
Format
Output can be printed in fixed point format (eg. 12.45) or exponential format (eg.
1.245E+01). Fixed point is generally preferred as it is easier to read and allows numbers with
different orders of magnitude to be readily identified. It cannot, however be used with very
large or very small values. In such cases, exponential format must be used.
As well as specifying the format, you can select the number of decimal places to be included.
This cannot be greater than 3 for exponential formatting and cannot be greater than 8 for fixed
706
Output
point formatting. These limits are imposed because of a maximum 10 digit field width. Care
must be taken when specifying the number of decimal places with fixed point format. You
must ensure that for the range of values likely to be encountered, you don't exceed the 10 digit
field width. For example five decimal place fixed point format could only handle values from
-999.99999 to 9999.99999. Values outside of this range would simply be printed as
"**********".
Section and material properties are always presented in exponential format regardless of the
format you specify (due to the extreme range of values usually encountered).
Enveloping
The analysis results data for each load case can be printed separately or can be combined into
a load case envelope. If a load case envelope is specified, the program selects and prints the
maximum and minimum values from the list of specified output load cases. The report also
includes the load case numbers and the matching coincident values that occur at the same
location and load case as each maximum and minimum.
At the end of an envelope report is a summary envelope showing the maximums and
minimums for a group of nodes and/or members. The summary report also shows the load
case numbers and the matching coincident values.
Envelope summary only
By default, envelope reports include an envelope summary at the end, however you can limit
your report to just the summary by activating this option in the report generation form.
Member end A or end B
For member end forces and moments, if you wish to limit your envelope to the maximums
and minimums that occur at just one particular member end (rather than from either end), you
should tick "Member End A" and/or "Member End B". If you tick "Either Member End" (the
default setting) then the maximums and minimums will be taken from either end.
The enveloping tool is a fast and convenient way of
determining the critical load cases, nodes, members and plates, regardless of the size of the
job.
Report member forces and moments in principal axes
Member forces and moments are by default reported in the local axis system of the member,
however for members with a non-zero principal angle you can get their principal forces and
moments by ticking this option.
Include warnings
This check box allows you to suppress warning messages relating to the analysis results
which sometimes appear in output reports. For example, if a non-linear analysis does not
reach the requested convergence in some load cases, then warning messages are posted in the
output report for those load cases.
Intermediate stations
SPACE GASS can print the displacements, forces and moments at any intermediate points
along a member (not just at the end nodes). Before intermediate member displacements,
forces and moments can be printed, you must specify how many equally spaced intermediate
member stations are to be considered. The program automatically adds an extra station at each
end of the member and at each point of application of a concentrated member load.
707

Sorting options
Analysis results output can be sorted in one or both of two ways.
1. If sorted in order of load case, the report lists the data for every node (or member)
under a main load case heading. This is repeated for each load case.
2. If sorted in order of node/member, the report lists the data for every load case under a
main node (or member) heading. This is repeated for each node (or member).
Member symbols notation
Steel member design reports allow you to optionally include a summary sheet of the symbols
used in the report together with a brief description of each.
Member section properties
This allows you to specify whether or not full section properties for the designed or checked
members are included in the output. This option is usually suppressed because it enlarges the
size of the report.
Non-critical load cases
The majority of the report for a steel member design gives information about the governing
failure mode and the critical load case. A summary showing the performance of all of the
other load cases can also be included if required. The non-critical load cases summary
includes the load factor and the failure mode for each load case.
A description of the failure mode for each load case does not necessarily indicate that
failure has occurred. It simply indicates the failure mode if the loads were increased enough
to cause failure.
Connection symbols notation
Steel connection design reports allow you to optionally include a summary sheet of the
symbols used in the report together with a brief description of each.
Connection specifications
This allows you to include or suppress the list of detailed specifications for the bolts, plates,
welds, stiffeners and cleats from the detailed output reports.
Connection calculations
This setting allows you to include or suppress the loads, stresses, capacities, factors and other
calculated values from the detailed output reports.
Warnings and notes
This check box allows you to suppress warning messages and notes relating to the design
results which sometimes appear in output reports.
Pass/fail criteria
For output of steel member and connection design results you can set the "Pass/fail criteria"
value to include only the members/connections which have passed, only the ones which have
failed, or all members/connections.
After completing the fields in the above form, you can click the Ok (if viewing), Print, Print
preview or Page setup buttons.
708
Output
Page setup
You can access the page setup form by selecting "Page Setup" from the File menu or clicking
the "Page Setup" button on the "Print Text Report" or "Print Graphics" forms.
The page setup form gives you full control over the printer selection, paper size, orientation,
margins, layout, scales and output format for both text and graphics.
There are separate tabs for text and graphics settings, however if the "Keep text and graphics
common items the same" check box is selected then items that are common to both text and
graphics only need to be changed in one tab rather than both.
If you want the text and graphics settings to be different then you must de-select the
"Keep text and graphics common items the same" check box before making the changes.
If you want to include your own logo in printed output, you should create a logo image file in
JPG format, install it with the SPACE GASS utility tool, and then select either of the "Logo
on first page only" or "Logo all pages" check boxes in the page setup form below. For best
results, make the image file large enough so that it contains enough pixels for a printer
resolution of 300 dpi or more. For example, if your printer operates at 600 dpi and you want
the printed logo height to be 20mm, your logo image file will need to be at least 472 pixels in
height (ie. 600/25.4x20). Regardless of the size of your logo image file, it will be scaled to
print at the exact height you specify in the page setup form.
709
710
Output
711
View text report

You can view a text report by clicking the
toolbar button and then selecting "View Text
Report" from the floating menu, or selecting "View Text Report" from the Output menu.
You must first select the data that you want to view, after which the report viewer is displayed
as follows.
The report viewer allows you to view any of the input or output data in an easy-to-read
format. The side menu lets you go directly to any part of the report or hide any sections of the
report before printing via the button located just above the side menu.
712
Output
Print preview
You can generate a print preview by clicking the "Print Preview" button in the "View Text
Report", "Print Text Report" or "Print Graphics" forms.
The print preview allows you to see exactly how the output will appear on your printer. For
text reports, the side menu lets you go directly to any part of the report or hide any sections of
the report before printing.
You can output direct to the printer or you can output to a text, PDF, HTML or picture file.
713
714
Output
Print text report

You can print a text report by clicking the
toolbar button and then selecting "Print Text
Report" from the floating menu, or selecting "Print Text Report" from the Output menu.
You must first select the data that you want to print, after which the print is produced.
715
Print graphics
You can print graphics by clicking the
toolbar button and then selecting "Print Graphics"
from the floating menu, or selecting "Print Graphics" from the Output menu.
Scale
Specify the desired hardcopy scale or leave it at zero for automatic scale to fit. For example,
type in a value of 100 for a 1:100 scale.
Title
This is simply a description which you can use to describe the particular view that is being
printed. It is placed near the bottom-left corner of the hardcopy and can be left blank if it is
not required.
After completing the fields in the above form, you can click the Print, Print preview or Page
setup buttons.
716
Output
The status report

A status report showing the actual problem size and the problem size limits can be included at
the start of each output report. It shows the number of nodes, members, restraints, sections,
materials, constraints, loads, load cases and members with design data. It also shows the static
and dynamic analysis status, ill-conditioning status, non-linear convergence, frontwidth, total
degrees of freedom, whether there has been a steel or concrete design or check and the design
code used. The status report can be suppressed if it is not required.
717
Standard Libraries
Standard libraries
SPACE GASS is supplied with libraries of standard sections, materials, bolts, plates, welds,
spectral curves, reinforcing bars and moving load vehicles.
The libraries can be accessed by SPACE GASS for rapid and convenient input of standard
properties. They are also scanned frequently during analysis and design operations.
You can get access to the libraries and retrieve data via the built-in library editor by clicking
the
button at various locations throughout SPACE GASS. You can also access the
library editor by choosing "Edit Libraries" from the File menu. The library editor is shown
below.
You cannot modify any of the standard libraries supplied with SPACE GASS, however you
can create your own custom libraries and edit them without restriction. You can also copy
719

data from the standard libraries into your custom libraries. For more information, refer to The
library editor.
720
Standard Libraries
The library editor

You can open the library editor from the File menu or by clicking the
button from
various places within SPACE GASS. If opened from the File menu, the library editor gives
you access to all types of library data (eg. sections, materials, bolts, plates, welds, reinforcing
bars, spectral curves and moving load vehicles). If opened via the
button from an area of
SPACE GASS that is working with a specific type of data (eg. section property data), the
library editor gives you access only to the applicable library types (eg. section property
libraries).
Custom libraries
You cannot edit or delete standard libraries (shown black in the library tree), however you can
create and edit your own custom libraries (shown blue in the library tree). To create a custom
library, click the appropriate library type in the library tree (eg. Section Libraries) and then
click the "Add Library" button at the bottom of the library editor. Alternatively, you can rightclick on "Section Libraries" in the tree and then select "New Library".
721
Similarly, for section libraries you can add groups (sub-categories) by clicking the "Add
Group" button at the bottom or by right-clicking on the custom library name and then
selecting "New Group".
Once a custom library has been created, you can add data by clicking the appropriate "Add"
button at the bottom or by right-clicking on the custom library, selecting the appropriate
"New" item and then entering the required data. For section libraries, new sections can be
added via the shape builder which automatically opens when you click the "Add Section"
button. Sections can also be edited by clicking the shape builder button
corner of the library editor.
near the top-right
You can also drag library items from a standard or custom library into a custom library. For
section libraries, you can even drag a whole group into a custom library. If you hold down the
Ctrl key while dragging then the items will be copied rather than being moved.
For information on how to import or export library data in other formats, refer to Importing
and exporting.
For information on how to import SPACE GASS 10 or older libraries, refer to Importing old
libraries.
722
Standard Libraries
Importing and exporting

Data can be imported into custom libraries or exported from standard or custom libraries by
opening the library editor, right-clicking on the desired library in the library editor tree and
then selecting the appropriate Import or Export option. If you wish to create a custom library
by importing data from another source, it must be in a text or MS-Excel file formatted
correctly for SPACE GASS. If you are not sure what the correct format is, you should export
one of the standard SPACE GASS libraries to a file and then open the file to see how it is
formatted and then use that as a pattern for the file you wish to import.
For information on how to import SPACE GASS 10 or older libraries, refer to Importing old
libraries.
723
Importing old libraries

If you have custom libraries in SPACE GASS 10 or earlier formats, you can import them into
the current version of SPACE GASS by opening the library editor, right-clicking on the
desired library type in the library editor tree, selecting Import -> From Library and then
locating and selecting the library to be imported. Note that SPACE GASS 10 custom libraries
are always called SGCustomLib.MDB (or SGMoveC.dat for moving load vehicles) and are
usually located in the SPACE GASS 10 program folder (c:\Program files (x86)\SPACE
GASS\Exe or c:\Program files\SPACE GASS\Exe).
724
Standard Libraries
Section libraries
Section libraries contain the geometric and strength information for the sections they contain.
This includes the section name, shape type, section properties, dimensions, fabrication type
and material strengths. Section libraries are now capable of holding non-standard sections and
sections built from up to 10 shapes.
When importing section data from another source into a SPACE GASS section library, if you
are not sure what the correct format is, you should export one of the standard SPACE GASS
libraries to a file and then open the file to see how it is formatted and then use that as a pattern
for the file you wish to import.
Note the following requirements for section property data.
1. For sections that have webs or flanges, the y-axis is parallel to the web(s) and the zaxis is parallel to the flange(s). For other sections the y-axis is the vertical axis and
the z-axis is the horizontal axis. The y and z axes generally correspond to the minor
and major axes respectively, however this is not always the case.
2. Moments of inertia and plastic section modulii are for the principal axes.
3. The principal angle is positive when the principal axes are rotated anti-clockwise with
respect to the non-principal axes when looking at the cross section from a member's
node A end towards its node B end. Note that the sign of the principal angle is shown
reversed in the shape builder.
4. The centroid dimensions are the distances from the shape's reference point to the
centroid along the y and z axes. Reference points are shown as a red dot in the image
for each shape type in the Shape builder.
5. For column Tee sections, the dimensions are orientated the same as for beam Tee
sections (ie. the depth is parallel to the web) even though column Tees are rotated
through 90 degrees compared to beam Tees when used in a SPACE GASS model.
6. The "Section type" field must conform to one of the following:
Circular Bar
Square Bar
Rectangular Bar
Circular Tube
Square Tube
Rectangular Tube
I or H Section
Plate Web Girder
Channel
Beam Tee
Column Tee
Equal Angle
Unequal Angle
Cruciform
Box Girder
Wedge
Slice
Fillet
Points Shape
725

LiteSteel Beam
LSB Back-to-Back
Lines Shape
Triangle
Cee Shape
Zed Shape
Top Hat
Double Angled Short
Double Angled Long
Double Angled Starred
Polygon
Polygon Tube
Equilateral Triangle
Schifflerized Angle
726
Standard Libraries
Material libraries
Each material in a standard material library contains the following information.
1. Youngs modulus
2. Poissons ratio
3. Mass density
4. Thermal coefficient
5. Concrete strength
727
Bolt libraries
Each bolt in a standard bolt library contains the following information.
1. Diameter
2. Tensile strength (normal strength)
3. Tensile strength (high strength)
4. Tensile stress area - Cross-sectional area for calculating tensile stress
5. Shank area - Plain shank cross-sectional area
6. Core area - Core cross-sectional area
7. Minimum tension - Minimum bolt tension at installation
728
Standard Libraries
Plate libraries
Each plate in a standard plate library contains the following information.
1. Width
2. Thickness
3. Yield stress (normal strength)
5. Yield stress (high strength)
729
Weld libraries
Each weld in a standard weld library contains the following information.
1. Size
730
Standard Libraries
Reinforcing bar libraries

Each bar in a standard reinforcing bar library contains the following information.
1. Diameter
2. Yield strength
3. Area
731
Spectral curve libraries

Each curve in a standard spectral curve library contains the following information.
1. Damping factor (%)
2. Period, acceleration point pairs
732
Standard Libraries
Vehicle libraries
Each vehicle in a standard vehicle library contains the following information.
1. Vehicle name
2. X, Y and load data for each wheel, where X is the distance back from the front of the
vehicle to the wheel, and Y is the distance sideways from the centerline of the vehicle
to the wheel.
733

Portal frame analysis
This worked example considers the analysis of a typical 25m span haunched portal frame.
Linear (1st order), non-linear (2nd order), dynamic (frequency and response) and buckling
analyses have been performed and the results are presented in the computer printout at the end
of this appendix.
This appendix considers only the analysis of the portal frame. The portal frame member and
connection design is covered in Portal frame member design and Portal frame connection
design.
This example is loosely based on the design example used in the AISC publication by
Woolcock, Kitipornchai and Bradford (9). There are, however a number of significant
differences between this example and the AISC example which can be summarized as
follows.
Because SPACE GASS has facilities for projected length member loads, the live load
has been input over the plan rafter length rather than its inclined length. This was a
situation that the software used in the AISC example could not model.
Because SPACE GASS has facilities for automatically calculating haunch section
properties based on the rafter size and the size of the member from which the haunch
was cut, the haunch section properties are different. The AISC example simply
approximates the haunch to a 530UB82 for half of its length and a 410UB60 for the
other half.
SPACE GASS uses a value for gravitational acceleration of 9.8066, the AISC
example uses 9.82.
SPACE GASS uses grade 300 steel, whereas the AISC example uses grade 250 steel.
The purlins used in the AISC design example are assumed to be spaced at a
maximum of 1500mm, while the structural drawings elsewhere in the publication
show them to be spaced at 1200mm maximum. This SPACE GASS example uses
purlin spacings of 1200mm as they are shown in the drawings.
Because the members in the AISC example have been designed by hand, they have not been
able to take full advantage of some of the more calculation intensive and slightly more
efficient higher tiers offered by the SPACE GASS steel member design module.
The differences between this example and the AISC example prohibit the direct
comparison of results. However, if you wish to do so, you should first modify the SPACE
GASS example in accordance with the differences listed above. If you do the modifications,
you will find that the results of the two examples agree almost exactly.
735
Geometry and loads

The portal frame considered in this example has the following basic properties.
Building length:
Portal span:
Portal spacing:
Eave height:
Apex height:
Columns:
Rafters:
Haunches:
Roof and walls:
Static load data
Dead load (DL):
72m
25m
9m
7.5m
8.155m (3 roof pitch)
530 UB 92.4
360 UB 50.7
360 UB 50.7 (3m long)
Trimdek 0.47 sheeting
Sheeting and purlins 0.90kN/m (slope)

Self weight (calculated by SPACE GASS)
Live load (LL):
2.25kN/m (plan)
4.5kN concentrated at apex
Cross wind (CW):

(external)
6.30kN/m on windward columns

4.50kN/m on leeward columns
6.48kN/m uplift on windward 8m of rafter
3.60kN/m uplift on central 8m of rafter
2.16kN/m uplift on leeward remainder of
rafter
Longit. wind (LW1):

(1st internal frame)
4.14kN/m outward on columns

5.04kN/m uplift on rafters
Longit. wind (LW2):

(external suction)

Cross wind (IPCW):

(Internal pressure)

Longit. wind (IPLW):

(Internal pressure)

Load combination 1:
Load combination 2:
Load combination 3:
Load combination 4:
Load combination 5:
1.25DL + 1.50LL
0.80DL + CW + IPCW
1.25DL + CW - 0.96IPCW (ISCW)
0.80DL + LW1 + IPLW
1.25DL + LW2 - 6.50IPLW (ISLW)
The distributed live load is based on a roof area of 9m x 25m = 225sqm which requires a
distributed live load of 0.25kPa.
The wind loads are based on terrain category 3 (industrial area) for region B with Vu = 60m/s
and Vs = 38m/s. Taking into account the height of the rafters and purlins (200mm), the eaves
height is assumed to be 8m and the apex height is assumed to be 8.7m.
736
Dynamic frequency mass data

Dead load (DL):
Self mass (calculated by SPACE GASS)
Sheeting and purlins 91.77kg/m (slope)
Live load (LL):
229.43kg/m (plan)
458.86kg concentrated at apex
Total distributed mass: 91.77 + 229.43 = 321.20kg/m

Mass at nodes 3 and 11: 1.63/2.0*321.20 = 0.26 tonne
Mass at nodes 4 and 10: 1.63*321.20 = 0.52 tonne
Mass at nodes 5 and 9: (1.63/2.0+2.99/2.0)*321.20 = 0.74 tonne
Mass at nodes 6 and 8: (2.99/2.0+6.26/2.0)*321.20 = 1.49 tonne
Mass at node 7:
6.26*321.20+458.86 = 2.47 tonne
Dynamic response data
Spectral curve:
Damping:
Dynamic modes:
Direction vector:
Loading code:
Vertical direction:
Sign of the results:
Base shear:
Site factor:
Acceleration factor:
Importance factor:
Structural response factor:
Spectral curve multiplier:
Mode combination method:
1989 Newcastle earthquake, magnitude 6.5

5%
1,2 and 3
Dx=1.0, Dy=0.0, Dz=0.0
General
Y-axis
Signed to match first dynamic mode
Not less than 80% of total static force
2.0
0.08
1.0
4.5
0.017778
SRSS
Load combinations
The static load combinations are in accordance with typical strength limit state stipulations
(excluding earthquake loading) as follows.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.25G + 1.5Q
1.25G + Wu
0.80G + 1.5Q
0.80G + Wu
While these load combinations are no longer in line with AS1170, they have been retained for
compatibility with the AISC publication on which this example is based.
In this worked example it has been assumed that the distributed live load in load case 2
need not be considered to act simultaneously with any wind load. The structure will be
designed to support either the distributed live load or the wind load, whichever produces the
most critical effect.
Notes on the structure
Extra nodes have been positioned at mid-height of the columns and at midspan of the rafters.
This is not absolutely necessary but it means that graphical displays will automatically show
737

the values of forces and moments at these points. Of course you can obtain the deflections,
forces and moments at these points without having to have nodes there by simply scaling
them off the diagrams or by obtaining an intermediate displacements, forces and moments
report, however these methods may sometimes be less convenient than having the values
displayed graphically.
Nodes have also been positioned at the mid-points and end-points of the haunches. These are
necessary so that the section properties can be varied along the haunch. In the above example,
the haunch has been modelled as a tapered 360 UB 50.
Only two prismatic members were used to approximate the tapered haunch because tests have
shown that this gives results very close to the exact solution. If you wish to experiment with
this, try inputting some frames with varying numbers of haunch segments, and compare the
results of the deflections and bending moments.
In fact, haunches do not have much effect at all on the bending moments in other parts of the
frame, however they do eliminate the need to design the rafters for the high bending moments
which usually occur at the knee. Haunches can also offer significant reductions in deflection
of the frame.
The frame, as modelled in SPACE GASS, is shown in the following diagrams.
Basic arrangement of nodes and members
738
Frame elevation
739
Method of input
The portal frame in this example was initially input as a single bay portal frame using the
structure wizard. This allowed quick and easy generation of the basic structural geometry,
restraints, section properties (including the haunch section properties) and material properties.
If the extra column and rafter nodes were not required, it would then have been a simple
matter to add the loads (graphically or using datasheet input) and then perform the analysis.
Node, member and plate numbering
In this example we wanted to match the node, member and plate numbering with the
numbering used in the AISC example. Therefore, it was necessary to modify the geometry
slightly so that the extra nodes were added and the nodes and members were re-numbered.
This was done graphically by simply subdividing the members and then renumbering the
structure with the extra nodes included. The rafter and haunch section properties were
assigned to members 3 - 10 by graphically changing the section property numbers of members
5, 6, 7 and 8 to section 2, members 3 and 10 to section 3, and members 4 and 9 to section 4.
Node restraints
When the structural geometry was established, node restraints of FFFRFR were applied to
support nodes 1 and 13, and restraints of RRFRRR were applied to rafter nodes 3, 6, 7, 8 and
11. The restraints on nodes 1 and 13 specified that the structure was pin-based, allowing
rotation about both the X and Z axes. The standard 2D frame pin restraint of FFFFFR was
not used in this case because it would have prevented rotation about the X-axis.
The rafter node restraints were applied to simulate the effect of wall and roof bracing that
would prevent any out-of-plane (Z-axis) movements at those nodes. A general restraint of
RRFRRR was not used in this case because it would have prevented the out-of-plane
movements of nodes 2, 4, 5, 9, 10 and 12 which, in real life, would be free to move in that
direction. Although no out-of-plane movements would occur in a static analysis (due to no
loads in that direction), they could occur in a buckling analysis and, if restrained, could result
in incorrect buckling load factors and effective lengths.
If no intermediate nodes were present that could move in the out-of-plane directions then a
general restraint could have been used.
Under normal circumstances it would not have been necessary to match the node and
member numbering with the AISC example. This would have removed the necessity to
subdivide the members, or change the member properties and node restraints as described
above.
Loads
The node and member loads were applied graphically. Although there are many member
loads, the graphical input facility made it very easy to input them en-masse. For most load
cases, it was simply a matter of placing a window around the members and then specifying
the load applied to them.
Self weight, combination load cases and load case titles were input using datasheets.
Input check
As a final check before the analysis was initiated, loading diagrams for each load case were
viewed followed by an output report of the complete structural data. Any errors in the data
were corrected and the model was then ready for analysis.
740
Analysis procedure
Linear analysis
The first analysis to be performed was a linear analysis for the primary load cases 1 - 7. The
results of this analysis were used to check frame deflections.
Non-linear analysis
Load cases 10 - 14 were analysed in a second run because the steel member design example is
based on factored combination load cases analysed non-linearly. Both P- and P- effects
were activated, while axial shortening wasnt. The linear analysis results for the primary load
cases were retained and the stiffness matrix was written to the disk.
A general optimization method was used, however this had little impact on the analysis
time due to the small size of the model.
The self mass of the portal frame was considered in association with mass load case 8 (which
incorporated the lumped masses due to both dead and live loading conditions). Six mode
shapes were requested.
The dynamic spectral response analysis was performed for spectral load case 9. The sign of
the results was determined automatically and all results were retained for those load cases
analysed linearly or non-linearly.
Buckling analysis
The default options were selected for the buckling analysis (ie. only one mode shape was
calculated).
741
Analysis results
The following summary was developed based upon the results:
Maximum sway deflection:
Maximum vertical deflection:
Maximum moment (column - knee):
Maximum moment (rafter - haunch):
Maximum moment (apex):
Minimum frame buckling load factor:
Natural frequencies (first 6 frequencies):
99mm (load case 3)

119mm (load case 4)
527kNm (load case 11)
8.23 (load case 14)
0.86, 1.82, 4.88, 6.27, 6.28, 6.76 Hz
The dynamic response spectrum analysis resulted in small displacements, forces and moments
that were insignificant in comparison with the static load cases.
The results of the non-linear analysis were then used to perform a steel member check and a
steel connection design.
As an interesting exercise, the results of the non-linear analysis were then compared with the
results of a linear analysis of the combination load cases. Load case 11 was still found to be
critical with the new moments being 542kNm at the knee, 223kNm at the end of the haunch
and 132kNm at the apex. You can see that the linear moments are actually greater than the
non-linear moments. This is also shown in the AISC example.
742
Graphical output
The following diagrams are examples of the graphical output that can be obtained from
SPACE GASS on the screen or printer.
Basic arrangement of nodes and members
Loading diagram (load case 3)
Deflection diagram (load cases 2, 3 and 4)
743
Bending moment diagram (load case 10)
744
Bending moment diagram envelope (load cases 10-14)
745
Dynamic mode shape (load case 8)
Buckling mode shape (load case 12) Note the out-of-plane buckling mode
746
Analysis input report

This report extract shows all of the frame analysis input data, including lumped masses and
spectral load cases.
ANALYSIS STATUS REPORT
---------------------Job name ...... Portal Frame Worked Example
Location ...... C:\Trunk\Shipping\Samples\Mixed
This is a 2D portal frame analysed and designed
example appendices.
Length units ......................... m
Section property units ............... mm
Material strength units .............. MPa
Mass density units ................... kg/m^3
Temperature units .................... Celsius
Force units .......................... kN
Moment units ......................... kNm
Mass units ........................... kg
Acceleration units ................... g's
Translation units .................... mm
Stress units ......................... MPa
Nodes ................................
13
Members ..............................
12
Plates ...............................
0
Restrained nodes .....................
7
Nodes with spring restraints .........
0
Section properties ...................
4
Material properties ..................
1
Constrained nodes ....................
0
Member offsets .......................
4
Node loads ...........................
1
Prescribed node displacements ........
0
Member concentrated loads ............
0
Member distributed forces ............
78
Member distributed torsions ..........
0
Thermal loads ........................
0
Member prestress loads ...............
0
Plate pressure loads .................
0
Self weight load cases ...............
2
Combination load cases ...............
5
Load cases with titles ...............
14
Lumped masses ........................
18
Spectral load cases ..................
1
Static analysis ......................
Y
Dynamic analysis .....................
N
Response analysis ....................
N
Buckling analysis ....................
Y
Ill-conditioned ......................
N
Non-linear convergence ...............
Y
Frontwidth ...........................
12
Total degrees of freedom .............
65
Static load cases ....................
8
Mass load cases ......................
2
for the SPACE GASS worked
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
32765)
32765)
32765)
32765)
32765)
5000)
999)
32765)
32765)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
10000)
10000)
10000)
250000)
10000)
(
(
10000)
10000)
747

STEEL DESIGN STATUS REPORT
-------------------------Members with design data .............
Member design or check ...............
Connections with design data .........
Connection design ....................
NODE COORDINATES (m)
---------------X
Node
Coord
1
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
4
1.630
5
3.260
6
6.250
7
12.500
8
18.750
9
21.740
10
23.370
11
25.000
12
25.000
13
25.000
Y
Coord
0.000
3.750
7.500
7.585
7.671
7.828
8.155
7.828
7.671
7.585
7.500
3.750
0.000
4
C
5
Y
( 32765)
AS4100
( 32765)
AS4100
Z
Coord
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
MEMBER DATA (deg,kNm/rad,m)

----------- (F=Fixed, R=Released) (*=Cable length)
Dir
Dir Dir Memb
Memb
Angle Node Axis Type Node A Node B Sect Mat
1
0.00
Norm
1
2
1
1
2
0.00
Norm
2
3
1
1
3
0.00
Norm
3
4
3
1
4
0.00
Norm
4
5
4
1
5
0.00
Norm
5
6
2
1
6
0.00
Norm
6
7
2
1
7
0.00
Norm
7
8
2
1
8
0.00
Norm
8
9
2
1
9
0.00
Norm
9
10
4
1
10
0.00
Norm
10
11
3
1
11
0.00
Norm
11
12
1
1
12
0.00
Norm
12
13
1
1
Node A
Fixity
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
Node B
Fixity
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
Length
3.750
3.750
1.632
1.632
2.994
6.259
6.259
2.994
1.632
1.632
3.750
3.750
NODE RESTRAINTS (kN/m,kNm/rad)

--------------- (F=Fixed, R=Released, S=Spring, *=General)
Rest
X Axial
Y Axial
Z Axial X Rotation Y Rotation Z Rotati
Node
Code
Stiffness Stiffness Stiffness Stiffness Stiffness Stiffne
1 FFFRFR
3 RRFRRR
6 RRFRRR
7 RRFRRR
8 RRFRRR
11 RRFRRR
748

13 FFFRFR
SECTION PROPERTIES (mm,mm^2,mm^4,deg)
-----------------Sect Name
1 530 UB 92.4
2 360 UB 50.7
3 360 UB 50.7-A
4 360 UB 50.7-B
Y-Axis
Mom of In
2.3800E+07
9.6000E+06
1.4404E+07
1.4399E+07
Shape
Source
I shape
Aust300
I shape
Aust300
Multiple shapes User
Multiple shapes User
Sect
1
2
3
4
Area of
Section
1.1800E+04
6.4700E+03
1.0845E+04
9.7132E+03
Sect
1
Shape
I shape
Trans Mir Rotate

No
No
0.00
D
533.00
I shape
No
No
0.00
356.00
I shape
No
No
0.00
356.00
Beam Tee
No
No
180.00
333.10
I shape
No
No
0.00
356.00
Beam Tee
No
No
Torsion
Constant
7.7500E+05
2.4100E+05
3.4719E+05
3.2708E+05
Mark
C1
R1
S3
S4
Z-Axis
Mom of In
5.5400E+08
1.4200E+08
6.4354E+08
3.6751E+08
180.00 178.002
Y-Axis
Shr Area
Infinite
Infinite
Infinite
Infinite
Bt/Bb Btw/Bbw
209.00
0.00
209.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (MPa,kg/m^3,strain/degC)

------------------Young's Poisson's
Mass
Matl Material Name
Modulus
Ratio
Density
1 STEEL
2.0000E+05
0.25 7.8500E+03
MEMBER OFFSETS (m)
-------------Memb Axes
Dxa
3
L
0.000
4
L
0.000
9
L
0.000
10
L
0.000
NODE LOADS (kN,kNm)
---------Load
X-Axis
Case Node
Force
2
7
0.000
Dya
-0.168
-0.106
-0.106
-0.168
Y-Axis
Force
-4.500
Z-Axis
Shr Area
Infinite
Infinite
Infinite
Infinite
Dza
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Dxb
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
Tt/Tb
15.60
15.60
11.50
11.50
11.50
11.50
11.50
0.00
11.50
11.50
11.50
0.00
Pri
Ang
0.
0.
0.
0.
Tw/
10.
14.
7.
11.
7.
11.
7.
11.
7.
11.
7.
11.
Coeff of
Expansion
1.170E-05
Concrete
Strength
Dyb
-0.168
-0.106
-0.106
-0.168
Dzb
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
749
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
MEMBER DISTRIBUTED FORCES (m,kN/m)

------------------------Load
Sub Axes
Start
Case Memb Load Sys
Position
1
3
1
GI
0.000%
750
Finish
Position
100.000%
GI
0.000%
100.000%
GI
0.000%
100.000%
GI
0.000%
100.000%
GI
0.000%
100.000%
GI
0.000%
100.000%
GI
0.000%
100.000%
10
GI
0.000%
100.000%
GP
0.000%
100.000%
GP
0.000%
100.000%
GP
0.000%
100.000%
GP
0.000%
100.000%
GP
0.000%
100.000%
GP
0.000%
100.000%
GP
0.000%
100.000%
10
GP
0.000%
100.000%
GP
0.000%
100.000%
GP
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
1.741
1.741
6.259
0.000
3.482
3.482
6.259
X Start/
Finish
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
6.300
6.300
6.300
6.300
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y Start/
Finish
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-0.900
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
-2.250
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
6.480
6.480
6.480
6.480
6.480
6.480
6.480
6.480
3.600
3.600
3.600
3.600
2.160
2.160
Z Star
Fini
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
10
0.000%
100.000%
11
GP
0.000%
100.000%
12
GP
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
10
0.000%
100.000%
11
0.000%
100.000%
12
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
10
0.000%
100.000%
11
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
2.160
2.160
2.160
2.160
2.160
2.160
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
4.140
4.140
4.140
4.140
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
5.040
4.140
4.140
4.140
4.140
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.440
751
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
12
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
10
0.000%
100.000%
11
0.000%
100.000%
12
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
0.000%
100.000%
10
0.000%
100.000%
11
0.000%
100.000%
12
0.000%
100.000%
SELF WEIGHT (g's)

----------Load
X-Axis
752
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1.440
1.440
1.440
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
4.680
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.900
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

Case
1
8
Accel'n
0.000
0.000
Accel'n
-1.000
-1.000
Accel'n
0.000
0.000
COMBINATION LOAD CASES

---------------------Load case 10: 1.25DL+1.5LL
1.250 * Load case 1: Dead load (DL)
1.500 * Load case 2: Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
Load case 11: 0.8DL+CW+IPCW
1.000 * Load case 3: Cross wind (CW)
1.000 * Load case 6: Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
Load case 12: 1.25DL+CW+ISCW
1.000 * Load case 3: Cross wind (CW)
-0.960 * Load case 6: Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
Load case 13: 0.8DL+LW1+IPLW
1.000 * Load case 4: Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
1.000 * Load case 7: Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
Load case 14: 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
1.000 * Load case 5: Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
-6.500 * Load case 7: Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
LOAD CASE TITLES
---------------Load
Case Title
1 Dead load (DL)
2 Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
3 Cross wind (CW)
4 Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
5 Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
6 Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
7 Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
8 Lumped masses (DL+LL)
9 Spectral load case
10 1.25DL+1.5LL
11 0.8DL+CW+IPCW
12 1.25DL+CW+ISCW
13 0.8DL+LW1+IPLW
14 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
LUMPED MASSES (kg,kgm^2)
------------Load
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
753
Z-Axis

Case
8
Node
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Mass
260.000
520.000
740.000
1490.000
2470.000
1490.000
740.000
520.000
260.000
Mass
260.000
520.000
740.000
1490.000
2470.000
1490.000
740.000
520.000
260.000
Mass
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Mass
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Mass
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
SPECTRAL LOAD DATA

-----------------Load Mode
Damping Mass
Direction Vector
Case Shape Spectral Curve Factor Case
Dx
Dy
Dz
9
1
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
8
1.000
0.000
0.000
2
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
8
1.000
0.000
0.000
3
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
8
1.000
0.000
0.000
Damping
Spectral Curve Factor Description
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0% Newcastle 1989, Dir=N-S, Mag=6.5
754
Mass
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Static analysis report (itemised)

This report extract shows the node displacements for primary load cases (1-9), the member
forces and moments for combination load cases (10-14), and the node reactions for all load
cases. Note that SPACE GASS lets you choose any desired load cases for each part of the
report.
Although load case 9 is a spectral load case rather than a static load case, it is also included in
this part of the report because its results are in the same form as those of a static analysis.
NODE DISPLACEMENTS (mm,rad)
-----------------Load case 1 (Linear): Dead load (DL)
Node
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
-3.443
-1.988
-1.704
-1.392
-0.795
0.000
0.795
1.392
1.704
1.988
3.443
0.000
Y-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
-0.037
-0.069
-3.152
-7.573
-19.423
-35.597
-19.423
-7.573
-3.152
-0.069
-0.037
0.000
Z-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Rotation
0.001
0.000
-0.001
-0.002
-0.003
-0.004
0.000
0.004
0.003
0.002
0.001
0.000
-0.001
Load case 2 (Linear): Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
Node
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
-6.194
-3.698
-3.193
-2.629
-1.532
0.000
1.532
2.629
3.193
3.698
6.194
0.000
Y-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
-0.048
-0.097
-5.540
-13.435
-35.183
-66.190
-35.183
-13.435
-5.540
-0.097
-0.048
0.000
Z-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Rotation
0.002
0.001
-0.003
-0.004
-0.006
-0.008
0.000
0.008
0.006
0.004
0.003
-0.001
-0.002
Load case 3 (Linear): Cross wind (CW)
755
Node
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
63.213
99.246
98.835
98.245
96.822
93.373
92.581
90.748
89.618
88.460
43.844
0.000
Y-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.117
0.234
-3.476
-0.524
27.786
96.251
78.638
42.540
21.016
0.084
0.042
0.000
Z-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Rotation
-0.018
-0.014
-0.004
-0.001
0.004
0.013
0.005
-0.010
-0.013
-0.013
-0.013
-0.012
-0.012
Load case 4 (Linear): Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
Node
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
10.251
6.504
5.584
4.560
2.597
0.000
-2.597
-4.560
-5.584
-6.504
-10.251
0.000
Y-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.100
0.200
9.951
24.370
64.155
118.858
64.155
24.370
9.951
0.200
0.100
0.000
Z-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Rotation
-0.003
-0.002
0.005
0.007
0.010
0.015
0.000
-0.015
-0.010
-0.007
-0.005
0.002
0.003
Load case 5 (Linear): Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
Node
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
2.808
1.823
1.565
1.278
0.728
0.000
-0.728
-1.278
-1.565
-1.823
-2.808
0.000
Y-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.029
0.057
2.772
6.813
18.027
33.464
18.027
6.813
2.772
0.057
0.029
0.000
Z-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 6 (Linear): Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
756
Z-Axis
Rotation
-0.001
0.000
0.001
0.002
0.003
0.004
0.000
-0.004
-0.003
-0.002
-0.001
0.000
0.001
Node
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
9.127
5.925
5.087
4.154
2.365
0.000
-2.365
-4.154
-5.087
-5.925
-9.127
0.000
Y-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.093
0.186
9.010
22.143
58.586
108.759
58.586
22.143
9.010
0.186
0.093
0.000
Z-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Rotation
-0.003
-0.001
0.004
0.007
0.009
0.013
0.000
-0.013
-0.009
-0.007
-0.004
0.001
0.003
Load case 7 (Linear): Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
Node
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
1.755
1.139
0.978
0.799
0.455
0.000
-0.455
-0.799
-0.978
-1.139
-1.755
0.000
Y-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.018
0.036
1.733
4.258
11.267
20.915
11.267
4.258
1.733
0.036
0.018
0.000
Z-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Rotation
-0.001
0.000
0.001
0.001
0.002
0.003
0.000
-0.003
-0.002
-0.001
-0.001
0.000
0.001
Y-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
-0.001
-0.001
-0.001
-0.002
0.000
0.002
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.000
0.000
Load case 8 (Linear): Lumped masses (DL+LL)
Node
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
-1.257
-0.716
-0.613
-0.500
-0.285
0.000
0.285
0.500
0.613
0.716
1.257
0.000
Y-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
-0.020
-0.034
-1.166
-2.777
-7.050
-12.848
-7.050
-2.777
-1.166
-0.034
-0.020
0.000
Z-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
757
Load case 9 (Spectral) Spectral load case
Node
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.142
0.255
0.257
0.258
0.258
0.254
0.258
0.258
0.257
0.255
0.142
0.000
Y-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
0.001
-0.052
-0.105
-0.168
0.000
0.168
0.105
0.052
0.001
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
MEMBER FORCES AND MOMENTS (kN,kNm)

------------------------Load case 10 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+1.5LL
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P- P- 4 Itns, 99.988% Cnv (Res gov)
Memb
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Node
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
Axial
Force
77.150
72.892
72.892
68.634
44.163
43.693
43.728
43.261
43.249
42.445
42.439
40.765
40.765
42.439
42.445
43.249
43.261
43.728
43.693
44.163
68.634
72.892
72.892
77.150
Y-Axis
Shear
-40.644
-40.644
-40.644
-40.644
66.421
57.393
57.365
48.514
48.523
33.220
33.230
1.242
-1.242
-33.230
-33.220
-48.523
-48.514
-57.365
-57.393
-66.421
40.644
40.644
40.644
40.644
Z-Axis
Shear
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 11 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+CW+IPCW
758
X-Axis
Torsion
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
-153.483
-153.483
-305.488
-298.089
-196.504
-199.207
-112.024
-116.590
7.872
7.868
118.633
118.633
7.868
7.872
-116.590
-112.024
-199.207
-196.504
-298.089
-305.488
-153.483
-153.483
0.000

Memb
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Node
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
Axial
Force
-111.210
-113.935
-113.935
-116.660
-71.579
-71.697
-71.756
-71.869
-71.849
-72.025
-72.015
-72.381
-71.867
-71.501
-71.507
-71.332
-71.344
-71.231
-71.195
-71.077
-70.823
-68.098
-68.098
-65.373
Y-Axis
Shear
77.731
71.656
71.662
65.587
-113.084
-97.131
-97.084
-81.016
-81.028
-50.958
-50.973
-1.128
-8.690
32.142
32.122
49.258
49.241
58.257
58.302
67.204
-67.473
-33.048
-33.050
1.375
Z-Axis
Shear
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Torsion
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
-0.001
272.886
272.885
526.758
514.769
343.477
347.913
203.508
211.094
17.416
17.423
-127.088
-127.088
-50.702
-50.708
66.786
59.254
144.881
140.473
241.074
252.982
61.589
61.588
0.000
Load case 12 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+CW+ISCW

Memb
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Node
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
Axial
Force
13.908
9.650
9.650
5.392
38.036
37.852
37.854
37.677
37.676
37.402
37.401
36.829
37.439
38.010
38.015
38.289
38.299
38.476
38.449
38.633
53.057
Y-Axis
Shear
43.143
2.670
2.669
-37.804
3.417
3.126
3.103
2.989
2.998
3.723
3.728
-7.768
-3.883
-24.391
-24.384
-36.594
-36.583
-43.748
-43.771
-51.114
35.916
Z-Axis
Shear
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Torsion
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
759
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
86.625
86.625
21.162
27.534
33.511
31.166
36.738
32.760
43.657
43.658
42.300
42.299
-41.230
-41.230
-133.038
-128.995
-194.408
-192.028
-269.109
-275.580
12
12
12
13
57.315
57.315
61.573
35.943
35.941
35.968
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.467
-138.467
0.000
Load case 13 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+LW1+IPLW

Memb
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Node
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
Axial
Force
-54.034
-56.759
-56.759
-59.484
-55.536
-55.654
-55.684
-55.797
-55.787
-55.962
-55.957
-56.323
-56.323
-55.957
-55.962
-55.787
-55.797
-55.684
-55.654
-55.536
-59.484
-56.759
-56.759
-54.034
Y-Axis
Shear
14.709
33.609
33.609
52.509
-56.667
-49.234
-49.198
-41.651
-41.664
-27.223
-27.235
2.950
-2.950
27.235
27.223
41.664
41.651
49.198
49.234
56.667
-52.509
-33.609
-33.609
-14.709
Z-Axis
Shear
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Torsion
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
90.108
90.108
251.759
242.455
156.521
159.966
86.556
92.446
-8.640
-8.637
-81.824
-81.824
-8.637
-8.640
92.446
86.556
159.966
156.521
242.455
251.759
90.108
90.108
0.000
Load case 14 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW

Memb
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
760
Node
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
Axial
Force
86.713
82.455
82.455
78.197
65.332
65.148
65.187
65.010
64.996
64.722
64.715
64.144
64.144
64.715
64.722
64.996
Y-Axis
Shear
-28.268
-44.806
-44.806
-61.343
74.891
64.158
64.116
53.560
53.573
35.144
35.159
-3.363
3.363
-35.159
-35.144
-53.573
Z-Axis
Shear
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Torsion
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
-138.160
-138.160
-336.781
-325.836
-211.544
-215.576
-118.343
-125.205
10.888
10.882
114.887
114.887
10.882
10.888
-125.205

9
10
11
12
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
65.010
65.187
65.148
65.332
78.197
82.455
82.455
86.713
-53.560
-64.116
-64.158
-74.891
61.343
44.806
44.806
28.268
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-118.343
-215.576
-211.544
-325.836
-336.781
-138.160
-138.160
0.000
NODE REACTIONS (kN,kNm)

-------------Load case 1 (Linear): Dead load (DL)
Node
1
13
X-Axis
Force
10.293
-10.293
Y-Axis
Force
25.270
25.270
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Load
Reac
0.000
0.000
-50.540
50.540
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil
Resid
4.477E-13
4.547E-13
0.000E+00
4.405E-13
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
4.334E-13
Load case 2 (Linear): Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
Node
1
13
X-Axis
Force
18.261
-18.261
Y-Axis
Force
30.375
30.375
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Load
Reac
0.000
0.000
-60.750
60.750
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil
Resid
8.528E-13
1.116E-12
0.000E+00
3.411E-13
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
1.052E-12
Load case 3 (Linear): Cross wind (CW)
Node
1
13
X-Axis
Force
-70.889
-8.224
Y-Axis
Force
-73.554
-26.461
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Load
Reac
79.112
-79.112
100.014
-100.014
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
3.992
0.000
Equil
Resid
0.000E+00
4.405E-11
0.000E+00
2.018E-12
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
3.865E-12
761

Load case 4 (Linear): Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
X-Axis
Force
-20.355
20.355
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Force
-63.000
-63.000
126.000
-126.000
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil -1.478E-12
Resid 1.364E-12
0.000E+00
2.345E-13
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
9.948E-13
Node
1
13
Load
Reac
Load case 5 (Linear): Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
Node
1
13
X-Axis
Force
-4.820
4.820
Y-Axis
Force
-18.000
-18.000
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Load
Reac
0.000
0.000
36.000
-36.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil -4.370E-13
Resid 3.837E-13
0.000E+00
2.274E-13
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
3.695E-13
Load case 6 (Linear): Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
Node
1
13
X-Axis
Force
-15.667
15.667
Y-Axis
Force
-58.500
-58.500
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Load
Reac
0.000
0.000
117.000
-117.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil -1.393E-12
Resid 3.297E-12
0.000E+00
1.535E-12
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
1.080E-12
Load case 7 (Linear): Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
Node
1
13
X-Axis
Force
-3.013
3.013
Y-Axis
Force
-11.250
-11.250
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Load
Reac
0.000
0.000
22.500
-22.500
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil -2.647E-13
Resid 3.944E-13
0.000E+00
2.132E-13
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
2.025E-13
Load case 8 (Linear): Lumped masses (DL+LL)
762
Node
1
13
X-Axis
Force
3.777
-3.777
Y-Axis
Force
14.005
14.005
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Load
Reac
0.000
0.000
-28.009
28.009
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil
Resid
1.635E-13
3.340E-13
0.000E+00
7.816E-14
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
9.415E-14
Load case 9 (Spectral) Spectral load case
Node
1
13
X-Axis
Force
-0.118
-0.118
Y-Axis
Force
-0.239
0.239
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
Reac
0.236
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 10 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+1.5LL

Node
1
3
6
7
8
11
13
X-Axis
Force
40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-40.644
Y-Axis
Force
77.150
-0.003
0.002
0.009
0.002
-0.003
77.150
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.004
0.000
-0.004
0.000
0.000
Load
Reac
0.000
0.000
-154.300
154.300
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil
Resid
7.114E-11
1.508E-04
0.000E+00
8.702E-03
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
3.605E-03
Load case 11 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+CW+IPCW

Node
1
3
6
7
8
11
X-Axis
Force
-77.731
-0.005
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.008
Y-Axis
Force
-111.210
0.001
-0.001
-0.015
-0.006
0.009
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.001
-0.002
-0.006
-0.001
0.006
-0.001
763

13
-1.375
-65.373
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
Reac
79.112
-79.107
176.582
-176.582
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
3.990
0.000
Equil
Resid
5.348E-03
7.552E-03
0.000E+00
1.502E-02
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
6.465E-03
Load case 12 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+CW+ISCW

Node
1
3
6
7
8
11
13
X-Axis
Force
-43.143
0.003
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.003
-35.968
Y-Axis
Force
13.908
0.002
-0.001
-0.001
0.001
-0.001
61.573
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
-0.001
0.001
0.000
-0.001
0.000
Load
Reac
79.112
-79.112
-75.481
75.481
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
3.994
0.000
Equil
Resid
5.341E-04
3.230E-03
0.000E+00
1.762E-03
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
8.404E-04
Load case 13 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+LW1+IPLW

Node
1
3
6
7
8
11
13
X-Axis
Force
-14.709
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
14.709
Y-Axis
Force
-54.034
0.002
-0.002
-0.007
-0.002
0.002
-54.034
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
-0.003
0.000
0.003
0.000
0.000
Load
Reac
0.000
0.000
108.068
-108.068
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil
Resid
3.368E-11
1.201E-04
0.000E+00
6.997E-03
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
3.039E-03
Load case 14 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW

Node
1
764
X-Axis
Force
28.268
Y-Axis
Force
86.713
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000

3
6
7
8
11
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-28.268
-0.005
0.004
0.015
0.004
-0.005
86.713
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.006
0.000
-0.006
0.000
0.000
Load
Reac
0.000
0.000
-173.425
173.425
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil
Resid
8.475E-11
2.542E-04
0.000E+00
1.466E-02
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
6.321E-03
765
Static analysis report (enveloped)

This report extract covers the same information as the previous section except that the results
are enveloped. It allows you to quickly locate the maximum and minimum values together
with their coincident values.
Note the summary envelopes at the end of each section which show the overall maximums
and minimums for all selected nodes and members.
NODE DISPLACEMENTS (mm,rad)
------------------ (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
Envelope = Load Cases 1-9
and All Nodes
Node
1
766
Load
Case
2
3
X-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Rotation
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Rotation
0.002
-0.018
3
2
3
2
2
3
63.213*
-6.194#
63.213
-6.194
-6.194
63.213
0.117
-0.048
0.117*
-0.048#
-0.048
0.117
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.014
0.001
-0.014
0.001
0.001
-0.014
3
2
3
2
4
3
99.246*
-3.698#
99.246
-3.698
6.504
99.246
0.234
-0.097
0.234*
-0.097#
0.200
0.234
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
-0.003
-0.004
-0.003
0.005
-0.004
3
2
4
2
4
2
98.835*
-3.193#
5.584
-3.193
5.584
-3.193
-3.476
-5.540
9.951*
-5.540#
9.951
-5.540
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
-0.004
0.007
-0.004
0.007
-0.004
3
2
4
2
4
2
98.245*
-2.629#
4.560
-2.629
4.560
-2.629
-0.524
-13.435
24.370*
-13.435#
24.370
-13.435
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.004
-0.006
0.010
-0.006
0.010
-0.006
3
2
4
2
4
2
96.822*
-1.532#
2.597
-1.532
2.597
-1.532
27.786
-35.183
64.155*
-35.183#
64.155
-35.183
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.013
-0.008
0.015
-0.008
0.015
-0.008
3
4
4
2
3
2
93.373*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
93.373
0.000
96.251
118.858
118.858*
-66.190#
96.251
-66.190
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.005
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.005
0.000
3
4
3
2
2
4
92.581*
-2.597#
92.581
1.532
1.532
-2.597
78.638
64.155
78.638*
-35.183#
-35.183
64.155
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.010
-0.015
-0.010
0.008
0.008
-0.015
3
4
3
2
2
3
90.748*
-4.560#
90.748
2.629
2.629
90.748
42.540
24.370
42.540*
-13.435#
-13.435
42.540
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
-0.010
-0.013
0.006
0.006
-0.013
10
3
4
3
2
2
3
89.618*
-5.584#
89.618
3.193
3.193
89.618
21.016
9.951
21.016*
-5.540#
-5.540
21.016
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
-0.007
-0.013
0.004
0.004
-0.013
11
3
4
4
2
2
3
88.460*
-6.504#
-6.504
3.698
3.698
88.460
0.084
0.200
0.200*
-0.097#
-0.097
0.084
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
-0.005
-0.005
0.003
0.003
-0.013
12
3
4
4
2
4
3
43.844*
-10.251#
-10.251
6.194
-10.251
43.844
0.042
0.100
0.100*
-0.048#
0.100
0.042
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.012
0.002
0.002
-0.001
0.002
-0.012
13
4
3
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003
-0.012
3
12
7
7
6
1
3
4
4
2
4
3
0.234
0.100
118.858*
-66.190#
64.155
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
0.002
0.000
0.000
0.015
-0.018
0.000
0.000
99.246*
-10.251#
0.000
0.000
2.597
0.000
MEMBER FORCES AND MOMENTS (kN,kNm)
767

------------------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
and All Members
and All Sections
The following maximums and minimums are taken from either end of the member
Memb
768
Load
Case
Axial
Force
Y-Axis
Shear
Z-Axis
Shear
X-Axis
Torsion
Y-Axis
Moment
Z-Axis
Moment
14
11
11
14
11
10
86.713*
-113.935#
-111.210
82.455
-113.935
72.892
-28.268
71.656
77.731*
-44.806#
71.656
-40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
272.886
-0.001
-138.160
272.886
-153.483
14
11
11
14
11
14
82.455*
-116.660#
-113.935
78.197
-116.660
78.197
-44.806
65.587
71.662*
-61.343#
65.587
-61.343
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.160
526.758
272.885
-336.781
526.758
-336.781
14
11
14
11
11
14
65.332*
-71.697#
65.332
-71.579
-71.579
65.332
74.891
-97.131
74.891*
-113.084#
-113.084
74.891
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-325.836
343.477
-325.836
514.769
514.769
-325.836
14
11
14
11
11
14
65.187*
-71.869#
65.187
-71.756
-71.756
65.187
64.116
-81.016
64.116*
-97.084#
-97.084
64.116
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-215.576
203.508
-215.576
347.913
347.913
-215.576
14
11
14
11
11
14
64.996*
-72.025#
64.996
-71.849
-71.849
64.996
53.573
-50.958
53.573*
-81.028#
-81.028
53.573
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-125.205
17.416
-125.205
211.094
211.094
-125.205
14
11
14
11
10
11
64.715*
-72.381#
64.715
-72.015
40.765
-72.381
35.159
-1.128
35.159*
-50.973#
1.242
-1.128
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.882
-127.088
10.882
17.423
118.633
-127.088
14
11
64.715*
-71.867#
-35.159
-8.690
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.882
-127.088

11
14
10
11
-71.501
64.715
40.765
-71.867
32.142*
-35.159#
-1.242
-8.690
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-50.702
10.882
118.633
-127.088
14
11
11
14
13
12
64.996*
-71.507#
-71.332
64.996
-55.787
38.289
-53.573
32.122
49.258*
-53.573#
41.664
-36.594
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-125.205
-50.708
66.786
-125.205
92.446
-133.038
14
11
11
14
13
14
65.187*
-71.344#
-71.231
65.187
-55.684
65.187
-64.116
49.241
58.257*
-64.116#
49.198
-64.116
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-215.576
59.254
144.881
-215.576
159.966
-215.576
10
14
11
11
14
13
14
65.332*
-71.195#
-71.077
65.332
-55.536
65.332
-74.891
58.302
67.204*
-74.891#
56.667
-74.891
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-325.836
140.473
241.074
-325.836
242.455
-325.836
11
14
11
14
11
11
14
82.455*
-70.823#
78.197
-70.823
-70.823
78.197
44.806
-67.473
61.343*
-67.473#
-67.473
61.343
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.160
252.982
-336.781
252.982
252.982
-336.781
12
14
11
14
13
13
10
86.713*
-68.098#
82.455
-56.759
-56.759
72.892
28.268
-33.050
44.806*
-33.609#
-33.609
40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
61.588
-138.160
90.108
90.108
-153.483
1
2
1
3
2
2
14
11
11
11
11
14
86.713*
-116.660#
-111.210
-71.579
-116.660
78.197
-28.268
65.587
77.731*
-113.084#
65.587
-61.343
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
526.758
-0.001
514.769
526.758
-336.781
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis

-------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
and All Nodes
Load
X-Axis
Y-Axis
769

Node
1
Case
2
3
2
3
3
4
Force
18.261*
-70.889#
18.261
-70.889
-70.889
-20.355
Force
30.375
-73.554
30.375*
-73.554#
-73.554
-63.000
Force
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
5
3
6
3
2
3
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
2
3
3
4
1
6
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
3
4
2
3
6
3
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
2
3
4
2
2
4
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
2
3
6
4
4
3
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
4
2
2
4
4
3
20.355*
-18.261#
-18.261
20.355
20.355
-8.224
-63.000
30.375
30.375*
-63.000#
-63.000
-26.461
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
1
1
1
11
4
3
2
3
4
20.355*
-70.889#
18.261
-70.889
0.000
-63.000
-73.554
30.375*
-73.554#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
770

3
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

-------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
and All Nodes
Load
Case
10
11
14
11
11
12
X-Axis
Force
40.644*
-77.731#
28.268
-77.731
-77.731
-43.143
Y-Axis
Force
77.150
-111.210
86.713*
-111.210#
-111.210
13.908
Z-Axis
Force
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
X-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
Moment
0.000
0.001
0.000
0.001
0.001
0.000
12
11
13
14
12
11
0.003*
-0.005#
0.000
0.000
0.003
-0.005
0.002
0.001
0.002*
-0.005#
0.002
0.001
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.002
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.002
13
14
14
13
14
11
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.002
0.004
0.004*
-0.002#
0.004
-0.001
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.003
0.006
0.006
-0.003
0.006
-0.006
11
12
14
11
12
11
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.015
-0.001
0.015*
-0.015#
-0.001
-0.015
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
0.001
0.000
-0.001
0.001
-0.001
14
11
14
11
11
14
0.000*
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.004
-0.006
0.004*
-0.006#
-0.006
0.004
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.006
0.006
-0.006
0.006
0.006
-0.006
11
11
12
11
14
14
11
0.008*
-0.003#
0.008
0.000
0.000
0.008
0.009
-0.001
0.009*
-0.005#
-0.005
0.009
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
-0.001
-0.001
0.000
0.000
-0.001
13
13
10
14.709*
-40.644#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Node
1
-54.034
77.150
771
1
1
1
1
8
8
772
14
11
12
13
-28.268
-1.375
-35.968
14.709
86.713*
-65.373#
61.573
-54.034
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10
11
14
11
11
14
40.644*
-77.731#
28.268
-77.731
0.000
0.000
77.150
-111.210
86.713*
-111.210#
-0.006
0.004
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
0.000
0.001
0.006
-0.006
Bill of materials report

This report extract shows the bill of materials listing that can be produced by SPACE GASS.
BILL OF MATERIALS (m,m^2,kg)
----------------Memb
1
2
3
4
5
Sect
1
3
4
2
2
Qty
4
2
2
2
2
Section Name
530 UB 92.4
360 UB 50.7-A
360 UB 50.7-B
360 UB 50.7
360 UB 50.7
Unit
Length
3.750
1.632
1.632
2.994
6.259
Total
Length
15.000
3.264
3.265
5.988
12.517
Unit
Mass
347.362
138.961
124.458
152.070
317.869
Total mass
= 2856.165
Centre of gravity = 12.500,5.802,0.000
773
Tota
Mas
1389.45
277.92
248.91
304.14
635.73
Dynamic frequency analysis report

This report extract shows the natural frequencies and periods for each of the dynamic modes
within each mass load case. In this case there was only one mass load case which we analysed
for three dynamic modes.
DYNAMIC NATURAL FREQUENCIES (Hz,Sec)
--------------------------Mass
Case
8
774
Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
Natural
Frequency
0.862
1.823
4.879
6.275
6.277
6.757
Natural
Period
1.160
0.548
0.205
0.159
0.159
0.148
Frequency
Tolerance Iterations
0.000977
11
0.000842
13
0.000890
14
0.000596
14
0.000192
16
0.000766
14
Dynamic spectral response analysis report

This report extract shows the general results of a dynamic response spectrum analysis for
spectral load case 9. A dynamic spectral response analysis also calculates displacements,
forces, moments and reactions just like a static analysis and, for comparison purposes, they
are included with the static analysis results in this report.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE SPECTRUM (kN,kg,sec,Hz)
------------------------Spectral case 9: Spectral load case
Mass load case:
Direction vector:
Loading code:
Auto scaling of base shear:
Sign of the results:
Probability factor:
Hazard factor:
Structural ductility factor:
Structural perf. factor
Spectral curve multiplier:
Mode combination method:
Direction
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Dominant
Mode
1
2
1
Mode
Direction Shape
Vector
1
Vector
2
Vector
3
8
Dx = 1.000, Dy = 0.000, Dz = 0.000
AS1170.4-2007
Off
Mode shape 1 (Calculated)
1.000
0.080
2.000
0.770
0.0308
SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of Squares)
Total
Static
Total
Force
Mass
0.0864 10998.8020
0.5035 10998.8020
0.0097 1234.6723
MPF for
Dominant
Mode
92.652%
59.179%
0.000%
Total
Mass Part
Factor
98.894%
59.179%
0.000%
Base
Shear
0.218%
0.000%
0.000%
Damping
Factor
5.0%
5.0%
5.0%
Natural
Period
1.1603
0.5484
0.2049
Natural
Frequency
0.862
1.823
4.879
Total
Mass Part
Factor
92.652%
0.000%
6.241%
98.894%
Spectral Curve
NEWCASTLE 5%
NEWCASTLE 5%
NEWCASTLE 5%
775
Buckling analysis report

This report extract shows the buckling load factors and the member effective lengths for each
combination load case. The primary load cases were not included in the buckling analysis
because in real life they could not occur in isolation.
Note that member effective lengths are not calculated for load cases 11 and 13 because their
buckling load factors are greater than 1000 (beyond the upper limit specified at the start of the
analysis).
BUCKLING LOAD FACTORS
--------------------Load
at
Case
Rotn
10
(X)
11
12
(Y)
13
14
(Y)
Load
Node at
Mode
Factor
Tolerance Iterations Max Trans
11.137
0.007812
15
12 (Z)
13
1
1
>1000.0
13.848
0.007812
15
9 (Z)
1
1
>1000.0
8.199
0.007812
15
9 (Z)
BUCKLING EFFECTIVE LENGTHS (kN,m)

-------------------------Load case 10 (Linear): 1.25DL+1.5LL
Mode
1
Memb
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Pcr
859.200
811.779
487.541
482.688
477.352
468.334
468.334
477.352
482.688
487.541
811.779
859.200
Length
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Ly
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Lz
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Ly
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Lz
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 12 (Linear): 1.25DL+CW+ISCW

Mode
1
776
Memb
1
2
3
4
5
6
Pcr
196.552
137.588
529.091
526.567
524.103
520.293
Length
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Node
Max

7
8
9
10
11
12
528.319
532.181
534.761
536.945
789.717
848.681
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Ly
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Lz
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 14 (Linear): 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW

Mode
1
Memb
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Pcr
710.976
676.063
530.441
529.252
527.689
525.385
525.385
527.689
529.252
530.441
676.063
710.976
Length
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
777

Portal frame member design
This worked example considers the AS4100 member design of the 25m span haunched portal
frame which was analysed in the previous appendix. The design is based on the non-linear
analysis results of the combination load cases 10 - 14.
This appendix considers only the design of the portal frame members. The portal frame
analysis and connection design is covered in Portal frame analysis and Portal frame
connection design.
This example bases the member design directly on the forces and moments obtained from the
non-linear analysis. The non-linear analysis results for combination load cases 10 - 14 are
included in the static analysis report (itemised) of the portal frame analysis worked example.
The portal frame has wall girts spaced at 1200mm and 1700mm, and roof purlins spaced at
1000mm, 1200mm and 800mm as shown in the following drawing. The frame is fully
symmetrical about its centre.
779
In order to check deflections, the following maximum limits will be used.

Eaves sway limit for serviceability: h/150
Apex sag limit for dead load: L/360
Apex sag limit for live load: L/240
Apex deflection limit for: L/150
serviceability:
Eaves sway due to cross wind: 99*(38/60)**2= 40mm = h/188 (Ok).
(Vu = 60m/s, Vs = 38m/s)
Apex sag due to dead load: 36mm = L/694 (Ok).
Apex sag due to live load: 66mm = L/379 (Ok).
Apex uplift due to cross wind (96+109)*(38/60)**2 = 82mm = L/305 (Ok).
and internal pressure:
In order to define the steel member design data for the frame, the following design groups
were specified.
780
Group 1:
Left column
Members 1 and 2
Group 2:
Left rafter
Members 3, 4, 5 and 6
Group 3:
Right rafter
Members 7, 8, 9 and 10
Group 4:
Right column
Members 11 and 12
(Haunches have to be checked by hand)
Groups 3 and 4 were specified as members 10,9,8,7 and 12,11 (rather than 7,8,9,10 and
11,12) so that the positions and types of flange restraints could be referenced from the column
base and the narrow end of the haunch in similar fashion to groups 1 and 2. This was not
absolutely necessary, however it made the input of the restraint data for groups 3 and 4
identical to the data for groups 1 and 2.
In the diagram above, the thick grey lines show the four design groups. They are drawn short
of their ends so that you can easily see where they start and finish.
Even though the haunches cant be design or checked (because of their varying properties and
non-standard shape), they have been included in the rafter groups 2 and 3. They have,
however, been excluded from the portion of the rafter being designed or checked by using an
I (ignore) zone in the flange restraint data. If the haunch members had simply been omitted
from the rafter groups then the group lengths would have been shorter and the compression
and bending effective lengths could have been underestimated.
All compression effective lengths were calculated by the buckling analysis and automatically
transferred into the member design. The advantage of doing it this way is that different
effective lengths can be used for each design load case. The alternative is to manually input
the effective lengths, however they are then used for every design load case and the design is
usually not as efficient.
The minor axis (out-of-plane) compression effective lengths were also specified as being
braced at each end due to wall and roof bracing that prevents any out-of-plane buckling at the
rafter ends. This has the effect of limiting the minor axis compression effective lengths to no
longer than the rafter group length.
Flange restraints for the columns were placed on the outside (top) flange at each end and at
each girt location. Inside (bottom) flange restraints were placed at the column ends. There are
no column fly braces and therefore no intermediate inside flange restraints were applied.
For each column, the column base plate was assumed to provide full restraint to both column
flanges and hence restraint codes of F (full) were specified for both column flanges at the
base.
781

Because wall bracing and an eaves strut effectively prevented lateral deflection of both
flanges at the top of the column and because the rafter provided partial (or full) twist restraint,
the restraints applied to the top of the column were assumed to be F (full).
In addition, the stiffness of the haunch meant that the restraining effect of the rafter could be
considered to be applied at the bottom of the haunch, hence additional flange restraints
identical to those at the top of the column were applied to both column flanges at the base of
the haunch. An I (ignore) continuous restraint was also applied to the segment from the
bottom of the haunch to the top of the column so that it would be ignored during the design.
Top flange restraints of L (lateral) were positioned at each purlin location in the rafter design
groups, except that the purlins close to the end of the haunch and near the apex were
conservatively assumed to be at the ends of the haunch and at the apex. Bottom flange
restraints were also positioned at the ends of the haunch and at midspan of the rafter design
groups to coincide with fly braces at those locations. Restraint codes of I (ignore) were
positioned between the first two rafter flange restraints so that the haunches could be excluded
from the calculations.
Fly braces were located at the face of the columns and at the apex, and hence the top and
bottom flange restraints at the ends of the rafter design groups were assumed to be at least F
(full).
The above diagram shows the location and type of all the flange restraints.
Note that the effect of the fly brace at midspan could also have been taken into account by
specifying a full restraint at the fly brace location on the top flange and not specifying
anything on the bottom flange. A full or partial restraint on one flange causes SPACE GASS
to automatically place a partial restraint (at least) on the other flange (see also Effective flange
restraints). This method would, however increase the kt factor marginally.
All of the member design data was input graphically, however it could have been input just as
successfully via a datasheet or by importing it from a text data file. For information about the
graphical input procedure for steel member design data, see also Steel member input methods.
For detailed information about the actual member design data values and settings, see also
Steel member design data.
782
Member design results

The AS4100 member design module running in checking mode was then initiated and the
results are shown in the following computer printout.
The rafters are satisfactory with load factors of 1.15 and 1.05. The 530 UB 92.4 columns have
also passed with load factors of 1.28 on both sides.
The results of a steel member design or check can be shown graphically as in the above
diagram. The member colors matched to the legend show that the columns and left rafter have
passed with load factors greater than 1.10, while the right rafter has passed with a load factor
greater than 1.00.
In this example, because the approximate sizes of the columns and rafters were known in
advance, it was appropriate to simply run a steel member check rather than a design. If the
steel module had been run in design mode instead, the column members may have been
selected as slightly less than 530 UB 92.4 because of their load factors being 1.28 and quite a
bit greater than 1.00.
Thus, if you know that your initial analysis member sizes are close to the final design sizes,
the recommended procedure is to run a steel member check first rather than a design. If the
check results show that the analysis member sizes are almost correct then it is a simple matter
to manually change some of the analysis member sizes and then do a final check to verify that
they are correct.
Alternatively, if your analysis member sizes have not been chosen carefully, you should run a
steel member design and then choose "Update analysis member sizes" from the Steel menu
(see also Updating analysis member sizes) to update the analysis data and bring it in line with
the design data. You should then iterate the analysis-design procedure until the design
member sizes agree with the analysis member sizes.
783
Steel member design report

AS4100 1998 STEEL MEMBER SYMBOLS NOTATION
----------------------------------------This
report extract shows all of the steel member design input and output data.
Group
= An actual member in the real structure which consists of

one or more analysis members joined together end-to-end.
Segment
= A part of the total member length under consideration
(usually equals the portion between lateral restraints).
Load factor
= The ratio of the minimum loads which cause failure to
the actual design loads.
Grade
= Grade of steel.
Fy
= Yield stress of overall section.
Fyw
= Yield stress of web.
Fu
= Ultimate tensile strength.
Ltot
= Total group length.
Lseg
= Length of the critical segment in the group.
kt
(5.6.3)
= Twist restraint effective length factor.
kl
(5.6.3)
= Load height effective length factor.
kr
(5.6.3)
= Lateral rotation effective length factor.
Le
(5.6.3)
= Bending effective length for major axis bending.
Lx
(6.3.2)
= Compression effective length for major axis buckling.
Ly
(6.3.2)
= Compression effective length for minor axis buckling.
Lz
= Torsion effective length.
L/r
= Slenderness ratio for compression or bending.
Arf
= Area of bolt holes removed from flanges.
Arw
= Area of bolt holes removed from web.
An
= Net area of section. (Gross area less Arf and Arw).
Ae
(6.2.2)
= Effective area of section.
Kf
(6.2.2)
= Form factor for compression members.
Kt
(7.3)
= Correction factor for eccentric effects in tension members.
m
(5.6.1.1) = Moment modification factor for bending.
s
(5.6.1.1) = Bending member slenderness reduction factor.
cx (6.3.3)
= Compression member slenderness reduction factor (major).
cy (6.3.3)
= Compression member slenderness reduction factor (minor).
b
(6.3.3)
= Compression member section constant.
me (8.4.4.1) = Ratio of major axis moments at ends of segment.
mx (8.4.2.2) = Ratio of major axis moments at ends of member.
my (8.4.2.2) = Ratio of minor axis moments at ends of segment.
(8.3.4)
= Index.
(3.4)
= Capacity factor.
N*
= Design axial force (+ve=compression).
Vx*
= Design major axis shear force (not considered).
Vy*
= Design minor axis shear force.
Mx*
= Design major axis bending moment.
My*
= Design minor axis bending moment.
Nt (7.2)
= Section capacity in tension.
Ns (6.2)
= Section capacity in compression.
Ncx (6.3.3)
= Major axis member capacity in compression.
Ncy (6.3.3)
= Minor axis member capacity in compression.
Vv (5.11)
= Shear capacity of web.
Mf (5.12.2)
= Moment capacity of flanges.
Msx (5.2)
= Section major axis moment capacity.
Msy (5.2)
= Section minor axis moment capacity.
Mbx (5.6)
= Member major axis moment capacity.
Mox (8.4.4)
= Member out-of-plane major axis moment capacity.
Mrx (8.3.2)
= Section major axis moment capacity reduced by axial force.
Mry (8.3.3)
= Section minor axis moment capacity reduced by axial force.
Mix (8.4.2.2) = Member in-plane major axis moment capacity.
Miy (8.4.2.2) = Member in-plane minor axis moment capacity.
Mtx (8.4.5.2) = Lesser of Mrx and Mox.
Mcx (8.4.5.1) = Lesser of Mix and Mox.
STEEL MEMBER DESIGN DATA (m)

-----------------------Restraint codes are: F => Fixed restraint
P => Partial restraint
R => Fixed and rotational restraint
S => Partial and rotational restraint
L => Lateral restraint
U => Unrestrained
C => Continuous lateral restraint
784
I => Ignore segment
Group: 1 Left column
Member list: 1,2
Compr'n eff lengths: Major axis => Calculate,
Minor axis
=> Calculate
N*
Vx*
Mx*
= -71.87 kN
=
0.00 kN (not considered)
= -133.15 kNm (Compact)
Vy*
My*
=
=
21.23 kN
0.00 kNm (Compact)
Portal Frame
0.00 kN (6.2)
0.00 kN (6.3.3)
Nt = 1746.90 kN
Ncx =
0.00 kN
(7.2)
(6.3.3)
Ns =
Ncy =
Noz =
(8.4.4.1)
Mo
199.02 kNm (5.6.1)
(5.11)
Mf
182.91 kNm (5.12.2)
Vv
0.00 kN
449.07 kN
Msx =
Mbx =
242.19 kNm (5.2)

133.79 kNm (5.6)
Msy =
Mox =
45.47 kNm (5.2)

139.30 kNm (8.4.4)
Mrx =
242.19 kNm (8.3.2)
Mry =
45.47 kNm (8.3.3)
Mix =
0.00 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Miy =
0.00 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Mtx =
139.30 kNm (8.4.5.2)
Mcx =
0.00 kNm (8.4.5.1)
Mx*
---- = 0.96 < 1.00
Mox
Member Design
(Pass) Member out-of-plane bending (8.4.4.2)
AS4100 1998 CALCULATIONS FOR GROUP 4 (*=Failure)

-----------------------------------Critical load case is
Section:
10, out of 10-14
530 UB 92.4 (I or H section, Rolled/SR)
Failure Crit
Mode Case
Start Finish
Pos'n Pos'n
Section
Member
Shear
7.000
0.000
7.000
14
10
11
Load
Load
Case Factor
10
11
12
13
14
1.28
2.91
1.44
2.83
1.33
Grade=
Fyw =
Ltot =
kt
=
kr
=
Lx
=
Lz
=
Lx/rx=
7.000
Axial
Force
Major
Shear
Minor
Shear
Major
Moment
78.76
77.15
-70.46
0.00
59.14
0.00
-62.88
-306.87
-285.35
220.00
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
300
320.0
7.500
1.03
1.00
35.676
7.000
164.6
2.08
1.28
14.89
(1.00)
Member out-of-plane bending (8.4.4.1)

Section bending about X-axis (8.3.2)
Section bending about X-axis (8.3.2)
MPa
m
(5.6.3)
(5.6.3)
m (Compression)
m (Torsion)
(Compression)
Fy
Fu
Lseg
kl
Le
Ly
=
=
=
=
=
=
Le/ry=
300.0
440.0
7.000
1.00
7.224
7.000
MPa
MPa
m (FP Top-Bot)
(5.6.3)
m (Bending) (5.6.3)
m (Compression)
160.9 (Bending)
=
0.0 mm^2
= 11800.0 mm^2
=
0.93 (6.2.2)
Arw
Ae
Kt
=
0.0 mm^2
= 10955.5 mm^2 (6.2.2)
=
1.00 (7.3)
1.80 (5.6.1.1)
cx
0.23 (6.3.3)
cy
0.25 (6.3.3)
0.00 (6.3.3)
me
0.00 (8.4.4.1)
0.37 (5.6.1.1)
mx
0.00 (8.4.2.2)
my
0.00 (8.4.2.2)
0.00 (8.3.4)
0.90 (3.4)
N*
Vx*
Mx*
=
77.15 kN (Slender)
=
0.00 kN (not considered)
= -285.35 kNm (Compact)
Nt
0.00 kN
Ncx =
671.54 kN
Noz =
0.00 kN
0.00
0.00
0.00
Failure
Mode
Arf
An
Kf
Vv
Minor
Load
Moment Factor
936.53 kN
Vy*
My*
=
=
40.64 kN
0.00 kNm (Compact)
(7.2)
Ns
(6.3.3)
Ncy =
739.85 kN
(8.4.4.1)
Mo
298.41 kNm (5.6.1)
(5.11)
Mf
455.47 kNm (5.12.2)
= 2957.99 kN
(6.2)
(6.3.3)
Msx =
639.90 kNm (5.2)
Msy =
92.24 kNm (5.2)
Mbx =
422.74 kNm (5.6)
Mox =
378.66 kNm (8.4.4)
Mrx =
639.90 kNm (8.3.2)
Mry =
92.24 kNm (8.3.3)
Mix =
621.73 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Miy =
82.62 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Mtx =
0.00 kNm (8.4.5.2)
Mcx =
378.66 kNm (8.4.5.1)
Mx*
---- = 0.75 < 1.00
Mox
(Pass) Member out-of-plane bending (8.4.4.1)
785

Portal frame connection design
This worked example considers the AS4100 connection design of the 25m span haunched
portal frame which was analysed in a previous appendix. The design is based on the nonlinear analysis results of the combination load cases 10 - 14.
This appendix considers only the design of the portal frame connections. The portal frame
analysis and member design is covered in Portal frame analysis and Portal frame member
design.
This example bases the member design directly on the forces and moments obtained from the
non-linear analysis. The non-linear analysis results for combination load cases 10 - 14 are
included in the static analysis report (itemised) of the portal frame analysis worked example.
The portal frame has wall girts spaced at 1200mm and 1700mm, and roof purlins spaced at
1000mm, 1200mm and 800mm as shown in the following drawing. The frame is fully
symmetrical about its centre.
787
788
Connection design results

The summary results of the steel connections design are as follows. More detailed reports can
also be produced.
Left Baseplate
Left Knee
789
Ridge
Right Knee
790
Right Baseplate
STEEL CONNECTION DESIGN DATA
---------------------------CONNECTION 1 - LEFT BASEPLATE
----------------------------Member:
Strength Grade:
Normal
Dimensions (LxWxT):
575x250x20 mm
Plate Strength Grade: Normal
Full Contact:
YES
Fy:
350 MPa
Welds:
Weld Strength Grade:
6 mm
Normal
Weld Category:
Weld Inside Flange:
SP
NO
Bolts:
Bolt Threads:
Bolts:
Pitch:
Prying Factor:
M24
Include
4
360 mm
0.71
Bolt Procedure:
Bolt Strength Grade:
Embedded Length:
Gauge:
Snug
Normal
195 mm
140 mm
Concrete:
Concrete:
Dimensions (LxWxD):
CONCRETE-20
775x450x395 mm
Type:
Rectangular
Grout:
Thickness:
20 mm
Fc:
25 MPa
Strength Grade:
Strength Grade:
Normal
Normal
CONNECTION 3 - LEFT KNEE

-----------------------Connection Type:
Bolted End Plate
Supporting Member:
Supported Member:
2
3
Haunch (D/Bb/Tb/Tw):
Haunch Length:
333.1/171/11.5/7.3 mm
3000 mm
Use Stitch Bolt:
NO
791

Stiffen web if necessary
Stiffen flange if necessary
Dimensions (LxWxT):
885x195x25 mm
Fy:
250 MPa
Bolt Procedure:
Bot Bolts (out/in):
Pitch inside:
Vert Edge Dist:
Dist to Flange in:
Bearing
High
2/4
80 mm
30 mm
65 mm
Length:
Fy:
0 mm
260 MPa
Weld Category:
GP
Length:
0 mm
Length:
Fy:
0 mm
260 MPa
Weld Category:
GP
Length:
0 mm
Fy:
250 MPa
8 mm
Normal
Weld Category:
GP
6
7
Strength Grade:
Strength Grade:
Normal
Normal
Fy:
250 MPa
Web Welds:
6 mm
Normal
Bolt Procedure:
Bot Bolts (out/in):
Pitch inside:
Vert Edge Dist:
Dist to Flange in:
Bearing
High
2/2
0 mm
30 mm
65 mm
Flange Weld Type:
Butt
Web Weld Type:
Butt
End Plate Stiffened:
NO
Bolts:
Bolt Threads:
Top Bolts (out/in):
Pitch outside:
Gauge:
Dist to Flange out:
Bolt Head Side:
M20
Include
2/4
0 mm
120 mm
65 mm
Default
Top Web Stiffener:

Dimensions (WxT):
84x12 mm
Plate Length:
Full
Welds:
Weld Length:
8 mm
Normal
Full
Bottom Web Stiffener:

Dimensions (WxT):
84x12 mm
Plate Length:
Full
Welds:
Weld Length:
8 mm
Normal
Full
Flange Doubler:
Position:
Both
Dimensions (LxWxT):
361.52x70x16 mm
Welds:
CONNECTION 7 - RIDGE
-------------------Supported Member 1:
Supported Member 2:
Dimensions (LxWxT):
550x200x25 mm
Flange Weld Type:
Butt
Web Weld Type:

Weld Category:
Fillet
SP
NO
Bolts:
Bolt Threads:
Top Bolts (out/in):
Pitch outside:
Gauge:
Dist to Flange out:
Bolt Head Side:
M20
Include
2/2
0 mm
120 mm
65 mm
Default
792
CONNECTION 11 - RIGHT KNEE

-------------------------Connection Type:
Bolted End Plate
Supporting Member:
Supported Member:
11
10
Haunch (D/Bb/Tb/Tw):
Haunch Length:
333.1/171/11.5/7.3 mm
3000 mm
Use Stitch Bolt:
Strength Grade:
Strength Grade:
Normal
Normal
NO
Stiffen web if necessary

Stiffen flange if necessary
Dimensions (LxWxT):
885x195x25 mm
Flange Weld Type:
Butt
Web Weld Type:

Weld Category:
Fillet
SP
NO
Bolts:
Bolt Threads:
Top Bolts (out/in):
Pitch outside:
Gauge:
Dist to Flange out:
Bolt Head Side:
M20
Include
2/2
0 mm
120 mm
65 mm
Default
Top Web Stiffener:

Dimensions (WxT):
86x6 mm
Plate Length:
Full
Welds:
Weld Length:
6 mm
Normal
Full
Bottom Web Stiffener:

Dimensions (WxT):
86x6 mm
Plate Length:
Full
Welds:
Weld Length:
6 mm
Normal
Full
Flange Doubler:
Position:
Both
Dimensions (LxWxT):
275x72x12 mm
Welds:
6 mm
Normal
Fy:
250 MPa
Web Welds:
6 mm
Normal
Bolt Procedure:
Bot Bolts (out/in):
Pitch inside:
Vert Edge Dist:
Dist to Flange in:
Bearing
High
2/2
0 mm
30 mm
65 mm
Length:
Fy:
0 mm
280 MPa
Weld Category:
GP
Length:
0 mm
Length:
Fy:
0 mm
280 MPa
Weld Category:
GP
Length:
0 mm
Fy:
260 MPa
Weld Category:
GP
Strength Grade:
Normal
Fy:
350 MPa
CONNECTION 13 - RIGHT BASEPLATE

------------------------------Member:
12
Dimensions (LxWxT):
575x250x20 mm
Full Contact:
YES
793

Welds:
6 mm
Normal
Weld Category:
Weld Inside Flange:
SP
NO
Bolts:
Bolt Threads:
Bolts:
Pitch:
Prying Factor:
M20
Include
4
360 mm
0.71
Bolt Procedure:
Embedded Length:
Gauge:
Snug
Normal
195 mm
120 mm
Concrete:
Concrete:
Dimensions (LxWxD):
CONCRETE-20
775x450x395 mm
Type:
Rectangular
Grout:
Thickness:
20 mm
Fc:
25 MPa
AS4100 STEEL CONNECTION DESIGN SUMMARY (*=Failure, #=Warning)

-------------------------------------- ($=Min design action non-compliance)
(D=Design, C=Check)
Plate or
Seat/Cleat
Bolts
Welds
Base Plate
575x250x20 mm
4M24
4.6N/S
6 mm CFW SP
3 D# Left knee
Plate
885x195x25 mm
Stiffener Top
84x12 mm
Stiffener Bot
84x12 mm
Flange Doublers
70x16 mm
7 D
Ridge
11 D
13 D
Conn
1 D
Title/Type
Left baseplate
11
0.76
12M20
Web welds
8.8N/TB FSBW SP
Flange welds
FSBW SP
11
0.92
550x200x25 mm
8M20
Web weld
8.8N/TB 6 mm CFW SP
Flange weld
FSBW SP
10
0.88
Right knee
Plate
885x195x25 mm
Stiffener Top
86x6 mm
Stiffener Bot
86x6 mm
Flange Doublers
72x12 mm
8M20
Web welds
8.8N/TB 6 mm CFW SP
Flange welds
FSBW SP
14
0.96
Right baseplate
Base Plate
575x250x20 mm
4M20
4.6N/S
10
0.57
6 mm CFW SP
AS4100 CALCULATIONS FOR CONNECTION 1 - LEFT BASEPLATE

----------------------------------------------------Design/Check:
Design
Critical load case:
11 out of 10-14
Utilization ratio:
0.76
Supported
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Base plate
= 575x250x20 mm (Fy = 250 MPa, Fu = 410 MPa)
794
Crit Stress
Case Ratio
530 UB 92.4
533 mm
209 mm
15.6 mm
10.2 mm
14 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
Pass
Weld:
= 6 mm CFW SP (Fu = 410 MPa)
Bolt:
= 4M24 4.6N/S
sp = 360 mm
lec = 195 mm
sg = 140 mm
Concrete:
CONCRETE-20
(Length = 775 mm, Width = 450 mm, Depth = 395 mm)
Grout:
Strength = 25 MPa, Thickness = 20 mm
Design actions: N*
Vy*
Vz*
My*
Mz*
Check 8:
=
=
=
=
=
111.21 kN Tension (Not used)

77.73 kN
0 kN
0 kNm (Not used)
0 kNm (Not used)
Base plate tension yielding

Yield line factor alpha = 8.86 mm
fNtp = 797.77 kN
fNtp > 111.21 kN
Check 9:
Pass
Capacity of weld at column base

fVw = 0.83 kN/mm
Resultant stress = 0.14 kN/mm
fVw > Resultant Stress
Check 10:
Pass
Capacity of anchor bolts in tension

fNtb = 320.81 kN
Nt = 111.21 kN
fNtb > Nt
Pass
fNct = 258.05 kN
fNtf = 112.96 kN
fNct > fNtf
Check 7:
Pass
Shear transfered by anchor bolts

nbv = 2
nbt = 4
fVfb = 51.43 kN
fVcex = 29.16 kN
fVcey = 60.8 kN
fVcp = 580.33 kN
Vres = 77.73 kN
Check 11:
fVfb > Vres / nbv
Pass
fVcex > Vx / nbt
Pass
fVcey > Vy / nbt
Pass
fVcpx > Vx / nbt
Pass
fVcpy > Vy / nbt
Pass
Anchor bolts for horizontal shear and tension

Check 10 must be satisfied:
Check 7 must be satisfied:
(A)^2 + (B)^2 < 1
A = Vres / (nbv x fVfb)
B = Nt / (fNtb)
AS4100 CALCULATIONS FOR CONNECTION 3 - LEFT KNEE

-----------------------------------------------Design/Check:
Design
Critical load case:
11 out of 10-14
Utilization ratio:
0.92
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
795

Supported
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
360 UB 50.7-A
689.1 mm
171 mm
11.5 mm
7.3 mm
11.4 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
Supporting
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
530 UB 92.4
533 mm
209 mm
15.6 mm
10.2 mm
14 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
Angle
= 2.99
End plate
= 885x195x25 mm (Fy = 250 MPa, Fu = 410 MPa)
Transverse stiffeners
Top
= 84x12 mm
Bottom
= 84x12 mm
Web welds
Flange welds
Top stfr. welds
Bot stfr. welds
=
=
=
=
FSBW
FSBW
8 mm
8 mm
SP (Fu
SP (Fu
CFW GP
CFW GP
= 410
= 410
(Fu =
(Fu =
MPa)
MPa)
410 MPa)
410 MPa)
Bolts
= 12M20 8.8N/TB (Fu = 830 MPa)
sg
sp2
spo
ae
=
=
=
=
120 mm
141.52 mm
65 mm
30 mm
sp1
sp3
spi
= 0 mm
= 80 mm
= 65 mm
Column flange doubler plate

Size
= 70x16 mm
Design actions: N*
Vy*
Vz*
My*
Mz*
=
=
=
=
=
71.58 kN Tension
-116.66 kN (Actual = -116.66 kN, Minimum = 40 kN)
0 kN (Not used)
0 kNm (Not used)
-514.77 kNm (Actual = -514.77 kNm, Minimum = 268.2 kNm)
Design moment > Member section capacity

Check 1: Detailing requirement
Plate depth
End plate width
bi >= bfb + 20 mm
bi <= bfc + 20 mm
Bolt gauge
sg <= bfb
sg <= bfc - 2.5 * df
sg >= 120 mm
Bolt pitches
sp1, sp2, sp3 >= 70 mm
Edge distance
aev >= 1.5 * df
aev <= 2.5 * df
aeh >= 1.25 * df
Check limits Table 3 - ASI Connection Design Guide 12
Warning
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 2: Flange welds to beam

Full penetration butt weld - No design check neccessary
Check 3: Web welds to beam
Check 4: Bolts at tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMbt > M* + Maxial*
0.88
Tension bolt moment capacity, fMbt = 613.24 kNm
End plate design moment, M* = -514.77 kNm
Maxial* = 22.22 kNm
Single bolt tension capacity = 162.68 kN
Sum of bolt lever arms = 1884.8 mm
796
Pass
Check 5: Bolts in shear

Design requirement:
ratio
fVfb = 555.77 kN > Vv = -116.66 kN
0.21
Total shear resisted by bolts, Vv* = -116.66 kN
Single bolt shear capacity, fVdf = 92.63 kN
End plate bearing capacity, fVbi = 276.75 kN
No. bolts effective in shear = 6
Check 6: End plate at tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMpt > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
0.82
End plate yield capacity, fMpt = 679.84 kNm
Bolt moment capacity, fMbt = 613.24 kNm
Section moment capacity, fMs = 502.87 kNm
Check 7: End plate in shear
Design requirement:
ratio
fVpe > Nft / nbp
0.48
fVpu > Nft / nbp
0.32
Horizontal shear yielding capacity, fVpe = 548.44 kN
Horizontal shear rupture capacity, fVpu = 835.79 kN
Total design tension force, Nft = 791.46 kN
Total of bolt rows resisting tension force, nbp = 3
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 8: Stiffener for end plate

N/A - No end plate stiffener
Check 9: Design capacity of stiffener welds to end plate
Check 10: Local bending of column flange at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMct > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
1.54
Stiffener
Column flange capacity, fMct = 362.3 kNm
Bolt group moment capacity, fMbt = 613.24 kNm
Yield line parameter, Yc = 5513.85 mm
Check 11: Local yielding of column flange at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwt > Nft
2.15
Stiffener
Unstiffened column web yield capacity, fRwt = 368.08 kN
Total design tension force, N*ft = 791.46 kN
Top flange to end of column = 97.95 mm
Check 12: Local yielding of column flange at beam compression flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwy > N*fc
1.75
Stiffener
Unstiffened column web yield capacity, fRwy = 414.94 kN
Total design compression force, N*fc = 725.87 kN
Check 13: Column web cripping at beam compression flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwc > N*fc
2.35
Unstiffened column web crippling capacity, fRwc = 309.22 kN
Stiffener
Check 14: Column web compression buckling

Design requirement:
ratio
fRwb > N*fc
1.03
Stiffener
Unstiffened column web compression buckling capacity, fRwb = 705.48 kN
Check 15: Unstiffened column web panel in shear
Design requirement:
ratio
fVc > Vc*
0.77
Design capacity of column web in shear, fVc = 939.44 kN
Column web pannel shear force, Vc* = 725.87 kN
Column axial capacity, fNs = 3398.4 kN
Pass
Check 16: Local bending of column flange with
797

flange doubler plates at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMctd > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
0.82
Column (flange+doubler) capacity, fMctd = 679.9 kNm
Bolt group design capacity, fMbt = 613.24 kNm
Flange doubler plate requirements:
bsd > [bfb - (twc + 2 * rc)] / 2
bsd < [bfc - (twc + 2 * rc) - 2 * fillet rad.] / 2
dsd > tfb + 5.0 * (ti + tfc + td)
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 17: Local yielding of column

web with plates at beam tension flange
N/A - no web with doubler plate at beam tension flange
Check 18: Local yielding of column web
with plates at beam compression flange
N/A - no web with doubler plate at beam compression flange
Check 19: Crippling of column web with
doubler plate at beam compression flange
Check 20: Compression buckling of column web with doubler plates
N/A - no web with doubler plate
Check 21: Column web panel with doubler plates in shear
Check 22: Column with transverse stiffeners
Design requirement:
fMcts > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
fRfts > N*ts
fRftw > N*ts
Geometry check for trans. stiffeners:
bs >= (bfb-twb) / 2
bs >= (bfb / 3 - twc / 2)
bs <= (bfc-twc) / 2
ds >= 1.8 * bs
ts >= 0.5 * tfb
fMcts = 908.99 kNm
fMbt = 613.24 kNm, fMs = 502.87 kNm
Nts = 423.38 kN
fRfts = 471.74 kN, fRftw = 460.89 kN
Yield line parameter, Ycs = 7371.78 mm
at tension flange
ratio
0.61
0.9
0.92

Design requirement:
Stiffener:
fRfcy > N*cs
fRfcb > N*cs
Welds to stiffeners:
fRfcw > N*cs - fRwy
bs >= (bfb-twb) / 2
bs >= (bfb / 3 - twc / 2)
bs <= (bfc-twc) / 2
ds >= 1.8 * bs
ts >= 0.5 * tfb
fRfcy = 894.54 kN, fRfcb = 1223.95 kN
Ncs = 725.87 kN
fRfcw = 1575.72 kN, fRwy = 414.94 kN
at compression flange
ratio
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
0.81
0.59
Pass
Pass
0.2
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 24: Column with transverse diagonal shear stiffeners

N/A - no web with transverse plate
AS4100 CALCULATIONS FOR CONNECTION 7 - RIDGE

-------------------------------------------Design/Check:
Design
Critical load case:
10 out of 10-14
Utilization ratio:
0.88
798
Pass
Supported
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
360 UB 50.7
356 mm
171 mm
11.5 mm
7.3 mm
11.4 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
Angle
= 5.99
End plate
= 550x200x25 mm (Fy = 250 MPa, Fu = 410 MPa)
Flange welds
= FSBW SP (Fu = 410 MPa)
Web welds
Bolts
= 8M20 8.8N/TB (Fu = 830 MPa)
sg
sp2
spo
ae
=
=
=
=
120 mm
141.52 mm
65 mm
30 mm
Design actions: N*
Vy*
Vz*
My*
Mz*
Check 1:
End plate:
Bolt gauge:
Edge dist.:
=
=
=
=
=
sp1
sp3
spi
-40.77 kN Compression
67.36 kN (Actual = -1.24 kN, Minimum = 67.36 kN)
0 kN (Not used)
0 kNm (Not used)
-118.63 kNm (Actual = -118.63 kNm, Minimum = 114.88 kNm)
Detailing limitations
bi >= bf + 20
sg <= bf
sg >= 120 mm
sp2 >= 70 mm
ae >= 30 mm
ae <= 2.5 bolt diameter
40 mm <= spo <= 75 mm
Spacing for bolt at haunch is not sufficient
Plate depth
Check 2:
Capacity of welds to beam flanges

Check not required for butt weld
Check 3:
Capacity of welds to beam web

Web axial force, Nw = -15.98 kN
Web bending moment, Mw = -18.77 kNm
Web shear force, Vy = 0.11 kN/mm
Web shear force, Vz = -0.61 kN/mm
Web resultant shear force = 0.62 kN/mm
Weld capacity = 0.83 kN/mm
Weld capacity > Resultant shear force
Check 4:
= 0 mm
= 0 mm
= 65 mm
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Capacity of bolts at tension flange

Number of tension bolts = 4
fMbt = 224.48 kNm
Mdesign = -118.63 kNm
Maxial = -6.77 kNm
fMbt > |MDesign| + Maxial
Check 5:
Pass
Capacity of bolts in shear

Total shear resisted (V*) = 67.36 kN
Bolts resisting shear = 4
Bolt capacity (fVdf) = 92.63 kN
Bolt group capacity (fVfb) = 370.51 kN
fVfb > V*
Pass
799

Check 6:
Capacity of end plate at tension flange

fMpt = 283.57 kNm
fMbt = 224.48 kNm
fMs = 229.75 kNm
fMpt > 1.11 x Min[fMbt, fMs]
Pass
Check 7:
Capacity of end plate in shear

Horiz. shear (Vh*) = 160.89 kN
Horiz. shear yield capacity (fVpe) = 562.5 kN
Horiz. shear rupture capacity (fVpu) = 863.46 kN
Min of [fVpu, fVpe] > Vh*
Pass
Check 8:
Requirement for stiffener to end plate

No stiffener - check not required
Check 9:
Capacity of stiffener welds to end plate

No stiffener - check not required
AS4100 CALCULATIONS FOR CONNECTION 11 - RIGHT KNEE

-------------------------------------------------Design/Check:
Design
Critical load case:
14 out of 10-14
Utilization ratio:
0.96
Supported
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
360 UB 50.7-A
689.1 mm
171 mm
11.5 mm
7.3 mm
11.4 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
Supporting
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Angle
= 2.99
End plate
= 885x195x25 mm (Fy = 250 MPa, Fu = 410 MPa)
Pass
530 UB 92.4
533 mm
209 mm
15.6 mm
10.2 mm
14 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
Transverse stiffeners
Top
= 86x6 mm
Bottom
= 86x6 mm
Web welds
Flange welds
Top stfr. welds
Bot stfr. welds
=
=
=
=
6 mm
FSBW
6 mm
6 mm
CFW SP
SP (Fu
CFW GP
CFW GP
(Fu =
= 410
(Fu =
(Fu =
Bolts
= 8M20 8.8N/TB (Fu = 830 MPa)
sg
sp2
spo
ae
=
=
=
=
120 mm
141.52 mm
65 mm
30 mm
410 MPa)
MPa)
410 MPa)
410 MPa)
sp1
sp3
spi
= 0 mm
= 0 mm
= 65 mm
Column flange doubler plate

Size
= 72x12 mm
Design actions: N*
Vy*
Vz*
My*
Mz*
=
=
=
=
=
-65.33 kN Compression
78.19 kN (Actual = 78.19 kN, Minimum = 40 kN)
0 kN (Not used)
0 kNm (Not used)
325.84 kNm (Actual = 325.84 kNm, Minimum = 268.2 kNm)
Check 1: Detailing requirement

Plate depth
End plate width
bi >= bfb + 20 mm
bi <= bfc + 20 mm
Bolt gauge
800
Pass
Pass
Pass

sg <= bfb
sg <= bfc - 2.5 * df
sg >= 120 mm
Pass
Pass
Pass
sp1, sp2, sp3 >= 70 mm
Pass
Bolt pitches
Edge distance
aev >=
aev <=
aeh >=
Check limits Table 3 -
1.5 * df
2.5 * df
1.25 * df
ASI Connection Design Guide 12
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 2: Flange welds to beam

Check 3: Web welds to beam
Design requirement:
SQRT(vz^2+vy^2) <= fVw
Web shear force, Vv = 78.19 kN/mm
vz = 0.8 kN/mm, vy = 0.06 kN/mm
fVw = 0.83 kN/mm
ratio
0.96
Check 4: Bolts at tension flange

Design requirement:
ratio
fMbt > M* + Maxial*
0.74
Tension bolt moment capacity, fMbt = 441.53 kNm
End plate design moment, M* = 325.84 kNm
Maxial* = 0 kNm
Check 5: Bolts in shear
Design requirement:
ratio
fVfb = 370.51 kN > Vv = 78.19 kN
0.21
Total shear resisted by bolts, Vv* = 78.19 kN
Single bolt shear capacity, fVdf = 92.63 kN
End plate bearing capacity, fVbi = 276.75 kN
No. bolts effective in shear = 4
Check 6: End plate at tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMpt > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
0.83
End plate yield capacity, fMpt = 589.88 kNm
Bolt moment capacity, fMbt = 441.53 kNm
Check 7: End plate in shear
Design requirement:
ratio
fVpe > Nft / nbp
0.41
fVpu > Nft / nbp
0.27
Horizontal shear yielding capacity, fVpe = 548.44 kN
Horizontal shear rupture capacity, fVpu = 835.79 kN
Total design tension force, Nft = 449.54 kN
Total of bolt rows resisting tension force, nbp = 2
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 8: Stiffener for end plate

Check 9: Design capacity of stiffener welds to end plate
Check 10: Local bending of column flange at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMct > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
1.4
Stiffener
Column flange capacity, fMct = 349.93 kNm
Bolt group moment capacity, fMbt = 441.53 kNm
Check 11: Local yielding of column flange at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwt > Nft
1.22
Stiffener
Unstiffened column web yield capacity, fRwt = 368.08 kN
801

Total design tension force, N*ft = 449.54 kN
Top flange to end of column = 97.95 mm
Check 12: Local yielding of column flange at beam compression flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwy > N*fc
0.65
Pass
Unstiffened column web yield capacity, fRwy = 787.64 kN
Check 13: Column web cripping at beam compression flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwc > N*fc
0.8
Unstiffened column web crippling capacity, fRwc = 638.73 kN
Pass
Check 14: Column web compression buckling

Design requirement:
ratio
fRwb > N*fc
0.72
Pass
Unstiffened column web compression buckling capacity, fRwb = 705.48 kN
Check 15: Unstiffened column web panel in shear
Design requirement:
ratio
fVc > Vc*
0.54
Design capacity of column web in shear, fVc = 939.44 kN
Column web pannel shear force, Vc* = 510.89 kN
Column axial capacity, fNs = 3398.4 kN
Check 16: Local bending of column flange with
flange doubler plates at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMctd > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
0.93
Column (flange+doubler) capacity, fMctd = 529.39 kNm
Bolt group design capacity, fMbt = 441.53 kNm
Flange doubler plate requirements:
bsd > [bfb - (twc + 2 * rc)] / 2
bsd < [bfc - (twc + 2 * rc) - 2 * fillet rad.] / 2
dsd > tfb + 5.0 * (ti + tfc + td)
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 17: Local yielding of column

web with plates at beam tension flange
N/A - no web with doubler plate at beam tension flange
Check 18: Local yielding of column web
with plates at beam compression flange
Check 19: Crippling of column web with
doubler plate at beam compression flange
Check 20: Compression buckling of column web with doubler plates
Check 21: Column web panel with doubler plates in shear
Design requirement:
fMcts > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
fRfts > N*ts
fRftw > N*ts
bs >= (bfb-twb) / 2
bs >= (bfb / 3 - twc / 2)
bs <= (bfc-twc) / 2
ds >= 1.8 * bs
ts >= 0.5 * tfb
fMcts = 669.9 kNm
fMbt = 441.53 kNm, fMs = 502.87 kNm
802
at tension flange
ratio
0.73
0.31
0.23
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass

Nts = 81.46 kN
fRfts = 260.06 kN, fRftw = 355.69 kN
Yield line parameter, Ycs = 6739.25 mm
Design requirement:
Stiffener:
fRfcy > N*cs
fRfcb > N*cs
Welds to stiffeners:
fRfcw > N*cs - fRwy
bs >= (bfb-twb) / 2
bs >= (bfb / 3 - twc / 2)
bs <= (bfc-twc) / 2
ds >= 1.8 * bs
ts >= 0.5 * tfb
fRfcy = 1044.81 kN, fRfcb = 1030.39 kN
Ncs = 510.89 kN
fRfcw = 1181.79 kN, fRwy = 787.64 kN
at compression flange
ratio
0.49
0.5
Pass
Pass
-0.23
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 24: Column with transverse diagonal shear stiffeners

N/A - no web with transverse plate
AS4100 CALCULATIONS FOR CONNECTION 13 - RIGHT BASEPLATE

------------------------------------------------------Design/Check:
Design
Critical load case:
10 out of 10-14
Utilization ratio:
0.57
Supported
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Base plate
= 575x250x20 mm (Fy = 250 MPa, Fu = 410 MPa)
Weld:
Bolt:
= 4M20 4.6N/S
sp = 360 mm
lec = 195 mm
Pass
530 UB 92.4
533 mm
209 mm
15.6 mm
10.2 mm
14 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
sg = 120 mm
Concrete:
CONCRETE-20
(Length = 775 mm, Width = 450 mm, Depth = 395 mm)
Grout:
Strength = 25 MPa, Thickness = 20 mm
Design actions: N*
Vy*
Vz*
My*
Mz*
Check 1:
=
=
=
=
=
-77.15 kN Compression (Not used)

40.64 kN
0 kN
0 kNm (Not used)
0 kNm (Not used)
Capacity for bearing on concrete support

Base plate area = 143750 mm^2
Geometrically similar area A2 = 261141.3 mm^2
fNc = 2092.5 kN >= Nc* = 77.15 kN
Check 2:
Pass
Capacity of steel base plate

fNs = 3774.15 kN >= Nc* = 77.15 kN
a1 = 34.33 mm
a2 = 41.4 mm
a4 = 83.44 mm
a5 = 742 mm
kx = 2.271942
X = 0.03850627
lambda = 0.2250999
ao = 41.4 mm
Pass
803
Check 3:
Weld length:
Weld stress:
Capacity of weld at column base

Lx = 418 mm
Ly = 947.6 mm
Vx = 0 kN/mm
Vy = 0.04 kN/mm
Plate fully contacts with column
SQRT(Vx^2 + Vy^2) = 0.04 kN/mm
Weld strength: fVw = 0.83 kN/mm

SQRT(Vx^2 + Vy^2) < fVw
Check 4:
Pass
Horizontal shear transfered by fiction

Slip factor = 0.4
Compression force = 77.15 kN
fVcf = 21.6 kN
Vres = 40.64 kN
fVcf > Vres is not satisfied - Anchor bolts check is required
Check 7:
Shear transfered by anchor bolts

nbv = 2
nbt = 4
fVfb = 35.71 kN
fVcex = 27.1 kN
fVcey = 55.5 kN
fVcp = 548.54 kN
Vres = 40.64 kN
804
fVfb > Vres / nbv
Pass
fVcex > Vx / nbt
Pass
fVcey > Vy / nbt
Pass
fVcpx > Vx / nbt
Pass
fVcpy > Vy / nbt
Pass
Cable Analysis
Cable analysis
This worked example demonstrates the input and analysis of a 30m tall, guyed mast. The
catenary cable equations are used to calculate the axial force in a nominal guy member, which
is then compared to the result obtained from SPACE GASS.
A non-linear analysis is the only type of analysis that can be performed on a structure
containing cable members due to their highly non-linear behaviour.
The guyed mast considered in this example has the following basic properties.
Height:
Number of guys:
Radial guy spacing:
Guy connections at:
Distance from base:
Guys:
Mast:
30m
3 sets of 3
120
15m, 22.5m and 30m
12m
10mm steel cable
406x9.5CHS
Dead load (DL):
Self weight (calculated by SPACE GASS)
The uniformly distributed dead load is not the only load that the structure would be subject to
in real life, however it is the only one considered here. The load cases are limited in order to
simplify the example.
In this example, the only type of load applied is an UDL. You
can apply point loads to cable members, however they must be applied as node loads rather
than member concentrated loads.
Elevation of guyed mast
805
Method of input
It was not possible to input the guyed mast using the structure wizard due to its unusual
geometric configuration. All of the data input was performed using either graphical tools or
datasheets.
Node restraints and member fixities
After the structural geometry was generated, node restraints of FFFFFF were applied to nodes
1, 5, 6 and 7 using the graphical restraint input facility. Even though the guyed members are
to be pin connected to the mast and to their base, a member end fixity of FFFFFF was
specified. This is because a member end fixity code of FFFRRR would yield the same result
as a code of FFFFFF for cable members (ie. cables have no moment capacity).
Loads
Loading due to the self weight of the structure was input using a datasheet.
Cables have no moment capacity. Hence, intermediate nodes on cables must have all
their rotational degrees of freedom restrained (ie. use RRRFFF).
Input check
As a final check before the analysis was initiated, an output report containing the complete
structural data was viewed. Any errors in the data were corrected and the model was then
ready for analysis.
806
Cable Analysis
Analysis procedure
A non-linear (2nd order) analysis was performed in which both P- and P- effects were
activated, while axial shortening was not.
807
Analysis results
In the absence of any lateral loads, the guys simply deflect vertically under self weight as
shown in the following deformed shape diagram.
SPACE GASS model
808
Cable Analysis
Deformed shape
This report extract shows all of the input data for the model, together with the intermediate
displacements, forces and moments for guy member 12. Following the report, we compare the
SPACE GASS results for member 12 with a theoretical formular.
ANALYSIS STATUS REPORT
---------------------Job name ...... Guyed Mast
Location ...... C:\Samples\Mixed
This is a guyed mast analysed for the SPACE GASS worked example appendices.
Length units .........................
Section property units ...............
Material strength units ..............
Mass density units ...................
Temperature units ....................
Force units ..........................
Moment units .........................
Mass units ...........................
Acceleration units ...................
Translation units ....................
Stress units .........................
m
mm
MPa
kg/m^3
Celsius
kN
kNm
kg
g's
mm
MPa
809
Nodes ................................
Members ..............................
Plates ...............................
Restrained nodes .....................
Nodes with spring restraints .........
Section properties ...................
Material properties ..................
Constrained nodes ....................
Member offsets .......................
7
12
0
4
0
2
1
0
0
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
32765)
32765)
32765)
32765)
32765)
5000)
999)
32765)
32765)
Node loads ...........................

Prescribed node displacements ........
Member concentrated loads ............
Member distributed forces ............
Member distributed torsions ..........
Thermal loads ........................
Member prestress loads ...............
Plate pressure loads .................
Self weight load cases ...............
Combination load cases ...............
Load cases with titles ...............
Lumped masses ........................
Spectral load cases ..................
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
10000)
10000)
10000)
250000)
10000)
Static analysis ......................

Dynamic analysis .....................
Response analysis ....................
Buckling analysis ....................
Ill-conditioned ......................
Non-linear convergence ...............
Frontwidth ...........................
Total degrees of freedom .............
Static load cases ....................
Mass load cases ......................
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
12
18
1
1
(
(
10000)
10000)
NODE COORDINATES (m)

---------------Node
X
Coord
Y
Coord
Z
Coord
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-12.000
6.000
6.000
0.000
15.000
22.500
30.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.392
-10.392
MEMBER DATA (deg,kNm/rad,m)

----------- (F=Fixed, R=Released) (*=Cable length)
810
Cable Analysis
Memb
Dir
Angle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Dir Dir Memb

Node Axis Type Node A Node B
Norm
Norm
Norm
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
1
2
3
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
Node A Node B
Sect Mat Fixity Fixity
2
3
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
Length
15.000
7.500
7.500
19.209
25.500
32.311
19.209
25.500
32.311
19.209
25.500
32.311
NODE RESTRAINTS (kN/m,kNm/rad)

--------------- (F=Fixed, R=Released, S=Spring, *=General)
Node
Rest
Code
1
5
6
7
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
X Axial
Stiffness
Y Axial
Stiffness
Z Axial X Rotation Y Rotation Z Rotati

Stiffness Stiffness Stiffness Stiffne
SECTION PROPERTIES (mm,mm^2,mm^4,deg)

-----------------Sect
1
2
Name
Mark
Shape
Source
406.4x9.5 CHS
Guy
S1
S2
Circular tube
Solid circle
Aust300
User
Z-Axis
Mom of In
Y-Axis
Shr Area
Z-Axis
Shr Area
Pri
Ang
1 1.1800E+04 4.6700E+08 2.3300E+08 2.3300E+08

2 7.8540E+01 9.8175E+02 4.9087E+02 4.9087E+02
Infinite
Infinite
Infinite
Infinite
0.
0.
Tt/Tb
Tw/
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
9.
0.
0.
0.
Sect
Sect
Area of
Section
Torsion
Constant
Y-Axis
Mom of In
Shape
Trans Mir Rotate
Circular tube
No
No
0.00
406.00
Solid circle
No
No
0.00
10.00
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (MPa,kg/m^3,strain/degC)

------------------Young's Poisson's
Matl Material Name
Modulus
Ratio
Bt/Bb Btw/Bbw
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Mass
Density
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Coeff of
Expansion
811
Concrete
Strength
STEEL
2.0000E+05
0.25 7.8500E+03
1.170E-05
SELF WEIGHT (g's)

----------Load
Case
X-Axis
Accel'n
Y-Axis
Accel'n
Z-Axis
Accel'n
0.000
-1.000
0.000
INTERMEDIATE DISPLACEMENTS (m,mm)

-------------------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
Memb 12, Case 1 (Non-linear):
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P-, P-, 2 Itns, 99.963% Cnv (Def gov)
Station
Location
0.000
3.231
6.462
9.693
12.924
16.155
19.387
22.618
25.849
29.080
32.311
Global X
Transl'n
0.000
-32.365
-57.964
-76.646
-88.253
-92.627#
-89.600
-79.003
-60.659
-34.387
0.000*
Global Y
Transl'n
-0.291
-25.718
-46.029
-61.036
-70.545
-74.352#
-72.247
-63.998
-49.374
-28.130
0.000*
Global Z
Transl'n
0.000
56.059
100.397
132.754
152.860
160.435*
155.192
136.838
105.066
59.561
0.000#
Local X
Transl'n
0.270
-0.162
-0.318#
-0.260
-0.053
0.233
0.526
0.738
0.786*
0.576
0.000
Local Y
Transl'n
Local Z
Transl'n
-0.108
-69.653
-124.732
-164.996
-190.083
-199.618#
-193.215
-170.474
-130.980
-74.303
0.000*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
INTERMEDIATE FORCES AND MOMENTS (m,kN,kNm)

------------------------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
Memb 12, Case 1 (Non-linear):
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P-, P-, 2 Itns, 99.963% Cnv (Def gov)
Station
Location
0.000
3.231
6.462
9.693
12.924
16.155
19.387
22.618
25.849
29.080
32.311
812
Axial
Force
Y-Axis
Shear
Z-Axis
Shear
X-Axis
Torsion
Y-Axis
Moment
Z-Axis
Moment
-1.560#
-1.542
-1.524
-1.506
-1.487
-1.469
-1.451
-1.433
-1.415
-1.397
-1.379*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Cable Analysis
The following catenary cable equation from Hibbeler (15) for a single catenary element can
be used to verify the results for member 12 shown above.
As you can see, it was necessary to resolve the UDL to the local axis of the member
(multiplying it by the cosine of the angle between the vertical). From this point the solution is
straightforward, the result varying by only 0.3% (ie. 1.469kN vs. 1.465kN).
See also Members.

813
Converting Old Jobs

Converting old jobs
SPACE GASS automatically converts all version 4.0 and newer jobs into the correct format at
the time they are opened. They are then saved with the usual <Job>.SG naming convention.
However, pre-version 4.0 jobs use multiple data files for each job, each of which has a
filename extension of "DAT". In order to open the pre-version 4.0 files with the current
version of SPACE GASS they must first be renamed to the new convention. This can be done
automatically with a batch program called SGName.BAT that is supplied with SPACE GASS.
In order to rename the old data files, you should first open a command (or DOS) prompt
window, go to the folder containing the old data files and then run SGName from your
SPACE GASS program folder. Assuming that the old files are in a folder called C:\OldData
and the SPACE GASS program files are in a folder called C:\Program Files\SPACE
GASS\EXE, the commands necessary to rename them are:
C:
CD\OldData
C:\Program Files"\SPACE GASS"\EXE\SGName
Once the files have been renamed, you can access them from the current version of SPACE
GASS as normal. Naturally, they still have to be converted to the latest format, however this
is done automatically as each job is opened by SPACE GASS.
815
Bibliography
Bibliography
1. Harrison H.B. "Computer Methods in Structural Analysis",
pp 248-251, Prentice Hall, 1973.
2. Ghali A. and Neville A.M.

"Structural Analysis A Unified Classical and Matrix Approach",
2nd edition, pp 364-374, Chapman and Hall, London, 1978.
3. AS1250 - 1981 "SAA Steel Structures Code",

Standards Australia, 1 The Crescent, Homebush, NSW, 2140, Australia.
4. AS4100 - 1998 "Steel Structures",

5. SABS0162 - 1984 "Code of Practice for The Structural Use of Steel",

The Council of the South African Bureau of Standards, Private Bag X191, Pretoria,
Republic of South Africa.
6. BS5950 : Part 1 : 2000 "Structural Use of Steelwork in Building",

British Standards Institution, 389 Chiswick High Road, London, W4 4AL.
7. NZS3404 - 1997 "Steel Structures Standard",

Standards New Zealand, Wellington Trade Centre,
Victoria Street, Wellington 1, New Zealand.
8. Clarke A.B. and Coverman S.H. "Structural Steelwork: Limit state design",
p 49, Chapman and Hall, London, 1987.
9. Woolcock S.T., Kitipornchai S. and Bradford M.A.

"Limit State Design of Portal Frame Buildings", 1st edition, AISC, 1991.
10. Clough R.W. and Penzien J. "Dynamics of Structures",

McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1975.
11. AS3990 - 1993 "Mechanical equipment - Steelwork",

12. Wittrick W.H. and Williams F.W. "Natural Frequencies of Elastic Structures",
Quarterly Journal of Mechanics and Applied Mathematics, Vol. XXIV, Pt. 3, 1971.
817
13. AS/NZS4600 - 2005 "Cold-Formed Steel Structures",

14. AS3600 - 2009 "Concrete Structures",

15. Hibbeler R.C. "Engineering Mechanics", 6th edition, Macmillan Publishing

Company, 1992.
16. AISC-ASD "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress Design",
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), June 1, 1989.
17. AISC-LRFD "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings", American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), Dec 1, 1993.
18. Eurocode 3 "Design of Steel Structures", European Committee for Standardization

(CEN), DD ENV 1993-1-1 : 2005.
19. Tessler, A. and Hughes, T.J.R., "A three-node Mindlin plate element with improved
transverse shear", Computer Methods In Applied Mechanics And Engineering 50
(1985) pp 71-101
20. Tessler, A. and Hughes, T.J.R., "An improved treatment of transverse shear in the
Mindlin-type four-node quadrilateral element", Computer Methods In Applied
Mechanics And Engineering 39 (1983) pp 311-335
21. Liu,, J, Riggs, H.R. and Tessler, A. , "A four-node, shear-deformable shell element
developed via explicit Kirchoff constraints", International Journal For Numerical
Methods In Engineering, Vol. 2000, 49, pp 1065-1086
22. Batoz, J., "An explicit formulation for an efficient triangular plate-bending element",
International Journal For Numerical Methods In Engineering, Vol. 18 (1982), pp
1077-1089
23. Batoz, J. and Tahar, M.B., "Evaluation of a new quadrilateral thin plate",
International Journal For Numerical Methods In Engineering, Vol. 18 (1982), pp
1655-1677
24. Hancock Gregory J., "Elastic method of analysis of rigid jointed frames including
second order effects", Steel Construction, Vol. 28, No. 3, September 19947
818
Bibliography
25. Hong Kong Building Department, "Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel
2011", Buildings Department 12/F-18/F Pioneer Centre, 750 Nathan Road, Mongkok,
Kowloon, Hong Kong
26. AISC 360-10, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings", American Institute of
Steel Construction (AISC), June 22, 2010
819
Index
2
2nd order analysis ................................. 484
See non-linear analysis ..................... 484
3
3D renderer ................................... 246, 458
A
A quick frontwidth calculation method 492
Absolute coordinates .................... 295, 323
Acceleration.......................................... 168
Align members ..................................... 276
Aligning plate axes ............................... 278
Alignment ..................................... 148, 285
Amplitude ............................................. 444
Analysis ................................................ 475
Buckling analysis ............. 502, 506, 508
Dynamic frequency analysis .... 514, 516
Dynamic response analysis ...... 522, 524
Static analysis ........................... 476, 494
Warnings and errors ......................... 531
Angle sections ...................... 132, 145, 547
Animation ............................................. 445
Annotation .................................... 448, 625
Aperture circle ........................ 29, 269, 283
Arc generation ...................................... 279
Area loads ..................................... 179, 280
Area of section...................................... 132
Attach ........................... 246, 269, 283, 285
Attachments .......................................... 116
Auto scaling of base shear .................... 524
AutoCAD.............................. 77, 79, 81, 94
Axes ...................................................... 102
Global axes ....................... 102, 107, 447
Local axes ......................... 102, 107, 453
Local axes for moments and shears ... 29,
312
Axial force distribution......................... 508
Axial forces .......................................... 478
Described.......................................... 478
Diagrams .......................................... 444
Sign convention ................................ 107
Axis limits ............................................ 312
B
Bar anchorage ....................................... 656
Base shear factor................................... 524
Bending effective lengths ..................... 547
Bending moments ................................. 478
Described.......................................... 478
Diagrams.....................................29, 444
Sign convention ............................... 107
Bends ................................................... 289
Bentley Structural .......................77, 79, 81
Bibliography ........................................ 817
Bill of materials ............................501, 773
BIM ...................................................77, 79
Bolts ......................623, 625, 636, 719, 728
Boundary conditions ............................ 129
See node restraints ........................... 129
Bracing..........................................223, 226
BS5950-1 2000 code specific items .... 600
Buckling analysis ................................. 475
Analysis ....................475, 485, 502, 508
Axial force distribution.................... 508
Cables .............................................. 506
Effective lengths .............................. 504
Load cases ....................................... 508
Load factor........................502, 506, 508
Messages.......................................... 494
Mode shapes .....................443, 502, 508
Node restraints ................................. 506
Results ......................................512, 776
Special considerations ..................... 506
C
Cables .................................................. 475
Analysis ............................475, 482, 484
Buckling analysis............................. 506
Chord length .................................... 119
Convergence .................................... 482
Converted to tension-only ............... 119
Damping ...................................482, 494
Fixity.........................................119, 482
Length .............................................. 119
Load stepping ...........................482, 494
Loading .....................160, 164, 168, 482
Members ...................................119, 482
Worked example .............................. 805
CAD ..................................................77, 79
CAD interface module ........................... 94
Calculator............................................... 26
Cartesian coordinates ....................295, 323
Catenary cables .................................... 482
See cables ........................................ 482
Centre of gravity ...........................501, 773
Changing the appearance of SPACE
GASS ............................................33, 34
Characteristic concrete strength ........... 146
Check boxes ........................................... 60
Chord length ........................................ 119
821

CIMSteel/2 file ........................... 77, 79, 81
CIS/2 file ................................................ 81
See CIMSteel/2 file ................ 77, 79, 81
Clean-up job ........................................... 68
Cleats .................................... 623, 625, 636
Click ....................................................... 57
Code check ........................................... 569
Codes .................................................... 562
Flange restraint ......................... 547, 562
Master-slave constraint..................... 148
Member fixity ................................... 119
Node restraint ................................... 129
Coefficient of thermal expansion ......... 146
Colors ............................................... 33, 34
Column and beam Tees ................ 144, 568
Combination load cases ........................ 169
Described.......................................... 169
Graphics ........................................... 290
Managing load cases ........................ 328
Text................................................... 206
Combined stress ratio ........................... 569
Limit ................................................. 569
Steel member design ........................ 569
Combo boxes .......................................... 60
Command buttons................................... 60
Command line options............................ 51
Compression effective lengths ..... 504, 547
Compression-only members 119, 481, 494,
516
Concrete beam design........................... 647
Described.......................................... 647
Designing and checking ........... 653, 664
Drawings .......................................... 662
Exporting .......................................... 664
Importing .......................................... 664
Input ................................................. 649
Load cases ................................ 649, 664
Minimum design actions .................. 654
Moment redistribution ...................... 657
Preferences ....................................... 669
Reports ..................................... 649, 664
Concrete column design ....................... 677
Biaxial bending ................................ 682
Confinement region .......................... 691
Described.......................................... 677
Designing and checking ........... 681, 693
Effective lengths ............................... 684
Exporting .......................................... 693
Importing .......................................... 693
Input ................................................. 679
Interaction diagrams ......................... 688
Load cases ................................ 679, 693
Minimum design actions .................. 683
Moment magnifiers .......................... 683
Preferences ....................................... 698
822
Reinforcement ................................. 684

Reports......................................679, 693
Voids................................................ 691
Configuring SPACE GASS ..............25, 36
Configuring the renderer........................ 36
Connect ................................................ 293
Connection design ............................... 623
Connectivity check .............................. 294
Constraint code .................................... 148
Context sensitive cursors ..................... 269
Continuous lateral restraint .................. 562
Contours............................................... 458
Control Panel ......................................... 34
Convergence 481, 482, 484, 494, 516, 569,
575, 717
Converting old jobs.............................. 815
Coordinate systems .............................. 102
Coordinates .......................................... 295
Absolute....................................295, 323
Cartesian ...................................295, 323
Polar..........................................295, 323
Relative .....................................295, 323
Copying ............................................... 328
Load cases ....................................... 328
Member loads .................................. 299
Member properties........................... 300
Node loads ....................................... 301
Node properties ............................... 302
Nodes, members or plates................ 296
Plate loads........................................ 303
Plate properties ................................ 304
Steel member properties .................. 546
Correction factors .................................. 32
CQC ..................................................... 524
Creating a new job ................................. 62
Critical flange ...................................... 582
Crosshair cursor ......................29, 380, 423
Crossing window ................................. 269
CSV file ............................................77, 79
Currents ........................................181, 411
Curved line resolution............................ 29
Custom libraries ................................... 721
Customizing
Property panels .................................. 45
Toolbars ............................................. 42
D
Damping .............................................. 174
Spectral curves................................. 174
Static analysis ...........................482, 494
Dashed lines ........................................... 29
Data entry .............................................. 60
Datasheet input .................................... 237
Dead loads ........................................... 230
Index
Deleting .................................................. 67
Jobs ..................................................... 67
Load cases ........................................ 328
Parts of the structure ................. 269, 305
Design ................................................... 535
Combined stress ratio
Steel member design............. 535, 592
Convergence ..................................... 535
...................................................... 578
Design segment535, 579, 580, 585, 586,
587, 592, 595
Lateral rotation factor ....................... 587
Load cases ................................ 535, 592
Load factor
Steel member design............. 535, 592
Load height factor ............................ 586
Member segment ..... 535, 579, 580, 585,
586, 587, 592, 595
Moment magnification ..................... 535
Section check.................................... 580
Segment ... 535, 579, 580, 585, 586, 587,
592, 595
Design actions .............................. 641
Design procedure .......................... 641
Minimum design actions ...... 625, 636
Steel member design
Assumptions ................................. 595
Check mode .................................. 595
Combined stress ratio ........... 535, 592
Described ...................................... 535
Design mode ................................. 595
Load factor............................ 535, 592
Section check ................................ 580
Segment535, 579, 580, 585, 586, 587,
592, 595
Stress ratio ................................ 535, 592
Torsional effects ............................... 535
Twist factor ...................................... 585
Development lengths ............................ 656
Diagram shading..................................... 29
Diagrams ...................................... 444, 458
Dialogue boxes ....................................... 58
Closing ............................................... 58
Moving ............................................... 58
Using the keyboard............................. 58
Dimensions ........................................... 332
Direction ............................................... 119
Angle ................................................ 119
Axis .................................................. 119
Node ................................................. 119
Vector ............................................... 174
Displacements ...................................... 478
Described.......................................... 478
Diagrams.......................................... 444
Sign convention ............................... 107
DOC file ................................................ 79
See MS-Word .................................... 79
Dongle ................................................... 11
See Hardware lock ........................11, 23
Doppler effect ...................................... 411
Double-click .......................................... 57
Drag ....................................................... 57
Draw .................................................... 306
DXF file ................................................. 94
Files ............................77, 79, 94, 95, 96
Layer names....................................... 29
Dynamic frequency analysis 172, 475, 514,
516
Frequency shift ................................ 516
Iterations .......................................... 516
Load cases ....................................... 516
Mode shapes ....174, 445, 514, 515, 516,
524
Natural frequencies .......................... 516
Results ......................................521, 774
Self mass.......................................... 516
Stiffness matrix ................................ 494
Worked example .............................. 735
Dynamic spectral response analysis ... 475,
522
Auto scaling of base shear ............... 524
Base shear factor.............................. 524
Load cases ....................................... 524
Mode combination method .............. 524
Results ..............................528, 529, 775
Sign of the results ............................ 524
Site factor......................................... 524
Site subsoil category ........................ 524
Spectral curve multiplier ................. 524
Vertical direction ............................. 524
Worked example .............................. 735
E
Eccentric effects............................547, 569
Compression members .................... 590
Tension members............................. 591
Edit mode ......................................343, 374
Effective lengths
Bending effective lengths ................ 550
Compression effective lengths..504, 549
Concrete column effective length .... 684
Steel member effective lengths504, 549,
550
Eigenvalue ....................................502, 514
Eigenvector ...................................502, 514
Elastic critical buckling analysis ......... 502
823

See buckling analysis ....................... 502
Elastic critical load analysis ................. 502
Elastic restraints.................................... 129
See node restraints ............................ 129
Elastic suppprts..................................... 129
End fixity .............................................. 482
See member fixity .................... 119, 482
End moment ratios and other factors .... 589
Enveloping............................................ 446
Graphics ........................................... 446
Reports ............................................. 705
Errors .................................................... 531
Analysis ............................................ 531
Text file ............................................ 213
ETABS ................................................... 79
Euler buckling capacity 485, 494, 502, 504
Examples .............................................. 805
Cable analysis ................................... 805
Portal frame analysis ........................ 735
Portal frame connection design ........ 787
Portal frame member design............. 779
Exporting
CIMSteel/2 file ............................. 79, 81
CIS/2 file ...................................... 79, 81
CSV file ................................ 79, 81, 636
DWG file .......................................... 636
DXF file................................ 94, 96, 636
IFC file ......................................... 79, 81
MS-Access file ........................... 79, 636
MS-Excel file ............................. 79, 636
MS-Word file ............................. 79, 636
SDNF file ........................................... 79
Step file ........................................ 79, 81
Text file .............................. 79, 185, 636
ZIP file................................................ 79
Extend members ................................... 309
Extrude members .................................. 310
F
Filters .............................................. 74, 312
Find....................................................... 314
Fixity .................................................... 119
See members .................................... 119
Flange restraints.................... 547, 562, 583
Flexural-torsional buckling .................. 502
Flipping a section ......................... 132, 143
Floor loading ........................................ 280
See area loading ............................... 280
Floor slab .............................................. 148
Folders .................................................... 26
Fonts ..................................................... 705
824
See output ........................................ 705

Forces................................................... 478
Described ......................................... 478
Diagrams.......................................... 444
Sign convention ............................... 107
Frame data ........................................... 113
Frame imperfections ............................ 569
See Imperfections ............................ 569
Frameworks Plus ..................77, 79, 81, 94
Frequency ............................................ 444
Frequency shift .................................... 516
Frontwidth ............................486, 491, 492
Full restraint ......................................... 562
G
Gauge ................................................... 625
General colours ...................................... 34
General configuration ............................ 29
General restraint................................... 129
Generate arc ......................................... 279
Geometry and loads ............................. 736
Girts ..................................................... 223
Global axes ...........................102, 107, 447
Graphical input
Colors ................................................ 33
Cursor .............................................. 269
Dimensions ........................................ 32
Display area ....................................... 53
Editing ......................................246, 269
Input ..........................................246, 269
Output .......................................705, 716
Overview ......................................... 269
Text format ........................................ 28
Gravity ................................................. 168
Grid ...............................................246, 317
Gridlines .............................................. 319
Group code ...................................547, 725
H
Hardware lock...................................11, 24
Haunches ......................431, 623, 625, 636
Headings .............................................. 116
Heartbeat ................................................ 24
......................................................... 605
Horizontal angle................................... 468
HTML file............................................ 709
Page setup ........................................ 709
Print preview ................................... 713
I
IFC file........................................77, 79, 81
Ill-conditioning and instabilities .......... 111
Index
Imperfections ........................................ 569
Importing ................................................ 79
ARC file ............................................. 79
CIMSteel/2 file ............................. 79, 81
CIS/2 file ...................................... 79, 81
CSV file ........................................ 79, 81
DXF file........................................ 94, 96
IFC file ......................................... 79, 81
Microstran file .................................... 79
MS-Access file ........................... 79, 636
MS-Excel file ............................. 79, 636
SDNF file ........................................... 79
Spectral curve text file ...................... 178
Step file ........................................ 79, 81
Text file ...................................... 79, 185
ZIP file................................................ 79
Incremental displacements ................... 494
Infotips.................................................. 321
Initiator ................................................. 187
Input methods ......................................... 77
Instabilities ................................... 111, 502
Installing SPACE GASS ........................ 24
Intermediate member stations....... 569, 578
Intermediate nodes................ 351, 400, 401
Moving intermediate nodes .............. 351
Removing crossed member nodes .... 400
Removing intermediate nodes .......... 401
Intersect ........................................ 293, 322
Iterating the analysis-design process .... 575
J
Jobs ......................................................... 68
Attachments ...................................... 116
Clean-up ............................................. 68
Delete ................................................. 67
Merge ................................................. 65
New .................................................... 63
Open ................................................... 64
Save .................................................... 66
Status .................................... 55, 73, 717
K
Keyboard .............................................. 295
Input ......................................... 295, 323
Shortcuts ............................................. 74
Kt factor ................................................ 569
L
Labelling and annotation ...................... 448
Lateral restraint..................................... 562
See flange restraints.......................... 562
Legal notice .............................................. 6
Libraries.................................................. 81
Converting section names when

importing or exporting................... 81
Creating custom libraries ................. 721
Standard libraries ............................. 719
The library editor ............................. 721
Library scan code..........................547, 725
Licence Agreement .................................. 6
Lift off.................................................. 119
Line width .............................................. 32
Linear analysis ..............101, 475, 476, 494
Linking to other programs ..................... 79
List boxes ............................................... 60
Lists ....................................................... 60
Live loads ............................................ 230
Load cases...... 74, 101, 174, 237, 476, 484,
494, 508, 514, 516, 524, 569, 578, 625,
636
Combining ........................169, 206, 290
Copying ........................................... 328
Deleting ........................................... 328
Load case titles viewer .................... 451
Manage ............................................ 328
Renumbering ................................... 328
Scrolling ............................................ 74
Titles ................................................ 171
Titles text ......................................... 207
Load factor ........................................... 502
Buckling analysis..............502, 506, 508
Limit .........................................508, 569
Steel member design.................569, 593
Load height factor ................................ 586
Load height position .............547, 557, 586
Load stepping ...............................482, 494
Loading diagrams ................................ 444
Loads ................................................... 299
Copying member loads .................... 299
Copying node loads ......................... 301
Copying plate loads ......................... 303
Filtering loads .................................. 312
See area loads .................................. 179
See combination load cases ............. 169
See load case titles ........................... 171
See lumped masses .......................... 172
See member concentrated loads ...... 158
See member distributed forces ........ 160
See member distributed torsions...... 162
See moving loads ............................. 352
See node loads ................................. 156
See plate pressure loads ................... 167
See prescribed node displacements . 157
See prestress loads ........................... 164
See sea loads .............................181, 411
See self weight ................................. 168
See spectral loads ............................ 174
See thermal loads ............................. 164
825

Local axes ............................. 102, 107, 453
Local axes for moments and shears 29, 312
Logo................................................ 47, 709
Lumped masses .................................... 172
Converting static loads to masses ..... 426
Described.......................................... 172
Dynamic frequency analysis ............ 516
Graphics ................................... 326, 444
Text................................................... 208
M
Macros .................................................... 69
Margins................................................. 709
See page setup .................................. 709
Mass density ......................................... 146
Masses .................................................. 172
See lumped masses ........................... 172
Master node .......................................... 148
Master-slave constraints ....................... 148
Described.......................................... 148
Graphics ........................................... 330
Text................................................... 195
Material properties................................ 146
Described.......................................... 146
Graphics ........................................... 331
Library ...................................... 719, 727
Text................................................... 194
MDB file................................................. 77
See MS-Access ............................. 77, 79
Measure ................................................ 332
Member alignment........................ 148, 154
Member check .............................. 581, 593
Member concentrated loads .................. 158
Described.......................................... 158
Graphics ................................... 334, 444
Text................................................... 199
Member distributed forces .................... 160
Described.......................................... 160
Graphics ................................... 336, 444
Text................................................... 200
Member distributed torsions ................. 162
Described.......................................... 162
Graphics ................................... 338, 444
Text................................................... 201
Member groups..................................... 558
Member imperfections.......................... 569
See Imperfections ............................. 569
Member numbering .............. 402, 491, 493
Member offsets ..................................... 154
Described.......................................... 154
Graphics ........................................... 340
Text................................................... 196
Member origins .................................... 455
Member prestress loads ........................ 341
826
Described ......................................... 165

Graphics....................................341, 444
Text .................................................. 203
Member schedule ................................... 94
Members .............................................. 119
Described ..........................101, 107, 119
Graphics........................................... 343
Text .................................................. 190
Menu system .......................................... 53
Merging jobs .......................................... 65
Meshing ............................................... 346
Microsoft ............................................... 77
Access ...........................................77, 79
Excel .............................................77, 79
Windows ............................................ 62
Word .................................................. 79
Microstation ..........................77, 79, 81, 94
Microstran .........................................77, 79
Minimum design actions......631, 636, 654,
683
Mirror................................................... 348
Mode combination method .................. 524
Mode shapes ........................................ 502
Buckling analysis......443, 502, 506, 508
Dynamic frequency analysis ... 445, 514,
515, 516
Dynamic response analysis ..... 174, 522,
524
Viewing mode shapes ...............443, 445
Modelling considerations..................... 515
Modulus of subgrade reaction ............. 129
Moment of inertia ................................ 132
Moment redistribution ......................... 657
Moments .............................................. 478
Described ......................................... 478
Diagrams.......................................... 444
Sign convention ............................... 107
Mouse .................................................... 74
The mousewheel ................................ 74
Using the mouse ................................ 57
Move .................................................... 349
Moving intermediate nodes ................. 351
Moving loads ........................182, 352, 733
MS-Access ......................79, 238, 312, 721
MS-Excel ..................77, 79, 238, 312, 721
MS-Word ........................79, 238, 312, 721
Multiple viewports ............................... 370
Multiplying factor ................................ 169
Multi-row editing ................................. 238
N
Natural frequencies ...............172, 514, 516
New features .......................................... 12
Node loads ........................................... 156
Index
Described.......................................... 156
Graphics ........................................... 372
Text................................................... 197
Node numbering ................... 402, 491, 493
Node restraints ...................... 101, 129, 377
Buckling analysis ............................. 506
Described.......................................... 129
Elastic restraint ................................. 129
Frame data ........................................ 129
General restraint ............................... 129
Graphics ........................................... 377
Restraint code ................................... 129
Text................................................... 192
Nodes .................................................... 101
Described.................................. 101, 118
Graphics ........................................... 374
Text................................................... 189
Non-linear analysis ...... 101, 475, 476, 479,
480, 482, 484, 494
Normal members .................................. 119
Normal window .................................... 269
Normalize mode shapes ........................ 516
Notes..................................................... 378
O
Ocean currents .............................. 181, 411
Offsets .................................................. 154
See member offsets .......................... 154
See plates .......................................... 124
Opening a job ......................................... 62
Operating plane .................................... 382
Optimization . 475, 486, 491, 492, 493, 494
Ortho............................................. 285, 380
Output ................................................... 512
Described.......................................... 705
Dynamic response analysis .............. 529
Fonts ................................................... 28
Page setup......................................... 709
Print graphics.................................... 716
Print preview .................................... 713
Print text report................................. 715
Printing this manual ............................. 5
Printing to a file ........................ 709, 713
Scale ......................................... 709, 716
Static analysis ................................... 501
Status report...................................... 717
Steel connection design .................... 643
Text format ......................................... 28
Worked examples ............. 735, 779, 805
P
Page setup ............................................ 709
Pan ....................................................... 381
Paradise solver ......................494, 508, 516
Partial restraint ..................................... 562
P-delta effects ...............479, 480, 484, 494
PDF file.........................................709, 713
PDF manual ............................................. 5
Pick .................................................57, 269
Picture file............................................ 709
Page setup ........................................ 709
Print preview ................................... 713
Pitch ..................................................... 625
Plane .............................................246, 382
Plate pressure loads.............................. 167
Described ......................................... 167
Graphics............................384, 439, 444
Text .................................................. 204
Plates.................................................... 278
Align plate axes ............................... 278
Contours .......................................... 458
Datasheet ......................................... 238
Described ..........................101, 107, 124
Drawing ........................................... 306
Graphics....................................386, 458
Library ......................................719, 729
Meshing ........................................... 346
Moments for reinforced concrete slabs
..................................................... 107
Pressure loads ...................167, 384, 439
Reverse plate direction .................... 406
Steel connection design ...623, 625, 636,
719, 729
Stress................................................ 458
Text .................................................. 191
Wood-Armer method....................... 107
Point ....................................................... 57
Pointer.................................................... 57
Poisson's ratio ...................................... 146
Polar coordinates ..........................295, 323
Portal frame builder ............................. 221
Prescribed node displacements ............ 157
Described ......................................... 157
Graphics....................................389, 444
Text .................................................. 198
Pressure................................................ 167
See area loads .................................. 280
See plate pressure .............167, 384, 439
Prestress ............................................... 165
See member prestress loads ............. 165
Pre-tension ........................................... 164
Principal angle ..................................... 132
Print preview........................................ 713
See output ........................................ 705
827

Printing ................................................. 705
See output ......................................... 705
Problem size limits ................................. 35
Program Manager ................................... 24
Property panels ..................................... 391
ProSteel ...................................... 77, 79, 81
Purlins................................................... 223
Rigid offset .......................................... 154

Risa-3D .................................................. 79
ROBOT .................................................. 79
Rotate ................................................... 407
Rotational inertia ................................. 172
Rotational restraint............................... 562
S
Q
Query
Analysis results ................................ 395
Member properties ........................... 343
Node properties ................................ 374
R
Radio buttons .......................................... 60
Rational buckling analysis .................... 502
Reactions .............................................. 478
Described.......................................... 478
Diagrams .......................................... 444
Sign convention ................................ 107
Real-time .............................................. 468
Redraw.................................................. 399
Region .................................................. 230
Registering SPACE GASS ............... 24, 47
Reinforcement ...... 107, 647, 677, 719, 731
Relative coordinates ..................... 295, 323
Removing crossed member nodes ........ 400
Removing intermediate nodes .............. 401
Renderer ........... 36, 42, 246, 285, 391, 458
Renumbering ........................................ 328
Load cases ........................................ 328
Members ........................................... 402
Nodes................................................ 402
Repeat last command ............................ 404
Reports.................................................. 705
See output ......................................... 705
Residual loading ................................... 494
Restraints .............................................. 129
Results .................................................. 512
Static analysis ................................... 501
Reverse member direction .................... 405
Reverse plate direction ......................... 406
Revit Structure ...................... 77, 79, 81, 91
Right hand orthogonal .......................... 102
Right hand screw rule ........................... 107
Rigid diaphram ..................................... 148
828
SAP2000 ................................................ 79
Saving a job ........................................... 62
Scale..................................................... 408
Scales ................................................... 409
Scissor lift ............................................ 148
Scripts .................................................... 70
Scroll bars .............................................. 60
Scrolling................................................. 74
SDNF file ..........................................77, 79
Sea loads .......................................181, 411
Seats ......................................623, 625, 636
Secant matrix ....................................... 494
Section check ....................................... 593
Section properties .................101, 119, 418
Angle sections ..........................132, 145
Area of section ................................. 132
Described ......................................... 132
Flipping a section .....................132, 143
Graphics........................................... 418
Library ......................................719, 725
Map file ............................................. 81
Moment of inertia ............................ 132
Principal angle ................................. 132
Section mark .................................... 132
Shape builder ................................... 136
Shear area ........................................ 132
Source .............................................. 132
Tee sections ..................................... 144
Text .................................................. 193
Torsion constant .............................. 132
Security .................................................. 11
See Hardware lock ........................11, 23
Seismic
Dynamic spectral response analysis 522
Indian seismic checks ...................... 547
New Zealand seismic checks ........... 547
Selecting nodes and members .............. 269
Selection window................................. 269
Self mass .......................................172, 516
Self weight ........................................... 168
Described ......................................... 168
Graphics....................................422, 444
Text .................................................. 205
Sentinel protection installer ................... 24
Serviceability check ............................. 576
SG file .................................................... 62
Index
SG.INI .................................................... 25
Shading ................................................... 29
Shape builder ........................ 132, 136, 343
Shear area ............................................. 132
Shear check........................................... 593
Shear forces .......................................... 478
Described.......................................... 478
Diagrams .......................................... 444
Sign convention ................................ 107
Shear wall ............................................. 148
Shielding............................................... 230
Shortcuts ................................................. 74
Sidesway............................................... 547
Sign conventions .................................. 107
Analysis ............................................ 107
Bending moment diagrams ................. 29
Sign of the results ................................. 524
Site factor ............................................. 524
Site subsoil category ............................. 524
Skew angle ........................................... 119
See direction angle ................... 119, 124
Slave node ............................................ 148
Slenderness ratio................................... 569
SmartPlant4D ......................................... 79
Snap .............................................. 246, 423
Solvers
Paradise ............................ 494, 508, 516
Watcom ............................ 494, 508, 516
Wavefront ......................... 494, 508, 516
Sound ...................................................... 29
Spectral loads ....................................... 174
Described.......................................... 174
Editor ................................................ 177
Library ...................................... 719, 732
Spectral curve multiplier .................. 524
Text................................................... 209
Spring stiffness ..................................... 129
SRSS..................................................... 524
STAAD................................................... 79
Stability analysis................................... 502
Stabilizing nodes .......................... 111, 494
Standard shapes .................................... 343
Starting SPACE GASS ........................... 50
Static analysis ....................... 475, 476, 494
Analysis type .................................... 494
Buckling ........................................... 485
Buckling messages ........................... 494
Compression-only members ............. 494
Damping ................................... 482, 494
Errors ................................................ 531
Iterations per load step ..................... 494
Load cases ........................................ 494
Load stepping ........................... 482, 494
Non-linear effects ............................ 494

Optimization .................................... 494
Results ..............................501, 755, 766
Tension-only members .................... 494
Worked example .............................. 735
Static load to mass conversion ............. 426
Status line .............................................. 55
Status report ....................................73, 717
Steel connection design ....................... 623
Described ......................................... 623
Designing and checking................... 636
Drawings...................................625, 636
Exporting ..................................625, 636
Importing ......................................... 636
Input ................................................. 625
Load cases ................................625, 636
Minimum design actions ..........625, 636
Preferences ...................................... 645
Reports............................................. 643
Steel member design ............................ 577
Check mode ..................................... 577
Combined stress ratio ...................... 569
Described ..................................543, 547
Design mode .............................569, 577
Effective lengths .......................504, 547
Errors ............................................... 620
Flange restraints............................... 562
Grouping ...........................547, 558, 578
Input ..................537, 538, 543, 545, 546
Load cases ....................................... 569
Load factor....................................... 569
Member check ................................. 593
Results ......................................593, 784
Section check ................................... 593
Shear check...................................... 593
Sign convention ............................... 557
Tee sections ..................................... 568
Text .................................................. 210
Worked example .............................. 779
Step file .......................................77, 79, 81
CIMSteel/2 file .......................77, 79, 81
IFC file....................................77, 79, 81
Stiffeners ...............................623, 625, 636
Stiffness matrix ....101, 111, 491, 493, 494,
516
Strength grade ...................................... 547
Stress ratio ........................................... 569
Stresses .........................................444, 458
Members .......................................... 444
Plates................................................ 458
Stretch .................................................. 427
StruCAD .....................................77, 79, 81
Structure wizard ................................... 219
Sub load number ...................158, 160, 162
Subdivide ............................................. 428
829

Subsets .................................................. 312
See filters .......................................... 312
Supports ................................................ 129
T
Tangent matrix ..................................... 494
Tapered members ................................. 431
Tapered plates....................................... 429
Tee sections .......................... 144, 568, 725
Tekla Structures .......................... 77, 79, 81
Temperature change ............................. 164
Tension-only and compression-only
effects ............................................... 481
Tension-only members 119, 481, 482, 494,
516
Terminator ............................................ 212
Terrain category.................................... 230
Text boxes .............................................. 60
Text display area..................................... 53
Text editor ............................................ 185
Text file ................................................ 213
Errors ................................................ 213
Exporting .......................................... 185
Format ........................................ 28, 186
Importing .......................................... 185
Worked example .............................. 216
Text reports........................................... 705
See output ......................................... 705
Textures ................................................ 433
Thermal loads ....................................... 164
Described.......................................... 164
Graphics ................................... 435, 444
Text................................................... 202
Title bar .................................................. 53
Toolbars .................................................. 53
Customizing ....................................... 42
Top flange............................................. 543
Topography .......................................... 230
Torsion constant ................................... 132
Torsions ................................................ 478
Described.......................................... 478
Diagrams .......................................... 444
Sign convention ................................ 107
Translational inertia .............................. 172
Transparency ........................................ 437
Trapezoidal loads.................................. 160
Triangular loads .................................... 160
U
Units ............................... 29, 114, 187, 725
Unstable equilibrium ............................ 485
Updating frame member sizes .............. 575
Using the keyboard to position points .. 323
830
Using the mouse .................................... 57

Utilization ratio .................................... 625
V
Varying plate pressure loads ................ 439
Vehicle library ..............................352, 733
Vertical angle ....................................... 468
Vertical axis ..............................29, 41, 468
Vertical direction ................................. 524
View..................................................... 444
Diagrams.......................................... 444
Member properties........................... 456
Members .......................................... 457
Node properties ............................... 456
Nodes ............................................... 457
Plate contours .................................. 458
Steel connection drawings ............... 625
View manager ...................................... 454
View results ......................................... 705
See output ........................................ 705
View results in XY or XZ plane .......... 460
View selector ....................................... 468
Viewpoint ............................................ 468
Viewports............................................. 370
Views ..............................................74, 471
Voids.................................................... 691
Von Mises Stress ................................. 107
W
WALF .................................................. 594
Watcom solver ......................494, 508, 516
Wave loads ...................................181, 411
Wavefront optimizer .............475, 486, 494
Analysis method .............................. 491
Analysis method in more detail ....... 493
Calculating the frontwidth ............... 492
Wavefront solver ..................494, 508, 516
Weighted average load factor .............. 594
Welcome to SPACE GASS ..................... 1
Welds ....................623, 625, 636, 719, 730
Wind loads ........................................... 230
Windows ................................................ 62
Wood-Armer Method .......................... 107
Worked examples ................................ 773
Bill of materials ............................... 773
Cable analysis ...........................805, 808
Centre of gravity .............................. 773
Frame analysis graphics................... 743
Frame analysis input ........................ 747
Frame analysis output ...............755, 766
Portal frame analysis ....................... 735
Index
Portal frame connection design ........ 787
Portal frame member design............. 779
Steel connection drawings ................ 625
Working plane .............................. 246, 382
XSteel .........................................77, 79, 81
ZIP file ................................................... 79

Zones ................................................... 655
Zoom.................................................... 473
XLS file .................................................. 77

See MS-Excel ............................... 77, 79
Y
Young's modulus ................................. 146
Z
831

Space Gass 12.5 Help Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Space Gass 12.5 Help Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Installation and Configuration

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Modelling the Structure

Text File Input

Portal Frame Builder

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Steel Connection Design

Concrete Beam Design

Concrete Column Design

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Importing and exporting

Importing old libraries

Portal Frame Analysis

Portal Frame Member Design

Portal Frame Connection Design

Converting Old Jobs

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

How to use this manual

This is an example of the SPACE GASS NOTES style and icon.

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Printing this manual

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

replace the Product or supply its equivalent;

supply the service again; or

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Windows 7, 8 or 10 (Windows 10, 64-bit preferred).

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Notification of any program modifications or enhancements as they become available.

Hardware locks and insurance

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

A new renderer with full editing capabilities.

Dimensions that can be added to your model or to individual members or plates.

Unlimited undo/redo steps.

More detailed infotips when hovering over a node, member or plate.

A new moving loads generator incorporating animated views of the vehicles

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

A new renumbering tool that offers renumbering in three directions simultaneously.

A taper/haunch tool that now subdivides automatically if required.

Versions 10.6 to 10.7

Nodes can now be moved, rotated or deleted directly in v10.7.

Versions 10.1 to 10.5

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

An interface to Autodesks Revit Structure program has been added in v10.51b.

The dynamic response analysis module now supports AS1170.4-2007 and

Importing/exporting MS-Excel, MS-Word or MS-Access data can now be done in

Importing of SDNF version 3 files is now supported in v10.50.

Zooming via the mousewheel is now centered on the mouse position.

Auto-created steel members are now terminated at pin-ended members.

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

A facility for generating moving loads has been added.

Print previews can be produced.

Your company logo can be included in text and graphical reports.

Text reports can be exported to PDF, HTML and TXT files.

Graphical output can be exported to PDF, HTML and BMP files.

All symbols are now shown correctly in reports.

USB network locks are supported.

Mouse wheel zooming, panning and viewpoint changing is supported.

Keyboard zooming, panning and viewpoint changing is supported.

Keyboard scrolling through filters, views and load cases is supported.

Tension/Compression-only effects can be made to revert to "no reversal" mode after a